QU Bulletin 2012 - Health Colleges-Final

Qassim University
Deanship of Academic Development
Qassim University
Bulletin 2012
(Health Colleges)
Prepared by:
Prof. Sulaiman A. Al-Yahya
Eng. Asif Mahmood, Eng. Upendra Lele
Produced by:
Dr. Hassan Khalafy
Custodian of the two Holy

Mosques
King Abdullah bin

Abdulaziz Al Saud
May Allah Protect him
His Royal Highness Prince
Salman bin Abdulaziz

Al Saud
May Allah Protect him
His Excellency Minister of

Higher Education
His Excellency Deputy Minister

of Higher Education
Dr. Khalid ibn

Mohammad Al Anqari
Dr. Ahmed ibn

Mohammad Al Saif
3
INDEX
Page
Preface by the University President
Introduction by VP (Planning,
Development & Quality)
Higher Education in Saudi Arabia

Qassim University
International Ranking
9
12
13
University Vision
14
University Mission
14
University Objectives
14
University Administration
Faculty Members
15
18
Organization Structure of the University 19

Admission and Academic Regulations
Graduate Studies
20
35
Deanship of Educational Services
46
Academic Departments (Prep.)
46
Training and Scholarships
46
Colleges and Specializations
48
Deanships
50
College of Applied Health Sciences in Al-Rass 58

Depertment of Clinical Nutrition
Department of Oral and dental health
Department of Diagnostic Radiology
Department of Dental technology
Department of Medical Equipments and Devices
Pharmacy department
Laboratory department
Nutrition department
Department of Associate Dentist
Anesthesiology department
College of Applied Medical Sciences
Department of Medical Laboratory
Department of Optometry
Department of Radiologic Techniques
Department of Medical Rehabilitation
Department of Clinical Nutrition
Department of Human Health
Department of Medical Equipment
66
College of Dentistry
216
Department of Prosthodontics
Department of Restorative Dentistry
Department of Preventive Dentistry
Department of Oral and Maxillofacial surgery
and Diagnostic sciences
College of Dentistry in Al Rass
232
Department of Prosthodontics
Department of Restorative Dentistry
Department of Preventive Dentistry
Department of Oral and Maxillofacial surgery
and Diagnostic sciences
College of Medical Rehabilitation Sciences in
Buraida
247
Department of General Nursing
Department of Midwifery (Obstetrics and
Gynecology)
Department of Associate Dentist
College of Medicine
257
Department of Anatomy and tissue structure
Physiology department
Pathology department
Department of internal medicine
Department of Obstetrics and Gnnecology
Ophthalmology department
Department of Pharmacology and Theraputics
Department of Orthopedics and Rehabilitation
Radiology department
Dermatology department
Psychiatry department
Department of community health & family
medicine
College of Medicine and Applied Medical
Sciences in Unaiza
294
Department of General Nursing
College of Nursing
307
Department of Medical surgery Nursing
Department of Community health Nursing and
Mental health
Department of Maternal Nursing and child
health
Department of Nursing education
College of Pharmacy
321
Department of Pharmaceutical practice
Department of Chemistry & Pharmacy of drugs
Pharmaceutics department
Department of medicines and poisons
College of Pharmacy in Unaizah
337
Department of Pharmaceutical practice
Department of Chemistry & Pharmacy of drugs
Pharmaceutics department
Department of medicines and poisons
College of Public Health and Medical
Informatics in Al-Bukairiyyah
353
Department of Health services
Department of Medical secretary
Department of Medical records
Epidemiology department
Department of Health information
Department of Health Insurance
Department of Public health
Research Centers and
University Directorate
366
Qassim University Bulletin
Preface by the University President
Qassim University is proud to present the Bulletin of 2012. This Bulletin has been published by
the University Vice Presidency of Planning, Development and Quality for the guidance of students
and faculty. Information about all the colleges and institutes is given in detail including programs offered,
courses and faculty members. The Study Plans and Course Description have been given comprehensively
to facilitate the students in the choice of courses.
We hope this bulletin with the Blessing of Allah is of great benefit and interest for the
acknowledgement of effectiveness and efficiency in education to achieve our higher goals.
I ask Allahs facilitation and help for all.
Prof. Khalid bin Abdul Rahman Al-Hamoudi

The President
Introduction
I am very glad that we are presenting this Bulletin of 2012 for the guidance and reference of students
and faculty members. In this Bulletin, information about all the colleges is given in detail including
programs offered, courses and faculty members. The Study Plans and Course Description have been
given comprehensively to facilitate the students in the choice of courses.
In this Bulletin the information of these colleges have been included: College of Agriculture and Veterinary
Medicine, College of Applied Health Sciences in Rass, College of Applied Medical Sciences, College of
Arabic Language and Social Studies, College of Architecture and Planning, College of Business and
Economics, College of Computer Science, College of Dentistry, College of Design and Home Economics in
Buraidah, College of Education, College of Engineering, College of Medical and Applied Health Sciences in
Unaizah, College of Medical Rehabilitation in Buraidah, College of Medicine, College of Nursing, College of
Pharmacy, College of Public Health and Health Informatics in Bukeriyah, College of Science, College of
Sciences and Arts in Bukeriyah, College of Sciences and Arts in Buraidah, College of Sciences and Arts in
Muthnib, College of Sciences and Arts in Rass, College of Sciences and Arts in Oqlatu's Soqoor, College of
Sciences and Arts in Unaizah, College of Sharia and Theology, Community College of Buraidah, Community
College of Unaizah.
The suggestions to improve the Bulletin will be highly appreciated and in the light of the suggestion we
will improve the publication to make it more beneficial and effective in the next years. We are thankful to
God Almighty who has given us an opportunity to complete this project.
Prof. Sulaiman A. Al-Yahya

Vice President for Planning, Development,
and Quality
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia is an Arab Muslim State

with a complete sovereignty. Its religion is Islam,
its constitution is derived from the Holy Qur'an
and the Prophet's (peace be upon him) Sunnah
(traditions), it has Arabic as the official language
and its capital is Riyadh. The system of Ruling in
Saudi Arabia has been a Royal System where
sons and grandsons of the Kingdoms Founder
King Abdulaziz bin Abdurrahman al Faisal al Saud
have been to hold reins of power of the
Kingdom in terms of allegiance and eligibility
where Ruling has been completely based on the
Holy Qur'an and Prophet's (peace be upon him)
Sunnah. The power of Ruling in the Kingdom has
been derived from the holy Qur'an and
prophet's (peace be upon him) Sunnah that are
the two regulators all over the Ruling system
and all its related systems where Ruling is based
upon justice, Shura and equality in terms of
Islamic Sharia.
Custodian of the Two Holy Mosques king
Abdullah Bin Abdulaziz Al-Saud (1343H/1924G)
is the King of Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. He was
born in Riyadh and brought up directly by his
Father King Abdulaziz Bin Abdurrahman the
Founder of the Third Saudi State. Being much
affected by his father and utilizing his
experience and statecraft, King Abdullah has
been loving his homeland feeling much
responsibility towards the Kingdom and its
citizens. In 1384H, King Faisal selected him to
head over the National Guard and in 1395 King
Khalid chose him to a Deputy Premiere in
addition to his position as the Chairman of the
National Guard. Afterwards, he was chosen by
King Fahd bin Abdulaziz to be the First Deputy
Premiere and Chairman of the National Guard in
addition to being the Crown Prince. In Monday
26th of Jumadah the Second, all Saudi people

pledged allegiance to Custodian of the Two Holy
Mosques king Abdullah Bin Abdulaziz to be the
King of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia and Prince
Sultan bin Abdulaziz as his the Crown Prince.
Custodian of Two Holy Mosques King Abdullah
Bin Abdulaziz has achieved a set of milestones in
both National And International Politics.
Additionally, he has a wide range of excellent
relationships with most Arab States Leaders. He
has contributed in a lot of humanitarian efforts
and good deeds as well.
Saudi Arabia is located in the southwest corner
of Asia, the Kingdom is at the crossroads of
Europe, Asia and Africa. It is surrounded by the
Red Sea on the West, by Yemen and Oman on
the South, the Arabian Gulf and the United Arab
Emirates and Qatar on the East, and Jordan, Iraq
and Kuwait on the North. Saudi Arabias Red Sea
coastline stretches about 1,760 kilometers
(1,100 miles) while its Arabian Gulf coastline
roughly 560 kilometers (350 miles). Estimated
area of the Kingdom is 2.149790 million square
kilometers.
The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia total population is
27,136,977 people, 18,707,576 of them Saudis,
according to 2010 statistics, and the growth rate
of the total population between 2004 and 2010
is 3.2%, while the population density is 14
people / sq km. The 2010 GDP reached with
constant prices to 3.76%, the private sector
contributed at a rate of 47.8%, while the GDP
per capita at the current prices reached 60.066
SAR. Moreover, the gross enrollment rate in
primary education in 2009 reached 99%, and the
infant mortality rate for the same year reached
17.3 per thousand live births.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Development in Kingdom has generally been

regarded as a discerning process dedicated to
formulating a well-cultured and comprehensive
social structure where community has stressed
its identity and creativity. In this respect,
Development has mainly been founded on
affirmative collective partnership starting from
planning and decision making, in addition
executing and holding responsibilities reaching
to utilization of fruits of development projects
and programs. All such related programs have
focused on Saudi people to be considered
means of Development and its objective as well.
The Saudi Government has consequently
attached much interest to Cooperative Societies
where charity works have been supported and
urged by the Government. Collaboration
between both Government and Private sectors
has helped much in pushing Government
Programs relating to Development plans.
Additionally, the Government has focused on
Care Program dedicated to the old-aged. It has
also sought to eliminate illiteracy through
opening a lot of schools for men and women
over cities and villages so that such people can
join the schools. The Kingdom has also paid keen
attention to the orphans where related services
have been implemented over the last 20 years
to cherish those orphans with an attempt to
eliminate the problem of mendicancy.
Madinah
Capital and Major Cities:
Almost the entire Kingdom is arid, although

there is rainfall in the north and along the
mountain range to the west, especially in the far
southwest, which receives the monsoon rains in
summer. Sporadic rain can also occur elsewhere,
sometimes very heavily, causing serious
flooding, including in Riyadh, where the air and
prevailing winds tend usually to be very dry.
Riyadh
Located in the central province, is the capital
city of Saudi Arabia. . It is also the high-tech
center of modern Saudi Arabia and houses the
headquarters of the Gulf Cooperation Council
(GCC).
Is the city where Prophet Muhammad emigrated

and lived.
Jeddah
Located along the eastern coast of the Red Sea,
is the commercial capital of Saudi Arabia, and
serves as an entrance to the rest of the
peninsula.
Is the capital of the Eastern Province. It houses

the Emirate of the Eastern Province and also
branches of many ministries, governmental
agencies and departments. King Fahd
International Airport is located northwest of the
city. Dammam Port is the largest on the Arab
Gulf.
Currency
Saudi Riyal (SR) pegged to U.S. dollar
($1=SR3.745); bank notes, in Arabic and English,
in denominations of 1, 5, 10, 50, 100 and 500
riyals; coins in denominations of 5, 10, 25, 50
and 100 halalahs, with 100 halalahs equal to one
riyal; metric system in use.
Climate
Makkah
Is the birthplace of the Prophet Muhammad and
the focal point of Hajj, the Islamic pilgrimage in
which almost two million Muslims from all parts
of the world participate every year.
10
Dammam
Introduction of Qassim Region
Introduction of Qassim Region
Al Qassim Province is one of the

thirteen administrative provinces of Saudi
Arabia. It is located in the center of Saudi Arabia
approximately 400 km northwest of Riyadh the
capital. Qassim is the heart of the country, its
population is more than a million and its area is
about 65,000 km. It has more than 400 cities,
towns, villages, and Bedouin settlements, ten of
which are recognized as governorates. Its capital
city is Buraydah, which is inhabited by
approximately 49% of the region's total
population. Buraydah has a typical desert
climate, with hot summers, cold winters and low
humidity. It is the seventh populated province in
the country after the province of JizanIt is
known to be the "alimental basket" of the
country, for its agricultural asset.
Qassim can be reached by driving or by
air. The principal means of road transport is
private cars. However, some taxis are also
available in all major towns in addition to Renta-car. Saudi Arabian Public Transport Company
(SAPTCO) plies some buses between major
towns. Additionally, some private operators
arrange coach tours for Haj and Umra. Qassim
can also be reached by air from all major
airports of Saudi Arabia, like Riyadh and Jeddah.
Qassim airport is about 25 Kms from the Capital
city Buraydah and 40 kms from the city of
Unaizah.
11
QUALITY FOCUS
ABET
Qassim Engineering College has been awarded
the prestigious accreditation by Accreditation
Board for Engineering and Technology (ABET).
Introduction- Qassim University
QS Stars
Qassim University was established in

2004 by merging two Qassim branches of Imam
Mohammad Ibn Saud Islamic University and King
Saud University. Since the establishment of the
university, it has experienced a remarkable
growth in enrollment and a significant
expansion of faculty and its administrative staff.
The university has applied for QS stars rating

which is an extensive quality audit of the
services and facilities provided by the university.
Location
Qassim University is located in the
center of the Qassim region, 4 km north of
Qassim regional airport, and covers an area
approximately 7.8 million square meters in total.
It is 28 Km from the main city Buraydah.
Qassim
University
is
currently
being
benchmarked by QS against its national and
international peers. The benchmarking provides
a detailed map of the university's strengths and
weaknesses in various academic markers.
NCAAA
Qassim University is currently undergoing the
accreditation process by National Commission
for Academic Accreditation and Assessment
(NCAAA).
COE
Community College in Buraidah obtained the
accreditation from the Council on Occupational
Education (COE) in July 2012.
ASIIN e.V.
Qassim University is also undergoing the
certification of quality management systems in
systems accreditation.
12
The number of male and female students

registered at university during 2010-11
approached 50,000 and number of faculty
members and staff reached well over 4,000. At
present the university encompasses 28 colleges
both for male and female students.
QS Benchmarking
INTERNATIONAL COLLABORATIONS
Qassim University currently has collaborations
with the following international universities:
Leland Stanford Junior University, USA
University of Southern California, USA
Durham University, UK
Xinjiang Medical University, China
University of International
Economics, China
Business
and
Huazhong Agricultural University, China

Peking University, Health Sciences Center, China
The University of Adelaide, School of Dentistry,
Australia
The University of Maastricht, Holland
University of Istanbul, Turkey
University of Ankara, Turkey
University of Marmara, Turkey
Scientific and Research Centers

The following scientific and research
centers are present to undertake research for
the Kingdoms growing scientific and industrial
needs. Research Center of the College of Sharia
and Theology, Research Center of College of
Arabic Language and Social Studies, Research
and Human Resource Development Center at
the College of Business and Economics,
Research Center of the College of Pharmacy,
Research Center of the College of Medicine,
Scientific Research Center of the College of
Applied Medical Sciences and the Engineering
Research and Consultation Center, Research

Center of the College of Computer Science,
Research Center of the College of Science and
Research Center of the College of Agriculture
and Veterinary Medicine.
13
INTERNATIONAL RANKING
QS World University Ranking
QASSIM UNIVERSITY VISION

A nationally distinguished institution of
higher education, supporting sustainable
development in the Qassim Region, and helping
to advance a knowledge-based society
QASSIM UNIVERSITY OBJECTIVES

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
QASSIM UNIVERSITY MISSION

7.
Provision of a high quality, accredited education
producing competent graduates who meet the
needs of the labor market, conducting applied
research and offering quality community
services to develop the Qassim Region and to
contribute to the building of a knowledge-based
economy, achieving all goals by using the most
advanced
techniques
in
management,
technology, and information processing, by
fostering
national
and
international
partnerships, and by boosting the University's
resources.
8.
Improving the Quality of education in

all disciplines and achieving excellence
in some programs and obtaining
national and international academic
accreditation.
Raising
the
competence
and
competitiveness of the students
Improve
the
effectiveness
of
community services and applied
research to meet the requirements of
development
Raising the administrative, technical,
institutional
and
informational
performance
Strengthening the cooperation and
partnership with local, national and
international institutions
Establishing and developing the
Universitys endowment, diversifying
the
sources
of
funding,
and
rationalizing the spending
Completing,
developing
and
maintaining the infrastructure of the
University
Raising the rates if efficiency and
satisfaction, and retention of human
resources
14
Qassim University (QU) appeared in the

QS Work Ranking for the first time in 2011.
According to the QS report, it has shown
excellent potential for strengthening its position
by harnessing its core strengths in teaching and
Research. QU has published Research papers
with institutions ranked in top 100 of the 2011
rankings. QU has also shown initiative in
arranging International Seminars in order to
develop relations with global academic peers.
UNIVERSITY ADMINISTRATION
University Council
University President
Vice-President for
Graduate Studies and
Academic Research
Deanship for
Academic Faculty
and Personnel
Deanship of
Postgraduate Studies
Council
Secretariat
Deanship of Academic
Research
Financial
Administration
Directorate of
Strategic Planning
Follow-up
Unit
Internal
Audit Unit
Vice-president for
Teaching and
Learning
Vice-president for
Planning, Development,
and Quality
College of Business
Deanship of
Educational
Services
Development
Media Centre
College of Education
Deanship of
Students Affairs
Deanship of Quality
Assurance and
Accreditation
Deanship of Library
Affairs
Legal Department
College of Science
Deanship of
Admission and
Registration
Deanship of Information
Technology
Public Service
Administration
Academic Council
Centre of
Sustainable
Development
College of Applied Medical

Sciences
Deanship of
Community
Services
Directorate for Planning

and the Budget
Department of
Stores
Directorate of
Publication and
Translation
College of Sharia
and Islamic Studies
College of Medicine
Centre of
Academic Studies
for Girls
Traffic
Management
Directorate of
International cooperation
and Scientific
Associations
College of Arabic
and Social Studies
Directorate of
Public Affairs and
the Media
Department of
Administrative
Communication
Institute of Studies and

Consultation Services
College of
Economics and
Administration
College of Pharmacy
University Gazette
College of Science and Arts

in Buraida City
Department of
Projects and
Maintenance
University Scientific
Journal
College of
Agriculture and
Veterinary
Medicine
College of Nursing
Community
College in Buraida

in Onaiza Governate
College of
Engineering
College of Design and

Home Economics
Community
College in Onaiza

in Al-Rass Governate
Department of
Procurement and
Tenders
Department of
Security and
Safety
Financial observer
College of
Architecture and
Planning

in Al-Miznib Governate
College of
Computing and
Informatics

in Al-Bukairia Governate
15
Vice-President
College of Medical
Rehabilitation in
Buraida
College of Medicine and

Medical Sciences in
Onaiza
College of
Engineering in
Onaiza Governate
College of Pharmacy in
Onaiza
College of Science
and Arts in AlAsiyah Governate

in Al-Badaiea Governate
College of Public
Health and
Information
Technology in AlBukairia
College of Applied
Medical Sciences in AlRass
on Al-Rass Goverate
College of Business
Administration in Al-Rass
Governate
College of Science
and Arts in
Dhariyyah
Governate

in Uklat Al-Sukoor
Governate
The Higher Education Council is the

supreme legislative body for all universities
and
institutions
of
post-secondary
education in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia,
headed by the Custodian of the Two Holy
Mosques and the minister of higher
education as the vice president; it includes
some of the ministers in charge of planning,
finance, education, civil service, the
presidents of the universities, in addition
other senior government officials involved
in the post secondary education.
Higher Education Council is in charge of
approving the establishment of new
institutions for higher education, new
educational units and programs; it
coordinates the activities of institutions of
higher education and approves to
regulations and by-laws for the activities of
the universities, and appoints the vice
presidents of the universities.
Minister of Higher Education
The Minister of Higher Education is the
direct supervisor of all presidents of Saudi
universities; he appoints the deans and
ensures that all operations carried out by
universities are in accordance with the
Charter of the Council of Higher Education
and Universities and its by-laws. He is also

head of the all Saudi universities councils.
University Council
Each university has a Council, headed by the
Minister of Higher Education and the
president of the university as a vice
president. Council members include the
Secretary General of the Higher Education
Council, the vice presidents of the
university, the deans, and three external
members appointed by the Minister of
Higher Education. The Council shall be
responsible for all operations of the
university, such as granting the academic
degrees to the students and the ratification
of the study plans and curricula of the
existing
departments,
and
make
recommendations to the Council for Higher
Education in other matters.
President of the University and the VicePresidents
The president is in charge of academic and
executive affairs of the University. He is in
charge of the administration of its affairs in
accordance with the Council of Higher
Education and Universities and its
regulations, by-laws, decrees, and the
decisions of the Council of Higher Education
and the University Council. He also
represents the university in the contacts
16
Council of Higher Education:
with
national
and
international
organizations. Four vice-presidents helps
the university president: (the Vice
President, the Vice President for Post
Graduate Studies and Research, the Vice
President for Teaching and Learning, Vice
President for Planning, Development, and
Quality), a number of deans, the university

boards, and the standing committees. The
four vice-presidents are assisted by the
deans of colleges and support Deanships
and the directors of administrative and
financial units.
ADMINISTRATIVE SUPPORT UNITS
Unit of International Cooperation and

Scientific Societies
Directorate of Scientific Publishing and

Translation
Department of Planning and Budget
Directorate of Procurement and University

Stores
Directorate of Administrative Communication
Directorate of Project management,

maintenance and integrity
Directorate of Financial Administration
Directorate Security and Safety Services
Directorate of Public Services
Department of Transport
Department of Public Relations
Legal Department
Center for Information and Decision Support
Follow-up Unit
Internal Audit Unit
Unit of University Central Switchboard
Directorate of Strategic Planning
University Media Center
17
Scientific Council
Members of the senior

management of the University
The President of Qassim University
Prof. Khalid bin Abdulrahman Al-Hamoudi
Tel: 3801094
Fax: 3800656
PO Box: 6666
Buraidah: 51452
E-mail: khamoudi@qu.edu.sa
Vice President for Planning and

Development and Quality
Prof. Dr. Suleiman Bin Abdul Aziz Al-Yahya
Tel: 3802331
Fax: 3802338
PO Box: 6666
Buraidah: 51452
E-mail: vppdq@qu.edu.sa
Vice President
Vice President for Scientific Research and

Postgraduate Studies
Dr. Abdulrahman Bin Saleh Al-wasel
Tel: 3801709
Fax: 3801705
PO Box: 6666
Buraidah: 51452
E-mail: vpgsr@qu.edu.sa
FACULTY MEMBERS
University Faculty members are:
Professors
Associate Professors
Assistant Professors
Lecturers
Instructors
The Council of the University appoints faculty

members after taking the opinion of the college
or institute or department concerned. NonSaudis may be appointed where appropriate.
Vice President for Academic Affairs

Prof. Dr. Ahmed Saleh Al Tama
Tel: 3801735
Fax: 3800108
PO Box: 6666
Buraidah: 51452
E-mail: vpea@qu.edu.sa
18
Prof. Abdul Moneim Bin Ibrahim AlMoneim

Tel: 3800313
Fax: 3800267
PO Box: 6666
Buraidah: 51452
E-mail: vpqu@qu.edu.sa
Organization Chart of Qassim University
University Council
University President
University Colleges
College of Sharia and Theology
College of Arabic Language and

Social studies
College of Business and Economics
College of Science and Arts in

Rass
College of Agriculture and

Veterinary Medicines

Unizah
College of Medicine

Bukeriyah
College of Engineering

Muthnib
College of Science
College of Scences and Arts in

Oqlaus-Soqoor
College of Computer Science
College of Design and Home

Economics Burida
College of Applied Medical Science
College of Health Science in

Burida
College of Pharmacy
College of Health Science

Unaizah
College of Nursing
College of Health Science in Rass
College of Architecture and

Planning
College of Health Science in

Bukeriyah
College of Business in Burida
College of Education
Community college of Burida
Vice President for Planning,

Development and Quality
Vice President
Vice President for

academic affairs
Vice President for Graduate

Studies and Academic
Research
Development
Deanship of faculty and

staff
Deanship of
admission and
registration
Deanship of Library
Deanship of
information and
Technology (IT)
Department of Planning
and finance
Deanship of student
affair
Deanship of Graduate
studies
Department
strategic plan
Department of legal
administration
Deanship of Quality
Assurance
Finanace Department
Deanship of
Community service
Deanship of Scientific
Research
Purchasing and store

department
Deanship of
educational services
Scientific Council
Finance controller
Center for e learning
and distance
education
Center of
information
Department of
strategic planning
Department of
planning
Communication
Department
Transportation
Department
Department of Public
relations
Council Secretary
Centre for Female

studies
Deanship of scientifice
rresarch
Services Department
University magzine
Security and safety

department
Scientific community
Community college Unaizah
International
cooperation
department
19
Admission and Academic Regulations

Qassim University aims to prepare and qualify
students academically to the maximum level
attainable according to modern scientific criteria. To
achieve these objectives, the University applies strict
regulations on study and examinations.
The Responsibility of the Student

Students are responsible for acquainting
themselves with the academic system of the
University and the rules regulating it, including

graduation requirements. Directions and help
provided by academic counselors do not absolve
students of this responsibility. It is the students
responsibility to become acquainted with the
requirements stipulated for awarding of
academic degrees. The students must also keep
themselves abreast of any new developments in
this regard. This can be done thorough
consultation with the head of their departments
or their academic counselors. The following is a
list of some of the more commonly used
terminology in academic systems:
Academic Year
Two main semesters and a summer semester if applicable.
Study Semester
A period no less than 15 weeks in which courses are taught. It does not
include the registration period or final examinations.
Summer
Semester
A period no more than eight weeks, not including a registration period or

final examinations, during which the time allocated for any course is
doubled.
Study Level
The stage of study. The number of levels required for graduation is eight
or more, depending on the accredited study plans.
Study Course
A study subject belonging to some specific level as a part of an accredited

plan in every specialization (program). Each course has a number, a code,
a name and a detailed description of its items that delineate it in terms of
content and level from other courses. The course also has a special file
kept by the appropriate department for the purposes of follow-up,
evaluation and development. Some courses may have one or more
prerequisites.
Study Unit
The weekly theoretical lecture whose length is no less than 50 minutes,

or the clinical lesson whose length is no less than 50 minutes, or the
practical or field lesson whose length is no less than 100 minutes.
Academic
Warning
A notification directed to students whose GPA falls below the minimum

level stipulated in the study regulation.
Course
Grade
Work
Academic Regulations
Definitions
The grade given for course-related work indicating the students

attainment in a study semester as represented by examinations, research
20
Final
Examination
An examination in the course held only once at the end of the semester.
Final
Grade
The grade the student receives on the final examination.
Exam
Final Grade
A grade awarded by adding the total course work grade and the final
exam grade in any course. The grade is calculated out of one hundred.
Overall Grade
The percentage or alphabetical code for the final grade that the student
receives in any course (see Appendix A).
Incomplete
Overall Grade
An overall grade recorded temporarily for students who did not complete
their course work in the stipulated time. It is coded in the academic
record as (IC).
Continued
Overall Grade
An overall grade recorded temporarily for any course requiring more than
one semester to complete. It is coded in the academic record as (IP).
Semester GPA
This GPA is obtained by dividing the total number of points achieved by

the total number of units designated for all the courses studied in any
semester. Points are calculated by multiplying the designated units by the
weight of the overall grade received in any course (see Appendix B).
Cumulative GPA
This GPA is obtained by dividing the total number of points achieved in all
courses studied at the University by the total number of units designated
for those courses (see Appendix B).
General Overall
Grade
A description of the students academic attainment during the period of

study at the University.
Minimum Study
Load
The least number of study units that can be registered for, in view of the
cumulative GPA, as decided by the University Council. This is temporarily
recorded for any course whose study requires more than one semester to
complete. It is coded in the academic record as (IP).
and other relevant educational activities.
21
Since the start of the academic year 2010 the

admission of the students was performed
electronically. Electronic admission starts by
applying via the internet and ends by sending
the acceptance letter and files of those who
accepted through express mail freely. Using this
system students do not need to come personally
to the college unless personal interview is a
requirement
The procedures governing the application

are as follows:
First: Conditions for Admission
3.
The following requirements have been

stipulated for the admission of the new
student:-
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Must obtain a secondary school

certificate or equivalent from inside or
outside of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
Must be Saudi or son of a Saudi mother
The secondary school certificate should
not be more than five years old and the
Rector of the University may give
exemption from this term if there are
good reasons.
Should be with good conduct and
behavior.
Should successfully pass the interview
conducted by the Senate.
Should be medically fit.
Should obtain approval from his
employer allowing him to study if he is
working in private or public sector.
Should fulfill any other terms fixed by
the Senate.
Must not be dismissed from another
university
for
disciplinary
or
educational reasons.
Second: The procedure for

governing
the
electronic
application
1.
2.
5.
6.
7.
Entering tests conducted by the

National Center for measurement and
evaluation in higher education.
Read the conditions for admission
through the portal (electronic gate) or
the site of the Deanship of Admission
and Registration on the internet.
Filling the application through portal to
accept in the specified period for that.
After expiry of the period set for the
electronic application, admission will
depend on the comparison between
the applicants, who meet all the
conditions and automatically according
to the rates, as required by different
colleges.
The requirement to pass the personal
interview for admission to some
colleges.
Trade-off between the applicants and
the applicants in the light of
competitive achievement and their
indicators,
which
includes
the
cumulative percentage of public and
the degree of achievement test and the
degree of testing capabilities.
Finally results will be announced and
candidates could enter through the
portal to know the outcome of the
nomination and help will be provided
by e-mail and text message (SMS) via
mobile phone.
Third: Registration
Registration of the students in each class is
done automatically according to specific
rules, the applicant can access to the gate of
academic system on the internet using the
22
Admission
1. Study System
Studying at the University proceeds on

a level-based system. The system
consists of at least eight levels. The
duration of a study level is usually one
semester.
The success of students in their course
work and their ascendance between
study levels is decided by the rules and
requisites for transferring from one
level to another.
It is possible for the study system at
some colleges to proceed on a full
academic year basis according to the
rules and procedures in its regulation.
Here, the expression study year
replaces the expression
study
semester. When this occurs, it must
not contradict other admission rules.
Courses are offered in the year-long
system for a study period, which is no
less than 30 weeks in length. This does
not include registration periods or final

examinations.
A final examination must be held for
each course during or at the end of the
study year. For practical or clinical
courses of a training nature, their final
examinations may be held at the end of
the training period.
For students who have failed a course,
a supplementary examination will be
held at least two weeks before the start
of the academic year. An overall grade
of acceptable (D) will be awarded to
students who pass the supplementary
examination instead of a grade of (F).
Students who fail the supplementary
exams will remain at the same year
level and repeat any failed courses. The
same applies to courses that do not
have supplementary exams. The college
council or other authorized party may
make exceptions to this rule.
A student shall not transfer from one
year to the next until the transfer
requirements are completed.
Students may not register in courses
exceeding two consecutive year levels.
2. Level System
In the level system, the study year is
divided into two main semesters, in
addition to the possibility of a summer
semester. If a summer semester is added,
the duration will be half the length of the
main semester. The requirements for
earning a scientific degree are distributed
among levels according to a study plan
approved by the University Council.
Students will be transferred from

one level to the next if they pass all
the courses at that level.
The minimum study load is 12
study units, and the maximum for
23
user name and password to perform the

deletion, addition, or modifications and
make sure that the recording and printing
of his time-table. The student should
confirm his registration during the first
week of the semester. The minimum course
registration to the course applicant (12), a
unit of study and a maximum of (20) unit of
study commensurate with the students
cumulative average. For student suspended
academically, they must provide a request
to the college where he is studying. The
student who does not wish to study in the
first semester or any other semester should
apply for postponing, as the lack of such
application will result in considering him
failed in the semester. In the case of
possible problems in the students
registration, he is advised to consult with
his academic advisoror Student Affairs in his
college.
student unless there are negative

remarks about him or her), and the
study schedules are made ready
before the commencement of the
study year.
3. The Visiting Student

A visiting student is a
student who is studying courses in
another university or in one of the
branches of the University to which he
or she is not enrolled. For these
students, the subjects studied will be
equalized.
(1) Qassim University students who
wish to be a visiting student at another
university or college must fulfill the
following requirements:
If the student is not able to register for some or

all of the courses at the continuing level
(because of contradictions, non-completion of
prerequisites or the completion of all courses at
that level), he or she can complete the study
load from the allowable courses if the following
requirements are met:
The number of levels from which

course registration is available is
limited to two consecutive levels.
Registration
is
completed
automatically (with no need for
application on the part of the
Students must have an

academic record (with a
cumulative GPA) for at least
one semester at the University
to which they are enrolled
before applying for visiting
student status.
Students must obtain prior
approval of their college to be
a visiting student and specify
the courses they wish to study.
The college may stipulate the
realization of a certain grade
to equalize the course.
Students are directed to study
by an official letter from the
Deanship of Admissions and
Registration.
The study must be at a
recognized college or
university.
The courses studied outside
the University must be
equivalent to and have a
number of units no less than
24
specializations is 20 study units.

This load can increase to 23 study
units for prospective graduates.
With the consent of the Permanent
Committee for Study Systems and
Plans, students may specify
different unit requirements for
specializations that necessitate
such a procedure.
At a certain level, students will be
obligated to repeat all failed
courses whose total number of
study units is equal to or greater
than the minimum study load.
If the student fails courses whose
total number of study units is less
than the minimum study load, he
or she will be obligated to study
those courses along with additional
courses from the levels that follow
thereafter and according to other
system rules.
Registration in the courses must
be in line with the regulations of
the study plan and schedules.
The study load must pertain to
the students cumulative GPA so
that it does not fall below
minimum requirements.
Students must avoid
contradictions in their schedules.
(2) Students from another university

who wish to study as a visiting student
at Qassim University must fulfill the
following requirements:
Students must have an

academic record (with a
cumulative GPA) for at least
one semester from their
university of record.
Students must obtain prior
written consent from their
university to enroll as a visiting
student at Qassim University.
The letter of consent must

specify the courses at Qassim
University to be studied.
Students must obtain the
consent of the college in which
they wish to study.
Students
may
study
a
maximum of two semesters at
Qassim University.
Students may not apply for
residence at Qassim University
and will not receive payments
from the University.
Courses shall be registered for
the students by the relevant
administrative units, taking
into consideration all the
regulations
pertaining
to
course registration.
Students will be given a letter
at the end of their study
indicating their results in the
courses studied.
Affiliation
After evaluating proposals made by the
relevant colleges, the University Council
may advocate study by affiliation in some
colleges and specializations. This will be
granted in accordance with the following
conditions:
1. The number of units required for
graduation of the affiliated student
must be no less than those required for
graduation of the regular student in the
specializations available for affiliation.
2.The affiliated student will be treated in
the same manner as the regular
student in terms of admission,
recording of overall grades, transfer,
dismissal and readmission. The only
exceptions are in the case of attending
lectures. The University Council is
25
one of the courses required

for graduation.
The maximum total number of
units counted from outside
the University is 20% of the
total number of graduation
units from Qassim University.
The GPA of equalized courses
is not counted in the
cumulative GPA. However,
these courses are included in
students academic record.
Students must submit their
results to the Deanship of
Admissions and Registration
within one week after the
beginning of classes in the first
semester following the period
of study at the host University.
If students fail to do so, they
will be considered absent for
those semesters (except for
summer semesters).
The monthly stipend will be
disbursed to students after
approval by the Deanship of
Admissions and Registration.
Study at the host university
should not exceed two
semesters.
Academic Policy
Attendance, Withdrawals and Transfers
Regular students must attend at least

75% of all lectures and tutorials or risk
being barred from entering the final
exam. Any student barred from
entering a final exam for failure to
meet the attendance policy will
automatically fail the course. Class
work grades will be recorded, and the
student will receive an overall grade of
barred (DN).
The council of the college offering the
course will confirm the lists of barred
students.
If the absence ratio in a course exceeds
50%, excuses will not be considered, as
stipulated in Article 10.
The lists of debarred students are to be
announced before the beginning of
final examinations.
The council of the college (which offers
the course), or whoever it authorizes,
can, with exception, lift the disbarment
and allow a student to sit for the final
examination. This may be done in cases
in which the student provides an
adequate reason for absence and that
reason is accepted by the appropriate
authority. Exceptions will be made only
if the student attended at least 50% of
classes.
Students whose debarment is lifted can
sit for the final exam in the same
semester in which they were debarred.
Exceptions are at the discretion of the

college council.
Students who are not present for the
final examination will receive a score of zero
on the examination, and their overall grade
in that course will be determined on the
basis of their class work grade. The
following are acceptable criteria for
reasonable absences:
The reason for absence

must be given within one
week of its occurrence.
Only involuntary absences,
such
as
health-related
issues, will be considered by
the college council.
In cases in which the council
determines the reason for
absence to be acceptable, a
substitute examination will
be given no later than two
weeks after the following
semester begins. The result
will be recorded the week
the substitute examination
is administered.
In the semester system,
students must provide a
written justification for
withdrawal at least five
weeks before the beginning
of final examinations to
receive a (W) on their
reports. In the yearly
system,
students
must
provide written justification
at least eight weeks before
the
final
examination.
Exceptions to these time
limits can be made only by
the appropriate authority. It
should also be noted that
the semester in question
will be counted toward the
overall time limit set for
26
authorized on recommendations of
college councils to set the rules
necessary to evaluate the performance
of affiliated students. An indication
must be made in the academic record
and graduation certificate or diploma
that the student studied by affiliation.
written consent from their

parents or guardians for
absences.
Postponement
Attendance
and
Non-
Students in semester-based
programs may apply for a
postponement of study
before, but no later than,
the first week after the
commencement of classes.
The application must be
provided in written form
and approved by a college
dean. The postponement
period is for a maximum
duration of two consecutive
semesters or three nonconsecutive semesters. In
the case of the yearly
system,
the
maximum
period is for one year or two
non-consecutive years. The
University Council may
make exceptions to these
rules
on
the
recommendations of the
relevant college council and
the
approval
of
the
Permanent Committee for
Students
Academic
Problems.
The
postponement duration will
not be counted in the time
limit set for the completion
of graduation requirements.
Postponement will go into
effect only after the
approval of the appropriate
college dean and an official
notification
from
the
Registration.
27
completing
graduation
requirements.
The semesters for which
students
request
withdrawals should not
exceed two consecutive
semesters or three nonconsecutive
semesters
throughout
the
entire
period of study; otherwise,
the students record will be
terminated.
Students
participating in the yearly
system of study are limited
to two withdrawals in nonconsecutive years. It is left
to
the
Permanent
Committee for Students
Academic Problems to make
exceptions to this policy,
and exceptions will only be
considered subsequent to a
written
recommendation
from a dean.
Written
requests
for
withdrawals will only be
considered after approval
from the respective college
dean and an official
notification
from
the
Registration.
For the written request of
withdrawal to be accepted,
the
student
will
be
subjected to the issues of
attendance as stipulated in
article 15.
The withdrawing student
will
be
automatically
registered for the following
semester after withdrawal
has been confirmed.
In
addition
to
the
aforementioned conditions,
female students will need
Students
will
be
automatically registered the
semester following the
postponement.
The record of regular
students will be terminated
if they do not attend classes
for the first seven weeks of
the semester.
The list of terminated
student records will be
provided by the colleges to
the Deanship of Admissions
and
Registration
eight
weeks after the semester
begins.
Students
visiting
other
universities for a semester
will not be counted as nonattending.
for Students Academic Problems can

make exceptions to this rule according
to certain criteria set by the committee.
A students record can be reinstated
only once. However, the University
Rector can make exceptions based on
the
recommendations
of
the
Permanent Committee for Students
Academic Problems.
The record of a student who has been
dismissed from the University on
academic grounds will not be
reinstated.
The record will not be reinstated for
students who have been dismissed
from the University on an educational
or disciplinary basis or for students who
have been dismissed from another
university for disciplinary reasons. If it
becomes known that the student had
been dismissed for such reasons, the
record after reinstatement will be
considered null and void as of the date
of reinstatement.
Reinstating a Students Record

Students whose records have been
terminated may apply for reinstatement
(including their old student number) according
to the following criteria:
The application for reinstating the

record must be submitted within four
semesters (or two academic years for
colleges that apply the year system)
after termination of the record.
The college council in question must
agree to reinstate the students record
in accordance with set regulations.
If four or more years elapse after the
termination of a students record (or
two or more academic years for
colleges that apply the year system),
students must submit a new
application to the University, without
reference to their previous studies, and
satisfy all current requirements of
application. The Permanent Committee
Transfer within Colleges
The student can, with the consent of

the college dean, transfer from one
specialization to another within the
college according to preconditions set
by the college council.
The remaining period of stay for the
student at the University must be
sufficient to complete graduation
requirements.
The procedures of transfer must be
finished within the first week
following the beginning of the
semester or academic year for
colleges using the year system.
Students must study for at least one
semester before requesting a
transfer.
Students can transfer only once
throughout their period of university
28
Transfer from One College to Another

With the recommendations of the
deans of the relevant two colleges and the
approval of the Permanent Committee for
Students Academic Problems, students may
transfer from one college to another in
accordance with the conditions set by the
council of the college to which the student
wishes to transfer. The following conditions
apply to such transfers:
The remaining period of stay for the

student at the university must be
sufficient to complete graduation
requirements.
Transfer
procedures
must
be
completed within the first week of the
semester or academic year for colleges
using the year system.
Students can transfer only after
completing at least one semester of
study at the college from which they
are transferring.
Students are allowed to transfer only
once throughout the entire period of
their university study.
For
students
to
whom
the
aforementioned transfer rules are not
applicable, it is the responsibility of the
president of the University to make
exceptions when necessary. These
exceptions will be based on
recommendations of the Permanent
Committee for Students Academic
Problems.
The academic record of the student
transferring from one college to
another will include all subjects studied
in addition to overall grades and
cumulative and semester GPAs.
Transfer from Outside the University

The transfer of a student from outside
the University may be accepted in accordance
with the following rules:
The deans of the colleges in the

university being transferred from and
the university being transferred to
(Qassim University) must consent.
The student must have studied at least
one semester at a recognized college or
university.
The student should not have been
dismissed for disciplinary reasons by
the university from which they are
transferring.
Students must satisfy the transfer
conditions set by the college council to
which they are transferring.
The number of units, which the
transferring student would be required
to study at Qassim University, may not
be less than 60% of the total number of
units required to receive a bachelors
degree from the University.
Transfer is permissible only once
throughout the students entire period
of study at any university in the
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
29
study. The college council will make

an exception to this rule only once.
The Deanship of Admissions and
Registration must be notified of the
transferred students during the
second week following the beginning
of the semester.
Cases to which these rules do not
apply will be directed to the college
council to consider and make
appropriate decisions.
The academic record of the student
transferring from one specialization
to another should include all the
subjects studied, overall grades and
semester and cumulative GPAs
throughout the students study at the
University.
The duration of time that the student

spent at the university being
transferred from and the time
remaining to be spent at Qassim
University must not exceed the average
of the minimum and maximum period
of stay at the college.
Transfer
procedures
must
be
completed two weeks before the start
of the semester or academic year for
colleges using the year system.
For
students
to
whom
the
aforementioned transfer rules are not
applicable, the University Rector can
exceptionally
preclude
them
if
necessary on the recommendation of
the
Permanent
Committee
for
Students Academic Problems.
The college council will equalize the
courses that the student had studied
outside the University on the
recommendations of the departments
that offer the courses in question. The
equalized courses will be included in
the students academic record, but
they do not count in calculating the
cumulative GPA.
If at any time the student had been
dismissed for disciplinary reasons, the
transfer will be considered null and
void by the University.
If it becomes known that the
transferred student had given incorrect
information, the student will be
referred to the Permanent Disciplinary
Committee of the University.
The student can transfer in any
semester from one university to
another in accordance with the timing
and procedures announced by the
university being transferred to and in
conformity with the general rules of
transfer.
Dismissal from the University
Students may be dismissed from the University

in the following cases:
First
A student receives three consecutive warnings
that his or her cumulative GPA has fallen below
the stipulated minimum (2.00 out of 5.00). In
such a situation, the student may be afforded a
fourth opportunity in the following cases:
The student raises his or her cumulative

GPA to two (2.00), assuming that he or
she had achieved forty-eight (48) points
from studying twelve (12) study units
and provided that these are calculated
and executed automatically. It is at the
college councils discretion to provide
other opportunities if the student
cannot raise the cumulative GPA to two
(2.00) given the former assumption.
The college council, at its discretion,
decides to grant students who have
been dismissed because of warnings an
opportunity that does not exceed two
semesters at most and in accordance
with the following:
There must be an
improvement
in
the
students performance in
the last two semesters.
This would be the case if
dividing the total number
of points for the two
semesters
into
the
number of registered
units yields a figure no
less than two (2.00). This
may not include the
summer semester.
The student must have
the capacity to raise his or
her cumulative GPA to
two (2.00) when and if he
or she receives the
30
The University Council reserves the

right to evaluate exceptional cases in
which students have exhausted the
opportunities provided them from the
two previous sections and to offer
them further opportunities. This is not
to exceed two semesters at most on
the recommendation of the Permanent
Committee for Students Academic
Problems, which in turn is based on the
recommendation of the college council.
On submitting such a case to the
University Council, the student must
ensure that his or her performance has
improved in the last two semesters.
This would be the case if dividing the
total number of points for the two
semesters into the number of
registered units yields a figure no less
than two (2.00). This may not include
the summer semester.
For colleges that apply the year system,
the student will be dismissed from the
university if his or her cumulative GPA
falls below two (2.00) for two
consecutive years. The student may be
offered a single opportunity to raise his
or her GPA to two (2.00) (on the
assumption that he or she had earned
96 points from 24 study units) provided
that this is executed automatically. If
the student cannot raise the
cumulative GPA to two (2.00), given the
previous assumption the college

council may offer another opportunity
at its sole discretion.
Second
Students will be dismissed if they cannot
complete graduation requirements in time.
However, the college council can make an
exception to students to complete graduation
requirements within a period not exceeding
twice the length of time specified for graduation
and in accordance with the following terms:
The reasons must be acceptable to the

college council.
There must be an improvement in the
students performance in the last two
semesters. This would be the case if
dividing the total number of points for
the two semesters into the number of
registered units yields a figure no less
than two (2.00 out of 5.00). This may
not include the summer semester. If
these terms are inapplicable to the
student, the case will be referred to
the Permanent Committee to make a
decision.
The University Council holds the right
to make exceptions to these guidelines
for dismissed students who have
surpassed the double time limit. This
will be done on the recommendation
of the Permanent Committee for
Students Academic Problems, which
in turn will
be
based on
recommendations of the college
council. In such cases, the exception
should not exceed two semesters. The
following should be observed when
referring the case to the University
Council:
The remaining courses for the

students graduation must be
31
opportunity and registers

in the available courses.
In case the two previous
conditions
are
not
applicable, the college
council
will
make
recommendations to the
Permanent Committee of
Students
Academic
Problems to make a
decision to that effect.
Third
Colleges must consider all the cases
they receive, refer them to their councils and
thereafter notify the Deanship of Admissions
and Registration about the decisions made by
the second week after the start of classes.
Examinations
1. -Final Examinations
The college council offering the course
determines the weight of the semester course
work. The weight should be between 30% and
50% of the total grade for the course based on a
recommendation of the department council.
The grade for the semester course
work is based on one of the following:
Oral or practical examinations or

research and other types of class
activities or all or part of these and at
least one written examination.
At least two written examinations.
The college council that offers the course can,

on the recommendation of the department
council, include oral and/or practical
examinations in the final examination of any
course and allocate to them some portion of the

final exam grade that it deems appropriate.
The department council offering a
course can, at its own discretion and on the
recommendation of the instructor of the course,
allow a student to complete any courses
requirements in the following semester and
register an overall grade of incomplete (IC) in his
or her record. In such a case, the grade to be
counted in the students semester or cumulative
GPA will not be less than the grade after
completing the courses requirements. If a full
semester elapses and the (IC) grade is not
changed, the grade will be replaced by an (F)
and included in the students semester and
cumulative GPA.
Research and symposia courses or
courses of a practical or field nature can be
excluded from the provisos of articles (22, 23,
24) depending on the decision the college
council makes based on the recommendation of
the council of the department from which the
course is offered. The college council decides
the form of measurement for a students
attainment in these courses.
If the research courses require more
than one study semester, an overall grade of
(continued) will be registered for the student,
and after finishing the course, the student will
be awarded the overall grade. If the student
does not complete the course in the allotted
time, the council of the department offering will
register an overall grade of (IC) in the students
record.
The general overall grade for the
cumulative GPA upon the students graduation,
on the assumption that the weight of the overall
grade is out of five (5.00), shall be as follows:
(Excellent): If the cumulative GPA is no

less than 4.50.
(V. Good): If the cumulative GPA is from
3.75 to less than 4.50.
32
completed in a period not

exceeding two semesters.
There
must
be
an
improvement in the students
performance in the last two
semesters. This is the case
when dividing the total
number of points for the two
semesters into the number of
registered units yields a figure
no less than two (2.00 out of
5.00). This does not include
the summer semester.
(Good): If the cumulative GPA is from

2.75 to less than 3.75.
(Satisfactory): If the cumulative GPA is
from 2.00 to less than 2.75.
The first class honors degree will be

awarded to those students who achieve a
cumulative GPA between (4.75) and (5.00). The
second class honors degree will be awarded to
those students who achieve a cumulative GPA
greater than (4.25) but less than (4.75).
To receive the first or second class
honors degree, the student must satisfy the
following conditions:
The student must not have

failed any of the courses at the
University
or
other
universities.
The student must have
completed all graduation
requirements within a period
not exceeding the average of
the maximum and minimum
periods of stay allowed at the
awarding college.
The student must have studied
no less than 60% of graduation
requirements
at
Qassim
University.
2. Procedures for Final Examinations
The college council forms a committee

to organize the progress of the
examinations and submits the results
to the Deanship of Admissions and
Registration within a period no more
than three days after the date of any
courses examination.
The college council may decide to
impose
confidentiality
on
the
procedures of the final examinations.
The instructor of the course prepares

the questions of the examination, or
questions may be prepared, if
necessary, by someone the college
council
chooses
on
the
recommendation of the head of the
department.
The instructor of the course grades the
final examination scripts, and the head
of the department may, if necessary,
add one or more specialist to
participate in grading. The college
council may nominate, if necessary,
whoever it deems fit to undertake the
grading.
The grader of the final examination
must record the grades scored by the
students on the record lists prepared
for that purpose, sign them up, and
have them sanctioned by the head of
the department.
The student may not sit for more than
two examinations in one day; the
University Council holds the right to
make exceptions.
The student may not enter the final
examination half an hour after it
begins, nor may the student exit the
exam hall until half an hour after the
exam begins.
Cheating
on
the
examination,
attempting to do so or going against
the
directions
and
rules
for
examinations are violations, and
students will be disciplined in
accordance with the student discipline
regulation issued by the University
Council.
The college council that offers the course

can approve the re-grading of examination
scripts, when necessary, for that course
within a period not surpassing the
beginning of the final exams for the
following semester.
33
The college council that offers the

course can approve re-grading of a
script, when necessary, on the request
of the student concerned. This should
be done within the first week of the
following semester.
The student must not have made a
previous request for re-grading an
examination that was found unjustified.
The student may not apply for the regrading of more than one examination
script in a single semester.
The college must prepare a form that
includes
the
aforementioned
information in addition to other
information, including student name,
university number, the courses
number, code and title, section
number, semester number, absence
rate, cumulative GPA, warnings, course
instructors name, examination date,
reasons for applying for re-grading and
a pledge by the student that the
information presented is correct.
In case the re-grading is approved, the
college council will form a committee
for re-grading the scripts. The
committee will submit a report
regarding the case to the college
council to make a decision. The

councils decision is final.
The committee can recommend that
the student be referred to the
Universitys Permanent Disciplinary
Committee if deemed necessary.
The college council can, on the
recommendation of the relevant
department council, set the time limit
for the written final examination
provided that it is no less than an hour
or more than three hours.
Without violating the provisions of
articles (3140), the University Council
will set the regulations pertaining to
the procedures of final exams.
4. The Academic Record

The academic record shows the
students educational progress. It includes all
the courses the student studied in each
semester, including the course codes, numbers,
study units, overall grades scored and their code
values. The academic record also shows the
semester and cumulative GPA and the general
overall grade, in addition to the courses from
which the transfer student has been exempted.
34
3. Rules for Re-Grading Exams
Objectives of Graduate Studies

Article 1
The Graduate Studies program aims to:
1. Promote the research and publication
of Islamic and Arabic studies;
2. Contribute to the enrichment of human
knowledge in all fields through
specialized studies and research in
order to make new scientific and
applied contributions and create
innovative discoveries
3. Provide opportunities for
undergraduate students to pursue their
graduate studies locally;
4. Develop qualified scientific and
professional human resources in
different fields of knowledge.
5. Encourage qualified scientists to keep
pace with the rapid developments in
science and technology to direct their
research towards the solution of
problems in Saudi society; and
6. Continue with the improvement of
undergraduate programs in order to
interface efficiently with graduate
studies/programs.
The Scientific Degrees
Article2
The University Council awards the following
scientific degrees according
to the College and Department Councils and
approval of the
Council of Deanship of Graduate Studies:
1- Diploma.
2- Master degree.
3- Doctoral degree.
Article3
Studying requirements for the scientific degrees
are determined according
to these regulating rules, except the following.
1- Medical diplomas.
2- Medical fellowships which are controlled by
the regulating rules issued by the University
Council
Organization of Graduate Studies

Article 4
A Deanship of Graduate Studies will be
established in every University. The Dean will
report to the Vice-Rector for Graduate Studies
and Scientific Research. The Deanship will
supervise all programs of graduate studies in the
University; coordinate them; recommend their
approval where appropriate; and, subject them
to periodic reviews.
Article 5
The Council of the Deanship of Graduate Studies
will consider issues relating to graduate studies
in the University in general and make the
necessary decisions within its authority as per
this unified regulating rules; specifically, the
Council will:
1. Propose/revise the general policy for
graduate studies and its coordination
with all University Colleges and
institutes and follow-up its
implementation after initial approval;
2. Propose, in coordination with academic
departments, the internal regulating
rules concerning the organization of
graduate studies;
3. Propose criteria for admission to
graduate studies and supervise their
implementation;
4. Recommend the approval of new
programs of graduate studies and their
coordination with existing programs;
5. Recommend the approval of graduate
courses as well as revise or change
their contents;
6. Recommend in Arabic and English, the
names for the graduate degrees as per
the recommendations of the college
councils;
7. Recommend the granting of degrees.
8. Make final decisions in matters relating
to graduate students a airs in the
University;
9. Approve the formulation of thesis and
dissertation committees, and report
the relevant a committees decision.
10. Formulate the general guidelines for
research plans; set up rules and regulations
for writing theses/dissertations; print,
submit and develop forms for their defense
and evaluation;
35
Graduate Studies
GRADUATE STUDIES
Article 6
The Council of Deanship of Graduate Studies
consists of the following:
1. Dean of Graduate Studies, acting as the
Chairman of the Council;
2. Dean of Scientific Research, member;
3. Deputy Dean of Graduate Studies,
secretary general of the council
4. A faculty member, of associate
professor rank (at least), from each
College offering graduate programs, appointed
by the University Council as per the
recommendations of the College Council and
the approval of the Rector, for a 2- years
renewable term.
The Council shall meet at least once a month. A
minimum of two thirds of its members is
required to be a formal meeting. Its decisions
are taken by simple majority, and in the case of
equal vote with or against a suggestion, the one
supported by the head of the council is adopted.
The decision of the council should be considered
final if there is no objection from the Rector
within 15 days from the date received in the
rectors office. The council can from standing or
temporary committees from its members or
others and charge them with various tasks.
New Programs
Article 7
The University Council will set detailed
standards to approve the graduate programs
based on the recommend.ations of the Council
of the Deanship of Graduate Studies after
consideration of the following:
1. There should be sufficient faculty members of
the rank of professor and associate professor
specialized in the program. In addition, sufficient
research facilities including laboratories,
computer resources, etc., should be available to
ensure the success of the program together with
the assurances regarding the quality of teaching,

research, and supervision of research.
2. The Department should have acquired
sufficient experience in managing
undergraduate program if the new program is
for a masters degree if it is for a doctorate
degree, experience in managing master,s
program is required .
3. The number of students expected to enroll in
the program should be sufficient to guarantee
the continuation of the program.
Article 8
With consideration of the requirements in
Article 7, the Department submits to the College
Council a detailed proposal of the program
explaining the following:
1. The program objectives and the need of the
Saudi society for it;
2. The nature of the program from its academic
and professional focus
3. The importance of the program and its
justification after reviewing what other
departments are offering in the same area of
specialization in the University and other
universities in the Kingdom;
4. The facilities available or what will be
procured by the Department to assure the
promotion of high academic and professional
quality for the program, especially, in the major
research areas identified by the Department
5. Faculty stability and turnover during the
previous five years;
6. The CVs of all faculty members in the
department and other faculty members in the
University who are involved in the program in
question.
Article 9
will review the program proposal and
coordinate its requirements and other existing
program requirements, if any, to avoid
duplication of effort. If the council is satisfied, it
may recommend that the program be approved
by the University Council.
Article 10
Any adjustments in the curriculum, program
requirements, or admission requirements
should be approved by the University Council as
per recommendations of the Council of the
36
Graduate Studies
11. Evaluate periodically the graduate studies

programs at the University through
committees from within the University or
from outside;
12. Study the periodic reports submitted by
academic departments in the University
and;
13. Study the items referred to it by the
University Council, or its Board Chairman, or
the Rector.
Article 11
Combined graduate programs can be
established between two or more Departments
or between two or more Colleges according to
guidelines approved by the University Council
based on the recommendations of the Council
of the Deanship of Graduate Studies in
coordination with the Departments concerned.
CONDITIONS FOR ACCEPTANCE
Article 12
The University Council determines the number
of students to be admitted each year for the
graduate studies as per the recommendations of
the Council of the Deanship of Graduate Studies
and suggestions by Department and College
Councils.
Article 13
For Admission to the Graduate Studies, the
following general requirements should be
satisfied:
1. The applicant must be a Saudi national or
must have official scholarship to the Graduate
Studies (for non-Saudis);
2. The applicant must have a university degree
from a Saudi university or from another
recognized university;
3. He/she must have a record of good behavior
and be medically fit.
4. Recommendation letters should be submitted
from two of his/her former professors.
5. An approval letter from his/her employer is
required, if the applicant is employed;
6. The basis in Ph.D. programs is that the
student should be a full-time student. However,
the University Council can decide exception
from this requirement whenever it is inevitable.
The Council of each university can add any other
general requirements as necessary.
Article 14
Admission to a postgraduate diploma requires
an undergraduate performance of not less than
good ( c grade )
Article 15
Admission to masters degree program requires
a minimum over all undergraduate performance
of very good ( B ) However the council for the
deanship of graduate studies can waive this

condition for upper good ( C+ ) on condition that
his/her grade is very good in the specialized
Courses . Board, given that The Council of the
Deanship of Graduate Studies can add other
requirements as per the recommendations of
the Department Council and the support of the
College Council.
Article 16
Admission to a Doctoral degree program
requires a minimum overall master degree
performence of very good if it is from a
university with a letter-grading system. The
Council of the Deanship of Graduate Studies
may add other necessary admission
requirements as per the recommendation of the
Department Council and the support of the
College Council.
Article 17
A graduate student may be admitted to masters
or doctoral program other than his/her original
field of study as per the recommendations
of the Councils of Department and the College
concerned, together with the approval of the
Council of the Deanship of Graduate Studies.
Article 18
The concerned department may require student
in a master or doctoral program to take a
number of deficiency courses for a maximum
period of three semesters with the following
considerations:
1. The deficiency courses must be completed at
the first attempt with a grade not less than
good ( C ) .
2.the cumulative GPA in all deficiency courses
must not be less than very good (B);
3. Registration for the intended graduate studies
program will not commence until the deficiency
courses are passed. The Department concerned
may allow the student to enroll in such graduate
courses if only one or two deficiency courses
remain;
4. The time period required for completing the
deficiency courses is not considered a part of
the maximum residency period for the degree in
question;
5. Deficiency courses are not included in the
GPA calculated on for graduate studies
37
Graduate Studies
Deanship of the Graduate Studies in

coordination with the department concerned.
Article 20
A student cannot enroll in two graduate
programs at the same time.
Deferment and Dropping
Article 21
The student may postpone his admission for not
more than two semesters based on the approval
of the relevant Department Council, the Dean of
the College concerned, and the Dean of
Graduate Studies. This period of postponement
will not be included as part of the maximum

residency period allowed for completing the
degree.
Article 22
Studies may only be postponed following the
approval of the relevant Department Council,
and Dean of the College concerned, and the
Dean of Graduate Studies according to the
following:
1. The student must have finished at least one
semester or more, or completed a good part of
his thesis;
2. Postponement must not exceed four
semesters (2 academic years);
3. The student must submit a postponement
request two weeks before the beginning of the
semester;
4.The postponement period is not included in
the maximum residency period required for the
degree.
Article 23
The student can request to drop all courses of
the semester subject to the following
conditions:
1. He/she must submit the form for dropping
before the final examination;
2. Approval of the Department Council together
with the approvals of the Dean of the College
concerned and the Dean of Graduate Studies,
are required;
3. This semester must not be considered from
the additional attempts given to the student.
4. This semester will be considered as part of
the postponement period that mentioned to it
in Article22.
Withdrawal
Article 24
If a student has withdrawn voluntarily from
graduate studies, and then decided to return, all
the current admission requirements must be
met.
1. If the student has withdrawn voluntarily and
then decided to return, the department can
count for him all or some of deficiency courses
that student has already studied before
withdrawal.
2. The main or major courses been studied by
the student before withdrawal should not be
counted for him.
38
Graduate Studies
Procedure for acceptance

Article 19
Admission and registration of graduate students
should be conducted through the Deanship of
Graduate Studies in coordination with the
Deanship of Admission and Registration, and to
accept students in accordance with the
following:
1. Apply for admission and have the
required documents presented to the
Deanship of Graduate studies from the
beginning of the second week until the
end of the fifth week of the semester
preceding the start of the study.
2. The Deanship of Graduate studies
transfer the documents of those who
wish acceptance to the relevant
departments within a period not
exceeding the end of the sixth week of
the previous semester to begin the
study.
3. Recommends that the relevant parts of
the council to accept students for a
period not exceeding the tenth week of
the semester prior to the
commencement of the study, and
return the documents to the Deanship
of Graduate studies within two weeks
from the date of the recommendation.
4. The Council of Deanship of Graduate
studies issues the decision regarding
the acceptance.
5. After the issuance of decisions to
accept students, Deanship of Graduate
studies send the entire original
documents to the Deanship of
Admission and Registration, and
provide the relevant parts of the list of
admitted students before the start of
registration period in course in at least
two weeks.
Dismissal and Readmission

Article 26
may decide to dismiss a student if:
1. The student gains admission to graduate
studies but does not register during the
registration period;
2. He/she registers in a semseter but does not
end classes in that semester.
3. He/she withdraws or discontinues the
program for one semester without an
acceptable excuse;
4. He/she does not show his seriousness in
studying or does not fulfill his academic duties
according to Article 52 of these regulating rules
5.His/her GPA is below B for two consecutive
semester,
6. He/she exceeds the postponement periods
mentioned in Article 22 of these regulating rules
7. If he/she violated the scientific honesty during
the period of studying courses or during his/her
thesis work, or if the rules and regulations
of the university are violated;
8. He/she does not pass the comprehensive
examination (if required) at the second attempt;
9. The thesis committee disqualifies the thesis
for defense or does not accept it following the
defense; and
10. His/her program remains incomplete
following the expiry of the maximum residency
period according to Article 36.
11. His/her program remains incomplete
following the expiry of the maximum residency
period according to Article 36.
Article 27
In extremely limited cases, a students _le can
be reinstated if the Department and College
Councils support his/her readmission request,
with justification. The readmission is to be
approved by University Council based on the
recommendations of the Council of the
Deanship of Graduate Studies with the following

considerations:
1. If the period between dismissal and the
application for readmission exceeds six
semesters, the student will be treated as a new
applicant regardless of the number of credit
hours he earned before.
2. If the period between dismissal and the
application for readmission is 6 semesters or
less, the student may be asked to repeat some
courses. These courses will be identified by the
Department and College Councils and approved
by the Council of the Deanship of Graduate
Studies. The credit hours earned from the time
of readmission will be counted in his GPA
calculation. The previous period attended in the
program by the student will be counted as part
of his/her maximum residency period for the
degree in question.
Additional Attempts
Article 28
Item (5) of Article 26 may be exempted to give a
student an additional attempt at graduating for
one or two semesters (maximum) as per the
recommendations of both the Department and
College Councils and the approval of the Council
of the Deanship of Graduate Studies.
Article 29
Item (10) of Article 26 may be exempted to give
a student an additional attempt at graduating
not exceeding two semesters following the
recommendations of the supervisor and the
Department, College, and Deanship of Graduate
Studies Councils.
Transfer
Article 30
A student can transfer from one recognized
university to the University as per the
recommendation of both the Department and
College Councils and the approval of the Council
of the Deanship of Graduate Studies after
consideration of the following:
1. The student must satisfy the admission
requirements and other departmental
requirements as necessary.
2. The student must not be dismissed, for any
reason, from the university from which he is
transferring.
3. The number of credit hours earned will be
calculated according to the following:
39
Graduate Studies
Article 25
A student would be considered to have
voluntarily discontinued his/her program and
would be dismissed in the following cases:
1. If he is accepted in the program and doesnt
register during the registration period;
2. If he/she registers in a semester but does not
a end classes in that
semester.
Article 31
The students major can be changed at the
university according to the recommendations of
the Department and College Councils and the
approval of the Council of the Deanship of
Graduate Studies taking the following into
consideration:
1. The student satis_es the admission and any
other requirements deemed necessary by the
Department.QT
2. Educational Units earned at the University
may be counted, if the new Department
approves its compatibility with the new program
to be transferred to. These credits will be
included in the GPA calculation.
3. The student should not have been previously
dismissed for any of the reasons indicated in
Article 26.
4. The period spent in the previous major will be
considered part of the maximum residency
period for the degree in question.
5. Only one change of major is allowed during
the maximum residency period for the degree in
question.
System of Study
Article 32
Studying for a postgraduate diploma includes
courses, field work, applied courses and
experimental activities that satisfy the following:
1. The residency period should not be less than
of two semesters and not more than four
semesters; and
2. The number of credit hours should not be less
than 24 and not more than 36.
The University Council determines the required

courses for the diploma degree as well as the
name of the diploma degree as per proposal of
both the Department and College Councils
concerned and the recommendations of the
Article 34
Studying for a doctoral degree involves one of
the following two approaches:
1. Coursework and dissertation with a minimum
of 30 educational units after the masters
degree in addition to the dissertation.
2. Dissertation and some courses with a
minimum of 12 specialized educational units
from the major, seminars, or research sessions
as required, according to the students academic
background and field of study .
Article 35
The academic year is divided into two semesters
each one is not less than 15 weeks not counting
registration and test period and one summer
semester which is not less than 8 weeks in which
the teaching period is doubled for each course.
In same colleges the study may be .yearly based according to the Universty Council which
does not contradict with this unified regulating
rules of Gradute Studies.
Article 36
1. The maximum residency period for a masters
degree must not be less than four semesters
and not more than eight semesters; not
including the summer sessions.
2. The residency period for a doctoral degree
must not be less than six semesters and not
more than ten semesters; the summer sessions
are not included.
Article 37
The maximum residency period for a degree
starts from the registration for graduate courses
up to the submission date of a report from the
students advisor with a copy of the thesis (or
any other requirements to the student program)
to the Department Chairman.
Article 38
A graduate student must take at least 70% of
the required educational units in the University
awarding the degree. All work related to his
40
Graduate Studies
(a) Courses under consideration should not have

been taken more than six semesters preceding
the application.
(b) The topics of the credit hours to be
transferred must meet the current program
requirements.
(c) The percentage of the credit hours to be
transferred must not be more than 30% of the
new program requirements.
(d) The grade of the transferred courses should
not be less than Very Good (B).
(e) The transferred credit hours will not be
included in the GPA calculation.
(f ) The Department Council will recommend the
transfer of credits, to be approved by the
Councils of the College and the Deanship of
Graduate Studies.
Article 39
A student cannot graduate until all the degree
requirements are completed. At graduation, the
general grade of the student is to be very good
(B) at least .
P
System of Examinations
Article 40
Conducting and grading graduate courses for
diploma, master and doctoral degrees should
follow the undergraduate studies and
examination rules and regulations which were
approved by the Higher Education Council in its
second meeting on 11/6/1416 H, with the
exception of the following:
1. A minimum of good ( C ) grade is required
from the student to pass a course.
2. The Council of the Deanship of Graduate
Studies should set appropriate
policies as per the department councils
recommendation and approval of the college
Council with regard to substitute examinations
and courses requiring a duration of study of
more than one semester.
3. Masters students -if required by the
program- and doctoral students must pass
comprehensive oral and written examinations
after the completion of all the required
coursework. This comprehensive examination
should be conducted by a specialized committee
according to regulations set by the University
Council as per the recommendations
of the Department Council and the approval of
the College Council concerned and the Council
of the Deanship of Graduate Studies. This
examination should cover the students major
field of the study as well as the other related
fields if exist. The student will be considered a
candidate for the degree in question if he passes
the examination at the first time. In case of
failure in the examination or part of it, a second
chance will be given to the student within the
following two semesters. Failure to pass the
examination the Council a second time will
incur dismissal from the program. The marks
scored by the student are to be recorded
according to the regulating rules of
Undergraduate Studies and Examination which
were approved by the Higher Education Council,

in its second meeting on 11/6/1416 H, subject to
what is stipulated in Article 40 of the unified
regulating rules for Graduate Studies in Saudi
universities, i.e., the exceptions mentioned.
Rules for the Comprehensive Test for the
Doctorate
1. The comprehensive examination is composed
of two parts: written and oral.
2. The comprehensive examination (written and
oral) will be in the major field and secondary
fields (if any).
3. The comprehensive exam aims to measure
the students capability, depth and areas:
a. Knowledge: the exam aims to measure the
students capability, depth and comprehension
to understand the major field subjects, and also
secondary fields (if any).
b. Analysis : the exam aims to measure the
students capability in analyzing and making
complementary action between concepts and
conclusion, and in suggesting reasonable
solutions and reasonable answers for questions
directed to him/her.
4. The Comprehensive Exam Committee:
a. The department council establishes an exam
committee of odd numbered members, from
full professors and associate professors, An
assistant professor, with two years experience
as assistant professor
can be chosen as a member of this committee.
b. The committee is responsible for preparing
the comprehensive exams, to correct them, and
to announce exam results. The committee then
raises the exam results to the department
council for approval.
c. If the program requirements contain a major
field or secondary fields from outside the
department, then it is so necessary that one of
the staff members of the concerned
department/departments should be a member
of the committee.
5. Written Exam: a. The written exam is to be
held during the semester coming after the
student has finished the courses. The exam is
held at a time determined by the exam
committee. After the approval of the
department council, the student can postpone
the exam for one semester.
b. Failing to pass the exam, the student can be
given an extra chance to re-take the exam,
during the two following semesters.
41
Graduate Studies
thesis/ dissertation must be completed in the

same University.
Thesis /Dissertation
Preparation of Thesis/Dissertation and
Supervision:
Article 41
On joining the program, each graduate student
should be assigned an academic advisor. The
advisor will guide and help the student to
choose the subject of the thesis/dissertation
and research plan according to the regulations
approved by the University Council, as per
recommendations of the Council of the
Deanship of Graduate Studies.
Article 42
After passing all the admission requirements
and completing at least 50 % of the required
courses, with a minimum cumulative GPA ofB
,the graduate student should submit his/her
thesis/dissertation proposal, if any, to the
department concerned. If the proposal is
approved, the Department Council will assign
either a thesis advisor, and co-advisor if
required, or thesis committee members and its
chairman. Subsequently, this information should
be submitted to the Council of the Deanship of
Graduate Studies for approval, as per the
recommendations of the College Council.
Article 43
Masters thesis should reflect originality and
involve a new contribution, and doctoral
dissertation should also reflect originality and
innovation, together with an effective
contribution to the advancement of knowledge
in the students field of study.
Article 44
Subject of masters thesis and doctoral
dissertation should be written in Arabic. Other
languages can be used in some majors with the
approval of the University Council as per
recommendations of the Department and
College Councils, and the Council of the
Deanship of Graduate Studies. In such cases, an
Arabic perfect summary must be included.
Article 45
The thesis/dissertation advisors must be of
professorial or an associate professorial rank
who are faculty members of the University. An
assistant professor may be nominator as master
thesis advisor if he worked two years as
assistant professor and has at least two papers
published or accepted for publication in his field
of specialty in refereed journals. then the
refereed books can be considered instead of
papers. A professor or associate professor from
the same department can participate and help
in supervision. The assistant professor can
participate and help in supervision years an
assistant professor and has at least one paper
published or accepted for publication (in his
field of specialization) in a reference journal.
42
Graduate Studies
c. Failing to pass the exam in the extra chance,

the student is to be dismissed and this is to be
according to the recommendation of
department council and college Council, and
approval of Deanship of
Graduate Studies council.
6. Oral Examination: a. After passing the written
exam, the student should sit for the oral exam,
at a time decided upon by the exam committee.
b. Failing to pass the oral exam, the student has
the right to re-take an
extra oral exam at any time, but not later than
the next semester.
c. Failing to pass the extra oral exam, the
student will be dismissed, and this is to be
according to the recommendation of the
department council and the College Council, and
approval of the Deanship of Graduate Studies
Council.
7. The duration (time) of the Comprehensive
Exam: According to the recommendation of
concerned department council, the college
council determines the duration (time) of each
of written and oral exams.
8. The marks needed to pass the Comprehensive
Exam:
a. Each exam (written and oral) has an
independent full mark (100).
b. PhD student passes the written and oral
exams, if he scores at least 70% in written and
70% in oral, from each member of the
committee.
c. Masters degree student passes the written
and oral exams, if he achieves at least 70% in
written, and 70% in oral, from most of the
members of the exam committee.
9. The college must submit to the Deanship of
Graduate studies the results of written and oral
exams, in two weeks from the date of the
exam.
Article 47
Based on the nature of the thesis/dissertation, a
co-advisor can be assigned from other
departments in the University, provided that the
thesis/dissertation advisor is assigned from the
department awarding the degree.
Article 48
A faculty member can be in the same time coadvisor or co-advisor for a maximum of four
thesis and when deeply necessary, the number
can be raised to five following the
recommendations of the Department Council
concerned and the approval of the College
Council, and the Council of the Deanship of
Graduate Studies. For the purpose of calculating
a faculty thesis/ dissertation will be counted as
one credit hour, whether the faculty member is
the sole advisor or the major advisor.
Article 49
If the advisor cannot continue supervising the
thesis /dissertation, or if his service to the
University is discontinued, the Department
concerned should suggest a replacement, to be

approved by the College Council and the Council
of the Deanship of Graduate Studies.
Article 50
By the end of each semester, the advisor should
report, in detail to the department chairman
about the students progress, to copy of the
report should be sent to the Dean of Graduate
Studies.
Article 51
Student completion of the thesis/dissertation
must be reported by the advisor to the
Chairman of the Department concerned, in
order to initiate the completion of the
procedure determined by the Council of the
Deanship of Graduate Studies. The procedures
are:
Names of member of examiners raised to the
graduate studies council and decision should be
taken in one month from the date of the College
Board.
After the approval of the Deanship of
Graduate Studies on the formation of
the Examination panel the department
head, refer the thesis to the members
of the committee and set a date for
discussion.
The discussion of the thesis can be in
public, or may be confidential, and the
decision of the committee is
immediately made after discussion.
In the case of non-validity of the thesis
or the discussion altogether, the Dean
of Graduate Studies should be notified;
to cancel the students enrollment.
The time between the approval of the
Deanship of Postgraduate Studies on
the formation of the judging panel
must not exceed four months (not
counting the public holidays within this
period).
Article 52
Based of the academic advisors report a lack of
commitment by a student towards his studies
and other academic duties will result in an
academic warning by the Department Council
concerned. If, after two warnings, no
improvement is evident, the Council of the
43
Graduate Studies
Article 46
The thesis/dissertation advisor may be a nonfaculty member of the University with
distinguished qualifications and experience in
academic research. This requires the approval of
the University Council, based on
recommendations by the Department Council
concerned, the College Council, and the Council
of the Deanship of Graduate Studies, and in
accordance with the following rules:
A. Masters Thesis
a. The holder of a doctorate
b. That have been on obtaining a
doctorate at least 3 years
c. To have at least 3 papers in
the area of concern papers
published or accepted for
publication in scientific
journals.
B. Doctoral Thesis
a. The holder of a doctorate
b. That have been on obtaining a
doctorate at least 5 years
c. To have at least 6 papers in
the area of concern papers
published or accepted for
publication in scientific
journals.
5. Decisions of the Committee should be based

on a majority vote of at least two thirds of the
total number of members.
The time between acceptance of the research

proposal and submitting of the thesis should not
exceed 2 semesters for the Masters degree and
four semesters for the Ph.D.
Article 56
If, for any reason, the thesis reason dissertation
advisor cannot participate in the defense
committee, due to his death or his service to the
University is discontinued, or his presence
outside the country in task for a long time, the
department concerned should suggest a
replacement who should be approved by the
college council and council of the deanship of
graduate studies.
PR
Article 57
A report is prepared and signed by all members
of the thesis/dissertation committee. The report
must be submitted to the Department Chairman
concerned within one week of the date of the
public defense. The report must include one of
the following recommendations:
1. The thesis/dissertation is accepted and
recommended for the award of the degree.
2. The thesis/dissertation is accepted with some
modifications, without
a re-defense being necessary. A member of the
committee is delegated to recommend awarding
of the degree after ensuring that the required
modifications are implemented within three
months from the date of the first public
defense. This period can be waived by the
University Council.
3. Further work is recommended on the
thesis/dissertation, followed by a second
defense within a certain period of time to be
decided by the Council of the Deanship of
Graduate Studies, based on the
recommendations of the Department Council
concerned. This period must not exceed one
year from the date of the first defense.
4. The thesis/dissertation is rejected.
Each committee member has the right to submit
his own comments or reservations in a separate
report both to the Department Chairman
concerned and the Dean of Graduate Studies,
within two weeks of the date of the defense.
Thesis/Dissertation Defense
Article 53
Based on the recommendations of the
Department and College Councils
concerned, a Defense Committee is formed by
the Council of the Deanship of Graduate Studies.
Article 54
The Masters thesis Defense Committee must
fulfill the following requirements:
1. It must comprise an odd number of members,
chaired by the thesis advisor.
2. The Committee must comprise at least three
members. The advisor and co-advisor if any
should not constitute a majority in the
Committee.
3. The Committee members should meet the
conditions of the thesis
supervision.
4. At least one member of the Committee must
be a professor or an
associate professor.
5. Decisions of the Committee should be based
on a majority vote of
at least two thirds of the total number of
members.
Article 55
The Doctoral Dissertation Defense Committee
must fulfill the following
requirements:
1. It must comprise an odd number of members,
not less than three, and chaired by the thesis
advisor.
2. The Committee members must be of the rank
of professors or associate professors. The
advisor and co-advisor (if any) should not
constitute a majority in the committee.
3. At least one member of the Committee must
be of Professor rank.
4. One member of the Committee must be from
outside the University.
Article 58
The Department Chairman concerned must
submit the report of the Thesis/Dissertation
Committee to the Dean of Graduate Studies not
44
Graduate Studies
Deanship of Graduate Studies may dismiss the

student as per the recommendation of the
Department Council.
Article 59
The Dean of Graduate Studies must submit the
recommendations to award the degree to the
University Council for approval.
Article 60
A masters thesis advisor from outside the
university will be given compensation of five
thousand Saudi Riyals (SR 5,000.00). A doctoral
dissertation advisor from outside the University
will be given compensation of seven thousand
Saudi Riyals (SR7,000.00).
Article 61
A faculty staff member of the University to
whom the thesis/dissertation is submitted
receives one thousand Saudi Riyals (SR1,000.00)
member or a non-faculty member from the
University to whom the thesis/dissertation is
submitted receives one thousand five hundred
Saudi Riyals (SR1,500.00) for participation the
Doctoral Defense Committee and one thousand
saudi riyals (SR 1,000) for participation in the
master defense Committee. A committee
member from outside the Kingdom receives two
thousands five hundreds Saudi Riyals
(SR2,500.00). If the Committee member is from
outside the city in which the University is
located, whereby the thesis/ dissertation is
defended, he should be given a roundtrip air
ticket from his place of residence (city/country)
and rent of suitable accommodation and living
for a maximum of two nights in addition to
honorarium indicated above, whether the
Committee member is from the Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia or from outside. If the Committee
member is blind or a female, his/her companion
should be given air ticket and accommodation
rent for a maximum of two nights. In case of
necessity, and according to the nature of study,
the Council of the Deanship of Graduate Studies
can add one or two nights, as per the
recommendation of the Department and college
Councils, as extended stay for the committee
member.
programs as per the recommendations of the

The results of the evaluation should be
submitted to the University Council.
Article 63
At the end of each academic year, the
Department Chairman should submit a report to
the Dean of the College concerned and the Dean
of Graduate Studies regarding the progress of
graduate studies in the Department.
Article 64
Whatever is not explicitly stated in this
document should follow the rules of the Council
of Higher Education and Universities and their
implementation rules and regulations as
practiced in the Kingdom.
Article 65
This document will cancel all the previous
graduate studies regulations in the Saudi
Universities and it will be implemented from the
first academic year following its approval date.
The University Council may take the appropriate
action in cases where students joined a
University under the old regulations.
Article 66
A University Council may issue its own
implementation rules regarding the progress of
graduate studies without contradicting the
regulating rules of this document.
Article 67
The Council of Higher education and Universities
has the right to interpret the regulations of this
document.
Gradute Studies / General Regulations

Article 62
The University Council approves the regulations
for the evaluation of the graduate studies
45
Graduate Studies
later than three weeks after the date of the

defense.
The deanships main responsibility is the

Preparatory Year Program (PYP) at Qassim
University. The program provides a foundation
for students knowledge in science, medicine,
mathematics and Englishthe foundation for
their subsequent University-level courses.
The use of the (PYP) for scientific and
medical specializations is supported by their
successful implementation at other Saudi
universities. Because of the importance and
necessity of the Preparatory Year Program, the
University has embarked on its implementation
to realize the following objectives:
1) To increase the employability of
graduates
of
science
specializations
(engineering, computers and other sciences) in
the public and private sectors by improving their
computer literacy and English language skills.
2) To prepare students to use English as
the medium of education in scientific and
medical specializations. Students study a weekly
total of sixteen hours distributed among the
four language skills (reading, listening, speaking
and writing). In addition, the high schoollevel
subjects of mathematics and natural sciences
(physics, chemistry and biology) are reviewed in
English.
3) To develop applied computer skills
by offering the ICDL (International Computer
Driving License) as the basis of a course.
4) To address the issue of academically
challenged students and their high rate of
dropout from the scientific and medical colleges.
The Preparatory Year Program affords both
students and the University an opportunity to
identify students abilities and their readiness to
join one of the medical or scientific colleges.
5) To offer new opportunities for fair

competition between students in view of the
varying evaluation conditions to which students
were subjected at the end of their high school
education. Students are assigned to suitable
colleges according to their GPA during the
Preparatory Year Program, regardless of their
grades in high school. Thus, each student is
evaluated according to criteria and conditions
that are deemed suitable for studying at the
university level in a particular specialization.
6) To ensure that students Preparatory
Year GPA is not included in the calculation of
their GPA after joining any particular college.
The calculation of the GPA begins afresh in the
newly joined college. This process helps the
students acclimate to the new environment in a
way that does not affect their overall university
GPA. The GPA in the Preparatory Year Program
is a competitive instrument between students,
and concerned colleges use it as the primary
tool to determine admission to their colleges.
Study Curriculum
The curriculum in the Preparatory Year

Program consists of two semesters of
study. For more information about
each course and the books and
references used, please see the course
descriptions available on the home
page of the Preparatory Year Program
website: www.pyp.edu.sa.
Training and Scholarships

Every year the Univeristy encourages a number
of faculty members to pursue studies in foreign
universities in specialized domains in order to
enhance their skills. This initiative helps in
promoting research as well as preparing the
faculty members to assume greater
responsibilities in future. The total number of
Ph.D. scholarships offered by the University for
46
Graduate Studies
Deanship of Educational
Services
studies abroad are 143, while the numbers sent

for Masters degree are 333. In addition to this,
the University also sent 51 Faculty members to
pursue fellowship in various specialities.
Graduate Studies
Qassim University has so far enrolled more than

60000 undergraduate students since its
inception, which is indicative of its substantial
contribution to the Education field.
47
Colleges and Specializations

Name of the College
No.
1

Sciences
College of Pharmacy
Specializations
1241AH
Main
Campus
Anatomy and Histology, Physiology,

Pathology, Medicine, Obstetrics and
Gynecology, Surgery, Pediatrics,
Otolayngology (ENT), Ophthalmology,
Pharmacology and Theraputics,
Orthopedics and Rehabilitation,
Radiology & Imaging, Dermatology,
Psychiatry, Family & Community
Medicine
1241AH
Main
Campus
Optometry, Medical laboratories,

Radiology
1241AH
Main
Campus
Pharmaceutical Practice, Chemistry and

Pharmacy of drugs, Pharmaceutics,
Medicines and Poisons
1241AH
Main
Campus
Prosthodontics, Restorative Denstistry,

Preventive Dentistry, Oral and
Maxillofacial surgery and Diagnostic
sciences
Main
Campus
Medical surgery Nursing, Community

health Nursing and Mental health,
Maternal Nursing and child health,
Nursing education
College of Nursing
1241AH
Location
College of Medicine
Date of
Foundation
College of Medical
Rehabilitation Sciences in
Buraida
It was
restructured
in1231 AH.
College of Medicine and

Medical Sciences in Onaiza
It was
restructured
in1231 AH.
Onaiza
It was
restructured
Al-Rass
Buraida
General Nursing, Midwifery (Obstetrics

and Gynecology), Associate Dentist
General Nursing
Clinical Nutrition, Oral and dental health,

Diagnostic Radiology, Dental technology,
48
11
Sciences in Al-Rass
in1231 AH.
College of Public Health and

Medical Informatics in AlBukairiyyah
It was
restructured
in1231 AH.
AlBukairiyyah
Health services, Medical secretary,

Medical records, Epidemiology, Health
information, Health Insurance, Public
health
Onaiza
Pharmaceutical Practice, Chemistry and

Pharmacy of drugs, Pharmaceutics,
Medicines and Poisons
Al-Rass
Prosthodontics, Restorative Denstistry,

Preventive Dentistry, Oral and
Maxillofacial surgery and Diagnostic
sciences
College of Pharmacy in Onaiza

1231 AH
11
Medical Equipments and Devices,

Pharmacy, Laboratory, Nutrition,
Associate Dentist, Anesthesiology
College of Dentistry in Al-Rass

1231 AH
49
Deanships
To promote the performance of its programs

and realize its different objectives, the
University took the initiative to apply for
permission to establish the Deanship of
Academic Development. Permission was
grantedThanks be to Allahwith Royal
Consent and Higher Education Council Decision
No. 12/38/1426.
The deanship aims to:
Unify the development path and

coordination
between
various
channels concerned with promoting
research and education;
Ensure the quality of the educational
process
through
continued
commitment to academic programs
and carried out with staff training
programs and a commitment to
scientific research;
Strive for superior academic
evaluation and accreditation by
cooperating with the necessary
institutions;
Make use of relevant technologies to
increase the quality of the
educational process and scientific
research;
Adhere to the scientific method and
an emphasis on furthering research
that will add to the prestige of the
University;
Brief the University administration
on the state of the University in the
fields of education, scientific
research and community service;
Prepare
special
reports
on
performance levels, as measured by
accredited criteria, in light of
Implement strategic plans as

required
by
the
changing
circumstances
surrounding
the
University;
Ensure the application of academic
and administrative rules and
regulations within the University;
Work to ensure the availability of
statistical data and information to
satisfy the needs of decision makers
at the University or other units in
need of this data;
Advocate strategic research and
studies that are concerned with
future planning and development
and
Recognize local and regional
changes, especially those related to
higher education.
The
deanship
embraces
the
development units and committees that are
concerned with different aspects of University
affairs. These committees are supervised by
distinguished professors who are interested in
various developmental aspects. Among the most
important of these units are the following:
1. The Unit for Skill Development

The unit strives for the development of
academic and administrative performance
within the University by holding training
sessions and workshops for all the University
affiliates, teaching staff members, lecturers and
demonstrators. The unit holds training sessions
in various fields in which trainers from both the
Kingdom and overseas participate. These
50
Deanships
Deanships of Academic
Development
comparative studies with local and

foreign universities;
Review the work of administrative
and financial units and work with
officials
to
eliminate
all
shortcomings and increase overall
performance;
training sessions are not restricted to Qassim

University affiliates; they are also available for
teaching staff members from other universities
and sectors.
2. The Unit of Administrative

Development
The unit aims to assist the university in
developing the strategic methods that will
provide the suitable techniques to improve the
performance of the university in two main areas
: administrative performance and future
financial performance .
The unit aims to explore ways to use modern

educational tools that emphasize individual
learning through technology. The unit provides a
means to those with special needs who cannot
commute to the University to pursue their
education. In these matters, the unit makes the
appropriate recommendations to decision
makers at the University.
4. The Unit of Prediction Studies

The unit is dedicated to strategic research and
studies that emphasize predictive planning and
development as well as the monitoring of local
and regional changes, especially those related to
higher education.
Deanship of Graduate Studies

The Deanship of Graduate Studies was
established in 2004 as an independent deanship
for graduate studies. The deanship undertook
the important task of supervising the graduate
program within the University in coordination
with other colleges. The program was developed
to provide ambitious Saudi students the
opportunity to pursue their education beyond
the university level and increase their academic
qualifications.
The deanship also oversees the
graduation ceremonies for all graduate students
in all colleges. In this regard, the deanship
oversaw the graduation of the first batch of
masters students from the College of
Agriculture and Veterinary Medicine in AY2004
2005.
The masters programs at the
University include the following specialties:
Arabic Language,
Fundamentals of Islam,
Holy Quran Studies,
History,
51
Deanships
3. Center of E-Learning and Distance

Learning
Sociology
and
Social
Services,
Business Administration,
Fundamentals of Education,
Animal Reproduction,
Islamic Studies,
The Prophets Sunnah (The
Prophets Way),
Faith,
Geography,
Veterinary Science,
Mathematics,
Teaching:
Ways
and
Methodology,
Islamic History,
Modern History,
Instructional Technology of
Education,
Curriculum of Instruction,
Poultry,
Economics,
Educational Psychology,
Computer Science,
Plant Protection and
Plant Production.

Registration
The Deanship of Admissions and
Registration is in charge of all admissions
procedures to the University. It has simplified
these procedures to the extent possible through
the use of advanced technology and a firm
commitment to the accuracy and privacy of
students academic and personal information.
Special attention is given to increasing students
awareness of their academic standing,
performance and overall well-being within the
program. The purpose of this is to allow
students to take a more active role in the
application process, be more informed on their
standing and better use electronic self-service

resources.
The deanship aims to
Work to ensure a seat at

the University for every
student who satisfies
admissions criteria;
Work to attract highcaliber students to the
University from both in
and outside the Qassim
region;
Ensure that students are
aware of the rules and
regulations related to
their
study
and
examinations;
Document
students
academic records and
continuously update them
electronically;
Work to develop and
adapt technology, so that
students can keep abreast
of their academic affairs
anywhere and at anytime;
Strive
to
distribute
students fees punctually
and without difficulty and
irregularities and
Document
students
graduation
procedures
smoothly
and
conveniently within the
time limit specified by the
University curriculum.
52
Deanships
The Deanship of Community Service

acts as an intermediary between the University
and all other sectors and institutions of the
community. Accordingly, the Deanship employs
the expertise, capabilities and resources
available at the University to offer scientific
diplomas and specialized training in a variety of
courses
in
science,
technology
and
management. The goal of this process is to
contribute to the satisfaction of community
needs and aspirations.
The deanship aims to
Serve students who were not

accepted in any of the University
departments, as well as other
members and institutions of the
community at large;
Strengthen
the
relationship
between the University and the
community and promote cultural,
technical
and
managerial
awareness for all community
members;
Provide students who were not
accepted in any of the University
colleges an opportunity to
continue their education and
acquire qualifications, enabling
them to compete in the labor
market, by offering a variety of
courses and specialized scientific
diplomas;
Satisfy the needs of the public and
private sectors by offering various
specialized short courses;
Organize and administer scientific
conferences and symposia with the
goal to exchange and transfer
experience and expertise in the
different areas of knowledge and
Strengthen University relationships

with all the public, private and
charity sectors of the community.
Deanship of Library Affairs

The Deanship of Library Affairs is one of
the fastest growing deanships at Qassim
University and was created after the issue of the
High Royal Decree authorizing the establishment
of the University. The libraries in existence at
the two former branches of
King Saud University and Imam Mohamed Ibn
Saud Islamic University were under the
administration of their relevant colleges.

Technically, they were under the administration
of the Deanship of Library Affairs at Imam
University, but administratively they were under
the supervision of one of the supporting
deanships.. The deanship began its duties using
the material and human resources available at
the College of Business and Economics. With the
completion of its permanent location, the
deanship finally moved in 2005 to the building
of the General Administration, with its
administrative offices occupying a section of the
Central Library. Since then, it has administered
the former libraries of the University.
The Consultative Committee of

the Deanship
A permanent Consultative Committee
for the Deanship of Library Affairs was formed
and includes deanship officials and experienced
university teaching staff members whose views
and proposals might benefit the performance of
the libraries and their activities. This was carried
out with the consent of his Excellency, the
53
Deanships
Deanship of Community Service
Deanship of Scientific Research

The Deanship of Scientific Research
provides an important role in community service
and in transforming the community through the
creation of a highly qualified workforce. This is
achieved through the use of research and
consultation centers located within the different
colleges of the University.
The University aims to create an
environment in which public and private sectors
of the community work together with research
and consultancy centers at the appropriate
colleges. The goal is to align the University with
the national strategy of using higher education
to transform the traditional economy of Saudi
Arabia into a knowledge-based economy. To
realize this strategic objective, the Deanship of
Scientific Research directs applied and
consultative research at the University in a way
that serves developmental needs and fosters
cooperation between the University and the
public and private sectors.
In a world characterized by the
universality of knowledge, constant change and
the availability of managerial, technical and
scientific experiences and their supporting
means, the deanships goal is to realize the
following objectives:
To provide appropriate plans and

strategies for entering the market of
scientific studies, applied research and
development and consultative services
and offer training in the University
centers and on the job,
To market the considerable scientific
apparatuses available to the University
and devote its resources to the service
and development of different sectors of

the national economy,
To improve services and production
methods in the public and private
sectors by applying the scientific
method that is conducive to
development and innovation,
To strengthen the University links with
the public and private sectors in the
field of scientific research by
conducting specialized studies and
providing varied consultative services,
To offer new methods and channels for
financing research projects at the
University by the public and private
sectors and encourage monetary and
service donations by individuals and
institutions for this purpose,
To coordinate with various commercial,
industrial,
engineering,
service,
agricultural and other sectors in the
region to synchronize the needs of
these sectors with the academic,
research, consultative and study
programs at the University and
To initiate agreements
with
the
external
beneficiaries to ensure
the representation of the
University
in
the
companies or commercial
projects it establishes or
in which it participates to
preserve its rights.
Deanship of Student Affairs

The Deanship of Student Affairs is one
of several supporting deanships at Qassim
University. This deanship is concerned with
serving students in all non-educational aspects
of University life. Through its services and
activities, the Deanship provides opportunities
for students to practice their hobbies and better
use their leisure time.
54
Deanships
University Rector, in Administrative Decision No.

479.
1. Administrative Affairs Unit,

2. Financial Affairs Unit,
3. Directorate of Student Activities,
4. Directorate
Guidance,
of
Orientation
and
5. Directorate of Food Services,

6. Student Fund Directorate,
7. Scholarship Sponsorship and Foreign
Student Unit and
8. Female Students Transportation Unit.
Deanship of Quality Assurance and

Accreditation
to both ensure and promote the quality of the

Universitys workings and operations and monitor the
effectiveness of the Universitys internal quality
assurance.
Deanship of Faculty and Staff

Affairs
This Deanship of Faculty and Staff
Affairs is responsible for recruiting employees
for the Universitys posts and positions in
accordance with civil service regulations and
procedures. It selects the personnel for each
post and determines the appropriate salary and
work conditions in addition to all other relevant
procedures, such as appointment, promotion,
transfer and remunerations.
With increased expansion in its work
and range of activities and tasks, the
administration was upgraded from control
under a junior administration to the present
deanship status. The deanship is the main group
overseeing employee interests and affairs, has a
wide range of authority and assumes sole
responsibility for the application and
interpretation of University regulations and their
implementation.
As the University has expanded
academically and administratively, the range of
responsibilities of the deanship has also
widened, indicating its increasing role in running
the Universitys affairs in the near future.
The goal of the Deanship of Quality Assurance and

Accreditation is to create an atmosphere of excellence
and creativity within university academia. The
deanships mission is to improve both the quality of
the academic and the administrative performance of
the University to achieve its strategic goals. The Deanship of Information and
deanship conducts checks to determine whether its
Technology
goals are being realized. The objectives of the
deanship are to manage the Universitys quality review The Deanship of Information and Technology
process (which ensures the quality of procedures and
works to achieve the following goals:
practices underlying undergraduate and graduate
learning, teaching, assessment and support), provide
1. To provide statistical services in studies
advice and guidance to both academic and nonand research in and outside the
academic departments, coordinate activities designed
University;
55
Deanships
The deanship also provides direction

and guidance to students and helps them
overcome any difficulties that may adversely
affect their study. The deanship emphasizes
aiding the growth of a mature and productive
student body and continually strives to make its
services more widely available so that students
can take advantage of the available resources.
The deanship includes the following directorates
and units:
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
To provide electronic publication

services
using
state-of-the-art
techniques;
To construct an interactive site on the
Internet by building a communication
network at the regional level and
equipping it with the necessary
technical services to furnish fresh
information in different fields;
To provide digital content in the
different disciplines to fulfill the needs
of students and researchers;
computer technologies, which facilitate easy

and convenient communication of information
to students. The center also offers learning
opportunities to students whose special
circumstances do not allow them to attend
regular classes at the University. The center
evaluates all prospects and possibilities for elearning and distance education and makes
appropriate recommendations to decision
makers at the University.
To propose and construct databases

suited to the nature of scientific
programs and educational activities
provided by the University;
To provide training services on
applications pertaining to the fields of
computer science, statistics and
information to increase the efficiency
of University affiliates, students and
any other interested parties;
To make the tools of modern electronic
management
available
to
all
departments and administrations of
the University and design and develop
systems and programs suited to
university needs and
To make maximum use of information
and communication technology and the
voluminous and ever increasing
amount of electronic information on
the Internet and other sources of
electronic information and adapt them
to benefit researchers and students.
Deanships
2.
Center for E-Learning and

Distance Education
The Center for E-Learning and Distance
Education aims to provide ways to use modern
learning methods based on individual and selfeducation through the use of
56
Colleges
57
3. To create health awareness in the

community.
4. To conduct scientific research that will lead
to find appropriate solutions to health
problems.
5.To produce highly skilled staff in various
health disciplines through post-graduation
program.
College of Applied Health

Sciences in Rass
Vision:
To achieve excellence in 'Health Education" and
to create distinct faculties at par with national
and international standard to support the
sustainable development in Qassim region and
to extend cooperation in raising the general
awareness
of
community
health.
Mission:
To provide a conducive and educated
environment for preparation of national health
education cadres to contribute in covering the
needs of the labor market, and the provision of
community services. It will also facilitates the
applied research for elevating local health
community standard and contribute to the
growth of knowledge in finding solutions
regarding health problems.
Aims:
1. To produce qualified graduates with high
level of knowledge and skills in various health
disciplines.
2. To contribute in filling needs of labour market
of workers in all health disciplines.
It came into existence under the name

College of Health Sciences for boys at AlRass", in the academic year of 1994-1995H.
Originally ,it was owned by the " Ministry of
Health' which awarded diploma certificates in
health disciplines of nursing, anaesthesia ,
,nutrition ,clinical laboratory , dental assistant,
pharmacy and operation room techniques.
The cool.ege was taken over by the 'Ministry
of Higher Education ' under the University of
Qassim.
The
University
issued
a
recommendation at its first meeting in the
academic year of 2007-2008 held on
21/10/2008 A.D. to restructure the College .
Since then , it is known as College of Applied
Health Sciences consisting of the following
branches
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Clinical Nutrition.
Diagnostic Radiology.
Medical devices.
Oral and dental health.
Dental Technology.
Students have been accepted in the preparatory

year since the academic year of 2008-2009H and
will be joining the faculty in beginning of the
academic year 2009-2010H, according to the
new structure.
Degrees Offered
- Bachelor
Programs
58
College of Applied Health Sciences in Rass
About:
24- Mohammad Rashid Alwatban, Teaching

Assistant, M.Sc
Faculty Members:
Abdullah Saleh AL-Rethieaa,
Ph.D.
Assistant Prof.
25- Fahad Zaid Almutairi, Teaching Assistant,

B.Sc
26-Shaher Mosleh Almutairi, Technician, M.Sc
2- Ibrahim Suliman AL-Naser, Assistant Prof.

Ph.D.
Programs
3- Alaa El-din Ali Fahmy Riad, Assistant Prof.

Ph.D.
BA Degree Program : Clinical Nutrition
4- Mohamed Mhmmoud Elbotiny. Assistant

Prof. Ph.D.
Study Plan:
5-Ibrahim Abdelrazig Ahmed, Assistant Prof.

Ph.D.
Level-1
Course
Code
Course Title
Credit
IC 101
Islamic Culture (1)
ARAB 101
Arabic Language
9-Alaa El-din Mohammed Kamila, Lecturer, M.Sc
HSCI 111
General Biology
10-Naseem Mohammad Al-Shwaiyat, Lecturer,

M.Sc
HSCI 112
General Chemistry
11-Yazan Hamdan Jammal, Lecturer,M.Sc
HSCI 121
Health Care &

Vocational Safety
HSCI 122
Biostatistics
HSCI 131
Medical Terminology
Course
Code
Course Title
Credit
6-Mohammad Mujtaba Ahmad, Assistant Prof.

Ph.D.
7-Ahmed Mohammed. Ezzedin Ali, Lecturer.
M.Sc
8-Ahmed Ali Yousif, Lecturer, M.Sc
12-Ali Saleh AL-Abdallat, Lecturer M.A

13-Yahya Mahmoud Ali Obeidat, Lecturer, M.A
14-Issa Salim Yousef Gharaibeh, Lecturer, M.A
15-Abdul Qayyum khan, Lecturer, M.A
16-Hossam Farouk Moawad Ali, Lecturer, M.Sc
17-Waleed Khalaf Almutiry, Teaching Assistant,
M.Sc
18-Omar Abdulaziz algobaisi, Teaching Assistant,
M.Sc
Level-2
IC 102
Islamic Culture (2)
19-Abdullah Jeza Albalaji, Teaching Assistant,

M.Sc
HSCI 113
Basic Biochemistry
20-Fahad Suliman Alharbi, Teaching Assistant,

M.Sc
HSCI 114
21-Abdulmohsin
Assistant, M.Sc
Principles of
Microbiology
HSCI 115
Principles of Anatomy
HSCI 116
General Physiology
HSCI 123
Emergency & First Aid
22-Abdulgadir
Assistant, M.Sc
Minour
Zaid
Alruitae,
Almutairi,
Teaching
Teaching
23-Bader Ibrahim Alharbi, Teaching Assistant,

M.Sc
Level-3
59
BA Degree Program : Clinical Nutrition
Course Title
Islamic Culture
(3)
CNUT 211
Basic Nutrition
HSCI 212
Basic Organic
Chemistry
HSCI 217
IC 103
Patient
Counseling
Credit
CNUT 312
Assessment of
Nutritional
Status
CNUT 313
Nutrition During
Life Cycle
General
Pathology
CNUT 314
Community
Nutrition
CNUT 221
Food
Microbiology
HSCI 1XX
Elective College
CNUT 222
Food Sciences
CNUT 2XX
Department
Elective
HSCI 232
Ethics of Health
Professions
XXXXXX
Free Course
CNUT 2XX
Department
Elective
4
Course Code
Level-4
Course Code
Course Title
Credit
ARAB 103
Arabic Language
Islamic culture
(4)
CNUT 213
Nutritional
Epidemiology
CNUT 219
Nutritional
Biochemistry
CNUT 223
Food Hygiene
HSCI 1XX
College Elective
CNUT 2XX
Department
Elective
IC 104
Level-5
Course Code
CNUT311
Level-6
Course Title
Credit
HSCI 311
Vitamins &
Minerals
CNUT 315
Maternal &
Pediatric
Nutrition
CNUT 316
Food Services
Management in
Hospitals
CNUT 317
Dietary
Requirements &
Meals Planning
CNUT 331
Food Chemistry
HSCI 1XX
College Elective
CNUT 2XX
Department
Elective
Level-7
Course Title
Nutrition
Education &
Credit
Course Code
Course Title
Credit
60
Course Code
Computer
Applications in
Nutrition
CNUT 411
Clinical Nutrition
in Diseases (1)
HSCI 411
Food & Drug

Interaction
CNUT 412
Malnutrition
Diseases
HSCI 431
Research
Methodology
CNUT 2XX
Department
Elective
Free Course
XXXXXX
This course will introduce, at an entry level, the

understanding of various cell structures and
functions, eukaryotes vs. prokaryotes,
classification of live organisms, introduction to
the genetics and introduction to human biology
including, introduction to human physiology,
anatomy, and introduction to human
embryology.
HSCI 112 General Chemistry (3h)
This course will help students to understand
basic chemical concepts and their application to
chemical sciences and appreciate the
importance of chemistry to health sciences and
provide a sound background for further studies.
HSCI 121 Health Care & Vocational Safety (2h)
Level-8
Course Code
Course Title
Credit
HSCI 334
Communication
Skills
CNUT 414
Clinical Nutrition
in Diseases (2)
CNUT 415
Enteral &
Paraenteral
Nutrition
CNUT 416
Clinical Practice
CNUT 417
Seminar in
Clinical Nutrition
CNUT 2XX
Department
Elective
XXXXXX
Free Course
Health Care Management is a broad based

educational program designed to develop
undergraduate students in managerial and
supervisory skills necessary for careers in health
and medical care facilities and agencies.
HSCI 122 Biostatistics (3h)
This course is designed to provide students with
a basic understanding of biostatistics. The
course cover descriptive statistics with concepts
of dispersion, central tendency measurements.
Graphic and tabular displays are also covered.
Simple inferential statistics involving probability,
sampling, confidence intervals and tests of
significance are presented.
HSCI 131 Medical Terminology (2h)
This course introduces the foundations of the
language of medicine and develops medical
vocabulary through the study of the structures,
functions, diagnostic procedures, pathology, and
treatment procedures of the body system.
HSCI 113 Basic Biochemistry (3h)
Course Descriptions
HSCI 111 General Biology (4h)
Biochemistry, is an advanced overview of

general biochemistry. A study of protein
structure and their physical properties; how
61
HSCI 331
these properties relate to catalysis, regulation of

catalysis and metabolic chemistry. with respect
to their relationship to physiological conditions.
emergency and early preparedness

management of disasters and crowd.
and
CNUT 211 Basic Nutrition (2h)

HSCI 114 Principles of Microbiology (4h)
HSCI 115 Principles of Anatomy (3h)

The Human Anatomy course involves the study
of the structure of the human body including a
gross and microscopic study of cell, tissues, and
organ systems listed in the course outline. All
major human organ systems are completed by
the completion of the Spring Human Physiology
Course.
HSCI 116 General Physiology (3h)
The purpose of this course is to study the basics
of physiology that aid in the applying of clinical
nutrition. The course covers the functions of
various systems and organs in the body and
studies the cell, tissues, blood vessels, the
digestive system, the endocrine system and the
nervous system. This will help students to
understand the abnormal changes in tissue and
organs in several diseased states.
HSCI 123 Emergency & First Aid (2h)
The course introduce students to skills of basic
life support which is needed by any health
professional in addition this course will
introduce first aids and basic response to
HSCI 212 Basic Organic Chemistry (3h)

Organic chemistry is the study of compounds
that originate in living systems; therefore, it is
recognized as an essential ingredient in the
education of scientists in a wide range of fields,
particularly the life sciences. The major foci of
the course are, understand the reactivity of
organic compounds, to appreciate the role of
structure in chemical identity and to apply
reactivity and structure to the understanding of
organic molecule function.
HSCI 217 General Pathology (2h)
General Pathology focuses on the fundamental
cellular and tissue responses to pathologic
stimuli. The course will introduce the student to
basic concepts of cellular and tissue alterations
common to all processes of disease. including:
cell injury ,adaptation and cell death;
inflammation
and
repair;
fluid
and
hemodynamic derangements. The components
of the innate and acquired divisions of the
immune
system,
including
pathological
developments
(hypersensitivity,
immunodeficiency, autoimmunity) In addition,
students are expected to learn modern concepts
in cancer causation, its terminology and
morphology as well as the biologic behavior of
benign and malignant neoplasms
CNUT 221 Food Microbiology (3h)
62
The course is designed to introduce the students

to the principles of microbiology, and the impact
microorganisms have on human health and the
environment. It gives an overview of microbial
structure, morphology, classification, genetics,
nutrition, growth, and metabolism unique to
microbes. An overview of important aspects of
Virology , Mycology , Parasitology and
Immunology will be covered. The practical part
will cover practical laboratory techniques,
methods and equipment used to investigate and
identify microorganisms.
Introduction to the science of nutrition Nutrients ( carbohydrate, proteins, lipids,

vitamins, minerals and water) - Functions,
sources and body needs of nutrients - balanced
diet - Digestion, absorption and metabolism of
macronutrient - food energy and its
determination and estimation of body energy
needs - Malnutrition diseases.
CNUT 222 Food Sciences (2h)

This course studies the physical, microbiological,
and chemical makeup of food. The students may
develop ways to process, preserve, package, or
store food ,according to industry and
government specifications and regulations. The
course also stresses what are the beneficial and
detrimental changes that occur in food during
processing, storage and utilization.
HSCI 232 Ethics of Health Professions (2h)
The course is designs to allow the student to be
familiar with skills needed for the practice of his
career in modern day dynamic health care
environment . These skills encompass legal and
ethical responsibilities ,political, economic,
social, environmental and professional issues.
CNUT 213 Nutritional Epidemiology (2h)
This course provides public health graduate
students with an understanding of the
theoretical and practical considerations in the
conduct of epidemiologic studies related to
nutrition. More specifically, the course focuses
on the conduct of epidemiologic studies of diet,
nutrition, and chronic disease.
CNUT 219 Nutritional Biochemistry (4h)
Study of the role of nutrients in the human body
at the cellular level and in metabolism.
Metabolism of macronutrients: carbohydrates,
lipids and protein. Metabolism of selected
micronutrients (vitamins and minerals).
Integration and regulation of their metabolism.
Production of energy in the cell.
CNUT 223 Food Hygiene (3h)
Biological and chemical hazards in food that

result from improper processing, packaging,
handling and storage; cleaning of food plant
equipments
and
facilities
including
characteristics of soil on equipment surfaces,
cleaning
compounds,
cleaninplace,
cleanoutofplace,
sanitizers
and
their
characteristics, and good manufacturing
practices.
CNUT311 Nutrition
Counseling (3h)
Education
&
Patient
The course includes applying communication

skills in the planning and implementing of
nutrition education programs. The course
includes the important of nutrition education in
improving the dietary habits of individuals to
protect them from diseases, and also to the
methods of dietary counselling for patients,
healthy individuals, small groups and
communities.
CNUT 312 Assessment of Nutritional Status (4h)
Theory and analysis of methods for nutritional
status assessment in community, ambulatory,
and acute- and long-term care settings.
CNUT 313 Nutrition During Life Cycle (2h)
The primary purpose of this course is to help
you understand the role of nutrition and
changes in nutritional requirements that occur
during the life cycle in humans. To adequately
understand these changes, it is necessary to
study the biochemical, physiological, and
psychological
processes
that
influence
nutritional needs.
CNUT 314 Community Nutrition (2h)
The student in this course will be introduced to
the nutrition problem in Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia, the reason behind it and the methods to
solve it with respect to the society believes and
habits. The course also covers the study of
implementing,
designing,
evaluating,
63
This course is designed to give students an

understanding of the relationships of
microorganisms to foodborne illness and
intoxications, food quality, food spoilage, food
preservation and bioprocessing
HSCI 311 Vitamins & Minerals (2h)
observe, manipulate, and explore model food

systems. The emphasis is on the major food
components (water, lipids, proteins, and
carbohydrates) and their behavior under
conditions of particular relevance to food
processing.
Mechanisms and Interactions of Vitamins and

Minerals in Cellular Metabolism; Scientific Bases
of Nutrient Requirements during the Life Cycle.
HSCI 331 Computer Applications in Nutrition

(3h)
CNUT 315 Maternal & Pediatric Nutrition (2h)
Applications and evaluation of computer

software tools for nutritional analysis and food
service management.
Principles and application of nutrition for

healthy mothers, infants, and children with
emphasis on current research related to normal
growth and development.
CNUT 316 Food Services Management in
Hospitals (3h)
The course covers the principles of
administration, human resources management,
budgeting and contracts. Also an introductory to
food services management and kitchen
operation, which include receiving raw
materials, storing, monitoring equipments. The
course provides a general knowledge of the
health specification which needs to be provided
to guarantee quality control.
CNUT 317 Dietary Requirements & Meals
Planning (4h)
Dietary standards -Food composition tables and
their use -Adequate diet - Use of food exchange
system and food groups for planning adequate
diet - Estimation of human energy requirements
- methods of evaluating diet and nutritional
status.
CNUT 331 Food Chemistry (3h)
This is an integrated lecture/lab/recitation
course applying theories of molecular reactivity
to model food systems. Lectures focus on the
molecular bases of chemical phenomena that
dictate the behavior of foods. Laboratories and
recitations provide opportunities for students to
CNUT 411 Clinical Nutrition in Diseases (1) (4h)

In this practical course, the student learns the
skills required to work in a hospital as a
dietician. The course also focuses on planning
treatment and follow-up patients for the
following cases: liver, pancreases, gallbladder
diseases and other gastrointestinal diseases.
HSCI 411 Food & Drug Interaction (3h)
This course will
Recognize the effect of
food/nutrients on medication kinetics, discuss
the effect of medications on food/nutrient
kinetics and explore what to do about specific
problems and Identify common drugs that
require counseling.
CNUT 412 Malnutrition Diseases (2h)
Presents major nutritional problems that
influence
the
health,
survival,
and
developmental capacity of populations in
developing societies. Covers approaches
implemented at the household, community,
national, and international levels to improve
nutritional status. Explores the degree to which
malnutrition can be prevented or reduced prior
to achieving full economic development through
targeted public and private sector interventions
that address the causes of malnutrition.
HSCI 431 Research Methodology (2h)
64
management and improvement of nutrition

programs. Also the course concentrate in
common nutrition problems in the community
and how to prevent .
This course will introduce participants to the

characteristics and various approaches to
designing and conducting qualitative research
projects in nutrition and health services
research. Students will gain hands-on
experience in various qualitative methods and
analysis techniques while carrying out a
research project related to their area of interest.
HSCI 334 Communication Skills (2h)
The student in this course will prepare a

comprehensive study on a subject related to
individual and community nutritional issues,
utilizing his previous knowledge which he
acquired through his studies. The student will be
using modern technology in getting the
information and presenting it. The study will be
presented and discussed with the faculty
members and other students.
This course introduces the students to the basic

concepts of effective human communication. It
focuses on the development of communication
skills and the basic components of the
communication process. It provides a
comprehensive coverage of major issues
including organizational conflict, leadership,
values, changes, diversity, technology and
ethical behavior, offering the students the
introduction to the current field of
organizational communication.
CNUT 414 Clinical Nutrition in Diseases (2) (4h)
This course utilizes the knowledge of the
Nutrition Care Process in the study of disease
states that affect nutrition status and require
the use of specialized nutrition (modified diets
and/or nutrition support) as adjunct therapy to
other medical, and surgical th. Understanding of
the affect that each disease or altered health
state has on nutrition requires basic knowledge
of normal physiology, nutritional requirements,
metabolism, digestion and absorption.
CNUT 415 Enteral & Paraenteral Nutrition (3h)
Principles and skills for prarental and enteral
nutrition
(nutrition
support)
practice:
indications, calculations, formulas and solutions,
access,
complications,
and
ethical
considerations. Understanding of inflammatory
metabolism and basic critical care monitoring
and interventions.
CNUT 417 Seminar in Clinical Nutrition (2h)
65
5 - Creativity: Creating organizational climate

that lead to the creative thinking and innovative
behavior.
6 - Teamwork: College established a culture of
teamwork
thinking
and
behavior.
7 - Scientific freedom: the college encourages
scientific exploration practices and opening up
and dealing with others.
College Goals:
-
Vision:
Leadership in the field of Applied Medical
Sciences and excellence in teaching and
scientific research to achieve what meets the
aspirations of the community.
Mission:
College seeks to leadership in providing medical
services and the Academy through the lesson
plans with high efficiency and quality of research
unique and effective medical services in the field
of Applied Medical Sciences, which is a
significant addition to the health services system
Matrix of values:
The matrix values of the College as an extension
of the values of Qassim University are as
follows:
1 - Justice: The College seeks to achieve the
elements of justice and equal opportunity and
fairness in dealing with everyone.
2 - Honesty: faithfully perform the work and
commitment
to
professional
ethics.
3 - Transparency: We commit ourselves to
disclose the transactions and procedures and
strengthening
the
requirements
of
accountability
and
integrity.
4 - Quality: we apply the highest standards of
quality in all work, including distinguishes
outputs and services.
Rehabilitation and graduation of

cadres able to meet the needs of
medical care in the community.
To contribute in solving the problems
of society and the environment by
scientific research
Preparation of cadres specialized in
medical applied sciences with high
standard of excellence.
Participation in the dissemination of
health awareness in various disciplines
of health of individuals and society.
Contribute to the development of the
services in health disciplines carried
out by the College
Preparation of the specialized cadre in
applied medical science with a distinct
standard.
Exchange
of
experiences
and
knowledges with the corresponding
colleges within and outside the
Kingdom.
Contribute to the development of the
medical assistance professions boards
and support their plans and future
programs.
Offering advice and carry out applied
research linked to health problems in
the Kingdom.
Historical review
The establishment of the College of Medical
Applied Sciences was based upon the royal
decision issued by the Royal Majesty the
Custodian of the Two Holy Mosques, Prime
66
COLLEGE OF APPLIED MEDICAL SCIENCES
COLLEGE OF APPLIED MEDICAL

SCIENCES
Duration of Study in this college is five years

including the preparatory year.
Before
graduation, students will undergo a full calendar
year of hospital training.
College admission Terms

Students can be accepted to the College after
the termination of university preparatory year.
-
Department of Medical Laboratory

Department of Radiologic Techniques
Department of Medical Rehabilitation
Department of Clinical Nutrition
Department of Human Health
Department of Medical Equipments
The Department of Medical Laboratory started
in the 2006/2007 academic year. The
department of Optometry started in the
academic year 2007/2008. The department of
radiologic techniques started in the academic
year 2009/2010. Now the college preparing for
the opening of the remaining departments as
steps prepared for each department:
About the college:

The College of Applied Medical Sciences was
established by the Royal decision, due to the
unprecedented advancements in the medical
and the diagnostic sciences and due to the ever
increasing size and capacity of the health care
institutions in Saudi Arabia. The advancements
of medical sciences dictated the need of
graduates who can support the existing medical
programs and systems.
The college's role, in the Society, will extend to
add to the health and safety of the Saudi
Society. Also, the college will continue to include
consultative and research facilities. The latter
will be used in contribution to the related health
research in the Kingdom.
obtain a cumulative average of at
least 3.25
Pass the fitness exam.
Pass a personal interview.
Seat provide inclusive
The General Structure of the Study Plan in the
College:
Level
Name
Credit hours
First
Core program
19
Second
Core program
19
From 3rd to
8th
Medical
Laboratory
102
From 3rd to
10th
Optometry
142
From 3rd to
8th
Radiological
Technology
102
Degrees:
B.sc.
Programs:
B.Sc. in Medical Laboratories
B.Sc. in Radiologic Technology
(OD) Optometry Doctor Degree
Department of Medical Laboratories:

67
Minister and Chairman of the Board of Higher

Education may God protect him - No.
(12/35/1426 ) . On 22/4/2005. The impact of
this historical decision will be a covering of the
multiple and increasing needs in health field and
keeping up with technical development in this
vital and important field in the country. The
college has the following departments, which
have been approved by the Board of Higher
Education
In order to get bachelor degree in

medical laboratory sciences the student must
completed successfully 140 CH including
university`s
requirements,
college`s
requirements, department`s requirement as
well as completion of the internship year.
options including: Hospitals (private or

governmental), teaching/lecturing, research
institutions, medical laboratory clinics, and
military sections.
Faculty of Medical Laboratories:

Prof. Dr. Salah Mesalhy
Careers opportunity:
Prof. Dr. AbdulRahman
The graduates of this department will

have a vast market with a wide variety of
Almehana
Female Section
Dr. Mohammad A. Issa
Dr. Entesar Abdulfaraj
Assistan Prof.
Dr. Varsha Shahane
Associate Prof.
Associate Prof.
Dr. Lizzy Sunny
Assistant Prof.
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Amel Makawi
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Mohammad A. Alzohairy Assistant Prof.
Dr. Sarah Ali
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Arshad Rahmani
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Surya Kantha
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Mohsin Shaikh
Assistant Prof.
Miss. Sarah Abu Alqasem Lecturer
Dr. Naser Aleragy
Assistant Prof.
Miss. Nada Khalaf Allah
Dr. Habeeb Ali
Assistant Prof.
Study Plan (Medical Laboratories):
Dr. Habeeb Khadri
Assistant Prof.
Level 1
Associate Prof.
Dr. Abdelmarouf H Mohieldein
Dr. Adel Alghanim
Mr. Modether Shehadeh
Lecturer
Mr. Hisam Wagi'allh
Lecturer
Mr. Ali Yousef
Lecturer
Mr. Majthob Abbas
Lecturer
Mr. Margoob Hassan
Lecturer
Mr. Tareq Ayub
Lecturer
Mr. Alaa' Eldien Baker
Lecturer
Mr. Raijo Yaa'kub
Lecturer
Mr. Altaieb Idris
Lecturer
Code
No.
Course Title
IC
101
Lecturer
Credit Hours
LT
LB
CR
Islamic
Studies (1)
ARAB
101
Language
Skills
BHS
111
Human
Biology
PHYS
112
General
Physics
CHEM
General
PreReq.
68
Requirement for graduation:
Chemistry
HLTH
121
Medical
Terminology
HLTH
122
Health Care
System and
Vocational
Safety
Total: 19 Credit Hours

Level 2
Code
No.
Course Title
IC
102
Credit Hours
PreReq.
L
T
L
B
C
R
Islamic
Studies (2)
101
IC
ANAT
114
Principles of
Anatomy
111
BHS
PHSL
115
Principles of
Physiology
111
BHS
CHE
M
116
Organic
Chemistry
113
Che
m
MDL
117
Principles of
Medical
Microbiolog
y
HLTH
123
Medical
Profession
Ethics
HLTH
124
Biostatistics
111
BHS
Credit
Hours
C
R
Islamic
Studies
(3)
ARA
B
103
Arabic
Writing
HLT
H
225
Emergenc
y Health
Care
122 Hlth
+114
Anat
CHE
M
120
Analytical
Chemistry
114Anat
,
115Phsl,
116Che
m,
117MDL
ANA
T
251
Histology
114Anat
,
115Phsl,
116Che
m,
117MDL
MDL
261
Introducto
ry
Immunolo
gy
114Anat
,
115Phsl,
116Che
m,
117MDL
MDL
---
College
Elective Group 1
101 IC
116
CHEM

Level 4
Level 3
Course
Title
L
B
IC
103
122
Hlth
Code
No.
L
T
Pre-Req.
Cod
e
No.
Course Title
Credit Hours
L
T
L
B
C
R
PreReq
.
69
113
Islamic Studies
(4)
MD
L
252
General
Pathology
MD
L
241
Medical
Microbiology
MD
L
253
Histotechnolog
y
MD
L
233
Medical
Biochemistry
MD
L --
College
Elective Group 2
Electron
Microscopy
253
MDL
MD
L
334
Clinical
Biochemistry
233
MDL
MD
L
344
Clinical
Bacteriology
241
MDL
MD
L
345
Clinical
Parasitology
241
MDL
++
+
Free Course
Total: 18 Credit Hour

Level 6

Level 5
Cod
e
No.
MD
L
355
Credit
Hours
Course Title
PreReq.
L
T
L
B
C
R
MD
L
362
Hematology
MD
L
453
Pathophysiol
ogy
MD
L
335
Body Fluids
Analysis
MD
L
Blood Bank
Course Title
MD
L
346
Pharmacolo
gy and
Antimicrobia
l
Credit Hours
L
T
L
B
C
R
251An
at
261M
DL
Cod
e
No.
252
MDL
334
MDL
261MDL
+262MD
PreReq.
241MD
L+
242MD
L or
243MD
L
MD
L
347
Clinical
Virology
241
MDL
MD
L
348
Clinical
Mycology
241
MDL
363
MD
L
356
L
Histopatholog
y
251MDL
+
252MDL
70
IC
104
Code
No.
MDL
457
MDL
464
MDL
436
MDL
---
MDL
---
Hlth
---
HLT
H
428
Level 8
Course
Title
Credit
Hours
Pre-Req.
L
T
L
B
C
R
Cellular
and
Molecular
Pathology
Clinical
Immunolo
gy and
Hematolog
y
Analytical
Laboratory
Automatio
n
Dept.
Elective
Course I
Dept.
Elective
Course II
College
Elective Group 3
Epidemiolo
gy and
Infection
Control
242MDL
or
243MDL
+
354MDL
+
356MDL
363MDL
335MDL
+
346MDL
70 % of
course
curriculu
m
70 % of
course
curriculu
m
Co. Req.
with 436
MDL
344MDL,
345MDL,
347MDL,
348MDL
Cod
e
No.
Course
Title
MD
L
437
Credit Hours
Pre-Req.
L
T
L
B
C
R
Applied
Clinical
Biochemist
ry
436 MDL
MD
L
449
Applied
Clinical
Microbiolo
gy
344MDL,
345MDL,
347MDL,
348MDL
MD
L
471
Case
Study
425Hlth
OR
426Hlth
MD
L
472
Graduation
Project
425Hlth
OR
426Hlth
MD
L --
Dept.
Elective
Course III
70 % of
course
curriculu
m
MD
L --
Dept.
Elective
Course IV
70 % of
course
curriculu
m
++
+
Free
Course
Course Description:
Course symbol: BHS
111
Course Title:
Human Biology
Level: First
Credit hours: 4(3+1)
71
Level 7
Prerequisite:
Preparatory Year
Mendelian genetics, Principles of embryology,

main human tissues, principles of anatomy and
physiology of human body systems
-Theory lectures
- Laboratory sessions
Evaluation of students:
- Semester Examination: Written and Practical
50%
- Final Examination:
50%
By the end of this course, student should be

able to know:
Reference book designated:
- The cell as a functional unit, structure, and the

main aspects of cell specialization,
Human Biology: Concepts and Current Issues.

Michael D. Johnson
cytology and classification of live organisms.

- The transport mechanisms across the cell
membrane
- The main principles of Physiology
Human Biology. Mader Sylvia , 7

edition, 2002.
Human Biology. Chiras DD
th
Course symbol: PHYS

112
Level: First
- Cellular processes needed for live
Course Title:
PHYSICS FOR
MEDICAL
SCIENCES
- Biochemical basis of generating energy
Prerequisite:
- The cellular division and multiplication

- DNA and RNA, formation.
- DNA and the genetic code.
- Spermatogenesis Oogenesis in human

- Fertilization and basic embryology
Aim of the course
- Introduction to specialized anatomical

structures
To emphasize the importance of the process of

scientific investigation as a means of solving
problems in everyday life;
- Hormonal regulation of vital functions

- Neuronal regulation of vital functions
Microscopy and tissue preparation methods,
staining, cell structure, organelle function, cell
division, nucleic acids, cellular genetics,
To contribute to the pupils general education

by helping to make sense of the physical
environment through scientific inquiry;
subject;
72

functions,
eukaryotes
vs.
prokaryotes,
embryology.
To develop the skills necessary to find solutions

to scientific problems;
To understand that scientific ideas are
developed within a contemporary and historical
context.
To develop positive attitudes towards physics,
science in general and the environment.
This course is designed specifically for students
enrolled in the College of Applied Medical
Sciences, which include departments such as
medical laboratory, optometry, medical
radiation techniques, and physiotherapy. The
course includes experiments that are direct
applications of concepts covered in the
theoretical component of the course. fluid
dynamics, thermal properties of materials,
electrical properties of materials, optics and
waves. And radiations
Viscosity measurement
Properties and sensation of sound
Optics and laser
Heat and thermal expansion
Heat Equivalent
Optical properties of materials
(Snells Law)
DC Measurements and the concept
of E-filed.
Interference of Electromagnetic
Waves.
The Spectrum of Hydrogen Atom
Radiation Detection and
Measurements
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
- Discussion
- Practical sessions
Semester examination
50%
Final Examination
50%
References
College physics Serway R. and J.
Faughn
- Physics in Biology and Medicine, Third
Edition (Complementary Science) by
Paul Davidovits
- Physics of the Human Body (Biological
and Medical Physics, Biomedical
Engineering) by Irving P. Herman
- Introduction to Radiological Physics and
Radiation Dosimetry by Frank H. Attix
- Any recommended text books by the
lecturer
- General Chemistry , Ebbing DD, latest Ed.
-
- General Chemistry, Hill et al. Latest Ed.

- Virtual Chemistry Online
Course symbol:
CHEM-113
Level: First
Course Title:
General Chemistry
Prerequisite:
Preparatory Year
Course Outline:
General concepts, chemical calculations,
molecular weight and chemical reactions in
aqueous solutions, energy and its
transformation, chemical bonds and chemical
reactions and the cyclic table, thermal
chemistry, properties of substances and
attraction forces between molecules, physical
properties of solutions, chemical equilibrium
and neutralization of acids and alkalines in
aqueous solutions, chemical mobility.
Evaluation Outline
73
To develop experimental and investigative

abilities;

able to:
50%
- Describe the atomic structure and define

atomic number, mass number and
Reading List:
- General Chemistry , Ebbing DD, latest Ed.
isotopes
- Know chemical and physical bonding and their
properties
- Know types of chemical reactions and concept

of rate of reaction
Course symbol:
HLTH-121
Level: First
- Know mole, molar mass, molarity and molality

and their use in laboratory
Course Title:
Medical
Terminology
- Know calculation formulae and their use in

clinical laboratory
Prerequisite:
Preparatory Year
- Know oxidationreduction reactions and their

biological significance
- Know different types of solutions and solubility
- Define acids, bases and describe acid-base
reactions
- Understand concept of pH and its calculations
- Know buffers and their types
- Know activation energy and endothermic and
exothermic reactions
st
nd
- Know 1 and 2 law of thermodynamics and

chemical equilibrium
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
- Discussion
Evaluation Means:
50%
Course Outline:
This course covers the linguistic structural basis
for scientific and medical terminology in Latin
and English and explanation of the main terms
in different applications of medical science
specialties to enable advanced students in
different branches and graduates deal easily
with physicians and other workers in different
specialties. The course also aims at acquainting
students with the pronunciation, writing and
understanding of general principal medical
terms and abbreviations corresponding to their
Arabic homologues.
able to:
- Correctly pronounce medical terms
- Explain the meanings of the common medical
terms regularly usable in medical and
health area
- Correctly understand sentences that include
these terms and abbreviations
74
- General Chemistry, Hill et al. Latest Ed.
- Fluent conversation in English with workers in

the health field
Teaching Methods:
- Define the health team and describe the

principles of organization and control of
the team.
- Explain the meaning of supervision and
leadership
- Lectures
- Discussion
- Mention the principles of organization ethics

Evaluation Means:
- Describe the levels of health care
- Semester Examination: 50%
50%
Reading List:
- Medical Terminology for Health Professions.
Ann Ehrlich, Carol L Schroeder.
- Comprehensive Medical Terminology. Betty
Davis Jones
Course symbol:
HLTH-122
Level: First
Course Title:
Health Care
System and
Vocational Safety
- Define quality and describe how to achieve in

health care services
- Mention the instruments and advantages of
achieving quality of health care
- Know danger associated with health
departments and affecting worker.
- Know safety procedures and problem solving in
biohazard.
Teaching Methods:
Prerequisite:
Preparatory Year
Course Outline:
Introduction to applied health sciences, concept
of health and factors affecting it, the general
hierarchy of health services and their current
and future needs, ethics of practice of the
different health professions.
- Lectures
- Discussion
Evaluation Means:
- Semester Examination: Written and practical
50%
50%
Reading List:
- Health Care Administration: Planning,
Implementing, and Managing Organized
Delivery Systems. Lawrence Wolper.

able to:
- Principles of Biomedical Ethics. Beauchamp

and Childress.
- Define health management

- Describe the organization of health
management and its general hierarchy
- www.islamset.com (Islamic constitution of

medical profession).
Course symbol:
Level: Fourth
75
Course Title:
Medical ethics
Prerequisite:
Preparatory Year
Course Outline:
understanding of medical ethics, concepts,
rights and duties. Introduction to effective
personal development knowledge and skills will
also be emphasizing.
- Acquire the skill of effective team

configuration.
- Acquire the skill of effective synergism.
Teaching Organization:
-Theory lectures
50%
50%
Reference book designated

able to:
- Know and describe the ethics of medical
professions
Ethics of practicing the profession of medicineThe Saudi Council of medical specialist- KSA
2005
- Know and describe the rights and duties of

medical team member towards the patients
The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People effective lessons in the process of personal
change, Stephen R. Covey.

medical team member towards the community.
Course symbol:
ANAT-114
Level: Second

medical team member towards the colloquies.
Course Title:
Principles of
Anatomy
Credit hours:
3(2+1)

medical team member towards himself.
medical team member towards the profession.
medical ethics in research.
- Acquire the skill of effective pro-activity.
- Acquire the skill of effective planning.
- Acquire the skill of effective prioritization.
- Acquire the skill of effective win-win thinking.
Prerequisite: BHS111
Course outline:
Introduction to anatomy of different regions
and organs of human body
Systemic anatomy of: joints, lymph, digestive,
urinary, reproductive, cardiovascular,
respiratory, nervous (CNS and autonomic),
musculoskeletal, endocrine, and embryology.
Clinical anatomy of certain diseases in relation
to systems organs
- Acquire the skill of effective communication.
76
HLTH-123
By the end of this course student should be able

to:
Course symbol:
PHSL-115
Level: Second
Describe the general structural characteristics of

the human body
Course Title
Principles of
Physiology:
Mention the anatomical characteristics of the

different organs and systems
Compare the different organ structures and
locate their sites in the body
Define planes , orientation, section and surface
anatomy of the body including sites of the body
cavities
Relate clinical observation to gross anatomy
able to:
- Know the anatomical structure of the various
systems of the human body.
- Know the relationship between some diseases
and the anatomical structure.
- Know some facts about the human
embryology.
Teaching Methods:
This course is aimed to understand the basis of

various physiological functions of the body from
the cell as the smallest functional component of
the body to the function of various organs,
systems. Further, these systems will be studied
with objective to enhance the concept of
integrative physiology, as functions of these
systems, to the most part, they are interrelated.
able to know:
- The basic aspects of physiology and body
functions
- The functional division of the Nervous System
(NS)
- The human endoskeleton, movement and

locomotion.
- Practical sessions.
Evaluation Means:
50%
Course Outline:
- The function of NS and the exerted control on

key body organs
- Lectures
- Semester Examination:
practical 50%
Prerequisite: BHS
111
Written and
- The chemical messengers and Endocrine

system
- The cardiovascular system and Hepatic
circulation.
77
This course covers the basic gross anatomical Reading list:

features of the human body that include:
Clinically oriented anatomy. Keith. L. Moore.
digestive, respiratory, cardiovascular, urogenital,
th
4 Ed. 1999.
neuroendocrinal, lymphoid and musculoskeletal
- Principles of Human Anatomy, by
systems. The course also covers the principles of
Gerard J. Tortora
clinical anatomy.
- The neural control of blood volume and

pressure
CHEM 113
Course Outline:
- The body fluid compartments and the blood as

a tissue.
- The renal system and Homeostasis
- The respiratory system and gas exchanges
- The respiratory-renal adjustment of acid base
- The digestive system
- The Pancreatic-Hepatic functions
- The reproductive system
- The ovarian, Hormonal and menstrual cycles
The course covers general subjects in organic

chemistry including aliphatic and aromatic
hydrocarbons, their properties and reactions,
alkyl, halides, alcohols, ethers, phenols,
aldehydes, ketones, amines and carboxylic acids.
able to:
- Know hydrocarbons, their classification,
nomenclature, physical and chemical
properties and describe aliphatic and aromatic
hydrocarbons.
- Know reactions of deletion, addition and
substitution
-Theory lectures
- Know methane, ethylene, and acetylene and

mention their properties
practical 50%
Written and
- Know alkyl halides, ether and alcohol and their

classification and their physical and
chemical properties
50%
- Know aldehydes and ketones and their physical

and chemical properties
- Define aromatic compounds, describe benzene

structure and mention their physical
Silverthorn, D.U.: Human Physiology: An

Integrated approach
and chemical properties
Human Anatomy & Physiology :Elaine N. Marieb.

Text Book of Medical Physiology: Guyton and
Hall Saunders
Principals of Medical Physiology: W.F. Gannong
- Know carboxylic acids, their classification and

their chemical and physical
Course symbol:
CHEM 116
Level: Second
Teaching Methods:
Course Title:
Organic Chemistry
Prerequisite:
Properties
- Lectures
- Discussion
78
Evaluation Means:
50%
50%
conditions required, or growth of bacteria,

bacterial genetics, bacterial relationship,
bacteriophage, bacterial metabolic products,
system of bacterial identification, Infection,
pathogenicity and virulence and chemotherapy.
General Virology:
- Organic Chemistry . Mc Murray.

- Organic Chemistry . Wade L.
- Introductory to Organic and Biochemistry
Experiments for students in Health
Professions. Brabson D.
Course symbol: MDL111
Level: Second
Course Title:
Principle of
Medical
Microbiology
Prerequisite: BHS
111
Course Outline:
This course covers the general principles of
microbiology including classification of different
groups of microbes, morphology of each group
and study of their characters. Also the study
includes a brief introduction to the infectious
diseases regarding their types, causative
microbial agents and methods of their control
together with study of food and air
microbiology.
Introduction to virology, classification of viruses,

structure of viruses, growth of viruses, viral
genetics, Infection and pathogenicity of virus
diseases.
General Mycology:
Introduction to mycology, classification of
mycology, structure of fungi, reproduction of
fungi, growth of fungi, Infections and
pathogenicity.
General Parsitology:
Introduction to parasitology, general definitions,
Infections and pathogenicity of parasites.
Epidemiology of parasites, diagnostics of
parasites, control of parasites, classification of
parasites:
(Protozoa,
Helminthes,
and
Arthropods).
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
- Seminars
Evaluation Means:
Practical 50%
Written and

able to:
General Bacteriology:
Reading Lists:
Introduction to bacteriology, morphological

shape of microorganisms, structure of bacterial
cell, reproduction and growth of bacteria,
physiology
of
microorganisms,
physical
- Foundations in Microbiology. Kathleen P.

Talaro, 2004.USA.
50%
79
Reading List:
- Medical Microbiology: A short Course.Baron, et

al., 1994.Willey-Lis.
- Use of computer applications in biomedical

data analysis.
Course symbol:
HLTH 124
Level: Second
Teaching Methods:
Course Title:
Biostatistics
- Lectures
Course Outline:
This course presents detailed description of
characters types, displaying and presenting
data, measures of central tendency, measures of
dispersion, principles of probability, random
variables and probability distribution, bimodal
distribution, natural distribution, confidence
intervals for mean, median, ratios and various
statistics tests.
able to:
- Identify the different methods of collecting
data.
- Interpret different types of data summaries
including tables and charts.
- Show the advantages and disadvantages of
different types of data presentation.
- Identify measures of central tendency and
measures of dispersion and interpreting them.
- Estimate means and their confidence intervals
and interpret results
- Identify properties of natural distribution and
explain the diverse repeated distribution of
biomedical data.
- Apply the suitable test for a list of specific data
such as student T test, F test, or chi-square test.
Evaluation Means:
50%
50%
Reading List:
Introductory Biostatistics for the Health
Sciences. Chernick M and Friis R - Presenting medical statistics from proposal to
publication. Janet Peacock, 2006.
Course symbol:
CHEM-120
Level: Third
Course Title:
Analytical
Chemistry
Prerequisite:
CHEM 114
Course Outline:
The course includes a survey of the classical
methods of chemical analysis, the underlying
theoretical concepts, and a brief introduction to
modern instrumental analysis techniques.
able to:
- Describe the applied chemical principles used
for separation, detection,
80
Prerequisite: Hlth
122
- Seminars
identification, and quantification of samples

constituents.
- Know statistical principles for chemical analysis
- Describe qualitative and quantitative analysis,
i.e., gravimetric and volumetric
analysis, concepts of acid-base, redox
reactions, precipitation reactions, titrimetric
analysis, spectrophotometric and
chromatographic analysis as well as
electrochemical behavior.
- Principles of quality control.
Prerequisite:
114Anat, 115Phsl,
116Chem, 117MDL
Course Outline:
The aim of this course is to identify light
microscopic structure of various normal human
body organs and tissues in addition to the study
of cell structure, and cell division.
able to know:
Teaching Methods:
- Cell structure and division, chromosomes and

genes.
- Lectures
- Epithelial tissue.
- Discussion
- Connective tissue, blood and lymphoid tissue.
- Muscular tissue
Evaluation Means:
- Nervous tissue.

50%
- Histology of digestive system.
50%
- Histology of urinary and genital system.

- Histology of respiratory system.
- Histology of cardiovascular system.
Reading List:
- Analytical Chemistry - An Introduction ,
Douglas A. Skoog 7th Edition, 2000.
http://www.chem.utoronto.ca/coursenotes/CH
M217/lectures.html3
- http://elchem.kaist.ac.kr/vt/chemed/analytic/ac-basic.htm
Course symbol:
ANAT 251
Level: Third
Course Title:
Histology
Credit hours: :
3(2+1)
- Histology of endocrine glands

This course covers the theoretical and practical
bases of identifying light & electron
microscopical structure of the cell and tissues of
the human body. These tissues include epithelial
tissues, connective tissue, muscular tissue,
nervous tissues. The course covers also the
microscopical structure of the different body
systems that include: digestive, respiratory,
cardiovascular, nervous, urogenital, male and
female genital systems, endocrine system,
lymphoid and musculoskeletal systems.
Teaching methods:
81

able to:
- Lectures.
- Know the critical clinical cases.

Means of evaluation:
50%
50%
- Diagnose these cases.

- Give the first aid of these cases.
- Call the ambulance in the proper time.
Reading list:
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
Bancroft and Marilyn Gamble, 2002 (5th ed).
- Basic Histology: Text and Atlas, 10th Edition;

2002.
Evaluation Means:
- Histology: A Text and Atlas, By Michael H Ross

and Wojciech Pawlina
2005 (5th ed)
practical 50%
Written and
50%
Reading list:
Basic Histology. Luiz Carlos Junqueira,

John Long, Jose Carnerio
- M Histology A Text and Atals. Ross
Color Textbook of Histology. Gartner
-
Course symbol:
HLTH 225
Level: Third
Course Title:
Ambulance Care
Prerequisite:
Hlth122 +
Anat114
- Internet source material specific to

each
critical clinical case as determined- by
the instructors.
- Workshops given by ministry of health and
Red Cresset
Course symbol: MDL
231
Level: Third
Course Title:
Principles of
Biochemistry
Prerequisite:
Chem 116
Course outline:
This course includes teaching the methods of
dealing with critical clinical cases. The student
should know how to diagnose these cases, give
the first aid procedure and call the ambulance in
the proper time.
Course Outline:
This course offers detailed study of the chemical
compositions and the biological functions of the
main biochemical molecules including
carbohydrates, proteins, lipids and their
82
- Theory and Practice of Histological Techniques.

By ; John D

able to:
- Know and classify the different groups of
carbohydrates and their main biological
significance with brief reference to some
pathological conditions such as diabetes.
- Know and classify the main lipids and describe
their chemical structures and
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
- Discussion
Evaluation Means:
50%
50%
Reading List:
- Biochemistry. Richard H. and Pamela C.
biological significance with brief reference to

some pathological conditions caused
Course symbol: MDL

261
Level: Third
Course Title:
Introduction to
Immunology
by lipid disorders such as arthrosclerosis.

- Know amino acids, their classification, physical
and chemical properties as well as
describing their chemical structures, their main
biological significance.
- Know proteins, their structures and physical
and chemical forces affecting their
structure with brief reference to some
common proteins, e.g., haemoglobin,
hormones e.g. insulin and immunoglobulin e.g.
IgG
- Describe enzymes and their role in the
biological reactions and as well as their
diagnostic role in many diseases e.g. enzyme
amylase in pancreatitis.
- Know the structure of nucleic acids i.e. DNA
and RNA and their role in protein
biosynthesis with brief reference to some of
genetic disorders such thalassaemia
Prerequisite:
114Anat, 115Phsl,
116Chem, 117MDL
Course Outline:
This course presents detailed description to the
structure of the immune system and its tissues,
cellular properties, functions and chemical
elements especially cytokines. It is also includes
definition of innate and acquired immunity,
different mechanisms of immune response and
hypersensitivity and its types. The course also
gives detailed explanation of immunity against
microbial injuries and methods of prophylaxis,
serological and immunological diagnosis of
microbial infection, immunodeficiency diseases,
vaccine and toxoid action and preparation for
prevention and treatment. In addition a brief
introduction will be given on tissue typing on
organ transplantation with great emphasis on
laboratory equipment related to immunological
and cystic fibrosis.
83
components, enzymes and different types of

hormones. It also includes methods of practical
qualitative and quantitative assays to discover
these molecules.

able to know:
- Innate (non-specific) immunity
- Complement system, antigens.
- Structure and function of immunoglobulin
- Classes of immunoglobulin: isotypes and
allotypes
- Genetics of idiotypes, antigen-antibody
reactions and test for these reactions
- Antibody formation, cells involved in immune
responses, major histocompatibility
complex, response to antigen.
- Cell-mediated immunity, immunoregulation,
immunization, tolerance and
Barbara A. Osborne 2000.

- Basic and Clinical immunology. Stites, Terr,
Tristran (eds), 2004.
Immunology , 4 th. Edition by Gorden
Reeves and Ian Todd , Black well Science
Ltd. U. K. 2000 .
Basic and Clinical Immunplogy, 22 nd Edition
Appleton Lange , by Stites ,DP, Terr,AI, and
Tristram ,GP (2005) :
Medical Immunology , 2 nd, Ed . by
Playfair.J.H.L., and Lydyard, P.M., (2005).
Course symbol: MDL
252
Level: Fourth
Course Title:
General pathology
Prerequisite: Anat
114, Phsl 115,
Chem 116, MDL
117
autoimmunity .
- Hypersensitivity states, tumor immunology.
Course Outline:
- Immunodeficiency (congenital and acquired).
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
- Seminars
This course contains introduction to general and

basic knowledge of diseases, their causes,
pathogenesis, general morphological and
changes at gross, microscopic and
submicroscopic levels as well as the prognosis of
the disease.
Evaluation Means:

able to know:

50%
- Definition of pathology and disease, causes of

diseases, pathology specimens and
50%
methods of pathological studies and their

relation to clinical aspects.
Reading List:
- Inflammation and repair.
- Immunology, 5th Edition . Richard A. Goldsby,

Thomas J. Kindt, Janis Kuby, and
- Cell injury, degeneration, tissue deposits,

necrosis, gangrene.
84
diagnosis as ELISA, immunoblotting techniques,

and PCR.
Rosai and Ackerman Surgical Pathology, 9

edition, Two volumes,
- Infection and granuloma.
th
Course symbol: MDL

241
Level: Fourth
This course clarifies all the known terms in

pathology , types and causes of disease,
pathogenesis, morphological changes in gross
and microscopic levels, symptoms and signs as
well as disease outcome. Also this course covers
the main pathological changes as inflammation,
degeneration, circulatory disorders, immune
disorders, growth disturbances and tumors.
Course Title:
Medical
Microbiology
Teaching methods:
This course covers studying of different types of

human diseases that caused by different types
of microbes, like viruses, bacteria, fungi, and
parasites. Also, student should be able to know
the different methods of identification of these
microbes, using both traditional and recent
techniques, prevention and treatment.
- Growth disorders and tumors.
- Lectures.
50%
50%
Prerequisite: MDL
261
Course Outline:

able to:
Identify the different human diseases that
caused by different microbes and how to
identify them, prevent them and treat them:
Reading list:
th
- Pathologic Basis of Disease, 7 edition,2007,

Elsevier. Robbins and Cotran
th
- Surgical Pathology, 9 edition, 2004. Rosai and

Ackerman
Concise Pathology, by Parakrama Chandrasoma
& Clive Taylor: 2 nd ed. Prentice-Hall
international, Inc, 1995.
Pathology illustrated, by Peter MacFarlane,
Robin Reid & Robin Callander, 5 th ed, Churchill
Livingstone
Robbins and Cotra
th
Pathologic Basis of Disease, 7 edition,

Copyright@2007, Elsevier. [Main Book]
Medical Bacteriology: Identify the different

types of bacteria that cause human diseases and
their classifications like
corynbacterium
diphtheriae,
(diphtheria),
mycobacterium
tuberculosis (TB), mycobacterium leprae
(leprosy), salmonella typhi (typhoid fever),
proteus a common saprophyte of decaying
organic matter and yersinia pestis (plague). In
addition, student should know the procedure of
diagnoses by direct microscopy, culture, ELISA
and PCR.
Medical Virology: Identify the various groups of
human viruses that comprise herpes, oncogenic,
hepatitis, influenza, HIV and polio virus. Also,
identify the clinical manifestations and describe
these human diseases and role of transmission
and mechanism of viral pathogenicity. In
85
- Circulatory disturbances.
addition, student should be able to know

different techniques in viral detection, as
immunofluoresence technique, ELISA, indirect
hemagglutination test, complement fixation
test, PCR, and how to isolate viruses by using
chicken embryo, tissue culture, or experimental
animals.
Medical Mycology: Identify the various groups
of medical mycoses that comprise superfacial,
cutaneous, subcutaneous and systemic mycosis.
Also, identify the different manifestations by
laboratory technique that include direct
microscopy, culture, serology, and PCR with
emphasis on mycosis.
Medical Parasitology: Identify the various
groups of medical parasitosis and describe their
clinical manifestations by means of laboratory
diagnosis such as direct (microscopy) and
indirect(serology) methods.
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
Prerequisite: 251
ANAT
Course Outline:
This course covers the general basics of tissue
preparation for light microscopy and includes
cellular and tissue decay and basics of tissue
fixation, types of histological cytological fixatives
and processes of dehydration, clearing and
embedding in paraffin wax and the other
embedding media and tissue sectioning. It also
covers the basics of cytological and histological
staining and the common techniques for special
staining of cells and tissues and hoe to prepare
these stains. It also covers non sectioning
methods for processing cells and tissues for light
microscopy such as smears and imprints. During
this course students are trained to equipment of
histological techniques as tissue processors,
embedding centers, rotary and automatic
microtomes, multi-program automatic linear
and rotary slide stainers and cover slippers.
- Discussion

able to:
- receive and registration of specimens.
Evaluation Means:
- Gross examination.
-Semester Exam.: Written and Practical 50%
- Know fixation: - general usage - types of

fixatives - factors affecting fixation.
- Final Exam.:
50%
- Perform tissue processing: tissue embedding,
sectioning, microtomes, frozen
Reading List:
-Review of Medical Microbiology. Jawetz,
Melnick and Adelberg, 2005.
-Practical Medical Microbiology. Mackie and
McCortney, 1996.
Course symbol: MDL
253
Level: Fourth
Course Title:
Histotechnology
Credit hours:
3(1+2)
sections
- Perform staining: - routine Hx&E staining
know the artifacts in histologic sections
- Perform histochemical and
immunohistochemical staining.
Teaching methods:
- Lectures.
86
events that control the function of normal

cells, tissues and organs and understand how
these
60%
- Describe the steps by which cells break down

biological molecules to extract energy for the
40%
performance of work.
Theory & Practice of Histological

Techniques, John D. Bancroft and
Marilyn Gamble, editors, 2002, 5 th
edition, Churchill Livingstone
Drury and Wallington Carletons
Histological Techniques
Theory and Practice of Histotechnology
by Dezna C. Sheehan
Course symbol: MDL

233
Course Title:
Medical
Biochemistry
- Describe major cellular biosynthetic pathways,

steps involved in these pathways and the
regulation of key enzymes.
- Explain the lipid transport disorders and their
relation to health.
- Explain energy balance and its disorders.
Level: Fourth
- Major metabolic disorders related to

arthrosclerosis, stroke, and diabetes.
- Understand genetic mutations and disease

cases.
Prerequisite: 120
Chem+ 231MDL or
232MDL
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
- Discussion
Course Outline:This course presents

introductory biochemistry relevant to human
health and disease that forms part of the
foundation of modern medical practice. The
molecular correlation with disease is
emphasized throughout the course.
By the end of the course, student should be
able to:
- Develop a broad and thorough understanding
at the molecular level of metabolic and
regulatory
Evaluation Means:
50%
Written and Practical
50%
Reading List:
nd
-Medical Biochemistry at a Glance, 2 Edition

blackwellpublishing.com/book.asp?ref=1405113
227
-Marks' Basic Medical Biochemistry: A Clinical
Approach, 2004.
87
Reading list:
-
processes are altered by disease
Level: Fourth
Course Title:
Principle of
Medical Genetics
- Discussion and case studies.

- Semester examination:
50%.
- Final examination:
50%.
Prerequisite: MDL213/214
Reading list:
Course Outline:
- Principles of Medical Genetics, 2nd edition. By:

Thomas D Gelehrter MD;

able to:
- Define chromosome, chromosomal map, genes
and chromosomal aberrations
and mutation.
- Explain genetic control of cell function and
protein synthesis.
- Classify genetic disorders into cytogenetic,
Mendelian and
multifactorial disorders.
- Recognize the basis of laboratory tests used in
screening and diagnosis of genetic
disorders and premarital evaluation
(screening).
- Genetic engineering and gene therapy
Teaching methods:
Francis Collins MD, PhD; David Ginsburg MD,

2007.
- Medical Genetics, Ekram Abdel-Salam, Cairo,
2006.
- Medical Genetics at a glance, by Dorian
Pritchard, Bruce R Korf, Blackwell Publishing.
Course symbol: MDL
353
Level: Fifth
Course Title: :
Pathophysiology
Credit hours:
3(2+1)
Prerequisite: 252
MDL
Course Outline:
The aim of this course is to give a summarized
idea about structural and physiological aspects
of different diseases affecting body organs and
tissues with correlation to pathological process
in laboratory and clinical findings and also the
basic lines of management. The study is
practically aided by identifying tissue sections of
normal tissues compared different common
diseases.
able to:
- Understand, and apply basic facts and
concerns about normal function of different
- Lectures.
88
This course aims at give a summarized idea

about principles of medical genetics and its
applications in health and disease through
studying chromosomal map, genetic control of
cell functions, mutations, and diseases resulting
from chromosomal aberrations, Mendelian
disorders and multifactorial disorders. Also it
deals with modern techniques and laboratory
tests to diagnosis genetic diseases, genetic
engineering and genetic counseling.
- Correlate pathological changes and functional

disorders to abnormal laboratory
findings.
- Know histological structure and function as
well as functional disorders and
- ACC Atlas of Pathophysiology, by: Springhouse

, 2007
-
common diseases affecting different body

organs and tissues.
This course covers the histological structure of
the different body systems and their functions,
functional disturbances and their relation to
appearance of disease manifestations. Also to
recognize the disease characteristics and the
ways of diagnosis and brief account on
principles of management. This course also
relates the pathological process to laboratory,
clinical findings . The study is practically aided by
identifying tissue sections of normal tissues as
well as different common diseases
Teaching methods:
- Lectures.
Essentials of Pathophysiology: Concepts

of Altered Health States by MattsonPorth, 2004
Pathophysiology for the Health
Professions, 2nd ed. By Gould, 2002
Textbook of physiology and
pathophysiology, essentials and clinical
problems, ISBN, Copenhagen Medical
publisher, 2000.
Pathophysiology review , classical
clinical cases, edited by Maurice,
Mulson, New York, McGraw Hill
Medical Publication, 2002.
ACC Atlas of Pathophysiology, by:
Springhouse , ISBN, Copyright 2007
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins
Course symbol: MDL

362
Level: Fifth
Course Title:
Hematology
Prerequisite:
251Anat, 261MDL
50%
50%
Reading list:
- Textbook of physiology and pathophysiology,
essentials and clinical
problems,,2000.
- Pathophysiology review , classical clinical
cases, 2002.
Course Outline:
This course includes identification of blood cells,
their normal counts, morphology and study
important blood diseases including coagulation
and bleeding disorders
able to:
- Describe normal hematopoiesis and
morphology of blood cells and platelets.
- Define and classify anemia types, bleeding and
clotting.
- Define leucocytosis, leucopenia and
enumerate their possible causes.
89
systems and correlate between functional

disorders and disease process.
bone marrow.
permit result release; explain the pathogenesis

of major organ diseases and assist in the
interpretation of results in routine clinical
biochemical testing.
- Make blood film to diagnose deferent types of

anemia and leukemia

able to:
Teaching methods:
- Understand the principles of clinical

biochemistry related to health and disease.
- Lectures.
- Perform routine clinical testing and describe

the levels of various analyses, i.e., blood
glucose,

50%
blood lipids, blood electrolytes, liver function

tests, kidney function tests, hemoglobin
50%
measurement, separate blood proteins and

hemoglobin types by electrophoresis.
Reading list:
- Perform special laboratory tests such as

cardiac enzymes
- Blood Principles and Practice of Hematology,

nd
2 ed. By Robert I Handin 2007.
- Anderson's Atlas of Hematology , Shauna C
Anderson 2003.
th
- Atlas of Clinical Hematology, 6 ed. By Helmut

Lffler, Johann Rastetter and
- Identify plasma and urine drug concentration

in toxicological cases and their measurements.
- Investigate common laboratory equipments
used in urine and blood samples.
- Quality control procedure governing
biochemical equipments.
Torsten Haferlach, 2005.

Teaching Methods:
Course symbol: MDL
334
Level: Fifth
Course Title:
Clinical
Biochemistry
- Lectures
Prerequisite: 233
MDL
Course outline: This course discusses the role of

biochemistry in clinical diagnosis, perform
biochemical analyses using a variety of
instruments; assess quality control data to
- Discussion
Evaluation Means:
50%
50%
Reading List:
90
- Define and classify leukemia and describe

features of blast cells in blood film and
- Clinical biochemistry: techniques and

instrumentation A practical course by John S
Varcoe 2001.
Course symbol: MDL
355
Level: Fifth
Course Title:
Electron
Microscopy
Prerequisite: 253
MDL
Course outline:
This course includes the methods of manual
preparation for transmission and scanning
electron microscopic examination. This includes
preparing fixatives for electron microscopy as
glutaraldehyde,
paraformaldehyde
and
metastaining with osmium tetra oxide and
dehydration, clearing and embedding in resins,
types of resins, ultramicrotomy, staining,
ultramicrotome, its mode of action, ultrathin
sections and staining with uranium acetate, and
lead citrate, installing pins in transmission
electron microscope. Also the course covers
training students to equipment for automatic
preparation of histological and cytological
specimens for electron microscopy and use of
the automatic stainer, the theoretical aspects of
transmission electron microscope work and
practically operating it, photographing and
preparing the electron microscope photographs.
It also covers the basics of scanning electron
microscope operation and the automatic
covering and photocopying.
able to:
-
Describe the basics of fixing electron

microscope specimens
Mention the steps of processing

specimens for electron microscope
examination
- Mention the types of the different
electron microscopes and the
properties of each
- Define each of the light and electron
lenses
- Mention the similarities and
dissimilarities between the
transmission and scanning electron
microscopes
- Use of ultramicrotome and preparing
thin and ultrathin sections
- Manual staining using lead citrate and
uranium acetate
- Enumerate the main
immunocytological staining methods
for electron microscopy
- Operation of electron microscopic
processors and automatic staining
- Describe the steps of photography,
processing and printing electron
microscopic photographs
- Operating transmission electron
microscope, adjusting it and
photography
- Operating transmission electron
microscope and covering apparatus and
performing specimen coverage for
scanning electron microscopy
- Applying safety measures in electron
microscopy units
Teaching Methods:
-
- Lectures
- Practical Sessions
Evaluation Means:
50%
- Final Examination
50%
Reading list:
91
- Clinical biochemistry, 3ed ed. Gaw A, Cowan R,

O'Reilly D, Stewart M. 2004.
- Practical electron microscopy. Hunter, Elaine E.

(1984).
skin, nose, ear and neck, muscles and

connective tissues.
- Basic electron microscopy. By Sameh ElShewemi. 1997
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
M. A. Hayat Principles and Techniques

of Electron Microscopy: Biological
Applications
- Michael J. Dykstra, Laura E. Reuss
Biological Electron Microscopy: Theory,
Techniques, and Troubleshooting
- Mark Staniforth, Joseph Goldstein,
Patrick Echlin, Eric Lifshin, Dale E.
Newbury Scanning Electron Microscopy
and X-Ray Microanalysis
Marc de Graef Introduction to Conventional
Transmission Electron Microscopy
-
Level: Fifth
Course Title:
Clinical
Parasitology
Prerequisite: 241
MDL
Course Outline:This course offers the basics of

medical parasitology where it includes
classification of endo- and exoparasite including
study of life cycles and ways of pathogenecity
together with brief clinical description and
determining suitable clinical specimens for
laboratory diagnosis using the light microscopy
and other laboratory tests such as
immunoserological methods e.g. ELISA and PCR .
Evaluation Means:
50%
50%
Reading List:
- Medical Parasitology: A Self-Instructional Text
by Ruth, Ph.D. Leventhal and Russell F. Cheadle,
2002.
Course symbol: MDL
344
Level: Fifth
Course Title:
Clinical
Bacteriology
Prerequisite: 241
MDL
Course Outline:This course covers studying of

different types of bacteria that cause diseases in
human and their phenotypic characteristics and
their structures in relation to bacterial
pathogenicity, as well as, the diagnosis,
prevention and treatment of these bacteria.

able to:

able to:
Know general definitions of parasitism,

parasitosis of the digestive system, blood and
lymph systems, respiratory system, excretory
and reproduction system, nervous system, eye,
Identify different types of bacteria that cause

human diseases and their classifications like
corynbacterium
diphtheriae
(diphtheria), mycobacterium tuberculosis (TB),
92
Course symbol: MDL

345
- Seminars
mycobacterium leprae (leprosy), salmonella

typhi (typhoid fever), proteus a common
saprophyte of decaying organic matter and
yersinia pestis (bubonic plague). In addition,
student should be able to know the virulence
determinants of bacteria and the mechanism of
bacterial pathogenesis and diagnosis (direct
microscopy, culture, PCR) and treatment of
pathogenic bacteria by conducting sensitivity
test.
practically aided by tissue sections of different

affected lesions of the body.
Teaching Methods:
common diseases affecting different systems

and tissues and correlate between
- Lectures

able to:
- Define biopsy in clinical and laboratory
practice, tissue processing and staining.
- Understand the pathologic changes at gross
and microscopic levels of various
Evaluation Means:
- Describe microscopic picture of different

common lesions that affecting body organs and
tissues

50%
- Know the immunological staining and

molecular tests in diagnostic laboratory.
Teaching methods:
50%
Reading List:
- Lectures.
-Medical Microbiology. Greenwood et al. 2002

McCortney, 1996.
Course symbol: MDL

356
Level: Sixth
Course Title:
Histopathology
Credit hours:
3(2+1)

50%
50%
Reading list:
th
- Pathologic basis of disease, 7 ed. By Robbins

and Cotran
Prerequisite:
251MDL +
252MDL
th
- Surgical pathology, 9 ed. by Rosai and

Ackerman.
Course Outline:
This course aims to give detailed
about different diseases affecting
and tissues with correlation to
process and microscopic findings.
informations
body organs
pathological
The study is
- Curan atlas of pathology

- Sternberg's diagnostic surgical pathology, 4
ed. By Stacey E Mills 2004..
th
93
functional disorders and disease process.
- Seminars
Course symbol: MDL

346
Level: Sixth
Course Title:
Pharmacology and
Antimicrobial
Credit hours:
3(2+1)
Prerequisite:
241MDL +
242MDL or
243MDL
Course Outline:
This course deals with history and principles of
pharmacology, principles of
absorption,
distribution, and elimination of drugs,
mechanisms of actions, dynamics, negative side
effects, drug interactions and drug classes with
emphasis on chemotherapeutics. It also discuses
activity of antibiotics in relation to their
structure, culture and sensitivity, antibiotics and
producer organisms, and the individual
antibiotics. In addition: a brief information will
be given on antiviral, antifungal and
anthelmintics (antiparasites).

able to know:
- General pharmacology:
- Pharmacokinetics (absorption, distribution,
metabolism and excretion)
- Pharmacodynamics (mechanism of drug
action)
- Chemotherapy of microbes
- Classification of antibacterial agents and
resistance
- Adverse reactions of antibacterial agents and
interaction.
- Prophylaxis of infection with antibiotics and
abuse
- Activity of antibiotics in relation to their
structure including quantitative determination,
minimum
bacteriostatic concentration (MIC) and
Minimum bactericidal concentration (MBC)
- Culture and sensitivity (antibiotic approach)
and producer organisms
- Individual antibiotics (in brief) beta-lactam
antibiotics, bminoglycosides, sulphonamides,
tetracyclines, chloramphenicol, macrolides,
miscellaneous and chemotherapy of
tuberculosis.
- Antifungal, antiviral and anthelmintics
(antiparasites).
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
- Seminars
Evaluation Means:
94
Ivan Damjanov, Histopathology, A Color

Atlas and Textbook, Williams and
Wilkins, 1996.
- Robbins and Cotran Pathologic Basis
th
of Disease, 7 edition,
Copyright@2007, Elsevier. [Main
Book]
- Rosai and Ackerman Surgical Pathology,
th
9 edition, Two volumes,
Copyright@2004, Elsevier. Mosby
Saunders.
- Colour Atlas of pathology, by Curan R.
C., third edition, ELBS, 1988 Oxford
University press.
Mills: Sternberg's Diagnostic Surgical Pathology
By Stacey E Mills, Darryl Carter, Joel K
Greenson, Reuter and Mark H Stoler, 2004 (4th
ed).
-

50%
- Trace minerals concentrations in blood.

- Acid-base balance and its disorders.
50%
- Mucus and pus
Reading Lists:
Teaching Methods:
- Principles of Pharmacology: The
Pathophysiologic Basis of Drug Therapy by
David E. Golan,
- Lectures
Armen H. Tashjian, Ehrin Armstrong, and

Joshua M. Galanter, 2004
Course symbol: MDL

335
Level: Sixth
Course Title: Body

Fluid Analysis
Prerequisite: 334
MDL
Evaluation Means:
50%
50%
Reading List:
- Urinalysis and Body Fluids :Susan
King King Strasinger, Marjorie Schaub Di
Lorenzo. 2001
Course Outline:
This course discusses water and electrolytes
balance, physiological regulation of water and
electrolytes balance, urinalysis and urine
sediments, seminal fluid, cerebrospinal fluid,
senovial fluid, exudates, transudates, Mucus and
pus.
able to analyze:
- Clinical Chemistry: Principles, Procedures,

Correlation 5th edition (2004).
Course symbol: MDL
363
Level: Sixth
Course Title: Blood

Banking
Prerequisite:
261MDL +262MDL
- Urinalyses and Urine Sediment.

- Water and electrolytes.
Course Outline:
- Cerebrospinal fluids (CSF).
During this course the student will study blood

phlebotomy, transportation and preservation
with emphasis on antigens and antibodies
reactions. Also it is include performance of
blood banking procedures including blood
grouping and Rh typing, antibody screens,
antibody identification, cross matching, elution,
- Seminal Fluid
- Senovial Fluid
- Exudates and Transudates.
- Kidney and gall bladder stones.
95
- The Antimicrobial Drugs by Eric M. Scholar and

William B. Pratt, 2000
- Discussion
and extract blood products such as platelet and

plasma.
Prerequisite: 241
MDL

able to :
Course Outline:
- Examine blood donors and select the proper

one by certain tests.
- Perform cross matching.
- Identify the common and rare blood groups.
- Understand the mechanisms of incompatibility
reactions in the human body.
- Extract blood products e.g. platelets,
cryoplamsa
- Educate community in blood donation
campaign
Teaching Methods:
This course covers studying of different types of

human viruses, their structures in relation to
viral pathogenicity, symptoms and diagnosis. In
addition to incidence and management of these
viral infections.
able to:
- Identify various groups of human viral diseases
such as herpes and others.
- Identify clinical manifestations and describe
viral diseases in term of transmission and
mechanism of viral pathogenicity and
symptoms.
- Know to diagnose viral infection by different
techniques in viral detection such as
- Lectures
- Discussion
immunofluoresence technique, ELISA, indirect

hemagglutination test, complement fixation test
and PCR.
Evaluation Means:
50%
- Isolate the viruses by using chicken embryo,

tissue culture, or experimental animals.
- know the managements of viral infections.
50%
Reading List:
Teaching Methods:
- Textbook of Blood Banking and Transfusion

Medicine
-Lectures
Sally Rudmann, PhD, MT(ASCP)SBB, CLS,

Professor and Director 2005.
Course symbol: MDL
347
Level: Sixth
Course Title:
Clinical Virology
-Seminars
-Practical sessions
Evaluation Means:
Practical 50%
Written and
50%
96
Reading Lists:
th
- Medical Virology(4 ed.). Fenner and White,

1996
- Principles and Practice of Clinical Virology, 5
ed. Zukerman et al
th
Practical 50%
Written and
50%
Reading Lists:
rd
-Medical Mycology (3 ed). Rippon, 1988.

Level: Sixth
Course Title:
Clinical Mycology
Prerequisite: 241
MDL
Course Outline:This course includes; study of
different fungi types that cause diseases in
human, their structures, characters, in addition
to, incidence, diagnosis and management of
mycoses.
-Medical Mycology and Human Mycoses.Everett

S., 1996.
Course symbol: MDL
457
level: Seventh
Course Title:
Cellular and
Molecular
pathology

able to:
Prerequisite:
242MDL or
243MDL +
354MDL +
356MDL
- Identify various groups of medical mycoses.
Course Outline:
- Identify superfacial, cutaneous, subcutaneous

and systemic mycosis.
This course is intended to study molecular basis

of diseases and tumors in relation to their
morphological and laboratory expression. It also
includes identification of abnormal and
malignant cells in pathological fluids and body
discharges as well as fine needle aspiration
specimens and its diagnostic applications. The
study is aided by practical cytological smears of
common lesions.
- Differentiate fungal infection from other

disease by symptoms and clinical manifestation
- Perform laboratory diagnosis of these fungi
that including classical materials (direct
microscopy,
culture, serology) and modern techniques.
- Know management of medical mycosis

able to:
Teaching Methods:
- Describe cell cycle and cell division.
- Lectures
- Understand molecular basis of various

pathologic changes such as, cell injury,
inflammation,
-Seminars
-Practical sessions
Evaluation Means:
necrosis, edema, carcinogenesis, genetic

disorders and mutation.
97
Course symbol: MDL

348
- Perform image analysis,

immunohistochemistry, flow cytometry and
insitu hybridization to
th
- Fine needle aspiration cytology, 4 edition, by

Svante R. Osell, Chirchil
Livingstone2005.
- Describe microscopic features of malignancy in

cytological smears of common lesions
such as normal and malignant epithelial cells in
urine, dysplastic and malignant cells in
pleural aspirate and peritoneal fluid,
inflammatory and dysplastic cells in
cervicovaginal smears.
- Understand fine needle aspiration (FNA) of
breast fibroadenoma and infiltrating duct
carcinoma
- Analyze genital cellular fluids male and female
- Diagnostic Molecular Pathology, Editor: Mark H

Stoler MD, ISSN, Copyright
2007 Lippincott Williams & Wilkins
- Cytology: Diagnostic principles and clinical
correlates., 2ed edition, by
Edumund S Cibas, Copyright@2007, Elsevier.
th
- Fine needle aspiration cytology, 4 edition, by

Svante R. Osell, Chirchil
Livingstone, published 2005, Copyright@2007
Elsevier.
- Applied Immunohistochemistry & Molecular
Morphology, By: Clive R Taylor
Teaching methods:
MD, PhD; Jiang Gu MD, PhD, ISSN, Copyright

2007 Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
- Lectures.
- Robbins and Cotran

Copyright@2007, Elsevier
th
50%
50%
Reading list:
- Diagnostic Molecular Pathology, By: Mark H
Stoler MD, 2007
- Leonard: Molecular Pathology in Clinical
Practice, (1st ed) By Debra G B Leonard 2006 .
- Cytology: Diagnostic principles and clinical
correlates., 2nd edition, by
Edumund S Cibas, 2007, .
Course symbol: MDL

436
Level: Seventh
Course Title:
Analytical
Laboratory
Automation
Prerequisite:
335MDL +
346MDL
Course Outline:
The aim of this course is to train students on the
principles and practices of instrumental analysis,
involving the use of modern automated
instrumentation in biochemical and medical
applications. It also explain general laboratory
98
diagnose immunological graft rejection in

organ transplantation.
instrumentation
and
support
units,
spectrophotometric and fluorescent techniques,
clinical analyzers, immunoassays, automated
hematology techniques, atomic absorption,
advanced automated separation techniques of
chromatography (HPLC, GC, GC-MS, LC-MS),
flow cytometry and modern electrophoreses
techniques and their applications in clinical,
nutritional, environmental, drugs and narcotic
abuse.
able to:

50%
50%
Reading List:
-Clinical
Biochemistry:
Techniques
Instrumentation: John S Varcoe 2001
and
- Principles of Instrumental Analysis, 5th Edition,

by Douglas A. Skoog, F. James Holler & Timothy
A. Nieman. 1998.
- Establish self confidence in dealing with

instrumentation.
Describe theoretical concept behind the design
Of instruments.
- Describe major operational requirements for
each category of instrumentation.
- Describe application and utilization for each
instrument in applied medical sciences.
- Handle trouble shooting procedures and
regular maintenance with quality control
measure.
- Demonstrate procedure of operation of major
advanced instruments to others.
- provide complete description of necessary
equipments in medical laboratory.
- work in research centre and reference
laboratory
Course symbol: MDL

464
Level: Seventh
Course Title:
Clinical
Immunology and
Hematology
Prerequisite:
364MDL
Course Outline:This course deals with clinical

and laboratory applications for important
immunological and hematological disorders
aided by case studies and explanation of
laboratory findings.
able to:
- Know Immune mechanisms and diseases
classification.
- Understand immunological basis of organ
transplantation and HLA typing.
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
- Discussion
- Enumerate laboratory findings in different

immunological disorders.
- Classify anemia and describe microscopic
picture and laboratory findings of hemostasis
disorder
Evaluation Means:
99
- Define leukocytosis, leukopenia in relation to

the underlying disease such as leuckemia and
including literature reviewed and use scientific

information resources.
able to:
lymphoma.
Teaching methods:
- Learn the essential steps the usage of library

and electronic search
- Lectures.
- Know types of scientific papers, thesis and

journals

51%
51%
- Learn the classification of collected

information in priority order
- Design a complete and basic research proposal.
Teaching Methods:
Reading list:
- Immunohematology Principles and Practice.
nd
2 ed. By Eva D Quinley MS,
MT(ASCP).
- Blood Principles and Practice of Hematology,
nd
2 ed By Robert I Handin MD; Samuel
E. Lux MD; Thomas P Stossel MD.
th
- Pathologic Basis of Disease, 7 edition By

Robbins and Cotran.
Course symbol:
HLTH 425
Level: Ninth
Course Title:
Research
Methodology
Prerequisite: 70%
of course
curriculum
Course Outline:Training on project

establishment and methodology of execution
The student carries out a thorough literature

search using different scientific resources under
the supervision of a faculty staff member
Evaluation Means:
Written report
11%
Presentation and verbal examination
21%
Reading List:
- As directed by the student's advisor.
Course symbol: HLTH
428
Level: Eighth
Course Title: Epidemiology

& Infection Control
Credit hours:
2(2+0)
Prerequisite344MDL,
345MDL, 347MDL,
348MDL
Course Outline:
Definition of Epidemiology, the principles of
epidemiology, uses of epidemiology in health
care, types of epidemiologic studies.
100
The modules help to implement appropriate

measures to control the spread of infection
Define the principles and processes used in
sterilization, disinfection and sanitation in the
health care facility
Management and communication skills
necessary for the coordination of an effective
infection control program
Define the governmental regulations and discuss
standards which govern infection control
practice
able to know:
Tell the methods of prevention and control of
infection
Should be able to demonstrate various types of
hand washing techniques and Personal
protective equipments
Park text book of Preventive and community

Medicine
Reading List:Park text book of Preventive and
community Medicine
Course symbol: MDL
449
Level: Eighth
Course Title: Applied

Clinical Microbiology
Prerequisite:
344MDL, 345MDL,
347MDL, 348MDL
Course Outline:
This course covers studying of different
microbes in term of isolation and identification
of viruses, bacteria, yeasts, fungi and parasites
that infect the different organs with interest in
clinical practice of microbiology throw case
studies.
By the end of this course, student should be able
to:
Enumerate various hand washing agents, ,

disinfectants, cleaning agents and waste
management
Identify, diagnose and treat microbes infection

of the gastrointestinal tracts, genito-urinary,
central nervous systems, and diseases affecting
eye, skin and musculoskeletal tissues
Teaching Methods:
Teaching Methods:
- Theory lectures
-Lectures
- Seminars
-Seminars
-Practical sessions
Evaluation Means:
Evaluation Means:

50%
Practical 60%
-Final Examination:
Reading List:
50%
Written and
40%
Reading Lists:
101
This course focuses on various modes of

transmission, incubation periods, host
resistance, and susceptibility to various
infections and communicable diseases
- Discussion

McCortney,1996.
Evaluation Means:
Course symbol: MDL

437
Level: Eighth

60%
Course Title:
Applied Clinical
Biochemistry
Prerequisite: 436
MDL
Course Outline:The aim of this course is to train

students on different routine and special clinical
biochemistry tests used in clinical laboratories
and all technical and scientific procedures
related to these tests.

able to:
40%
Reading List:
-Clinical Biochemistry: Techniques and
Instrumentation: John S Varcoe 2001
-Tietz Textbook of Clinical Chemistry, 3rd
Edition, Burtis , Ashwood and Tietz, 1999
Course symbol: MDL
471
Level: Eighth
Course Title: Case

Study
Prerequisite:
425Hlth OR
426Hlth
- Know clinical biochemistry tests and their

application and operation of equipments
- Know result interpretation, reporting and

authorization
Course Outline:
During this course students will study and
prepare selected case studies for different
disease conditions including physiological,
pathological, clinical, and diagnostic aspects.
Student will thoroughly study the case
designated and carry out all investigation to
draw final diagnosis. The work will be presented
in the form of written report and seminar
presentation.
- Advice and train the medical and laboratory

staff

able to:
- Contribute to research and development in

the laboratory
- Study different disease conditions and perform

required investigations and draw right diagnosis
Teaching Methods:
- Prepare selected case study for disease

condition using patient medical records and
other
- Prepare standard operating procedure (SOP)

manuals
- Prepare and perform quality control
procedures for all tests
- Know method settings and evaluations
- Lectures
102
-Review of Medical Microbiology. Jawetz,

Melnick and Adelberg, 2005.
scientific resources
- Collect data
- Interpret laboratory results and statistics of the

case
- Analyze data
- Trouble shooting
- Prepare and write detailed report.

- Write research progress reports
- Present case study in form of seminar and
discuss it in depth with his colleagues and
instructor
Teaching Methods:
- Write a final paper format with presentation in

form of seminar.
Teaching Methods:
Written report
Seminar presentation
Verbal and questions
Evaluation Means:
Evaluation Means:
- Written Report
50%

50%
- Viva Examination
50%
Reading List:
50%
Reading List:
Elective Courses Description:
Course symbol: MDL

472
Level: Eighth
Course symbol: MDL

480
Level: Ninth
Course Title:
Graduation Project
Course Title:
Laboratory
Management and
Quality Control
Prerequisite:
426Hlth OR
427Hlth
Course Outline:
This course helps student to start
predetermined
project
including
data
acquisition and analysis then write report under
the supervision of a faculty staff member.
able to:
- Conduct practical research
Prerequisite: 70%
of course
curriculum
Course Outline:
This course give an introduction to laboratories
and their types, management, departments,
laboratory information system (LIS), sample
collection, transportation and preservation,
quality assurance. It also includes dealing with
instruments ant its trouble shooting, methods of
103
The student conduct the practical research

project under the supervision of a faculty staff
member
analysis, safety precaution, and recognition of

laboratory dangers.
-Clinical Laboratory Management: Lynne Shore

Garcia, editor (2004)

able to:
-Handbook of Laboratory Health and Safety, 2nd

Edition(1995)
- Define laboratory management
Course symbol: MDL

481
- Describe components
information system (LIS).
of
laboratory
- Describe the methods of specimen collection,

transportation, preservation and storage
Course Title:
Quality
improvement in
Health care
Credit hours:
2(1+1)
Prerequisite: 70%
of course
curriculum
- Write result reports properly

- Understand the importance and relevance of
quality assurance.
Course Outline.
- Describe the important

procedures for
selecting equipments, their operation and
maintenance
Introduction of Quality management system,

quality tools, requirements implementation,
controls, evaluation and Assurance in Health
care
according to certain guidelines.

- Perform quality control test to the equipments
and diagnostic consumables
- Describe safety procedures in different
diagnostic and research laboratories
By the end of this course, student should be able

to
Principle for total Quality management in Health
care organization
Implementation of Total Quality
Management requirement
Teaching Methods:
Organization and Management
- Lectures
Quality management system
- Discussion
Document control
Evaluation Means:
Review control
50%
50%
Reading List:
External services and supplies

Advisory services
Resolution of complaints
104
- Describe general plan of administrative

organization of diagnostic and reference
laboratories
Level: Tenth
Identification and control of nonconformities

Corrective action
PREVENTIVE ACTION
-FUNDAMENTALS OF HEALTH CARE

IMPROVEMENT GREGORY S. OGRINC, LINDA
A. HEADRICK
- TEXTBOOK OF TOTAL QUALITY IN
HEALTHCARE A. F. AL-ASSAF, JUNE A.
CONTINUAL IMPROVEMENT
INTERNAL AUDITS, QUALITY ASSURANCE AND

ACCREDITATION
MANAGEMENT REVIEW
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT
PERSONNEL
COURSE SYMBOL: 485

MDL
LEVEL: TENTH
COURSE TITLE:
SOCIAL AND
PREVENTIVE
MEDICINE
CREDIT HOURS:
2(1+1)
PREREQUISITE: 07%
ACCOMMODATION AND ENVIRONMENTAL
OF COURSE
CONDITIONS
CURRICULUM
EQUIPMENT AND MEDICAL PROCEDURE

LOCAL AND INTERNATIONAL REGULATORY AFFAIRS
TEACHING METHODS:
- LECTURES
COURSE OUTLINE:
IN THIS COURSE STUDENTS ARE INTRODUCED TO
THE HISTORY OF SOCIAL MEDICINE, PREVENTIVE
MEDICINE, PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY, AND
APPLICATION OF EPIDEMIOLOGIC PRINCIPLES IN
- DISCUSSION
PREVENTIVE AND SOCIAL MEDICINE, STUDY

DESIGNS, SCOPE OF SOCIAL AND PREVENTIVE
EVALUATION MEANS:
MEDICINE, COMMUNICABLE AND CHRONIC DISEASES,
- SEMESTER EXAMINATION:
PROJECTS 50%
WRITTEN AND
PREVENTION INTERVENTIONS, SOCIAL AND

BEHAVIORAL ASPECTS OF HEALTH, OCCUPATIONAL
AND ENVIRONMENTAL RISK FACTORS
- FINAL EXAMINATION: 50%
BY THE END OF THIS COURSE, STUDENT SHOULD BE

ABLE TO KNOW:
READING LIST:
- HEALTH CARE ADMINISTRATION: PLANNING,
IMPLEMENTING, AND MANAGING ORGANIZED
DELIVERY SYSTEMS. LAWRENCE WOLPER.
DISCUSS PRINCIPLES AND ASPECTS OF SOCIAL AND
- PRINCIPLES AND METHODS OF QUALITY
TYPES OF RESEARCH STUDIES
MANAGEMENT IN HEALTH CARE
DONALD E.
LIGHTER, DOUGLAS C. FAIR.
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE
DISCUSS THE EPIDEMIOLOGIC PRINCIPLES, VARIOUS
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE AND CHRONIC

DISEASES
PREVENTION INTERVENTIONS
105
SCHMELE
QUALITY AND TECHNICAL RECORDS
UNDERSTAND VARIOUS OCCUPATIONAL,

ENVIRONMENTAL RISK FACTORS

able to
UNDERSTAND CERTAIN BEHAVIORAL ASPECTS IN
- Concept of Business
HEALTH PROMOTION AND DISEASE PREVENTION
- Business planning and policy

-Terminologies related Business Management
TEACHING METHODS:
-Concept of Health care
- THEORY LECTURES
-Health care ethics
- SEMINARS
-Health care Budgeting and Financing
- LABORATORY SESSIONS
-Health care organization and related sector
-Health care Business models
50%
50%
Reading List:
Park text book of Preventive and community
Medicine
Textbook of Public Health and Community
Medicine (by AFMC and WHO India office)
Barker's Text book of Basic Epidemiology
Course symbol: 486
MDL
Course Title:
Business study in
Health care
Level: Tenth
Credit hours: 2
(1+1)
-Health care products in different

Pharmaceutical sector
Biotechnology Sector
Medical Devices Sector
Medical Research sector
Medical informatics
sector
- Health care insurance
sector
- Hospital Sector
- Diagnostic Division sector
-Health care marketing
-
- Health care production sale , promotion and

regulations
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
- Discussion
Prerequisite: 70%
of course
curriculum
Evaluation Means:
Course Outline.
Introduction to Health care Business, model,
Products, marketing ethics , finance ,important
competitive and regulatory forces shaping these
health care sectors
- Semester Examination: Written and Projects

50%
- Final Examination: 50%
Reading List:- Health Care Administration:
Planning, Implementing, and Managing
Organized Delivery Systems. Lawrence Wolper.
106
EVALUATION MEANS:
The Business of Health care Innovation by

LawtonsRobert Burn (Cambridge)
The Business of Health care by Kenneth H. Colin,
Douglas E.Hough
Course symbol: 487

MDL
Level: Tenth
Course Title:
Environmental Health
Education
Credit hours:
2(1+1)
Prerequisite:
07% of course
curriculum
Course Outline: This course focuses on

Health Education, Environmental health,
environmental exposures (from food, air and
water), Hazardous effects of pollution,
communication skills and types of
communication methods.
able to know:
Identify sources of toxic chemicals and define
various environmental hazards. Describe the
fate of toxic chemicals in air, water and soil and
their transfer to human food chain - The
transport mechanisms across the cell membrane
Develop sound knowledge about exposure and
abatement of air and water pollution Understand environmental regulations and
compliance with regulations in specific
instances.
Demonstrate appropriate written and oral
communication skills related to Environmental
health education - Biochemical basis of
generating energy
Teaching Methods:
- Theory lectures
- Seminars
50%
50%
Reading List:
Park's text book of Preventive and Social
Medicine
Textbook of Public Health and Community
Medicine (by AFMC and WHO India office)
Barker's Text book of Basic Epidemiology
Course symbol: MDL
488
Level: Tenth
Course Title:
Haemostasis and
Clot
Prerequisite: 07%
of course
curriculum
Course Outline: This course shows detailed

aspects of the haemostatic process which
includes the coagulation system and fibrinolytic
system, and the concepts about how the
process prevents bleeding as well as thrombosis
by keeping the blood in fluid state within
vascular system
able to know:
107
- Principles of Biomedical Ethics. Beauchamp

and Childress.
- The role of blood vessel, platelet, coagulation

factors, coagulation factors inhibitors, and
fibrinolytic system in hemostatic mechanism
Degrees:
Bachelor of Science (B.Sc.) in Radiologic
Technology.
- All type of diseases and abnormalities tha lead

to bleeding tendency.
Admission requirements :
1. Complying with the colleges admission
requirements
4. Successful completion of the colleges core
program
- the thrombatic tendency and tha factors might

be inclusive and mechanisms associated
3. Place availability
- The uses of the anti coagulants, and the

monitoring investigations
Graduation requirements :
For graduation, students have to:
- General molecular concepts about the

haemostatic inherited diseases.
Pass the universitys preparatory year,

which involves 16 credit hours of
English language, 6 credit hours of
mathematics, 6 credit hours of
computer, 4 credit hours of physical
sciences, and 2 credit hours of learning
skills.
Pass the 140 credit units of the college

of applied medical sciences, which are
distributed
to
eight
academic
semesters.
Successfully complete the internship

year
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
- Seminars
Evaluation Means:
50%
50%
Reading List:
Practical hematology 12
S.M. Lewis 2008
th
edition, john Dacie,
Clinical hematology, principles, procedures,

th
correlations. 8
edition. Cheryl lotspeichsteininger. Anne Stiene- Martin. John Koepke
2004
Department of Radiologic
Technology:
Career opportunities :
The graduates of the radiologic technology
department have various opportunities to work
as radiographic technologists in general
radiography, ultrasound imaging, CT scan, MRI,
nuclear medicine, and any other division of
radiology department of either government or
private hospitals and/or health care centers. The
graduates also have an opportunity to work in
the academic field and research centers.
Faculty (Radiologic Technology)

A-Nasr Aldeen Mohamed Naeem
Lecturer
A-Abdullah Hamdan
Lecturer
Sunil Kalagi
Lecturer
108
- The coagulation investigations used to detect

these abnormalities
Abdulrhman Alshahrani
Demonstrator
No.
etical
tical
ai
ni
ng
ed
it
me
nt
Study Plan:
Level 1
Cod
e
No.
Course
Title
IC
102
Islamic
Culture
(2)
IC
101
AN
AT
114
Principle
s
of
Anatomy
BHS
111
PHS
L
115
Principle
s
of
physiolo
gy
BHS
111
MD
L
117
Principle
s
of
Medical
Microbio
logy
BHS
111
Organic
Chemistr
y
CHE
M
116
CHE
M
113
Ethics of
Medical
Professio
n
HLT
H
123
HLT
H
124
Biostatist
ics
14
Credit Teaching Units

Theor
etical
Prac
tical
Tr
ai
ni
ng
Cr
ed
it
IC
101
Islamic
Culture
(1)
ARA
B
101
Arabic
Language
Skills
BHS
111
Human
Biology
CHE
M
113
General
Chemistr
y
PHY
S
112
General
Physics
HLT
H
121
Medical
Terminol
ogy
HLT
H
122
Health
Care
System
&Vocatio
nal
Safety
Total
Req
uire
me
nt
Total
15
Course
Title
19
Level 3
4
Co
de
N
o.
19
Level 2
Cod
e
HLT
H
122
Req
uire

Theor
Prac
Tr
Cr
Course
Title
Credit
Units
Teaching
Th
eo
re
tic
Tr
ai
ni
Pra
ctic
al
Cr
ed
it
Req
uire
me
nt
Ty
pe
of
Re
qu
ire
m
109
al
IC
10
3
Islamic
Culture
(3)
AR
AB
10
3
Arabic
Editing
HL
TH
22
5
Emerge
ncy
Health
Care
RA
D
24
1
Radiatio
n
Physics
&
Nuclear
Medicin
e
en
t
ng
RAD
241
IC
101
M
DL
25
2
4
1
Total
PHY
S
112
Principl
es
of
Image
Formati
on&
Acquisit
ion
AN
AT
114
PHY
S
112
CHE
M
116
RAD
241
RA
D
25
1
Principl
e
of
General
Radiogr
aphy -1
13
AN
AT
114
PHS
L
AN
AT
114
PHS
L
115
CHE
M
116
MD
L
117
18
Level 4
PHS
L
115
RA
D2
31
General
Patholo
gy
AN
AT
114
HLT
H
122
115
Cod
e
No.
Course Title
IC
104
Req
uire
me
nt
Th
eo
re
tic
al
Prac
tical
Tr
ai
ni
ng
Cr
ed
it
Islamic
Culture (4)
IC1
01
RA
D
232
Radiographi
c Anatomy
&
Physiology-1
RA
D
251
RA
D
242
Medical
Imaging
Equipments
RA
D
241
RA
D
252
Principle of
General
Radiography
-2
RA
D
251
RA
D
Patient care
in Radiology
HLT
H
110
233
Department
RA
D
251
RA
D
234
Radiation
Safety
&
Protection
RA
D
231
RA
D
251
MD
L
xxx
College
Electivegroup -1
Total
14
RAD
343
RAD353
Course
Title
Credit
Units
Teaching
Th
eo
ret
ica
l
Pra
ctic
al
Tr
ain
ing
Physics
of
Comput
ed
Tomogr
aphy
Clinical
Practice
-1
Ultraso
und
Physics
Viewing
&
Reading
Medical
Images
-1
RAD
335
Radiogr
aphic
Anatom
y
&
Physiolo
gy-2
RA
D
232
RAD
361
Contras
t Media
&
it's
applicat
ions
CHE
M
116
Pathop
hysiolog
y
13
18
Cr
edi
t
Req
uire
me
nt
MDL
354
RA
D
242
Total
RA
D
232
RA
D
353
RA
D
251
MD
L
252
18
Level 6
RA
D
232
RA
D
242
RAD
344
RAD
354
CHE
M1
16
Level 5
Code
No.
&
Equipm
ent
225
RA
D
242
Cod
e
No.
Course
Title
RA
D
371
Compute
d
Tomogra
phy scan
Imaging

Theor
etical
Prac
tical
Tr
ai
ni
ng
Cr
ed
it
Req
uire
me
nt
RA
D
343
RA
D
111
353
RA
D
362
X-ray
Fluorosc
opic
Techniqu
e
RA
D
232
RA
D
242
RA
D36
1
RA
D
372
Nuclear
Medicine
Techniqu
e
RA
D
242
RA
D
361
RA
D
443
Physics
of
Magnetic
Resonan
ce
RA
D
355
Clinical
Practice 2
RA
D
242
College
Electivegroup -2
MD
L
213
Or
MD
L
232
xxx
Free
course
12
17
Level 7
Cod
e
No.
Course
Title
RA
D
473
Req
uire
me
nt
Theor
etical
Prac
tical
Tr
ai
ni
ng
Cr
ed
it
Magnetic
Resonan
ce
Imaging
RA
D
343
RA
D
474
Ultrasou
nd
Imaging
RA
D
345
RA
D
456
Viewing
&
Reading
Medical
Images 2
RA
D
354
RA
D
362
RA
D
252
RA
D
353
MD
L
xxx
Total
RA
D
355
RA
D
xxx
Departm
ent
Elective
RA
D
xxx
Departm
ent
Elective
HLT
H
xxx
College
Electivegroup -3
75%
of
Tea
chin
g
Pla
112
n
x
Total
11
15
17
Course Description(Radiologic Technology):
Level 8
Co
de
N
o.
Course
Title
RA
D
xx
x
Depart
ment
Elective
RA
D
43
6
Quality
Manage
ment in
Radiolo
gy
Depart
ment
RA
D4
37
Graduat
ion
Project
Credit
Units
Teaching
Th
eo
re
tic
al
Tr
ai
ni
ng
Pra
ctic
al
Cr
ed
it
Req
uire
me
nt
RAD
231
RAD
353
421
HLT
H
427
HLT
H
Free
Course
Level: 1
Course Title: Human

Biology
Requirements:
Preparatory Year
Course Units: (Theory

+ Practice): 4(3+1)
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Cre
dit
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
10
Practical
Exam
15t
h
15
10
Assignm
ents &
Reports
15
st
nd
12
1 Half
Exam
2 Half
Exam
or
xx
x
Ty
pe
of
Re
qu
ire
m
en
t
Course Code: BHS 111
th
Total
Semester
Assessment
Final Exam
16th
50%
50%
Course objectives:
This course aims to provide students with the
functions;
eukaryotes
vs.
prokaryotes;
classification of live organisms; introduction to
the genetics and introduction to human biology;
introduction to human physiology, anatomy,
and introduction to human embryology.
3
Course description:
113
This course consists of the following

components: The cell as a functional unit,
structure, and the main aspects of cell
specialization; cytology and classification of live
organisms; The transport mechanisms across
the cell membrane ; The main principles of
PhysiologyThe
cellular
division
and
multiplication; DNA and RNA, formation; DNA
and the genetic code ; Cellular processes needed
for live- Biochemical basis of generating energy;
Spermatogenesis Oogenesis in humanFertilization and basic embryology; Introduction
to specialized anatomical structure; Hormonal
regulation of vital functions- Neuronal
regulation of vital functions; Microscopy and
tissue preparation methods, staining, cell
structure, organelle function, cell division,
nucleic acids, cellular genetics, Mendelian
genetics, Principles of embryology, main human
tissues, principles of anatomy and physiology of
human body systems
Requirements:
Preparatory Year
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Cre
dit
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Cre
dit
1st Half
Exam
6th
10
Practical
Exam
15t
h
15
2nd Half
Exam
12t
h
10
Assignm
ents &
Reports
15
Total
Semester
Assessment
Final Exam
16th
50%
50%
Teaching Methods:
Course objectives:
Lectures,
Labs and Workshops
Recommended text books

Human Biology: Concepts and Current Issues.
Michael D. Johnson
Human Biology. Mader Sylvia , 7th edition ,
2002.
Course
112
Code:
PHYS
Course Title: PHYSICS
Level: 1

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
This course is designed specifically for students

enrolled in the College of Applied Medical
Sciences, which include departments such as
medical laboratory, optometry, medical
radiation techniques, and physiotherapy. The
course includes experiments that are direct
theoretical component of the course. Fluid
dynamics, thermal properties of materials,
electrical properties of materials, optics and
waves and radiations. The importance of the
process of scientific investigation as a means of
solving problems in everyday life; ; To develop
experimental and investigative abilities; To
develop the skills necessary to find solutions to
scientific problems; To understand that scientific
ideas are developed within a contemporary and
historical context.
Course description:
114

components:
Viscosity
measurement
;
Properties and sensation of sound ;Optics and
laser ,Heat and thermal expansion ;Heat
Equivalent ,Optical properties of materials
(Snells Law) ; DC Measurements and the
concept
of
E-filed.,
Interference
of
Electromagnetic Waves; The Spectrum of
Hydrogen Atom, Radiation Detection and
Measurements
Teaching methods:
Lectures
Labs and workshops
1.
2.
3.
College physics
Serway R. and J.
Faughn
Physics in Biology and Medicine, Third
Edition (Complementary Science) by
Paul Davidovits
Physics of the Human Body (Biological
and Medical Physics, Biomedical
Engineering) by Irving P. Herman
Course Code: CHEM

113
Level: 1
Course Title: General

Chemistry
Requirements:
Preparatory Year

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Cre
dit
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
10
Practical
Exam
15t
h
15
10
Assignm
ents &
Reports
15
st
nd
12
1 Half
Exam
2 Half
Exam
th
Total
Semester
Assessment
Final Exam
16
50%
th
50%
Course objectives:
This course aims to provide students with
General concepts, chemical calculations,
molecular weight and chemical reactions in
aqueous
solutions,
energy
and
its
transformation, chemical bonds and chemical
reactions and the cyclic table, thermal
chemistry, properties of substances and
Course description:
components: Describe the atomic structure and
define atomic number, mass number and
isotopes; Know chemical and physical bonding
and their properties; Know types of chemical
reactions and concept of rate of reaction; Know
mole, molar mass, molarity and molality and
their use in laboratory; Know calculation
formulae and their use in clinical laboratory ;
Know oxidation-reduction reactions and their
biological significance; Know different types of
solutions and solubility; Define acids, bases and
describe acid-base reactions; Understand
concept of pH and its calculations; Know buffers
and their types; Know activation energy and
endothermic and exothermic reactions ; Know
st
nd
1 and 2 law of thermodynamics and chemical
equilibrium
Teaching methods:
Lectures
Labs and workshops
115
1.
2.
3.
General Chemistry, Ebbing DD, latest

Ed.
General Chemistry, Hill et al. Latest Ed.
Virtual Chemistry Online
general
principal
medical
terms
and
abbreviations corresponding to their Arabic
homologues.
Course description:
Code:
HLTH
This course consists

components: Correctly
terms.
Level: 1
Course Title: Medical

Terninology
Requirements:
Preparatory Year

+ Practice): 2(2+0)
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
Cre
dit
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Cre
dit
12.5
Practical
Exam
15t
h
Assignm
ents &
Reports
15
st
1 Half
Exam
nd
2 Half
Exam
We
ek
th
th
12
12.5
Explain the meanings of the common medical

terms regularly usable in medical and health
area; Correctly understand sentences that
include these terms and abbreviations; Fluent
conversation in English with workers in the
health field
Teaching methods:
Lectures,
Labs and Workshops
1.
2.
Total
Semester
Assessment
Final Exam
of the following
pronounce medical
Medical Terminology for Health

Professions.
Ann Ehrlich, Carol L
Schroeder.
Comprehensive Medical Terminology.
Betty Davis Jones
50%
th
16
50%
Course objectives:
linguistic structural basis for scientific and
medical terminology in Latin and English and
explanation of the main terms in different
applications of medical science specialties to
enable advanced students in different branches
and graduates deal easily with physicians and
other workers in different specialties. The
course also aims at acquainting students with
the pronunciation, writing and understanding of
Course
122
Code:
HLTH
Level: 1
Course Title: Health

Care
System
and
Vocational Safety
Requirements:
Preparatory Year

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Assessm
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
Instructors:
We
ek
Cre
dit
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
10
Practical
Exam
15t
h
15
116
Course
121
th
12
10
Assignm
ents &
Reports
1.
15
2.
3.
Total
Semester
Assessment
Final Exam
16th
4.
50%
50%
Course objectives:
Introduction to applied health sciences, concept
of health and factors affecting it, the general
hierarchy of health services and their current
and future needs, ethics of practice of the
Course description:
components: Define health management;
Describe
the
organization
of
health
management and its general hierarchy; Define
the health team and describe the principles of
organization and control of the team; Explain
the meaning of supervision and leadership;
Mention the principles of organization ethics;
Describe the levels of health care; Define
quality and describe how to achieve in health
care services; Mention the instruments and
advantages of achieving quality of health care;
no danger associated with health departments
and affecting worker; Know safety procedures
and problem solving in biohazard.
Course
123
Health Care Administration: Planning,

Implementing,
and
Managing
Organized
Principles of Biomedical Ethics.
Beauchamp and Childress.
www.islamset.com )
Islamic
constitution of medical profession
Code:
HLTH
Level: 2

Ethics
Requirements:
Preparatory Year

+ Practice): 2(2+0)
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
Cre
dit
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Cre
dit
12.5
Practical
Exam
15t
h
Assignm
ents &
Reports
We
ek
st
nd
12
1 Half
Exam
2 Half
Exam
th
th
12.5
Total
Semester
Assessment
Final Exam
16th
15
40%
60%
Course objectives:
Lectures,

understanding of medical ethics, concepts,
rights and duties. Introduction to effective
personal development knowledge and skills will
Labs and Workshops
Course description:
Teaching methods:

components: Know and describe the ethics of
117
nd
2 Half
Exam
medical professions; Know and describe the

rights and duties of medical team member
towards the patients; Know and describe the
towards the community; Know and describe the
towards the colloquies; Know and describe the
towards himself; Know and describe the rights
and duties of medical team member towards
the profession; Know and describe the rights
and duties of medical ethics in research; Acquire
the skill of effective pro-activity; Acquire the skill
of effective planning; Acquire the skill of
effective prioritization; Acquire the skill of
effective win-win thinking; Acquire the skill of
effective communication; Acquire the skill of
effective team configuration.; Acquire the skill
of effective synergism.
Teaching methods:
Lectures,
Labs and Workshops
1.
2.
Ethics of practicing the profession of

medicine- The Saudi Council of medical
specialist- KSA 2005
The Seven Habits of Highly Effective
People - effective lessons in the process
of personal change, Stephen R. Covey.
st
1 Half
Exam
th
Practical
Exam
15t
h
10
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
10
15
Assignm
ents &
Reports
15
.4
Total
Semester
Assessment
Final Exam
16
40%
th
60%
Course objectives:
Introduction to anatomy of different regions and
organs of human body; Systemic anatomy of:
joints, lymph, digestive, urinary, reproductive,
cardiovascular, respiratory, nervous (CNS and
autonomic), musculoskeletal, endocrine, and
embryology. Clinical anatomy of certain diseases
in relation to systems organs
This course covers the basic gross anatomical
features of the human body that include:
digestive, respiratory, cardiovascular, urogenital,
neuroendocrinal, lymphoid and musculoskeletal
systems. The course also covers the principles of
clinical anatomy.
Course description:
Course
114
Code:
ANAT
Course Title: Principles

of Anatomy
Requirements:
BHS
111
Level: 2

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Instructors:
.3
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Cre
dit
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Cre
dit

components: Describe the general structural
characteristics of the human body; Mention the
anatomical characteristics of the different
organs and systems; Compare the different
organ structures and locate their sites in the
body; Define planes , orientation, section and
surface anatomy of the body including sites of
the body cavities; Relate clinical observation to
gross anatomy ; Know the anatomical structure
of the various systems of the human body;
118
Know the relationship between some diseases

and the anatomical structure; Know some facts
about the human embryology.
Teaching methods:
Lectures,
Labs and Workshops
This course aims to provide students the basis of

various physiological functions of the body from
the cell as the smallest functional component of
the body to the function of various organs,
systems. Further, these systems will be studied
with objective to enhance the concept of
integrative physiology, as functions of these
systems, to the most part, they are interrelated.

1.
2.
Clinically oriented anatomy. Keith. L.

th
Moore. 4 Ed. 1999.
Principles of Human Anatomy, by
Gerard J. Tortora
Course Code: PHSL 115
Level: 2

of Physiology
Requirements:
BHS
111

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Instructors:
.1
Assessm
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Practical
Exam
15t
h
10
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
10
Cre
dit
15
Assignm
ents &
Reports
Final Exam
16
Teaching methods:
Lectures,
Labs and Workshops
15
.2
Total
Semester
Assessment

components: The basic aspects of physiology
and body functions; The functional division of
the Nervous System (NS); The function of NS
and the exerted control on key body organs; The
human
endoskeleton,
movement
and
locomotion; The chemical messengers and
Endocrine system; The cardiovascular system
and Hepatic circulation; The neural control of
blood volume and pressure; The body fluid
compartments and the blood as a tissue; The
renal system and Homeostasis; The respiratory
system and gas exchanges; The respiratory-renal
adjustment of acid base; The digestive systemThe
Pancreatic-Hepatic
functions;
The
reproductive system- The ovarian, Hormonal
and menstrual cycles

1.
50%
th
50%
2.
3.
4.
Course objectives:
Silverthorn, D.U. :Human Physiology:

An Integrated approach
Human Anatomy & Physiology :Elaine
N. Marieb.
Text Book of Medical Physiology:
Guyton and Hall Saunders
Principals of Medical Physiology: W.F.
Gannong
119
Course description:
Course Code: CHEM

116
Level: 2
Course Title: Organic

Chemistry
Requirements: CHEM
113

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Practical
Exam
15t
h
We
ek
Cre
dit
Cre
dit
alcohol and their classification and their physical

and chemical properties; Know aldehydes and
ketones and their physical and chemical
properties; Define aromatic compounds,
describe benzene structure and mention their
physical and chemical properties; Know
carboxylic acids, their classification and their
chemical and physical properties.
Teaching methods:
Lectures,
st
1 Half
Exam
th
10
Labs and Workshops

15
th
12
10
Total
Semester
Assessment
Final Exam
16th
Assignm
ents &
Reports
1. Organic Chemistry . Mc Murray.

2. Organic Chemistry . Wade L.
3. Introductory
to
Organic
15
and
Biochemistry Experiments for students
in Health Professions. Brabson D.
50%
50%
Course objectives:
course covers general subjects in organic
chemistry including aliphatic and aromatic
hydrocarbons, their properties and reactions,
alkyl, halides, alcohols, ethers, phenols,
aldehydes, ketones, amines and carboxylic acids.
Course Code: MDL 117
Level: 2

of
Medical
Microbiology
Requirements:
BHS
111

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
.1
Assess
ment
st
1 Half
Exam
Wee
k
Cre
dit
th
10
Course description:
components:
Know hydrocarbons, their
classification, nomenclature, physical and
chemical; properties and describe aliphatic and
aromatic hydrocarbons; Know reactions of
deletion, addition and substitution; Know
methane, ethylene, and acetylene and mention
their properties; Know alkyl halides, ether and
Instructors:
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
10
Total
Semester
Assessment
Assessme
nt
We
ek
Practical
Exam
15t
h
Assignme
nts
&
Reports
Cre
dit
15
15
50%
120

nd
2 Half
Exam
Final Exam
16th
Lectures,
50%
Labs and Workshops

general principles of microbiology including
classification of different groups of microbes,
morphology of each group and study of their
characters. Also the study includes a brief
introduction to the infectious diseases regarding
their types, causative microbial agents and
methods of their control together with study of
food and air microbiology.
Course description:
components: General Bacteriology: Introduction
to bacteriology, morphological shape of
microorganisms, structure of bacterial cell,
reproduction and growth of bacteria, physiology
of microorganisms, physical conditions required,
or growth of bacteria, bacterial genetics,
bacterial relationship, bacteriophage, bacterial
metabolic products, system of bacterial
identification, Infection, pathogenicity and
virulence and chemotherapy.
General Virology: Introduction to virology,
classification of viruses, structure of viruses,
growth of viruses, viral genetics, Infection and
pathogenicity of virus diseases.
General Mycology: Introduction to mycology,
classification of mycology, structure of fungi,
reproduction of fungi, growth of fungi,
Infections and pathogenicity.
General
Parsitology:
Introduction
to
parasitology, general definitions, Infections and
pathogenicity of parasites. Epidemiology of
parasites, diagnostics of parasites, control of
parasites, classification of parasites: (Protozoa,
Helminthes, and Arthropods).
Teaching methods:

1.
2.
Course
124
Foundations in Microbiology. Kathleen

P. Talaro, 2004.USA.
Medical
Microbiology:
A
short
Course.Baron, et al., 1994.Willey-Lis.
Code:
HLTH
Level: 2
Course
Biostatistics
Requirements:
122
Title:
Hlth

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
Cre
dit
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Practical
Exam
15t
h
Assignm
ents &
Reports
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
th
10
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
10
Cre
dit
15
15
.3
Total
Semester
Assessment
Final Exam
16th
50%
50%
Course objectives:
detailed description
of characters types,
displaying and presenting data, measures of
121
Course objectives:
central tendency, measures of dispersion,

principles of probability, random variables and
probability distribution, bimodal distribution,
natural distribution, confidence intervals for
mean, median, ratios and various statistics tests.
Course description:
This course
components:
consists
of
the
following
Teaching methods:
Course
225
st
Cre
dit
th
1 Half
Exam
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Practical
Exam
15t
h
10
th
2 Half
Exam
12
10
Cre
dit
15
Assignm
ents &
Reports
15
.1
Total
Semester
Assessment
Final Exam
16
50%
th
50%
Course objectives:
methods of dealing with critical clinical cases.
The student should know how to diagnose these
cases, give the first aid procedure and call the
ambulance in the proper time.
Lectures,
Course description:
Labs and Workshops

components: Know the critical clinical cases;
Diagnose these cases; Give the first aid of these
cases; Call the ambulance in the proper time.
2.
We
ek
nd
Identify the different methods of collecting

data; Interpret different types of data
summaries including tables and charts; Show
the advantages and disadvantages of different
types of data presentation; Identify measures of
central tendency and measures of dispersion
and interpreting them; Estimate means and
their confidence intervals and interpret results;
Identify properties of natural distribution and
explain the diverse repeated distribution of
biomedical data; Apply the suitable test for a list
of specific data such as student T test, F test, or
chi-square test; Use of computer applications in
biomedical data analysis.
1.
Assessm
ent

Sciences. Chernick M and Friis R
Presenting medical statistics from
proposal to publication. Janet Peacock,
2006.
Code:
HLTH
Level: 3
Teaching methods:
Lectures,
Labs and Workshops
1. Internet source material specific to each

Course
Title:
Ambulance Care
Requirements:
Hlth
122 + Anat 114

+ Practice): 2(1+1)
Instructors:
critical clinical case as determined by the

instructors.
2. Workshops given by ministry of health and

Red Cresset
122
Level: 4th

of Biochemistry
Requirements: Chem
116

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Practical
Exam
15t
h
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
10
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
10
Cre
dit
15
Assignm
ents &
Reports
15
.1
Total
Semester
Assessment
Final Exam
16
chemical structures and biological significance

with brief reference to some pathological
conditions caused by lipid disorders such as
arthrosclerosis; Know amino acids, their
classification, physical and chemical properties
as well as describing their chemical structures,
their main biological significance; Know
proteins, their structures and physical and
chemical forces affecting their structure with
brief reference to some common proteins, e.g.,
haemoglobin, hormones e.g. insulin and
immunoglobulin e.g. IgG ; Describe enzymes and
their role in the biological reactions and as well
as their diagnostic role in many diseases e.g.
enzyme amylase in pancreatitis; Know the
structure of nucleic acids i.e. DNA and RNA and
their role in protein biosynthesis with brief
reference to some of genetic disorders such
thalassaemia and cystic fibrosis.
Teaching methods:
50%
th
Lectures,
50%
Labs and Workshops
Course objectives:
detailed study of the chemical compositions and
the biological functions of the main biochemical
molecules including carbohydrates, proteins,
lipids and their components, enzymes and
different types of hormones. It also includes
methods of practical qualitative and quantitative
assays to discover these molecules.
1- Biochemistry. Richard H. and Pamela C.

Level: 3

Pathology
Requirements: Anat
114, Phsl 115, Chem
116, MDL 117

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Practical
Exam
15t
h
Assignm
ents &
Course description:
This course
components:
consists
of
the
following
st
Know and classify the different groups of

carbohydrates and their main biological
significance with brief reference to some
pathological conditions such as diabetes; Know
and classify the main lipids and describe their
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
10
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
Cre
dit
15
123
10
Reports
1.
15
2.
Total
Semester
Assessment
Final Exam
16th
3.
50%
50%
4.
th

2007, Elsevier.
Concise Pathology, by Parakrama
nd
Chandrasoma & Clive Taylor: 2 Ed.
Prentice-Hall international, Inc, 1995.
Pathology
illustrated,
by
Peter
MacFarlane, Robin Reid & Robin
Callander, 5 th ed, Churchill Livingstone
Rosai and Ackerman Surgical Pathology,
th

introduction to general and basic knowledge of
diseases, their causes, pathogenesis, general
morphological and changes at gross,
microscopic and submicroscopic levels as well as
the prognosis of the disease.
Course description:
components: Definition of pathology and
disease, causes of diseases,
pathology
specimens and methods of pathological studies
and their relation to clinical aspects;
Inflammation and repair,- Cell injury,
degeneration,
tissue
deposits,
necrosis,
gangrene; Circulatory disturbances, - Infection
and granuloma, - Growth disorders and tumors;
Terms in pathology ; types and causes of
disease, pathogenesis, morphological changes in
gross and microscopic levels, symptoms and
signs as well as disease outcome. Also this
course covers the main pathological changes as
inflammation,
degeneration,
circulatory
disorders,
immune
disorders,
growth
disturbances and tumors.
Teaching methods:
Lectures,
Labs and Workshops
Level: 6
Course Title: Principle

of Medical Genetics
Requirements: MDL
213/214

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Practical
Exam
15t
h
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
10
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
10
Total
Semester
Assessment
Final Exam
16th
Cre
dit
15
Assignm
ents &
Reports
15
50%
50%
Course objectives:
summarized idea about principles of medical
genetics and its applications in health and
disease through studying chromosomal map,
genetic control of cell functions, mutations, and
diseases
resulting
from
chromosomal
124
Course objectives:
aberrations,
Mendelian
disorders
and
multifactorial disorders. Also it deals with
modern techniques and laboratory tests to
diagnosis genetic diseases, genetic engineering
and genetic counseling.
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
nd
This course
components:
consists
of
the
Teaching methods:
Lectures,
Labs and Workshops
1.
Principles of Medical Genetics, 2nd

edition. By: Thomas D Gelehrter MD;
2. Francis Collins MD, PhD; David
Ginsburg MD, 2007.
3. Medical Genetics, Ekram Abdel-Salam,
Cairo, 2006.
4. Medical Genetics at a glance, by
Dorian Pritchard, Bruce R Korf,
Blackwell
Publishing.
Level: 5
Course
Title:
Pathophysiology
Requirements:
252
MDL

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Instructors:
Assessm
We
Cre
Assessm
th
We
Cre
th
12
10
following
Define chromosome, chromosomal map, genes

and chromosomal aberrations and mutation;
Explain genetic control of cell function and
protein synthesis; Classify genetic disorders into
cytogenetic, Mendelian and multifactorial
disorders; Recognize the basis of laboratory
tests used in screening and diagnosis of genetic
disorders and premarital evaluation (screening);
Genetic engineering and gene therapy
dit
ent
ek
Practical
Exam
15t
h
10
2 Half
Exam
Course description:
ek
Total
Semester
Assessment
Final Exam
16
dit
15
Assignm
ents &
Reports
15
50%
th
50%
Course objectives:
This course aims to provide students with a
summarized idea about structural and
physiological aspects of different diseases
affecting body organs and tissues with
correlation to pathological process in laboratory
and clinical findings and also the basic lines of
management. The study is practically aided by
identifying tissue sections of normal tissues
compared different common diseases.
Course description:
components: Understand, and apply basic facts
and concerns about normal function of different
systems and correlate between functional
disorders and disease process; Correlate
pathological changes and functional disorders to
abnormal laboratory findings; Histological
structure and function as well as functional
disorders and common diseases affecting
different body organs and tissues; Functional
disturbances and their relation to appearance of
disease manifestations; To recognize the disease
characteristics and the ways of diagnosis and
brief account on principles of management ;
Pathological process to laboratory, clinical
125
findings. Practical for identifying tissue sections

of normal tissues as well as different common
diseases.
Teaching methods:
Reports
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
th
16
50%
Final
Exam
th
16
50%
Lectures,
Labs and Workshops
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Textbook
of
physiology
and
Pathophysiology, essentials and clinical
problems, 2000.
Pathophysiology
review,
classical
clinical cases, 2002.
ACC Atlas of Pathophysiology, by:
Springhouse, 2007.
Essentials of Pathophysiology: Concepts
of Altered Health States by MattsonPorth, 2004.
Pathophysiology for the Health
Professions, 2nd ed. By Gould, 2002.
Course Code: RAD 241
Level: 3
Course Title: Radiation

Physics and Nuclear
Medicine
Requirements:
PHYS
112+ANAT114+PHSL115
Course
Units:
(Theory + Practice):
3(2+1)
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
10
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
10
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Practical
Exam
15t
h
Assignm
ents &
Cre
dit
15
15
Total
Semester
Assessment
Final Exam
16
50%
th
50%
Course objectives:
basic knowledge and fundamentals of radiation
physics in medicine for both diagnostic and
therapeutic applications. The course gives the
students an introductory overview of the
nature, generation, type, and characteristics of
radiation used for medical imaging and
treatment. It also give them a brief description
of interactions of radiation with matter,
radiation detection and measurements, and
production
and
characteristics
of
radiopharmaceuticals used in nuclear medicine
applications.
Course description:
components: introduction and background of
radiation and its uses in medicine; atom and its
physical construction; radiation activities;
characteristics and types of radiation used for
medical applications; techniques of radiation
production; radiation spectrum and intensity;
interaction of radiation with matter; gamma ray
and its production and characteristics;
radioisotopes and radiopharmaceutical kits used
in nuclear medicine; construction,conponants
and application of gamma camera..
126
common factors that would have an impact on

the image, and the ways of controlling and
optimizing them in order to produce an image
with a good quality. In addition, the course is
expected to get the students familiar with digital
imaging techniques.
Lectures
Labs and workshops
1- Fundamentals of X-Ray Physics-2008 (Georgii
V Pavlinsky).
2- Atoms, Radiation, and Radiation Protection
(Physics Textbook) 2007 (James E. Turner).
3- Radiologic Science for Technologists: Physics,
Biology, and Protection 2008 (Stewart
C.Bushong).
Course Code: RAD 231 Level: 3
of Image Formation &
Acquisition
Requirements: PHYS
112+CHEM 116+RAD
241

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Instructors:
Course description:
The course covers most of the main aspects of
medical imaging. These include radiologic films
and their types and components; imaging
cassettes with intensifying screens; digital
imaging plates; imaging procedures and
techniques; image quality parameter including
contrast , resolution and their related exposure
factors; image defects; dark room; manual and
automatic film developing; film sensitivity and
its measurements; and the principle of digital
imaging
Teaching methods:
Assessm
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
10
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
10
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Practical
Exam
15t
h
Assignm
ents &
Reports
Cre
dit

15
15
th
16
50%
Final
Exam
th
16
Lectures
Labs and workshops
50%
1- John L. Ball , Chesney's Radiographic Imaging

, 1995 .
2- Terri L. Fauber , Radiographic Imaging and
Exposure , 2008 .
of
General
Radiography-1
Requirements: ANAT
114+PHSL
115+RAD
241

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Assessm
ent
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Practical
Exam
15t
h
Instructors:
Course objectives:
By completing this course, students are
expected to be aware of and understand the
mechanism by which a medical image is
generated and constructed for the most of
human body's organs and their main parts. The
students should be able to understand the most
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
10
Cre
dit
15
127
Teaching methods:
th
12
10
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
Assignm
ents &
Reports
15
th
16
50%
Final
Exam
th
16
50%
Course objectives:
The aim of this course is to provide students
with scientific and practical knowledge that
should enable them to know and understand
the terminologies and techniques of medical
imaging. The course also aims to help the
students to identify the routine and alternative
procedures and positions used for radiological
investigations. In addition, the students will
learn the skills required for image assessment.
Course description:
This course consists of two major components:
the scientific terminologies used for general
radiography; the routine and alternative
techniques and positions used for general
radiological investigations such as upper and
lower extremities, chest, abdomen, and pelvis.
The course covers in depth the selection of
appropriate exposure factors and the technical
procedures and steps to be followed for
successful competition of these investigations.
In addition, the students will be provided with
special radiographical positioning skills required
for some emergency cases.
Teaching methods:
Lectures
Labs and workshops
Recommended text books:
1- A. Stewart Whitley , Clark's Positioning in
Radiography , 2005 .
2Kenneth L. Bontrager , Textbook of

Radiographic Positioning and Related Anatomy,
2009.
Level: 4

Imaging & Equipments
Requirements:
RAD
241

+ Practice): 2(2+0)
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
Assessm
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
12.5
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
12.5
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
Practical
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
Assignm
ents &
Reports
Final
Exam
16
15
th
16
th
60%
40%
Course objectives:
The ultimate goal of this course is to provide
students with the basic knowledge of electronics
and physics related to X-ray radiography
machines. This includes: electrical and electronic
circuits, main supply, physical and mechanical
operations, radiation safety and protection. In
this course, the students will also identify a wide
range of X-ray machines with different type,
operation , application and how to avoid the
malfunction of these machines.
Course description:
This course consists of the following sections: Xray machines and their main electrical and
electronic components; electrical main supply,
connections and cables; a full description of X-
128
nd
2 Half
Exam
ray tube and its components; timers and

collimation; and type of general X-ray machines.
In addition, the course covers some other
technologies used in medical imaging such as
ultrasound and magnetic resonance techniques
with a general overview of their major
components.
Teaching methods:
Lectures
and parts of some systems of the human body.

The course enables the students to physically
feel, draw and discuss these parts using
anatomical models, phantoms and radiological
images, and to learn the relationship between
the real objects and images. Also the course
enables them to study and know the
fundamental differences between diseases and
fractures in the bones of the human body.

1- P.H carter , Chesney's Equipment for Student
Radiographers ,1995 .
Level: 4
Course
Radiographic
Anatomy
Physiology-1
Requirements:
241
Title:

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
RAD
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
Cre
dit
Assessm
ent
&
This course consists of an explanation of the

essential anatomy and physiology of the parts of
some systems of the human body with the aid of
images. The course covers mainly the skeletal
system of the body including skull, chest bones
with ribs and sternum, upper extremities such
as hand, arm and shoulder, lower extremities
such as foot, leg, knee and thigh, and all the
joints of these extremities. It also covers some
of anatomical parts related to general
radiography.
Teaching methods:
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
th
10
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
10
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
Practical
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit

th
15
Assignm
ents &
Reports
Final
Exam
16
15
15
th
16
50%
Lectures
Labs and workshops
th
50%
Course objectives:
The aim of this course is to help students to
identify anatomy and physiology of the organs
1. Kenneth L. Bontrager , Textbook of

Radiographic Positioning and Related
Anatomy , 2009.
2. James D. Mace , Radiographic Pathology for
Technologists , 2008 .
3.
Level: 4
Course Title: Principle

of
General
Radiography-2
Requirements: ANAT
114+PHSL
115+RAD
241

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Instructors:
129
Course description:
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
Assessm
ent
nd
th
12
10
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
th
15
Assignm
ents &
Reports
Lectures
Labs and workshops
Cre
dit
Practical
Exam
10
2 Half
Exam
We
ek
15
15

Anatomy ,2009.
th
16
Final
Exam
th
16
50%
50%
Course objectives:
This course aims to enrich students with further
scientific and practical knowledge of what they
already studied and learnt in the previous
course (RAD 251). The students will be able to
know and learn the techniques, routine and
alternatives positions and procedures of of
general X-ray radiographic examinations for the
rest of the human bodys systems, which were
not covered in the previous course.
Course description:
This course is consisting of two major
components: the scientific terminologies used
for general X-ray radiography; the routine and
alternative techniques and positions used for
general radiological investigations such as skull,
cervical, thoracic, lumber, sacral and coccygeal
spinal vertebras, paranasal sinuses and teeth.
The course covers in depth the selection of the
appropriate exposure factors and the technical
procedures and steps to be followed for
successful completition of these investigations.
In addition, the students will be provided with
special radiographical positioning skills required
for some emergency cases
Course Title: Patient

Care in Radiology
Requirements: HLTH
225+RAD 251

+ Practice): 2(2+0)
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
Assessm
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
nd
th
12
12.5
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
Cre
dit
Practical
Exam
12.5
2 Half
Exam
We
ek
Assignm
ents &
Reports
Final
Exam
16
15
th
16
40%
th
60%
Course objectives:
The course aims to provide students with the
professional and scientific ways of dealing with
patients of different types and cases. It is also
aimed to help the students to identify patients
needs either in the radiology department or in
any other department and ward of the hospital.
The students will learn how to communicate
with patients, addressing their problems,
responding to their inquiries and requests,
taking care of them, and keeping their rights.
Teaching methods:
130
Assessm
ent
They will also come across all items of medical

ethics, guidelines and regulations.
nd
2
Half
Exam
12
th
10
Course description:
In this course, students will learn how to provide
patients with full explanations about their X-ray
examinations, listen properly to patients , deal
with their questions and inquiries regarding the
examinations, and prepare them physically and
mentally for examination. The students will also
study the methods of sterilization of the area of
the examination and the technique patient
mobilization monitoring. Moreover, they will
know how to deal with urgent and emergency
cases in terms of precautions, procedures and
drugs. Finally, the students will be introduced to
the techniques of transferring patients between
the wards and departments of the hospital and
from and to emergency department and
isolation unit.
Teaching methods:
Lectures
2.
Final
Exam
16
15
16
th
th
50%
50%
Course objectives:
essential understanding and awareness of the
hazard of over-exposure of radiation and its
expected biological effects. It also provides the
students with the basic knowledge and skills of
radiation protection to help them to avoid the
unnecessary exposure to radiation. In addition,
the course helps the students to identify the
international standards, regulations, protocols
and guidelines for radiation and dosimetry.
Course description:
Recommended text books :

1.
Total
Semester
Assessme
nt
Assignme
nts
&
Reports
Ruth Ann Ehrlich , Patient Care in

Radiography: With an Introduction to
Medical Imaging , 2007.
Arlene M. Adler , Introduction to Radiologic
Sciences and Patient Care , 2007
Level: 4
Course Title: Radiation

Safety & Protection
Requirements:
RAD
231+ RAD 251

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Instructors:
This course consists of the following parts: an

introduction of radiobiological effects on human
tissues and cells; absorbed, equivalent and
effective doses; over-exposure effects; the
principle of radiation protection, safety and
control and the concept of ALARA for workers
and patients radiation; the principle of
dosimetry; dosimetric units, calculations and
tools; minimum and acceptable dose limits for
workers and patients.
Teaching methods:
Lectures
Labs and workshops
Assessme
nt
st
1
Half
Exam
W
ee
k
Cred
it
Assessme
nt
We
ek
Cred
it

1.
th
Practical
Exam
10
th
15
15
James E. Turner , Atoms,

Radiation,
and
Radiation
Protection (Physics Textbook)
, 2007 .
131
2.
2- Glenn F. Knoll , Radiation

Detection and Measurement ,
2000 .
3.
Level: 5
Course
Title:
Computerized
Tomography Physics
Requirements:
RAD
242

+ Practice): 2(2+0)
scan machine; high speed receptors and their

different types and features; radiation scatter
detectors; the technology of 3D- and 4-D image
formation and reconstruction; the common
technical faults which might have an effect on
CT scan image quality and the possibilities of
avoiding or minimizing them.
Teaching methods:
Instructors:
Lectures
Assessm
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
Assessm
ent
nd
th
12
12.5
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
Cre
dit
Practical
Exam
12.5
2 Half
Exam
We
ek
Assignm
ents &
Reports
Final
Exam
16
15
1. Euclid seeram , Computed Tomography:

Physical Principles, Clinical Applications, And
Quality Control , 2008 .
Level: 5
Course Title: Clinical

Practice-1
Requirements:RAD
232+ RAD 242
Course Units: (Clinical

Practice): 2
Instructors:
th
16
th
60%
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Cre
dit
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Cre
dit
40
40%
st
1 Half
Exam
Practical
Exam
Course objectives:
nd
The main purpose of this course is to enhance

the ability of students to well understand the
fundamentals of physics of computed
tomography (CT). The course helps the students
to identify the structure and components of a
typical CT scan machine, the principle of digital
image construction using high speed receptors,
and the techniques of image reconstruction with
various dimensions.
Course description:
This course consists of an introduction of
history, generations and development of CT
scan technology; components of a typical CT
2 Half
Exam
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
Assignm
ents &
Reports
Final
Exam
16
10
th
16
50%
th
50%
Course objectives:
The main purpose of this course is to enable
students to practice their theoretical knowledge
of general X-ray radiography for the areas of
head, chest, abdomen, and upper and lower
extremities. The course helps the students to
132
improve their professional skills of medical

imaging in a way that insures a high level of
image quality at an acceptable quantity and
dose of exposure.
Course description:
In this course, the students are divided into
groups which are then distributed to the
radiology departments, including outpatient Xray, ER and ICU departments, of a range of
hospitals available in the region. This is to
enable the students to effectively apply their
practical and clinical skills of general
radiography for the areas of head, chest,
abdomen, and upper and lower extremities for
most of routine and alternative positions.
Teaching methods:
Clinical Practice
Recommended text books :
12.5
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
Reports
15
th
16
Final
Exam
th
16
60%
40%
Course objectives:
The aim of this course is to give students a full
insight into essential physics of ultrasound (US)
imaging technology. This includes some physical
phenomena such as sound reflection and
diffraction, wavelength, frequency, echo, etc.
The course also helps the students to study and
understand the main components of a typical US
machine, the physical features of different types
of transducer and probe and the methods of
using,
calibrating, and maintaining these devices.
1- Kenneth L. Bontrager , Textbook of

Anatomy , 2009 .
Level: 6
Course
Title:
Ultrasound Physics &
Equipment
Requirements:
RAD
242

+ Practice): 2(2+0)
Instructors:
Course description:
This course covers all of the following sections:
an introductory overview of physics of US;
generation and absorption of US waves;
interaction of US waves with maters; Doppler
effect; the composition and main components
of a standard US machine; imaging with US
technology; the common defects of an US
image; the technology of reconstruction of 3Dand 4D -images and their compatibility with the
images of other modalities.
Teaching methods:
Assessm
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
Assessm
ent
nd
th
12
Cre
dit
Lectures
th
Practical
Exam
12.5
2 Half
Exam
We
ek
Assignm
ents &
1- Stwart
C.Bushong
,
Diagnostic
Ultrasound: Essentials of Medical
Imaging Series , 1999 .
2- Cindy A .Owen , Ultrasound Physics Review ,
2000 .
133
Level: 5
Course
Title:
Assessment & Reading
of Medical Images-1
Requirements:
RAD
232+RAD 353

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Assessm
ent
Assessm
ent
Instructors:
quality, image defects, the minimum limits of

image acceptance, and the decision of image
rejection and patient recall and the effects of
this decision. These elements are to be
explained and discussed using real examples of
radiological images of number of imaging
modalities.
Teaching methods:
Cre
dit
th
Practical
Exam
10
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
10
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Cre
dit
Lectures
Labs and workshops
th
15
Assignm
ents &
Reports
Final
Exam
16
15

Radiographic Positioning and Related Anatomy ,
2009 .
15
2- Nina kowalczyk , Radiographic Pathology for
Technologists ,2008
th
16
th
50%
50%
Course objectives:
The purpose of this course is to increase the
ability of students in reading, viewing and
assessing radiological images with respect to
anatomical, physiological and pathological
contents. The students also learnt the basic skills
of image quality assessment and the technical
defects that might lead to image rejection and
repetition. In addition, the course enables the
students to know and study number of foreign
bodies in terms of depth and radio-opaque
characterizations. However, the ultimate goal of
this course is to provide the students with the
minimum limits of image quality and
acceptance.
Course description:
Level: 5
Course Title: Contrast

Media
&
its
applications
Requirements: CHEM
116+RAD 251

+ Practice): 2(2+0)
Assessm
ent
Assessm
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
Instructors:
nd
th
12
12.5
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
Cre
dit
Practical
Exam
12.5
2 Half
Exam
We
ek
Assignm
ents &
Reports
Final
Exam
16
15
th
16
40%
th
60%
This course is composed of the following

elements: image viewing and assessment, image
134
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Course objectives:
The aim of this course is to give students the
basic knowledge needed in understanding the
contrast media used in a variety of radiological
examinations. The students are expected to be
aware of and understand the purpose of using
contrast media, its types and physical and
chemical features, and finally its applications for
a wide range of radiological imaging application.
The course also aims to introduce the students
to the potential medical side effects of the use
of contrast media, and the ways of preventing
and/or minimizing the consequences of these
effects on the human body and treating them if
happened.
Course
Radiographic
Anatomy
Physiology-2
Requirements:
232
Title:
RAD
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
Cre
dit
Assessm
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
th
nd
th
12
10
Course description:
This course involves the following subjects: a
definition of contrast media used in the
applications of medical radiological diagnosis;
types of contrast media; its indications,
precautions, reactions and side effects; the
applications of contrast media in different
radiography technologies such as fluoroscopy,
CT scan, MRI, and ultrasonography. The course
also involves an overview of the emergency
drugs and instruments that should be around
where contrast agents are administrated to
patient and their uses for different adverse
reactions, and the techniques of resuscitation.
Teaching methods:
Lectures
1- Henrik S. Thomsen , Contrast Media: Safety
Issues and ESUR Guidelines , 2009 .
2- Steven C. Jensen PhD , Pharmacology and
Drug Administration for Imaging Technologists ,
2005 .
&
10
2 Half
Exam
Level: 5
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Practical
Exam
We
ek
th
15
Assignm
ents &
Reports
Final
Exam
16
Cre
dit
15
15
th
16
50%
th
50%
Course objectives:
The aim of this course is to help students to
identify anatomy and physiology of the organs
and parts of some systems of the human body.
The course enables the students to physically
feel, draw and discuss these parts using
images. In this course, the students learnt the
anatomy and physiology for special radiological
procedures such as X-ray fluoroscopy, CT scan,
MRI, Ultrasound, and nuclear medicine.
Course description:
This course consists of an explanation of the
essential anatomy and physiology of some
systems of the human body with the aid of
radiological
images
of
the
following
technologies: X-ray fluoroscopy, CT scan, MRI,
Ultrasound, and nuclear medicine. The course
also enables the students to identify and discuss
135
the similarities and uniqueness among the

images of these technologies in terms of image
acquisition and display.
Teaching methods:
Lectures
Labs and workshops
The students are given full information about

the materials and instruments used in this
technology. In addition, they are provided in
detail with the steps and procedures of most of
general and special X-ray fluoroscopic
investigations for all body parts.

1- Lorrie L. Kelley , Sectional Anatomy for
Imaging Professionals , 2007 .
2- Kenneth L. Bontrager , Textbook of
2009 .
Level: 6
Course
Title:
Fluoroscopic
Technique
Requirements:
RAD
232+RAD
364+RAD
242

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Instructors:
The course consists of a technical background

and introduction of X-ray fluoroscopic
technology. This includes: image intensifier
system and its main components, and digital
receptors and their physical parameters. Also
the course introduces students to the steps and
procedures of most of the common X-ray
fluoroscopic examinations which include the
examination of urinary, digestive, reproductive
systems, and how to get patient ready for these
examinations. In addition, the students are
given an overview of digital fluoroscopic image
construction.
Teaching methods:
Lectures
Labs and workshops
Assessm
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
10
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
10
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
Assessm
ent
Practical
Exam
Assignm
ents &
Reports
We
ek
th
15
Cre
dit

1- Stephen palter , Interventional Fluoroscopy:
Physics, Technology and Safety, 2001 .
15
15
th
2- Albert Michael Snopek , Fundamentals

of Special Radiographic Procedures
,2006 .
Level: 6
Course
Title:
Computerized
Tomography Imaging
Requirements:
RAD
232+RAD
343+RAD
353

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
16
50%
Final
Exam
th
16
50%
Instructors:
Course Objectives:
basic knowledge and skills of X-ray fluoroscopy.
-3
Assessm
We
Cre
Assessm
We
Cre
136
Course Description:
st
1 Half
Exam
ek
dit
th
ent
nd
th
12
10
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
Labs and workshops
dit
Practical
Exam
10
2 Half
Exam
ek
th
15
Assignm
ents &
Reports
Final
Exam
16
15
1- Euclid seeram , Computed Tomography:

Physical Principles, Clinical
Applications, and Quality Control , 2008 .
15
4- Paul E. Christian BS , Nuclear Medicine

and PET/CT Technology and Techniques
, 2007 .
th
16
th
50%
50%
Course objectives:
The aim of this course is to introduce students
to the medical indications of plane CT scan
investigations for all organs of human body, and
the optimized and appropriate procedures of
performing such investigations. The students are
also introduced to some special CT scan
investigations which require contrast agents and
interventional procedures. In addition, the
course provides the students with the basic
theoretical and practical knowledge which
enable them to operate a typical CT scan
machine and perform various CT scan
investigations in an optimized way.
Course description:
This course consists mainly of an in depth
explanation of positioning and procedures of
most of CT scan investigations such as CT brain,
chest, spine, abdomen, etc. Also the students
study the medical indications and diagnostic
benefits of performing each investigation.
Finally, the course also consists of a part that
explains the techniques and methods of
acquisition and display of a CT image and its
compatibility with the images of other
modalities.
Teaching methods:
Lectures
Level: 6
Course Title: Magnetic

Resonance Physics &
Equipment
Requirements:
RAD
242

+ Practice): 2(2+0)
Assessm
ent
Assessm
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
12.5
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
12.5
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
Instructors:
Practical
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
Assignm
ents &
Reports
Final
Exam
16
15
th
16
th
60%
40%
Course Objectives:
with concepts and theories of the technology of
magnetic resonance imaging (MRI). The
students are provided with afull explanation
about the major components and parts, types,
and applications of a typical MRI machine. The
course also aims to help the students to identify
the physical features of a wide range of coils and
137
ent
receptors used in diagnostic purposes. In

addition, students also learn how to use,
calibrate, and deal with these equipments.
Course Description:
This course consists of the following sections: an
introductory overview of the physics of
magnetic resonance imaging; generation of
electromagnetic
waves;
interactions
of
electromagnetic waves with media and matters;
effect of these waves on image quality; the main
components of a typical MRI machine;
acquisition of an MRI image and its technical
artifacts; the techniques of image reconstruction
of a 3D- and 4D MRI images and their
compatibility with the images of other
modalities.
Teaching methods:
Lectures
1- 1- Carolyn Kaut , MRI in Practice , 2005

.
2- Terranova-MRI Firths field MRI
TEACTION SYSTEM.ACR guidline,2005 .
Level: 6

Practice-2
Requirements:
RAD
252+RAD 353

Practice): 2
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
Assessm
ent
We
ek
Cre
dit
Clinical
Exam
40
nd
2 Half
Exam
Assignm
ents &
Reports
th
16
Final
Exam
th
16
50%
50%
Course Objectives:
The main purpose of this course is to enable
students to apply their theoretical knowledge of
special procedures of X-ray radiography and
medical imaging for the all parts of spine, and
the major organs of urinary and digestive
systems. In general, the course enables the
students to practice the radiographic
procedures of the following technologies: X-ray
fluoroscopy, CT scan, MRI, US, and nuclear
medicine. The students are also given a general
overview of the techniques and applications of
panoramic dental radiography.
Course Description:
Textbooks and references:
st
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
This course is constructed as to give students

the practical knowledge and skills of radiography
and medical imaging for the following
modalities: X-ray fluoroscopy, CT scan, MRI, US,
and Gamma camera. It covers all the routine
and special radiographic procedures of most of
the systems of the human body such as
digestive, urinary, nervous cardiovascular,
lymphatic, and respiratory systems. In addition,
the course covers the radiographic examinations
of CT and MRI brain and spinal cord.
Teaching methods:
Clinical Practice.
2009 .
10

138
Level: 6
Course Title: Nuclear

Medicine Technique
Requirements:
RAD
242+RAD 364

+ Practice): 2(1+1)
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
Assessm
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
Practical
Exam
10
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
10
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
We
ek
th
15
Assignm
ents &
Reports
Cre
dit
15
applications in medical imaging; the procedures

and steps of most of functional investigation
undertaken in nuclear medicine such as brain
scan, blood-flow imaging, infarction imaging,
ventilation perfusion imaging, gastrointestinal
examinations, venography, renogram, bone and
bone marrow scans, thyroid scan, and tumor
scan. The course also consists of basic
knowledge of electronic and physical methods
used for image construction, acquisition,
presentation and processing.
Teaching methods:
Lectures
Labs and workshops
15
th
16
50%
Final
Exam
th
16
1- Fred A. Mettler , Essentials of Nuclear

Medicine Imaging , 2005.
2- Christiaan Schiepers , Diagnostic
Nuclear Medicine , 2009.
50%
Course Objectives:
The main aim of this course is to provide
students with the required knowledge of
techniques and procedures of nuclear medicine
investigations, and the definition, nature and
types of radioactive materials used for
diagnostic and therapeutic applications of
nuclear medicine technology and how to handle
and manage these materials. It also aims to help
the students to identify the machines used in
the radiographic investigations of nuclear
medicine, and the methods of clinical and
physical calibrations of these machines.
Course Description:
This course consists of the following parts: an
introduction of radiographic investigations of
nuclear medicine; Gamma camera and its
components; radioactive materials: their nature,
generation, physical characteristics, and
Level: 7
Course Title: Magnetic

Resonance Imaging
Requirements:
RAD
231+ RAD 353

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Instructors:
-1
Assessm
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
Assessm
ent
Practical
Exam
10
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
10
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
We
ek
th
15
Assignm
ents &
Reports
Final
Exam
16
Cre
dit
15
15
th
16
th
50%
50%
139
Course Objectives:
ent
The purpose of this course is to help students to

improve their knowledge of techniques and
medical indications and justifications of imaging
with MRI for various bodys parts and systems.
The students learn how to operate a typical MRI
machine, and prepare and perform different
MRI investigations. The course also helps the
students to develop their skills and awareness of
safe MRI practices, emergency procedures and
risk assessment processes, and standard of care
polices in and outside the MRI suite.
1 Half
Exam
Course Description:
The course consists mainly of clinical indications,
patient preparation, positions, procedures and
techniques of imaging with MRI technology for
head, chest, abdomen, spinal vertebrae, pelvis,
and some other parts of the human body. The
course also highlights an explanation of
acquisition, registration, reconstruction, display,
control and printing of an MRI image, and its
capability with images of other radiographic
facilities.
Teaching methods:
Lectures
Labs and workshops
st
ek
dit
th
ent
Practical
Exam
10
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
10
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
ek
dit
th
15
Assignm
ents &
Reports
Final
Exam
16
15
15
th
16
th
50%
50%
Course Objectives:
basic skills of medical imaging with ultrasound
technology for most of body organs and
systems. The students will learn how to prepare
patient for US examination, the positions and
procedures of different US investigations, and
the medical indications of each of these
investigations. In addition, the course provides
the students with all technical knowledge and
skills associated with US investigations, e.g. the
selection of appropriate probe for each
investigation.
Course Description:
Catherine Westbrook , Handbook of

MRI Technique ,2008
2- Terranova-MRI Firths field MRI
TEACTION SYSTEM.ACR guidline,2005
1-
Level: 7
Course
Title:
Ultrasound Imaging
Requirements:
RAD
345

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Instructors:
This course involves an introduction of medical

indications
and
justifications
of
US
examinations, and patient preparation and
appropriate probe for each examination. The
course also involves a full explanation of most of
US examinations such as those for abdominal
and pelvic areas, urinary systems, thyroid gland,
tests, breast, jugular veins, and also obstetric
gynecologic cases.
Teaching methods:
Assessm
We
Cre
Assessm
We
Cre
Lectures
Labs and workshops
140
Course Description:
1- Marveen Craig , Essentials of Sonography and

Patient Care , 2005 .
This course is composed of the following

elements: image viewing and assessment, image
quality, image artifacts, the minimum limits of
image acceptance, and the appearance of
disorders and diseases on images of most of
radiography modalities such as X-ray
fluoroscopy, CT scan, MRI, gamma camera. The
students are also trained on how to compare
between images of these modalities in respect
of clinical diagnostic and image quality.
Level: 7
Course
Title:
Assessment & Reading
of Medical Images-2
Requirements:
RAD
355+RAD
361+RAD
354

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
10
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
10
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
Assessm
ent
Practical
Exam
Assignm
ents &
Reports
We
ek
th
15
Cre
dit
15
Lectures
Labs and workshops
1. Richard R. Carlton , Principles of Radiographic
Imaging: An Art and a Science ,2005
2- Lorrie L. Kelley , Sectional Anatomy for
Imaging Professionals .2007.
15
Level: 8
Course Title: Quality

Management
in
Radiology Department
Requirements:
RAD
231+RAD 353

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Assessm
ent
Assessm
ent
th
16
50%
Final
Exam
th
16
50%
Instructors:
Course Objectives:
The purpose of this course is to increase the
ability of students in reading, viewing and
assessing radiological images of special
procedures with respect to anatomical,
physiological and pathological contents. The
course provides the students with the basic skills
of image quality assessment and the technical
defects that might result in image rejection and
repetition. The students are to be trained on
images of most of special radiography such as Xray fluoroscopy of digestive, urinary, and
reproductive systems, brain CT, MRI of spinal
cord, and bone scan, renogram, and liver scan of
the nuclear medicine.
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
Practical
Exam
10
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
10
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
We
ek
th
15
Assignm
ents &
Reports
Final
Exam
16
Cre
dit
15
15
th
16
th
50%
141
Teaching methods:
ent
Assessm
ent
50%
st
Course Objectives:
This course aims to enable students to study and
learn the scientific and practical perceptions of
health management for radiology department.
The course helps them to develop their ability
and skills of general management, leadership,
planning, quality management, operation
management, and methods of improvement of
image quality and work performance. It also
provide the students with the basic theories and
practices of patient, emergency, and crisis
managements.
Course Description:
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
Assessm
ent
nd
Cre
dit
50
Written
Report
-
2 Half
Exam
We
ek
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
th
16
50%
Final
Exam
th
15
50%
Course Objectives:
This course consists of the following aspects:

fundamental definitions and theories of health
management; managing through a radiology
department; leadership; models and traits of
medical leadership; medical ethics and
regulations in radiology departments and
nuclear
medicine;
justifications
and
optimizations of medical procedures in radiology
departments; methods of motivation and
productivity; quality management and control;
techniques of performance improvement and
appraisal.
Teaching methods:
Lectures
Labs and workshops
Jeffrey papp ,Quality Management in the
Imaging Sciences , 2010.
Level: 8
Course
Title:
Graduation Project
Requirements: HLTH
426 or HLTH 427

+ Practice): 2(0+2)
Instructors:
The aim of this course is to help students design

and carry out a research project in the field of
radiation and medical imaging. The course
provides the students with the scientific
techniques of the following: topic selection;
research methodologies and approaches; data
collection; data analysis; preparing a report with
the findings, results, conclusions, suggestions
and further work of the selected project.
Course Description:
The course covers the main aspects of how to
carry out a scientific research project and
prepare a report. This includes: problem
identification;
title
selection;
research
introduction; research objectives; hypothesizes;
research
design,
approaches
and
methodologies;
research
materials
and
methods; data collection and analysis; results
and discussion; conclusions; suggestions and
future work; references and bibliographies.
Teaching methods:
The research project is undertaken by the
researcher under the supervision of one of the
academic staff and presented in a form of
scientific symposium and/or paper
142

These include all references, textbooks and
bibliographies chosen and cited by the
researcher which have to be then listed at the
end of the research.
patients rights; infection control and radiation

protection in a dental radiology department;
dental radiographic positions; panoramic
technology; digital dental radiography; viewing
and assessment of a dental X-ray image.
Teaching methods:
Level: 8 (Elective)
Course Title: Dental

Radiography
Requirements:
RAD
252

+ Practice): 1(1+0)
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
Assessm
ent
Lectures
Cre
dit
th
12.5
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
Written
Report
-
We
ek
Cre
dit
Level: 7 or 8 (Elective)
Title:

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
15
Course
Interventional
Radiography
Requirements:
361+RAD 364
RAD
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
Cre
dit
Assessm
ent
12%
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
th
16
Final
Exam
1- Eric Whaites, Essentials of Dental

Radiography and Radiology,(Feb 5,
2007)
th
16
2- Joen Iannucci , Laura Jansen Howerton,

Dental Radiography: Principles and
nd
Techniques , 2 ed , 2000 .
60%
40%
st
Course Objectives:
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
th
10
At the end of this course students should be
able to understand and master the techniques,
machines, procedures, and film positions of
dental X-ray radiography. The students are also
expected to learn how to deal with dental
patients and help them with staff in radiation
protection and infection control.
Course Description:
The course consists of the following subjects:
dental X-ray machines; types of dental X-ray
films; film developing and processing; quality
control in a dental radiology department;
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
10
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
Written
Report
We
ek
th
15
Assignm
ents
Final
Exam
16
Cre
dit
15
15
th
16
50%
th
50%
Course Objectives:
143
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek

basic skills of procedures and applications of
interventional X-ray radiography for both
diagnostic and therapeutic purposes. This
includes most of invasive imaging procedures
such as angiography, biopsy, dialysis, drain
insertions,
balloon
angioplasty
and
catheterization for different body organs and
systems.
The students learn
how to position and prepare patient for these
procedures. Also the course provides the
students with all technical knowledge and skills
associated with this technology, e.g. the
selection of appropriate location of catheters
and needles insertion.
Assessm
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
Assessm
ent
nd
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
Cre
dit
40
Clinical
Exam
-
2 Half
Exam
We
ek
Assignm
ents
Final
Exam
16
10
th
16
50%
th
50%
Course Description:
Course Objectives:
This course consists of an introduction of
positions and technique of most of
investigations
of
interventional
X-ray
radiography and how to prepare patient and
perform these investigations which include a
variety of angiography procedures, cardiac
catheterization, TIPS, and biliary intervention.
Also this course consists of an explanation of
methods, techniques and procedures of some
other interventional X-ray procedures such as
biopsy, dialysis, and drain insertions.
Teaching methods:
This course aims to enable students to practice

their knowledge of medical imaging and
radiological examinations of X-ray fluoroscopy
using contrast media for various systems of
human body such as digestive and urinary
systems. The course allows the student to
develop their professional skills of medical
imaging with fluoroscopy in a way that insures
a high level of image quality at an acceptable
quantity and dose of exposure.
Course Description:
Lectures
Labs and workshops
1Krishna Kandarpa , Handbook of
Interventional Radiologic Procedures , 2001 .
Level: 8 (Elective)

Practice
in
Fluoroscopy
Requirements:
RAD
361

Practice): 2
Instructors:
In this course, students are able to effectively

apply their practical and clinical skills of routine
and alternative X-ray fluoroscopic investigations
for most of human bodys systems. The students
are also helped to identify types, ingredients,
features, and possible adverse reactions of
contrast agents used in fluoroscopy. They are
also trained on special techniques, skills, and
procedures used in the case of emergency.
Teaching methods:
Clinical Practice .
144
Course
Radiotherapy
Procedure
Requirements:
231+RAD 353
Title:

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
RAD
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
Cre
dit
Assessm
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
th
10
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
Practical
Exam
Assignm
ents
We
ek
th
15
Teaching methods:
Lectures
Labs and workshops
15
10
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
Cre
dit
fundamental physics of radiotherapy and linear

accelerators; the generation of high energy
radiation for treatment purposes; physical
characteristics of high energy photons and
electrons used in radiotherapy, and their
interactions with matter and human tissues;
technical steps, protocols, and procedures of
different radiotherapy applications for most of
bodys organs; precautions and scientific
methods of minimizing and/or preventing
patient
from
potential
effects
and
consequences.
15
1- k . kian Ang ,Radiotherapy for Head and

Neck Cancers: Indications and Techniques, 2005.
th
16
50%
Final
Exam
th
16
50%
Course Objectives:
The main purpose of this course is to provide
students with knowledge and understanding of
fundamental radiation physics of linear
accelerators
and
their
construction,
components, applications, operation and
calibration. It l also helps the students to know
the physical characteristics of high energy
photons and electrons used in radiotherapy
applications, and their interactions with matter.
In addition, the students are provided with all of
the common techniques, procedures and
precautions of clinical radiotherapy.
Course Description:
The course consists of the following
components: an introductory overview of
Level: 8 (Elective)
Course Title: Digital

Imaging & PACS
Requirements:
RAD
231+RAD
343+STAT118

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
Assessm
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
th
10
nd
2 Half
Exam
th
12
10
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
Practical
Exam
We
ek
th
15
Assignm
ents
Final
Exam
16
Cre
dit
15
15
th
16
50%
th
50%
145
1- Stephen palter , Interventional Fluoroscopy:

Physics, Technology and Safety ,2001.
Course Objectives:
ent

with the essential knowledge of principle of
digital imaging and the common approaches of
image digitization. It also aims to give the
students a general overview of PACS and its
compatibility, connection, and integration with
all networks available in radiology and other
departments of the hospitals. Moreover, the
students are provided with techniques and
methods of information security applied in
radiology departments.
1 Half
Exam
st
ek
dit
th
ent
Practical
Exam
10
nd
2 Half
Exam
ek
th
12
dit
th
15
Assignm
ents
10
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
15
15
th
16
50%
Final
Exam
th
16
50%
Course Description:
This course is consisted of the following
sections: an introduction and principle of digital
imaging; instruments and devices used in this
technology; current approaches of image
digitization and the features and pros and cons
of each approach; acquisition, registration and
display of digital image and; its capability with
other imaging facilities; PACS; conventional
versus digital images in terms of advantages,
disadvantages, methods of acquisition and
generation, and image quality assessment.
Teaching methods:
Course Objectives:
This course aims to help students to understand
the essential knowledge of computing and
digitization
for
image
acquisition,
reconstruction, display and presentation. It also
aims to allow the students to practice their basic
clinical skills of digital radiography including
image acquisition, processing, post-processing,
manipulation and analysis for different imaging
technologies.
Course Description:
Lectures
Labs and workshops
Course Title: Post

Processing of Digital
Images
Requirements:
RAD
476

+ Practice): 3(2+1)
In this course, students are helped to clinically

apply their theoretical background of digital
imaging at radiology departments of the
hospitals. This includes clinical practice of
acquisition, registration, processing and analysis,
manipulation and optimization of a digital image
in a way that could give an advantage to the
process of image interpretation, diagnosis and
reporting. The course also enables the students
to study most of the clinically available
technologies and styles of digital processors.
Instructors:
Teaching methods:

1- Christi E. Carter , Digital Radiography and
PACS , 2009 .
Lectures
Labs and workshops
Assessm
We
Cre
Assessm
We
Cre
146
1Richard R. Carlton , Principles of

Radiographic Imaging: An Art and a Science
,2005.
2- Christi E. Carter , Digital Radiography and
PACS,2009.
Level: 8 (Elective)

Practice
in
Radiotherapy
Requirements:
RAD
474

Practice): 2
Instructors:
In this course, students are helped to put into

practice their theoretical knowledge and
concepts of radiotherapy physics. This is
achieved by giving them the opportunities of
practicing their clinical skills in radiotherapy
departments of the hospitals. This includes
clinical practice of the construction, components
and operation of high-energy medical
accelerators, radiotherapy techniques and
procedures used in treating most of tumors and
malignancies, treatment planning techniques,
and some alternative skills and procedures used
in radiotherapy techniques.
Assessm
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
nd
2 Half
Exam
Assessm
ent
Clinical
Exam
Assignm
ents
We
ek
th
40
10
th
16
Final
Exam
th
16
50%
50%
Course Objectives:
This course aims to enable students to clinically
practice their knowledge of a wide range of
radiotherapy techniques for most of tumor
cases. The course helps the students to know
and apply various theories and models of dose
calculation and determination for high energy
photon and electron beams, measurement of
radiation distribution, and treatment planning.
The students would be aware of special
precautions, hazards, optimization methods,
and quality assurance of radiotherapy.
Course Description:
Clinical Practice.
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
Cre
dit
1- Technical basis of radiation therapy ,4 ed

2006
Level: 8 (Elective)

Practice in modern
radiographic
application
Requirements:
RAD
371+RAD472+RAD473

Practice): 2
Assessm
ent
st
1 Half
Exam
We
ek
Cre
dit
nd
2 Half
Exam
Instructors:
Assessm
ent
Clinical
Exam
Assignm
ents
We
ek
Cre
dit
40
Total
Semeste
r
Assessm
ent
10
th
16
Final
Exam
th
16
50%
50%
147
Teaching methods:
At the end of this course students should be

able to understand and master most of
radiographic investigations that need modern
medical imaging modalities such as CT scan,
MRI, imaging with nuclear medicine, ultrasound
technology, and positron emission tomography
(PET) scan.
Course Description:
In this course, students are distributed to the
hospitals and health care centers to observe,
understand and practice most of radiographic
investigations of modern medical imaging
facilities such as CT scan, MRI, sonography , and
gamma camera and PET of nuclear medicine.
Degree conferred by Department:
(OD) optometry doctor degree in optometry
Department entry requirements:

- Meet the requirements of college admission.
- Pass the courses of the core program at the
College successfully.
- Provide a seat inclusive.

Graduation Requirements:
1 - Successfully pass the preparatory year

Proposed methods of teaching:
Clinical Practice.
Textbooks and references:

1- Euclid seeram , Computed Tomography:
Physical Principles, Clinical Applications, and
Quality Control , 2008 .
2- Paul E. Christian BS , Nuclear Medicine
and PET/CT Technology and
Techniques , 2007 .
Marveen Craig , Essentials of Sonography and
Patient Car, 2005.
2 - Pass the prescribed modules successfully
3- Pass the internship (one year) successfully

The required credit hours for graduation from
the department are distributed into four main
groups of courses:
The first group includes 12 credit hours,
known as the requirements of the university,
which are the courses required to be given for
all university students.
Specialties offered by the department:
The department provides a wide range of

specialties support the general field of
optometry , such as contact lenses , double
vision, poor and severe vision, electro
physiology of the eye
The second group includes 42 credit hours,

known as the college requirements, which is the
courses required to be studied for all students of
the Faculty of Applied Medical Sciences, and is
divided into 34 credit hours compulsory in
addition to 8 optional credit hours
The third group which includes 118 credit

hours, known as the requirements of the
department divided into 8 units of compulsory
148
Course Objectives:
The fourth group, a group of free courses and

composed of 6 credit hours chosen from courses
offered at the university.
Career Opportunities for graduates:
The graduate of the (OD) program can work in
multiple areas such as, the government and
private hospitals, in academic field , research
centers, primary medical care, domains of visual
assistive devices and supplies , military and
government sectors as well as in private sector
individually or within a medical team brings
together different medical specialties.
Faculty (Department of Optometry):
Level 1
Code
No.
Course Title
ARAB
101
Language
Skills
BIOL
111
Human
Biology
PHYS
112
General
Physics
CHE
M 113
General
Chemistry
HLTH
121
Medical
Terminolog
y
HLTH
122
Health Care
System and
Vocational
Safety
Assistant Prof.
Manzor Qurashi
Assistant Prof.
Saad algundi
Prof.
Hamid gadalmola
Associate Prof.
Mohammed Farahna
Assistant Prof.
Level 2
Igaz Ahmed
Assistant Prof.
Course Title
Amjad Ali Khan
Assistant Prof.
Code
No.
.Fijai Komar
Assistant Prof.
IC
102
Lecturer
Fishakh Naier
Lecturer
Naganathan Matoramal
Lecturer
Study Plan (Department of Optometry:
C
R
Ahmed Sabahalkheir
Saleh Taye
L
B
Islamic
Studies (1)
Associate Prof.
Lecturer
L
T
IC 101
Yousef H. Aldebasi
Mustafa Gamar
Credit Hours
Total
Pre.
Req
.
19 Credit Hours
Credit Hours
Pre.
Req.
L
T
L
B
C
R
Islamic
Studies (2)
101
IC
ANA
T 114
Principles
of Anatomy
111
Biol
PHSL
115
Principles
of
111
Biol
149
courses from outside of the department and 94

credit hours of compulsory courses within the
department in addition to 18 units of elective
courses within the department.
Physiology
CHE
M 116
Organic
Chemistry
113
Che
m
MDL
117
Principles
of Medical
Microbiolo
gy
111
Biol
STAT
118
Biostatistics
HLT
H 123
Medical
Profession
Ethics
3
Anat11
4
18 Credit Hours
Total
122
Hlth
Credit Hours
L
T
L
B
C
R
IC
103
Islamic
Studies (3)
ARA
B 103
Arabic
Writing
HLT
H 224
Emergenc
y Health
Care
General
Pathology
OPT
O 241
Geometric
al and
physical
optics(1)
Optometry
(1)
Islamic
Studies
(4)
101 IC
College
elective
course
group 1
Pre.
Req.
MDL
232/2
31
115Phsl
+116Ch
em
ANA
T 251
Histology
114
101 IC
OPT
O 242
Geometric
al and
physical
optics (2)
OPTO
242
OPT
O 243
Visual
optics
OPTO
241
OPT
O 252
OPTO2
31
OPTO
261
IC
104
114
ANAT
Phsl
115
PHYS
112
OPT
O 262
2
Pre.
Req.
C
R
Anat
114
MDL
252
Credit
Hours
L
B
Course
Title
Course
Title
L
T
19 Credit Hours
Code
No.
Phsl
115
Neuroscie
nce
Optometr
y (2)
Total
18 Credit Hours
150
Level 3
OPT
O 261
Eye
anatomy
and
physiolog
y
Level 4
Total
Code
No.
OPT
O 231
Level 5
Code
No.
Course Title
OPT
O 332
Credit Hours
Pre.
Req
.
OPTO
354
Monocular
sensory
processing
OPT
O
353
L
T
L
B
C
R
Ocular
biochemistr
y
OPTO
355
Binocular
vision
OPT
O
243
OPT
O 344
Geometrical
and physical
optics (3)
OPTO
xxx
Dept.
elective
OPT
O
xxx
OPT
O 352
Oculomotor
systems
PHAR
M 301
OPT
O 353
Ocular
neuroscienc
e
General
pharmacolo
gy
(compulsor
y out of
dept.)
OPT
O
364
OPT
O 381
Clinical
procedures
(1)
Ocular
assessment
and
diagnose
Optometry
(3)
OPTO
391
OPT
O 363
Clinical
screening
(1)
College
elective
group 2
OPT
O 382
MDL
243/24
2
231
MD
L or
232
MD
L
XXX
Free course
Total
2
18 Credit Hours
Xxx
Free course
Level 6
Code
No.
Opto
345
Course Title
Ophthalmic
optics and
dispensing
Credit
Hours
Pre.
Req.
L
T
L
B
C
R
Total
Level 7
Code
No.
OPT
O
243
19 Credit Hours
Course Title
Credit
Hours
L
T
L
B
Pre.
Req.
C
R
151
(1)
Visual
perception
OPT
O 354
57
field
OPTO
xxx
(dept.
elective)
MDL
xxx
OPTO
465
OPT
O
355
OPTO
471
Ocular
pharmacolo
gy(1)
PHA
RM
301
Strabismu
s and
amblyopi
a
(dept
elective )
MDL
xxx
General
vision
therapy
(dept.
elective)
OPTO
xxx
OPTO
485
Clinical
procedure
s (3)
OPT
O
484
OPTO
xxx
(dept
elective )
OPT
O
xxx
OPTO
493
Cornea
and
contact
lens (3)
OPT
O
492
HLTH
425/426
College
elective
group 2
70%
of
the
study
plan
OPTO
473
OPT
O 391
OPTO
483
Clinical
screening
(2)
OPT
O 382
OPTO
484
Clinical
procedures
(2)
OPT
O 381
OPTO
492
Cornea and
contact lens
(2)
OPT
O 363
xxx
Free course
2
Total
Total
19 Credit Hours
Level 8
Code No.
OPTO
446
OPTO4
Course
Title
O
456
Credit
Hours
Pre.
Req.
L
T
L
B
C
R
Ophthalm
ic optics
and
dispensin
g (2)
Visual
OPT
O
345
18 Credit Hours
Level 9
Code
No.
Course
Title
Credit
Hours
Pre.
Req.
L
T
L
B
C
R
OPTO
xxx
(dept
elective)
OPTO
472
Ocular
pharmacol
OPT
O
xxx
0
2
OPT
OPT
152
OPTO
456
O
471
OPTO
487
Optometry
clinic (1)
OPT
O
484
594
PTO
495
Anterior
segment
disease
OPT
O
492
OPTO
xxx
(dept
elective)
OPT
O
xxx
OPTO4
97
Glaucoma
disease
OPT
O
457
OPTO
496
Cornea and
contact
lens (3)
OPT
O
493
16 Credit Hours
Total
(2)
OPTO
489
Open
eye
clinic
and
emergen
cy
procedur
es
OPTO
487
OPTO
xxx
(dept
elective)
OPTO
xxx
OPTO
499
Laser
and its
applicati
on in
ocular
disease
OPTO
384
OPTO
460
Research
project
HLTH4
25/426
Total
16 Credit Hours
Level 10
Code
No.
Course
Title
Credit
Hours
L
T
OPTO
xxx
(dept
elective)
(dept
elective)
L
B
Pre.
Req.
C
R
Curriculum by Tract:
OP
TO xxx
OPTO
xxx
OPTO
xxx
OPTO
468
OPTO
488
Pediatric
optometr
y
Optomet
ry clinic
Course Description (Dept of

Optometry):
OPTO
391,465
OPTO
487
1. BASIC SCIENCE
Human Biology
BIOL -111
General physics
PHYS-112
General Chemistry
CHEM-113
Principles of Anatomy
ANAT-114
Principes of Physiology
PHSL -115
Organic Chemistry
CHEM-116
Principle of medical Microbiology MDL -117
153
ogy (2)
Biostatistics
STAT -118
Oculomotor Systems
OPTO-352
Histology
ANAT -251
Visual Neuroscience
OPTO-353
Biochemistry
MDL -231
Monocular Sensory Processes
OPTO-354
Biochemistry and Molecular Genetics
Binocular Vision
OPTO-355 MDL -232
2. PUBLIC HEALTH
Visual Perception
OPTO-456
Visual fields
OPTO-457
Behavioral Vision and Learning
OPTO-458
Optometric Epidemiology
OPTO-459
HLTH-121
Health Care Systems and Vocational safety

HLTH-122
Medical Profession Ethics
HLTH-123
Emergency Health Care
MDL -224
Principles of medical genetics
MDL -242
Genetics and molecular biology
MDL -243
Research methodology
HLTH -425
Study design
HLTH -426
6.
OPTOMETRY
Optometry I
OPTO-261
Optometry II
OPTO-262
Optometry III
OPTO-363
Refractive and Binocular Case Analysis

OPTO-364
Strabismus and Amblyopia
3.
BASIC EYE PHYSIOLOGY
Practice Development and Administration

OPTO-466
Ocular anatomy and Physiology
OPTO-231
Ocular Biochemistry
OPTO-332
Vision Rehabilitation
4.
OPTO-465
OPTO-467
Pediatric and Special population Optometry

OPTO-468
OPTICS
Geometrical and Physical Optics I OPTO-241
Vocational optometry
OPTO-499
Geometrical and Physical Optics II OPTO-242
Research project in optometry
OPTO-460
Visual Optics
OPTO-243
7.
MEDICINE
Geometrical and Physical optics III OPTO-344
General Pathology
MDL-252
Ophthalmic Optics and Dispensing IOPTO-345
General Pharmacology
PHARM-301
Ophthalmic Optics and Dispensing IIOPTO-446
General Pharmacology for Optometry 1

OPTO-471
5.
VISUAL SCIENCE
Neuroscience
OPTO-251
Ocular Pharmacology
OPTO-472
General Vision Therapy
OPTO-473
154
Medical Terminology
Clinical Medicine and Systemic Disease

OPTO-474
CLINICAL OPTOMETRY
Optometric Procedures
Course Outline:
OPTO-381
Clinical Screenings
OPTO-382
Clinical Screenings II
OPTO-483
Optometric Procedures II
OPTO-484
Optometric Procedures III
OPTO-485
Clinical Orientation
OPTO-486
Optometric Clinic I
OPTO-487
Optometric Clinic II
OPTO-488
Open Eye Clinic and Emergency procedures

OPTO-489
9.
SPECIALTY EYE PROCEDURES
Ocular Assessment and Diagnosis OPTO-391

Cornea and Contact lenses I
OPTO-492
Cornea and Contact Lenses II
OPTO-493
Geriatrics
OPTO-494
Anterior Segment Disease
OPTO-495
Cornea and Contact Lenses III
OPTO-496
Glaucoma
OPTO-497
Posterior Segment Disease
OPTO-498
Laser and surgical Management of Eye Disease

OPTO-499
Course symbol:
BIOL-111
Level: First
Course Title: Human

Biology
Credit hours:
4(3+1)
Prerequisite:
This course will introduce, at an entry

level, the understanding of various cell
structures and functions, eukaryotes vs.
prokaryotes, classification of live
organisms, introduction to the genetics
and introduction to human biology
including, introduction to human
physiology, anatomy, and introduction
to human embryology.
By the end of this course, student
should be able to know:
- The cell as a functional unit, structure,
and the main aspects of cell
specialization,
cytology and classification of live
organisms.
- The transport mechanisms across the
cell membrane
- The main principles of Physiology
- The cellular division and multiplication
- DNA and RNA, formation.
- DNA and the genetic code.
- Cellular processes needed for live
- Biochemical basis of generating
energy
- Spermatogenesis Oogenesis in
human
- Fertilization and basic embryology
- Introduction to specialized anatomical
structures
- Hormonal regulation of vital functions
155
8.
Preparatory Year
Microscopy and tissue preparation

methods, staining, cell structure,
organelle function, cell division, nucleic
acids, cellular genetics, Mendelian
genetics, Principles of embryology,
main human tissues, principles of
anatomy and physiology of human
body systems
-Theory lectures
- Semester Examination: Written and
Practical 50%
Human Biology: Concepts and Current
Issues. Michael D. Johnson
Course symbol:
PHYS 112
Course Title:
PHYSICS
Human Biology. Mader Sylvia ,

th
7 edition , 2002.
Level: First
Credit hours:
3(2+1)
Prerequisite:
Aim of the course

To emphasize the importance of the
process of scientific investigation as a
means of solving problems in everyday
life;
To contribute to the pupils general
education by helping to make sense of
the physical environment through

scientific inquiry;
To provide the basis for further study of
the subject;
To
develop
experimental
investigative abilities;
and
To develop the skills necessary to find

solutions to scientific problems;
To understand that scientific ideas are
developed within a contemporary and
historical context.
To develop positive attitudes towards
physics, science in general and the
environment.
This course is designed specifically for
students enrolled in the College of
Applied Medical Sciences, which
include departments such as medical
laboratory,
optometry,
medical
radiation
techniques,
and
physiotherapy. The course includes
experiments
that
are
direct
theoretical component of the course.
fluid dynamics, thermal properties of
materials, electrical properties of
materials, optics and waves. And
radiations
Viscosity measurement
Properties and sensation of
sound
Optics and laser
Heat and thermal expansion
Heat Equivalent
Optical
properties
of
materials (Snells Law)
DC Measurements and the
concept of E-filed.
Interference
of
Electromagnetic Waves.
The Spectrum of Hydrogen
Atom
156
- Neuronal regulation of vital functions
Radiation Detection
Measurements
and
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
- Discussion
Evaluation Outline
Semester examination
50%
Final Examination
50%
References
-
College physics Serway R.

and J. Faughn
Physics in Biology and
Medicine, Third Edition
(Complementary Science) by
Paul Davidovits
Physics of the Human Body
(Biological and Medical
Physics, Biomedical
Engineering) by Irving P.
Herman
Introduction to Radiological
Physics and Radiation
Dosimetry by Frank H. Attix
Any recommended text books
by the lecturer
chemical reactions in aqueous

solutions, energy and its
transformation, chemical bonds and
chemical reactions and the cyclic table,
thermal chemistry, properties of
substances and attraction forces
between molecules, physical properties
of solutions, chemical equilibrium and
neutralization of acids and alkalines in
should be able to:
- Describe the atomic structure and
define atomic number, mass number
and
isotopes
- Know chemical and physical bonding
and their properties
- Know types of chemical reactions and
concept of rate of reaction
- Know mole, molar mass, molarity and
molality and their use in laboratory
- Know calculation formulae and their
use in clinical laboratory
- Know oxidationreduction reactions
and their biological significance
Course symbol:
CHEM-113
Level: First
- Know different types of solutions and

solubility

Chemistry
Credit hours:
3(2+1)
- Define acids, bases and describe acidbase reactions
Prerequisite:
Preparatory Year
- Understand concept of pH and its

calculations
- Know buffers and their types
Course Outline:
General concepts, chemical
calculations, molecular weight and
- Know activation energy and

endothermic and exothermic reactions
157
st
nd
- Know 1 and 2 law of

thermodynamics and chemical
equilibrium
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
- Discussion
anatomy of certain diseases in relation

to systems organs
This course covers the basic gross
anatomical features of the human body
that include: digestive, respiratory,
cardiovascular,
urogenital,
neuroendocrinal,
lymphoid
and
musculoskeletal systems. The course
also covers the principles of clinical
anatomy.
Evaluation Means:
50%
Reading List:
- General Chemistry , Ebbing DD, latest
Ed.
- General Chemistry, Hill et al. Latest
Ed.
Course symbol:
ANAT-114
Level: Second
Course Title:
Principles of
Anatomy
Credit hours:
3(2+1)
Prerequisite: BIOL111
By the end of this course student should

be able to:
Describe the general structural
characteristics of the human body
Mention the anatomical characteristics
of the different organs and systems
Compare the different organ structures
and locate their sites in the body
Define planes , orientation, section and
surface anatomy of the body including
sites of the body cavities
Relate clinical observation to gross
anatomy
should be able to:
- Know the anatomical structure of the
various systems of the human body.
- Know the relationship between some
diseases and the anatomical structure.
Course outline:
Introduction to anatomy of different
regions and organs of human body
Systemic anatomy of: joints, lymph,
digestive, urinary, reproductive,
cardiovascular, respiratory, nervous
(CNS and autonomic), musculoskeletal,
endocrine, and embryology. Clinical
- Know some facts about the human

embryology.
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
Evaluation Means:
158

Practical 50%
practical 50%
Written and
- The human endoskeleton, movement

and locomotion.
50%
- The chemical messengers and

Endocrine system
Reading list:
Clinically oriented anatomy. Keith. L.
th
Moore. 4 Ed. 1999.
- Principles of Human Anatomy,
by Gerard J. Tortora
Course symbol:
PHSL-115
Level: Second
Course Title
Principles of
Physiology:
Credit hours:
3(2+1)
- The cardiovascular system and

Hepatic circulation.
- The neural control of blood volume
and pressure
- The body fluid compartments and the
blood as a tissue.
Prerequisite: BIOL104
- The respiratory system and gas

exchanges
- The respiratory-renal adjustment of
acid base
- The digestive system
Course Outline:
This course is aimed to understand the
basis of various physiological functions
of the body from the cell as the
smallest functional component of the
body to the function of various organs,
systems. Further, these systems will be
studied with objective to enhance the
concept of integrative physiology, as
functions of these systems, to the most
part, they are interrelated.
should be able to know:
- The basic aspects of physiology and
body functions
- The functional division of the Nervous
System (NS)
- The function of NS and the exerted
control on key body organs
- The Pancreatic-Hepatic functions

- The reproductive system
- The ovarian, Hormonal and menstrual
cycles
-Theory lectures
practical 50%
Written and
50%
Silverthorn, D.U.: Human Physiology:
An Integrated approach
159
- The renal system and Homeostasis
Human Anatomy & Physiology :Elaine

N. Marieb.
Text Book of Medical Physiology:
Guyton and Hall Saunders
Principals of Medical Physiology: W.F.
Gannong
Course symbol:
CHEM 116
Level: Second
Course Title: Organic

Chemistry
Credit hours:
3(2+1)
- Define aromatic compounds, describe

benzene structure and mention their
physical and chemical properties
- Know carboxylic acids, their
classification and their chemical and
physical Properties
Teaching Methods:
- Discussion
Evaluation Means:
Course Outline:
The course covers general subjects in
organic chemistry including aliphatic
and aromatic hydrocarbons, their
properties and reactions, alkyl, halides,
alcohols, ethers, phenols, aldehydes,
ketones, amines and carboxylic acids.
able to:
- Know hydrocarbons, their
classification, nomenclature, physical
and chemical

Practical 50%
Reading List:
- Organic Chemistry . Mc Murray.
- Organic Chemistry . Wade L.
- Introductory to Organic and
Biochemistry Experiments for students
in Health
Professions. Brabson D.
properties and describe aliphatic and

aromatic hydrocarbons.
- Know reactions of deletion, addition

and substitution
Course Title:
Principle of
Microbiology
- Know methane, ethylene, and

acetylene and mention their properties
- Know alkyl halides, ether and alcohol
and their classification and their
physical and chemical properties
50%
Level:
Second
Credit
hours:
4(2+1)
Prerequisite:
BIOL-111
Course Outline:
- Know aldehydes and ketones and
their physical and chemical properties
This course covers the general

principles of microbiology including
160
Prerequisite: CHEM
113
- Lectures
classification of different groups of

microbes, morphology of each group
and study of their characters. Also the
study includes a brief introduction to
the infectious diseases regarding their
types, causative microbial agents and
methods of their control together with
study of food and air microbiology.
classification of parasites: (Protozoa,

Helminthes, and Arthropods).
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
- Seminars
General Bacteriology:
Introduction to bacteriology, morphological
shape of microorganisms, structure of bacterial
cell, reproduction and growth of bacteria,
physiology of microorganisms, physical
conditions required, or growth of bacteria,
bacterial
genetics,
bacterial
relationship,
bacteriophage, bacterial metabolic
products,
system
of
bacterial
identification, Infection, pathogenicity
and virulence and chemotherapy.
General Virology:
Introduction to virology, classification
of viruses, structure of viruses, growth
of viruses, viral genetics, Infection and
pathogenicity of virus diseases.
Evaluation Means:
-
Semester
Examination:
Written and Practical 50%

Reading Lists:
- Foundations in Microbiology. Kathleen
P. Talaro, 2004.USA.
- Medical Microbiology: A short
Course.Baron, et al., 1994.Willey-Lis.
Course symbol: STAT
118
Course Title:
Biostatistics
Level:
Second
Credit
hours:
3(2+1)
Prerequisite:
Hlth 122
General Mycology:
Introduction to mycology, classification
of mycology, structure of fungi,
reproduction of fungi, growth of fungi,
Infections and pathogenicity.
General Parsitology:
Introduction to parasitology, general
definitions,
Infections
and
pathogenicity
of
parasites.
Epidemiology of parasites, diagnostics
of parasites, control of parasites,
Course Outline:
This
course
presents
detailed
description
of characters types,
displaying and presenting data,
measures
of
central
tendency,
measures of dispersion, principles of
probability, random variables and
probability
distribution,
bimodal
distribution,
natural
distribution,
confidence intervals for mean, median,
ratios and various statistics tests.
161

able to:
- Identify the different methods of

collecting data.
- Interpret different types of data
summaries including tables and charts.
Show
the
advantages
and
disadvantages of different types of data
presentation.
- Identify measures of central tendency
and measures of dispersion and
interpreting them.

Sciences. Chernick M and Friis R - Presenting medical statistics from
proposal to publication. Janet Peacock,
2006.
Course symbol:
ANAT 251
Level: Third
Course Title:
Histology
Credit hours: :
3(2+1)
Prerequisite:
114Anat, 115Phsl,
116Chem, 117MDL
- Estimate means and their confidence

intervals and interpret results
Course Outline:
- Identify properties of natural
distribution and explain the diverse
repeated distribution of
biomedical data.
- Apply the suitable test for a list of
specific data such as student T test, F
test, or chi-square test.
- Use of computer applications in
biomedical data analysis.
Teaching Methods:
- Cell structure and division,

chromosomes and genes.
- Connective tissue, blood and

lymphoid tissue.
- Seminars
- Muscular tissue
- Nervous tissue.
Evaluation Means:
Practical 50%
Reading List:

able to know:
- Epithelial tissue.
- Lectures
The aim of this course is to identify light

microscopic structure of various normal
human body organs and tissues in
addition to the study of cell structure,
and cell division.
50%
- Histology of digestive system.

- Histology of urinary and genital
system.
- Histology of respiratory system.
- Histology of cardiovascular system.
162

able to:
This course covers the theoretical and

practical bases of identifying light &
electron microscopical structure of the
cell and tissues of the human body.
These tissues include epithelial tissues,
connective tissue, muscular tissue,
nervous tissues. The course covers also
the microscopical structure of the
different body systems that include:
digestive, respiratory, cardiovascular,
nervous, urogenital, male and female
genital systems, endocrine system,
lymphoid and musculoskeletal systems.
Teaching methods:
- Lectures.
Practical 50%
50%
Reading list:
- Theory and Practice of Histological
Techniques. By ; John D
Bancroft and Marilyn Gamble, 2002
(5th ed).
- Basic Histology: Text and Atlas, 10th
Edition; 2002.
- Histology: A Text and Atlas, By
Michael H Ross and Wojciech Pawlina
2005 (5th ed)
- Basic Histology. Luiz Carlos Junqueira,
John Long, Jose Carnerio
Color Textbook of Histology. Gartner

Course symbol: MDL
231
Level: Third
Course Title:
Principles of
Biochemistry
Credit hours:
3(2+1)
Prerequisite: Chem
116
Course Outline:
This course offers detailed study of the
chemical compositions and the
biological functions of the main
biochemical molecules including
carbohydrates, proteins, lipids and
their components, enzymes and
different types of hormones. It also
includes methods of practical
qualitative and quantitative assays to
discover these molecules.
able to:
- Know and classify the different groups
of carbohydrates and their main
biological
significance with brief reference to
some pathological conditions such as
diabetes.
- Know and classify the main lipids and
describe their chemical structures and
biological significance with brief
reference to some pathological
conditions caused
by lipid disorders such as
arthrosclerosis.
- M Histology A Text and Atals. Ross
163
- Histology of endocrine glands
describing their chemical structures,

their main biological significance.
- Know proteins, their structures and
physical and chemical forces affecting
their
structure with brief reference to some
common proteins, e.g., haemoglobin,
hormones e.g. insulin and
immunoglobulin e.g. IgG
- Describe enzymes and their role in the
biological reactions and as well as their
diagnostic role in many diseases e.g.
enzyme amylase in pancreatitis.
- Know the structure of nucleic acids i.e.
DNA and RNA and their role in protein
biosynthesis with brief reference to
some of genetic disorders such
thalassaemia
Course symbol: MDL

252
Level: Fourth

pathology
Credit hours:
3(2+1)
Prerequisite: Anat
114, Phsl 115, Chem
116, MDL 117
Course Outline:
This course contains introduction to
general and basic knowledge of
diseases, their causes, pathogenesis,
general morphological and changes at
gross, microscopic and submicroscopic
levels as well as the prognosis of the
disease.
able to know:
- Definition of pathology and disease,
causes of diseases, pathology
specimens and
methods of pathological studies and
their relation to clinical aspects.
and cystic fibrosis.

Teaching Methods:
- Inflammation and repair.
- Lectures
- Discussion
- Cell injury, degeneration, tissue

deposits, necrosis, gangrene.
- Circulatory disturbances.
- Infection and granuloma.
Evaluation Means:
Practical 50%
50%
Reading List:
- Biochemistry. Richard H. and Pamela
C.
- Growth disorders and tumors.

This course clarifies all the known
terms in pathology , types and causes
of
disease,
pathogenesis,
morphological changes in gross and
microscopic levels, symptoms and signs
as well as disease outcome. Also this
course covers the main pathological
164
- Know amino acids, their classification,

physical and chemical properties as
well as
changes
as
inflammation,
degeneration, circulatory disorders,
immune disorders, growth disturbances
and tumors.
Prerequisite: 120
Chem+ 231MDL or
232MDL
Teaching methods:
Course Outline:
- Lectures.
Practical 50%
50%
Reading list:
th
- Pathologic Basis of Disease, 7

edition,2007, Elsevier. Robbins and
Cotran
th
- Surgical Pathology, 9 edition, 2004.

Rosai and Ackerman
Concise Pathology, by Parakrama
Chandrasoma & Clive Taylor: 2 nd ed.
Prentice-Hall international, Inc, 1995.
Pathology
illustrated,
by
Peter
MacFarlane, Robin Reid & Robin
Callander, 5 th ed, Churchill Livingstone
Robbins and Cotra
th

Copyright@2007, Elsevier. [Main
Book]
Rosai and Ackerman Surgical Pathology,
th
This course presents introductory

biochemistry relevant to human health
and disease that forms part of the
foundation
of
modern
medical
practice. The molecular correlation
with disease is emphasized throughout
the course.
By the end of the course, student should be
able to:
- Develop a broad and thorough
understanding at the molecular level of
metabolic and regulatory
events that control the function of
normal cells, tissues and organs and
understand how these
processes are altered by disease
- Describe the steps by which cells
break down biological molecules to
extract energy for the
performance of work.
- Describe major cellular biosynthetic
pathways, steps involved in these
pathways and the
regulation of key enzymes.
- Explain the lipid transport disorders and
their relation to health.
Course symbol: MDL

233
Level: Fourth
- Explain energy balance and its

disorders.

Biochemistry
Credit hours:
3(2+1)
- Major metabolic disorders related to

arthrosclerosis, stroke, and diabetes.
165
- Understand genetic mutations and

disease cases.
- Know the critical clinical cases.

- Diagnose these cases.
Teaching Methods:
- Give the first aid of these cases.
- Lectures
- Call the ambulance in the proper time.
- Discussion
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
Evaluation Means:
Written and
Evaluation Means:
50%
Written and practical 50%
Reading List:
-Medical Biochemistry at a Glance, 2nd

Edition
blackwellpublishing.com/book.asp?ref=
1405113227
-Marks' Basic Medical Biochemistry: A
Clinical Approach, 2004.
Course symbol: HLTH
224
Level: Third
Course Title:
Ambulance Care
Credit hours:
2(1+1)
Prerequisite:
Hlth122 +
Anat114
50%
Reading list:
- Internet source material
specific to each critical clinical
case as determined
by the instructors. - Workshops given by ministry of
health and Red Cresset
Course symbol:
HLTH-121
Level: First

Terminology
Credit hours:
2(2+0)
Prerequisite:
Preparatory Year
Course outline:
This course includes teaching the
methods of dealing with critical clinical
cases. The student should know how to
diagnose these cases, give the first aid
procedure and call the ambulance in
the proper time.
should be able to:
Course Outline:
This course covers the linguistic
structural basis for scientific and
medical terminology in Latin and
English and explanation of the main
terms in different applications of
medical science specialties to enable
advanced students in
different
branches and graduates deal easily
166
Practical 50%

able to:
- Correctly pronounce medical terms
- Explain the meanings of the common
medical terms regularly usable in
medical and
health area
- Correctly understand sentences that
include these terms and abbreviations
- Fluent conversation in English with
workers in the health field
Evaluation Means:
- Semester Examination: 50%
50%
Reading List:
- Medical Terminology for Health
Professions. Ann Ehrlich, Carol L
Schroeder.
- Comprehensive Medical Terminology.
Betty Davis Jones
Course symbol:
HLTH-122
Level: First
Course Title: Health

Care System and
Vocational Safety
Credit hours:
3(2+1)
Prerequisite:
Preparatory Year
Course Outline:
Introduction to applied health sciences,
concept of health and factors affecting
it, the general hierarchy of health
services and their current and future
needs, ethics of practice of the
able to:
- Define health management
- Describe the organization of health
management and its general hierarchy
- Define the health team and describe
the principles of organization and
control of
the team.
- Explain the meaning of supervision
and leadership
- Mention the principles of organization
ethics
- Describe the levels of health care
- Define quality and describe how to
achieve in health care services
- Mention the instruments and
advantages of achieving quality of
health care
- Know danger associated with health
departments and affecting worker.
- Know safety procedures and problem solving in
biohazard.
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
- Discussion
167
with physicians and other workers in

different specialties. The course also
aims at acquainting students with the
pronunciation,
writing
and
understanding of general principal
medical terms and abbreviations
corresponding
to
their
Arabic
homologues.

practical 50%
50%
Reading List:
- Health Care Administration: Planning,
Implementing, and Managing
Organized
- Principles of Biomedical Ethics.
Beauchamp and Childress.
- www.islamset.com ( Islamic
constitution of medical profession).
Course symbol:
HLTH-123
Level: Fourth

ethics
Credit hours:
2(2+0)
- Know and describe the rights and

duties of medical team member
towards the community.
towards the colloquies.
towards himself.
towards the profession.
duties of medical ethics in research.
- Acquire the skill of effective proactivity.
- Acquire the skill of effective planning.
Prerequisite:
Preparatory Year
Course Outline:
This course will introduce, at an entry
level, the understanding of medical
ethics, concepts, rights and duties.
Introduction to effective personal
development knowledge and skills will
should be able to:
- Acquire the skill of effective

prioritization.
- Acquire the skill of effective win-win
thinking.
communication.
- Acquire the skill of effective team
configuration.
synergism.
-Theory lectures
- Know and describe the ethics of

medical professions

Practical 50%

towards the patients
50%
168
Evaluation Means:
Ethics of practicing the profession of

medicine- The Saudi Council of medical
specialist- KSA 2005
Course symbol: MDL

472
Level: Eighth
Course Title:
Graduation Project
Prerequisite: 425Hlth
OR 426Hlth
Course Outline:
This course helps student to start
predetermined project including data
acquisition and analysis then write
report under the supervision of a
faculty staff member.
able to:
- Conduct practical research
- Collect data
50%
- Viva Examination
50%
Reading List:
-
As directed by the student's advisor.
Course symbol:
OPTO 231
Level: 3
Course Title: Ocular

Anatomy and
Physiology
Prerequisite: ANAT
114
Credit hours:
3(2+1)
Course description
A detailed study of the human visual
apparatus and related structures is
presented.
This course presents a systematic study of
the physiology of the eye.
Lecture topics include function,
physiology and biochemistry of the lids,
lacrimal apparatus, cornea, uveal tract,
intraocular fluids, lens, retina and optic
nerve.
- Analyze data
- Trouble shooting
- Write research progress reports
- Write a final paper format with
presentation in form of seminar.
Teaching Methods:
The student conduct the practical
research project under the supervision
of a faculty staff member
Topics are approached from gross

anatomical, histological and
embryological perspectives.
The laboratory is devoted to the
demonstration of basic ocular anatomy
concepts.
Laboratories include dissection of the
mammalian eye and examination of the
human eye.
Objective
Evaluation Means:
169
The Seven Habits of Highly Effective

People - effective lessons in the process
of personal change, Stephen R. Covey.
- Written Report
To enable students to recognize orbital

contents as well as the globe structure.
Course Contents
1- Ocular anatomy
The orbit and paranasal sinuses, The
lacrimal system,The eyelids
The conjunctiva,The cornea,The ciliary
body,The iris,The lens,The choroid and
sclera,The retina,The visual pathways,The
extraocular muscles
2- Orbital vasculature and the cavernous
sinus
3- Skull osteology
4- Visual acuity and adaptation
5- Color vision
6- Binocular vision and stereopsis
7- General physiology of eye structure
8- The Orbital Blood Vessels
9- The Nerve Supply of the Orbit
10- Embryology
Course evaluation:
Mid term exams 50%
Final exam
50%
References
General Ophthalmology by Daniel G.
Vaughan
The Ophthalmic assistant by Stein. Slatt.
Stein
Ocular Anatomy and Physiology by Saude
Ocular Anatomy and Physiology by
Tammy Langley, Shiela Coyne Nemeth,
Carolyn Shea and Al Lens (Editor)
Clinical Anatomy of the Eye by Richard S.

Snell and Michael A. Lemp
Course symbol: OPTO332
Level: 5

Biochemistry
Credit hours:
2(2+0)
Prerequisite: MDL232
Course description:
Study the biochemistry of the
visual process, the chemistry
of visual excitation including
discussion of: Photoreceptor
cells,
Rhodopsin
and
neurotransmitter hypothesis
and substances involved. The
relationship of rhodopsin to
the spectral sensitivity curve
and ERG and ERP. The cone
pigments and normal human
color vision. The genetic
components of red green color
deficiency. The biochemistry
and metabolism of the retina
including hereditary retinal
degeneration (e.g. retinitis
pigmesntosa).
The
biochemistry of the cornea
including corneal hydration,
pump
system,
corneal
metabolism, and tear film
composion
and
function
including the effect of contact
lens wear. The biochemistry of
the normal lens and cataract
formation.
able to:
1- Know the biochemistry of the
visual process.
170
To enable students to examine and

determine the similarities and differences
between the mammalian and human eye.
- Lectures
- Discussion
Evaluation Means:
- 2 Semester Examination:
Written
40%
Written
60%
Level: 3
Course
Title:
Geometrical
and
Physical Optics I
Prerequisite: phys 112
Credit hours:
(2+0)
Course Description:
This course is the first of three essential
courses which, covers the basic optical
theory (both geometric and physical
(wave) optics) and its components.
Geometrical optics deals with the
treatment of light as a ray and will help
the student to understand the basics of
light reflection and refraction. These
principles will be applied to the study of
image formation, lenses, mirrors,
aberrations, prisms, fibers, optical
system design and optical instruments.
Physical optics introduces the wave
nature of light and the consequences of
this behavior. Topics studied include
interference, diffraction, polarization,
interferometry, spectroscopy, etc.
There will also be an introduction to:
light matter interaction and laser.
A lab component will parallel the
lectures
and
provide
hands-on
experience handling optical equipment.
In the laboratory, the student will
develop the ability to appraise, use and
interpret
data
to
express
171
2- Understand the chemistry of

visual excitation including
discussion of:
a- Photoreceptor cells
b- Rhodpsin
c- Neurotransmitter
hypothesis and
substances involved.
d- Know the relationship
between rhodopsin and
spectral sensitivity curve
and ERG and ERP.
3- Understand the role of cone
pigments in normal human
color vision.
4- Know the genetic components
of red green color deficiency,
(causes of color blindness).
5- Know the biochemistry and
metabolism of the retina
including hereditary retinal
degeneration (e.g. retinitis
pigmesntosa).
6- Know the biochemistry of the
cornea including corneal
hydration, pump system,
corneal metabolism, and tear
film composion and function
including the effect of contact
lens wear.
7- Know the biochemistry of
normal lens and cataract
formation, its causes and
symptoms.
8- Know the types of intraocular
lenses, advantages and
disadvantages.
9- Apply all the previous study in
diagnosis of color blindness
and its types, cataract and the
suitable intraocular contact
lenses for the patient.
Teaching Methods:
Overall Courses Objectives

Upon completion of this course, the
student will be able to:
1. Describe the basic principles of

optical physics as related to optometry.
2. Integrate the physics concepts of
geometric optics to apply to discuss
their
practical
applications
in
optometry.
3. Explain and discuss with a working
vocabulary of terms applicable to light
as a ray, geometric and physical optics,
and related optical devices.
4.
Demonstrate
an
elementary
knowledge of graphics construction and
ray-tracing techniques.
5. Demonstrate familiarity with general
terminology and materials used in the
field of optics.
6. Apply principles and simple physics
equations
to
solve
elementary
geometric
and
physical
optics
problems.
7. Write (using correct data collection,
organization, and analysis techniques) a
complete formal laboratory report
(written utilizing proper grammar
techniques) to include: title of
experiment, objectives, data and
observations, results and conclusions.
Course contents:
Geometrical and Physical Optics I
The propagation, reflection

and refraction of light
Refraction including Total
Internal
Reflection
w/Applications
Spherical refracting interfaces
- convex, concave, derivation
of vergence equation
Prisms and Dispersion angular dispersion - dispersive
power
Dispersion
without/deviation
and
deviation
without
dispersion.Achromatic prisms
Plane and Spherical Mirrors including Image

Formation Using Ray Diagrams
Thin Lenses including Thin

Lens Equation Calculations and
Image Formation
Optical
Systems
and
Instruments Using Multiple
Lenses and Mirrors
Mirror and Lens Imaging Errors
(Aberrations) w/Aperture and
F-stops
REFERENCE:
1. Fundamentals of optics
Jenkins/White
2. Optics
A.H.Tunnacliffe J.G.Hirst
Course evaluation:
2Mid term exams 40%
Level: 4
Course
Title:
Geometrical
and
Physical Optics II
Prerequisite: OPTO
241
Credit hours:
(2+0)
The ray theory of light
172
mathematically and explain (often

using a model) the physical phenomena
involved.
The symmetrical optical system, thick

lenses, apertures and stops, magnifiers,
microscopes,
telescopes,
camera
lenses, focimeters, ophthalmometers,
and projectors. The resolving power,
depth of focus and field of view of
optical systems. Exact ray tracing and
the aberrations of optical systems.
Simple and
compound
micro0scope
Telescope
Magnifying power of
simple and
compound
microscope,
telescope
Course contents
Thick lenses.
Thick lenses - front
and back vertex
powers - reduced
system - dioptric
power of equivalent
lenses, cardinal
points.
Application - to
calculate the
equivalent dioptric
power, of thick
meniscus lens, plano
convex vertex
powers, position of
principalplanes.
Dioptric powers using
reduced systems.
Matrix theory and
lens matrices.
Apertures and stops.

Entrance pupil and
exit pupil
Field stop
Entrance port and
exit port, field of
view, vignetting
Depth of field and
depth of focus
Optical instruments:
Spectrometer
Resolving power of
optical instrument
Resolving power of
the eye
The aberrations of optical

systems.
Chromatic
aberrations - cause
and
methods
of
minimizing,
achromatic doublet
Monochromatic
aberrations - first
order and third order
theory
Spherical aberrations,
coma, astigmatism,
curvature, distortion cause and the
methods of
minimizing
aberrations
Tangent condition for
elimination of
distortion.
Point spread function
173
Course description:
Modulation transfer
function
Exact ray tracing
FIBRE OPTICS
Wave Nature of Light
References.
Quantum Theory - Dual Nature of Light
1. Fundamentals of optics
Jenkins/White
2. Optics
A.H.Tunnacliffe J.G.Hirst
Hugens principle - Laws of reflection

and refraction at spherical surfaces and
lenses.
Description of the phenomena of
interference, Youngs experiment,
coherent sources,phase and path
difference, intensity, Theory of
interference fringes.
Course evaluation:
Mid term exams 40%
Final exam
1: Nature of light:
60%
Level: 5
Course
Title:
Geometrical
and
Physical Optics III
Prerequisite: OPTO
242
Credit hours:
(1+1)
Newtons rings experiment - refractive

index of liquid
2: Diffraction and scattering
Single slit, qualitative and quantitative
Circular aperture
Multiple slits - grating
Rayleighs scattering
Course Description:
Provides the theoretical background in
physical optics necessary to understand
the principles behind many phenomena
observed when working with patients
in vision testing and prescribing. The
nature and speed of light as a wave and
as a particle using mathematical
modes.. Fresnel and Fraunhoffer
diffraction of light and its effect on
visual acuity and resolution. Sources of
light, their spectra and the nature of
color.
Absorption,
scattering,
dispersion,
polarization
and
birefringence. Light quanta, their origin,
description
and
consequences,
including lasers and holography.
Raman scattering
3: Polarisation
Polarisation of transverse waves - light
as transverse waves
Double refraction, principal plane, nicol
prism - plane polarization
Circular elliptic polarization production,
detection and behavior
Optical activity - Fresnals half shade
polarimeter
Polarisation by selective absorption
dichorism.
4: Radiometry & Photometry:
174
Course contents:
Radiant intensity
1. Optics in Vision
Henri Obstfeld
Irradiance
2. Optics
Brijilal
Lamberts cosine Law
3. Geometric, Physical, Visual optics

Michael.P.Keating
Reflection co-efficient, transmission coefficient,

power-transmitted
and
Reflected
Lummen Brodhun Photometer
5: Spectrum
Sources of spectrum. Bunsen - carbon mercury - sodium
Emission and absorption spectra classification - visible - ultra violet and
infra
spectraelectromagnetic
spectrum
6: LASER OPTICS:
Basic laser principles - spontaneous and
stimulated emission. Coherence spatial, temporal, Laser
pumping - population inversion optical
feedback
Gas lasers, and solid lasers, Helium
neon laser argon ion laser ruby
laser.
Monocular laser carbandioixide,
eximer laser. Semi conductor lasers.
Lasers
Course evaluation:
2Mid term exams 30%
Practical
20%
Final exam
50%
Level: 2
Course
Optics
Credit hours:
2(2+0)
Title:
Visual
Prerequisite: OPTO
241
Course Description:
The optical aspects of the visual
process. The optic array as a
description of the environment as
contrasted with the conventional view
of the optics of vision based on
geometrical optics and the retinal
image. Ocular models and the imageforming nature of the eye are
considered with emphasis on blur,
chromatic and spherical aberration and
the effects of the pupil. The StilesCrawford Effect, entoptic phenomena,
and glare are discussed. Introduction to
photometry and accommodation and
its role in the visual process. Emphasis
on understanding how changes in
defocus and pupil size affect contrast,
spatial frequency content of the retinal
image, depth of focus and the effects of
aberrations. These topics are related to
clinical refraction and patient care. The
laboratory provides demonstrations of
the various important phenomena.
Course contents
1. Introduction
REFERENCE BOOKS:
175
Basic concepts and definitions in

Photometry
3.The eye as an optical instrument

4.Schematic eyes, Gullstrand`s eye, the
normal eye
5.Refractive
errors:myopia,hyperopia,astigmatism,r
efractive ametropia, axial ametropia
6.Planes and angles of the eye
7.The refractive correction:spectacles
and contact lenses
8.Optical aberrations, depth of focus
and the effects of aberrations.
9.Accommodation
10. optical quality of the retina
Ophthalmic Optics and

Dispensing I
(2+1)
Prerequisite:
opto 344
Course description
Provides the student with the
theoretical and the practical knowledge
and the skills necessary to provide high
quality dispensing services in a private
practice setting. The course covers the
basics of lens materials, single vision
lenses, prisms, bifocals, vertical
imbalance
problems
and
basic
dispensing.
Learning Outcomes
On completion of this subject, the
student should be able to:
11- entoptic phenomena

12-Introduction to photometry and
accommodation and its role in the
visual process.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.Emsley, H. Visual Optics
2.Borish,I.- Clinical Refraction
3.Goldstein,D.-Optics for Optometrists
4.Hart-Adler`s Physiology of the eye
5. Geometric, Physical, Visual optics
Michael.P.Keating
Course evaluation:
1. apply the paraxial theory to analyze

and solve problems related to
image characteristics in various
optical systems
2. recognize the commonly used units
for prism power and inter-converse
a prism power between the
different units
3. use a focimeter and a lens measure
to find the power of a single vision
spectacle lens
4. analyze and solve problems related
to the optical properties of a
single vision spectacle lens
Mid term exams 40%

Final exam
60%
Level: 6
Course Title:
Credit hours:
5. state the optical principles of

lenticular and Fresnel lenses and
recognize their ophthalmic uses
6. select appropriate lens materials for
spectacle prescriptions
176
2. Optical elements of the eye
name some commonly used

spectacle frame materials and
state their properties
8. recognize the major components of a

spectacle frame
9. measure basic features of a spectacle
frame
and
related
facial
parameters for the purposes of
lens edging and frame fitting
10. evaluate the optical suitability of a
given pair of single vision
spectacles
11. perform lens laying-off and edging
for single vision spectacles
Outline Syllabus
Course content
Vergence method of ray

tracing
Basic optic properties of single
vision lenses
Ophthalmic lens power and
form presentation
Ophthalmic prism and lens
decentration
Obliquely crossed cylinders
Accurate transposition
Lens materials and fabrication
Lenticular and Fresnel lenses
Frame material and types
Frame and face measurement
1. Vergence method of ray tracing :

Theory, method and applications
of tracing paraxial ray through
single and complex lens systems.
2. Basic optical properties of single
vision lenses : Optical properties of
spherical and sphero-cylindrical
lenses; principles of focimeter and
lens measure.
3. Ophthalmic lens power and form
presentation : Lens power and
form transposition. Writing of

prescriptions and lens shapes
presentations.
4. Ophthalmic prism and lens
decentration : Specification of
ophthalmic prisms and interactions
of prisms. Theory and calculation
of prismatic effects on lens
decentration.
5. Obliquely crossed cylinders : Effects
and calculation of cylinders crossed
at any angle.
6. Accurate transposition : Calculation
of exact lens forms for thick lenses,
with bi-toric surfaces.
7. Lens materials and their fabrication :
Optical and physical properties of
common ophthalmic lens
materials; selection of lens
materials. Introduction to
processes of lens making.
8. Lenticular and Fresnel lenses :
Optical principles and ophthalmic
uses of lenticular and Fresnel
lenses.
9. Frame materials : Merits of different
types of spectacle frame materials;
frame types and components
parts; effects of frame designs on
fitting.
10. Frame and face measurement :
Introduction to spectacle frame
and face measurement.
Laboratory/workshop practice
Workshop safety; lens measure;
thickness caliber; PD and frame
measure; lens marking; lens edging;
uses of focimeters for single vision
177
7.
lenses and completed spectacles; basic

spectacle fitting.
Course contents
3: Tinted and protective lenses
Course evaluation:
3.1 Characteristics of tinted lenses
Mid term exams 30%
3.2 Absorptive Glasses
Practical exam
20%
Final exam
50%
3.3 Polarising Filters

3.4 Photochromic Filters
References:
3.5 Reflecting filters
Jalie, M. The Principles of Ophthalmic
Lenses. Association of Dispensing
Opticians, London,
Obstfeld H. Spectacle Frames and their
Dispensing. W.B. Saunders, London,
Terms relating to ophthalmic optics and
spectacle frames. Part 2. Glossary of
terms relating to spectacle frames.
BS3521, Part 2., , British Standard.
Recommended Reading
Jalie, M. Ophthalmic lenses and
dispensing. Butterworth-Heinemann :
Optician, 1999
Brooks CW, Borish IM. System for
Ophthalmic Dispensing. 2nd ed.
Butterworth-Heinemann,.
Wakefield, KG, Bennett AG. Bennett's
Ophthalmic Prescription Work. 3rd ed.
Level: 6
Course Title:
Ophthalmic Optics and
Dispensing II
Credit hours: (2+1)
Prerequisite: opto 344
Course description
Optical and physical characteristics of
ophthalmic
lenses.
Prescribing
ophthalmic lenses. Selecting, fitting and
adjusting spectacles. continuation of
ophthalmic optics and dispensing 1
3.6 Bifocal lenses

3.7 Trifocal lenses
3.8 Progressive addition lenses
3.9 Lenticular lenses
3.10 Reflection from spectacle lenses,
ghost images, Reflections in bifocals at
the dividing line
3.11 Antireflection coating, antiscratch
coating, antifog coating, Mirror coating,
edge coating, Hard Multi Coating (HMC)
3.12 Field of view of lenses
3.13 Size, shape of view of lenses
3.14 Aspherical lenses
4: spectacle frames
4.1 Types and parts
4.2 Classification of spectacle framesmaterial, weight, temple, position,
coloration
4.3
Frame
construction,
measurements and markings
frame
5: dispensing optics
5.1 Surfacing and polishing glass lenses
5.2 Glazing
178
5.4 Facial measurements and frame

choice
5.5
Frame
and
dimension
measurements of complete pair of
spectacles
5.6 Complete dispensing for subjects.
5.7 Special lenses examination of
specimens
5.8 Lens faults in sections
5.9 Measurements of assorted faces for
spectacle
5.10 Making and edging of bifocal
lenses
5.11 Edging of lenses for plastic, metal
and rimless frames
5.12 Joining
solvents
plastics
by
different
Practical:
Laboratory exercises in edging,
mounting, insertion and glazing,
neutralization, surfacing, lens lay out,
frame adjustments, transportation
(optical cross, toric and flat), and filling
prescriptions.
Jalie, M. The Principles of Ophthalmic Lenses.

Association of Dispensing
Opticians, London,
Obstfeld H. Spectacle Frames and
Dispensing. W.B. Saunders, London,
their
Terms relating to ophthalmic optics and

spectacle frames. Part 2. Glossary of terms
relating to spectacle frames. BS3521, Part 2.,
British Standard. Recommended Reading: Jalie,
M. Ophthalmic lenses and dispensing.
Butterworth-Heinemann : Optician, 1999
Brooks CW, Borish IM. System for Ophthalmic
Dispensing. 2nd ed.
Butterworth-Heinemann,
Wakefield, KG, Bennett AG.
Ophthalmic Prescription Work.
Bennett's
3rd ed.
Mid term exams 30%

Practical exam
20%
Final exam
50%
Level: 5
Course
Neuroscience
Credit hours:
(2+0)
Title:
Equipments:
Ophthalmic Mechanics Trial case, P.D.
rule, one pair finish lens (plastic and
glass, cylindrical and spherical), one
pair rough lens (glass), one spectacle
frame, protractor, long nose pliers,
chipping pliers, screwdriver set, lens
pattern materials (scissors, cardboard,
pens).
References:
Prerequisite: OPTO
231
Course description:
The nerve cell and neuroembryology.
The spinal cord (ascending and
descending
pathways),
brainstem
(medulla, pons and midbrain), cranial
nerves (efferent and afferent columns),
179
5.3 Frame manipulation and repair
the diencephalon, the telencephalon

and sensory receptors.
- Lectures
- Seminars.
Course outline:
- Group discussion
By the end of this course student

should be able to:
Mid term exams 40%

Final exam
60%
Recommended Books:
Fundemental neuroscience, Larry R.Squire et al.
th
3 Ed. 2008.
th
Describe the general structural and functional

characteristics of the human nervous system,
Including: The nerve cell and neuroembryology.
The spinal cord; grey and white matter
(ascending
and
descending
pathways),
brainstem (medulla, pons and midbrain), cranial
nerves (efferent and afferent columns), the
diencephalon, the telencephalon and sensory
receptors.
Correlate clinical observation
neurological sciences.
Evaluation Means:
to
Neuroscience, Dale Purves et al. 4 Ed.

2006
Principles of neural science, Eric R.
th
Kandel, 4 Ed.
Level: 5
Course
Oculomotor
Credit hours: (2+0)
Title:
Systems
Prerequisite: OPTO
251
Course contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
The nerve cell

Neuroembryology
The spinal cord
The spinal cord (ascending
pathways),
5. The spinal cord (descending
pathways),
6. Medulla
7. Pons
8. Midbrain
9. Cranial nerves (efferent and
afferent columns)
10. The diencephalon
11. The telencephalon
12. Sensory receptors
Teaching Methods:
Course description:
This course reviews some of the main
features of each of the oculomotor
systems: saccadic, pursuit, fixation,
optokinetic,
vestibula-ocular
and
vergence. Of primary concern are the
characteristics of different types of eye
movements and how they arise from
the interactive dynamics of orbital
mechanics
and
brainstem
neurophysiology. Quantitative models
are utilized to illustrate and highlight
important system properties. As part of
the course students have an
opportunity to observe each type of
180
Introduction to basic neuroscience,

structures and functions of different
regions and organs of human nervous
system. Including the Neuroanatomy,
Neurophysiology, Neuroembryology.
Clinical Neuroanatomy of certain
diseases in correlation to systems and
organs will be elucidated.
eye movement in a laboratory setting

and to investigate quantitatively
significant
properties
of
the
movements.
Normal
oculomotor
behavior and physiology are used as a
basis for understanding eye movement
disorders.
Course contents:
vengeance), Supra nuclear control of

eye movements.( the superior colliculi,
the occipital cortex, the psycho optical
reflexes & fixation.
Oculomotor system:
vestibular ocular reflexes, optokinetic
reflexes. Diagnosis & clinical aspects of
ocular anomalies & disorders.
Eye movements:
Converge through a spectacle lens.
Interactive
dynamics
of
orbital
mechanisms
&
brain
stem
neurophysiology out line of extra
ocular muscle control.
Extra ocular muscles-their function &
nerve supply.
Mechanics of actions of extra ocular
muscles -cross sectional area of muscle,
length of muscle.
Arc of contact, muscle plane, Muscle
axis of rotation.
Prismatic effects in spectacle lenses

REFERENCES:
Evaluation Means:
2Mid term exams 40%
Final exam
60%
Level: 5
Course Title: VISUAL

Neuroscience
Credit hours:
(2+0)
Prerequisite: OPTO
251
Physiology of ocular movement:

Basic Kinematics, ( position of gaze,
Ficks axes)
Ocular movements :
Monocular Movements
( Adduction, Abduction, supraduction,
Infraduction,
Incycloduction,
excycloduction).
Binocular Movements
VERSIONS(saccadic
&
pursuit
movement, position maintenance
movements, stabilization movements &
their characteristics). VERGENCES
(Convergence, divergence, vertical
Course contents
This course presents the study of the
central nervous system, including
cellular neurophysiology, organization
of sensory pathways, voluntary control
of movement, and the physiology of
central visual pathways.
Neuroanatomy and neurophysiology of
the eye and visual system will be
studies.
Gross
anatomy,
histology
and
functional significance of the optic
nerve, optic chiasma, optic radiation,
181
The orbit anatomy of the extraocular

muscles.
lateral geniculate body and the visual

cortex will be studies.
3- Visual information
(physiology of vision),
The cranial nerves, their nuclear

organization and innervation of ocular
and extraocular tissues will also be
studied.
4- The ocular sensory and motor

system
Objective
The student will gain a basic
understanding of the central nervous
system. In addition to the study of the
major sensory and motor pathways of
the brain, and discussion of the clinical
correlations
of
neuroanatomical
structure.
students will learn the anatomy and
physiology of the visual pathways,
along with the psychophysics and
physiology of binocular vision.
The neuroanatomy and physiology of
the ocular motor system is introduced
in order to understand eye movements
and ocular motor system.
5- The ocular sensory and motor

pathways
Part B
1- The cranial nerves
2Nuclear
organization
and
innervational control of the cranial
Nerves which sub serve the oculovisual
system.
References
Basic Science Ophthalmology
By: John Ferris and D L Easty
Functional Neuroanatomy
by Wendell J. S. Krieg.
Ocular Anatomy and Physiology
by Saude
Course Evaluation:
2 Mid term exams 40%
Final exam
Topics
Part A
1- Gross anatomy of the cerebrum and
brain stem.
2- Anatomy of the Visual Pathway:
Course symbol:
OPTO-354
Course
Title:Monocular
Sensory Processes
60%
1Level:
Credit hours: (2+1)
i) Anatomy of the optic nerve.

ii) Anatomy of the optic
chiasm.
Prerequisite: OPTO
352, OPTO 353
iii Anatomy of the optic radiations.

iv) Anatomy of the Visual Cortex
Course description:
182
Visual information processing and

introduction to visual field defects will
be covered.
processing
Objective: To provide the students with

clear understanding of the processes
involved in the perception of various
domain of vision. Specifically, the
students will learn the various
processes that are done by the visual
system to make sense out of the image
that is formed on the retina.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Visual Physiology
a. Processing of light at each layer of
retina
b. Types of Bipolar cells, ganglion cells
c. Receptive fields
d. Post retinal visual pathways in terms
of visual processing
Introduction to Psychophysics
a. Webers Law and Fechners Law
b. Classical concepts of thresholds
c. Modern concepts of thresholds
statistical nature of thresholds;
internal and external noise; factors
affecting thresholds
d. Psychophysical methods of threshold
estimations methods of limits,
staircase and adaptive techniques of
threshold estimation, forced-choice
procedures
Luminance perception
MTF, OTF of optical system
a. Definition
b. Diffraction limited MTF
c. Nyquist theorem and aliasing
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Contrast, Contrast sensitivity, Contrast

sensitivity function
a. Definitions
b. Measurement methods
c. Visual pathway of contrast perception
d. Effect of optical and neural disorders
on the CSF
Visual Acuity:
a. Detection acuity
b. Resolution: Relation between MTF
and retinal structures, Grating acuity
c. Recognition: Snellen, Landolts C, Log
MAR, Lea, LCVA
d. Vernier acuity: Types
e. Relation between acuities
f. Dynamic acuity
Color vision
a. Rod and Cone Spectral Sensitivity
Function
b. Theories of color vision trichromatic
theory and color opponent theory
c. Visual pathway involved color
perception
Motion perception: Theories
Form perception: Object recognition, face
recognition
Course Evaluation:
Practical exam
20%
Final exam
50%
Level: 1
Course Title: Binocular

Vision
Credit hours:
(2+0)
Prerequisite:OPTO 243
Course description:
183
The anatomical and neurophysiological

bases for spatial and temporal visual
performance are examined and related
to clinical testing. Visual acuities,
contrast sensitivity, light and dark
adaptation, and color vision are
discussed in terms of their normal
function
and
clinically
relevant
deviations from normal. Laboratories
emphasize the measurement of these
functions in assessing the visual
capacities of individual patients.
Course contents:
Grades
of
binocular
visionsimultaneous perception (first grade of
binocular vision), fusion, steropsis
(third grade of binocular single vision).
Advantages of binocular vision. Visual
direction and the horopter_visual
direction, corresponding point and
normal
retinal
correspondence,
horopter, physiologic diplopia.
Binocular fusion-panums area,fixation
disparity,theories
of
binocular
fusion,synergy
hypothesis
of
panum,local sign hypothesis of
hering,eye movement hypothesis of
helmholts,suppession hypothesis of du
tour and verhoeff,physiologic basis of
fusion.
Dihoptic stimulation-depth with fusion
and depth with diplopia,diplopia
without depth,retinal rivary and
suppretion,binocular lusure. Stropsisphysiologicalbasis of stereopsis,local
and
global
stereopsis
and
fusion,stereopsis
acuity
neurophysiology of stereopsis.
perception of depth under binocular

condition,monocular clues (non
stereoscopic clues to spetial
orientation)-parallactic movements,
linear perspectiveoveriay of
contours,sizedistance from horizon
,distribution of highlights, shadow,
shades and light .aerial perspective,
influence of accommodation and
convergence on depth perception,
conclusion. Integration of the motor
and sensory system into binocular
vision.
Binocular defects:
Binocular
optical
defectsanisometropia-vision
in
anisometropia,treatment,
Binocular
optical
defects-aniseikoniasymtoms,
clinical
investigatoin,treatment.
Binocular muscular co-ordinationorthophoria-binocular vision.
Binocular
muscular
anomaliesheterophoria-the causes of imbalance
,exophoria, esophoria, hyperphoria,
cyclophoria,
symptoms
of
heterophoria, treatment. Binocular
muscular anomalis-heterotropiathe
vision in concomitant strabismus,
treatment. Binocular muscular coordination-convergence-voluntary and
reflex convergence, reflex convergence,
the measurement of convergence, the
relation between accommodation and
convergence,
binocular
accommodation,
fatigue
of
convergence.
Binocular
muscular
anomaliesanomalies of convergence and other
reading
difficultiesinsufficiency
of
convergence, convergence excess, the
Depth perceptionsteropsis,nonstereoscopic cluesto yhe
184
An analysis of the geometrical,

psychophysical,
and
physiological
sensory and motor aspects of binocular
vision,
including
their
clinical
implications. Topics include visual
direction
and
correspondence,
binocular
summation/averaging,
rivalry, fusion, the horopter, stereopsis,
spatial
distortion/adaptation
and
aniseikonia,
fixation
disparity,
vergence/accommodative interactions,
and motor/perceptual interactions.
Laboratory sessions cover many of
these topics.
ophthalmologist and the reading ability

of children.
Perception of wavelength as color;

colorimetry, color vision theories,
BINOCULAR VISION TEST:
Trichromatic-opponent colors theory,

neurophysiology of color vision.
Test
for
simultaneous
macular
perception, test for fusion, test for
stereopsis-synoptophore
or
stereoscope test, vectograph test,
titmus
stereo
test,randomdot
sterogram test,simple motor task test
based on stereopsis.
Objectives
The aim of the course is to teach
students how the perception process of
the visual system is and the mechanism
color vision and its defects.
Topics
Binocular vision Anomalies & Procedures

for vision therapy, By Griffies
Course Evaluation:
Understanding Visual Perception

Perception of Depth
Level: 1
Course Title:
Visual
perception
1) Visual Perception
Reference books
Perception of Motion
Credit
hours: (2+1)
o Directional Sensitivity
Perception of Shape
Perception of Size
Perception of Distance
Prerequisite:
OPTO 354.
Perception of Time
2) Optical Illusions and Entopic
Phenomena

Final exam
60%
Course description:
This course is concerned with the study
of the perception of depth, direction,
size, shape, distance, motion and time,
through the visual medium.
Optical
illusions
and
entopic
phenomena;
their
causes
and
significance to the visual system.
Description of Optical Illusions

Causes
Significance to the Visual System
3) Color Vision
Mechanisms of Color Vision
Color Vision Defects and their
Significance
Recommended Texts
The mechanisms of color vision, color

vision defects and their significance.
185
by
2) Optometry
by Keith
Edwards and Richard Llewellyn
3) The physiology of the eye (Fourth
Ed.)
by Hugh Davson
Course Evaluation:
Practical exam
20%
Final exam

Course Title:
Visual field
50%
Level: 8
Credit
hours: (1+1)
Prerequisite:
OPTO 456
Course description:
The epidemiology, pathophysiology,
anatomy, and clinical correlates of the
visual fields and its utilization in the
diagnosis and treatment of ocular
disease. The curriculum is designed to
cover the entire spectrum of visual field
examination and analysis from basic
technique in the area of Amsler grid
and tangent screen evaluation to the
most
sophisticated
automated
perimetry systems. The laboratory
section of this course is designed to
provide intensive hands on education
with a wide variety of visual field
instrumentation and techniques.
Practical exam
20%
Final exam
50%
Level: 1
Course Title:
Behavioral Vision and
Learning
Credit hours:
(1+1)
Prerequisite: OPTO
456
Course descriptions:
An inclusive model of behavioral vision
is presented. Clinical application of
research in perceptual and cognitive
development and new techniques used
in infant evaluation with discussion of
the practical aspects involved in
examining children from birth to five
years of age. Models of spatial
development developed by Piaget and
Gesell are discussed along with the
ideas of Kephart, Barsch, Getman,
Trvarthan, Rosner and Corballis and
Beale. Introduction to standardized
visual-perceptual clinical tests. The
relationship of the visual-perceptual
cognitive skills and motor-based skills is
also discussed. Review of research on
the efficacy of perceptual training and
communication skills in vision therapy.
Course contents
a) Assessment of children Vision &
Paediatric evaluation, diagnosis &
management.
b) Strabismus & Aniblyopia.
Course evaluation:
186
1) Visual Perception
Cornsweet
c) Non- Strabismic Biuoculan Disorders.

d) Neuro- Optometric Rehabilitation.
e) Evaluation, Diagnosis & Optometric
management of children with mental
retardation C.P. Dyslexia, Multiple
Sensory Motor Haudicap.
Course Title:
Optometric
Epidemiology
Credit hours:
(2+0)
Prerequisite:118 stat
Coursed description:
g) Sports vision.
h) Refraction in special cases (
pseudophakia , aphakia, irregular
corneal astigmatism , coloboma of iris,
choroids, retina, nystagmus, post R.K.,
PRK, LASIK)
i) Congenital cataract, glaucoma.
j) Patient with low vision.
k) Patient with anisometropia(
Anisokonia)
l) Monocular & binocular subjective
refraction.
Basic epidemiological principles as

applied to eye and vision problems.
Applications of epidemiology in
optometric practice.
Course Evaluation:
Final exam
Course Title:
Optometry 1
60%
Level: 3
Credit
hours: (2+2)
Prerequisite:
115 PHSL
Reference Books:
1.Paediatric Optometry, By Jerome
Rosner
2.Vision development, By ILG & Bullis
3.Management of Special Population,
By Dominiquee Maino.
Course Evaluation:
Practical exam
20%
Final exam
50%
Level: 1
Course Description:
This course introduces theoretical and
practical aspects of determining the
refractive state of the eye. The etiology
diagnosis, and treatment of myopia,
hyperopia and astigmatism are
discussed
together
with
their
correction using spectacle lenses. In the
clinical laboratory, the student as
practitioner learns to observe a
patient's behavior, construct working
hypotheses, skillfully and efficiently
carry out appropriate examination
procedures, and then successfully
gather sufficient data to develop
187
f) Visual Disorders in senior citizens,

evaluation, diagnosis+ management.
Course content
1.0 Refraction Conditions
1.1Refractive
Status
(ametropia,
hyperopia,
myopia,
presbyopia
astigmatism, and emmetropia)
1.2Incidence & Distribution, Definition,
Classification,
Etiology,
and
its
Management
1.3 Determination of refractive status
both
objective
(retinoscopy,
autorefractors) and subjectively both
(monocular and bin ocular)
2.0 Accommodative mechanism
2.1 Definition, Classification
2.2 Determination of accommodative
mechanisms function both objectively
and subjectively including dynamic
both retinos copy, amplitude of
accommodation, cross cylinder tests,
negative
and
positive
relative
accommodation.
2.3
Identify
anomalies
of
accommodation (including ill sustained
accommodation,
insufficiency
of
accommodation spasm of near reflex,
inertia of accommodation), aphakia,
anomalies of ACA ratio and its
management.
PRACTICAL OPTOMETRY
1.0 Assessment of Visual Functions
1.1 Case History
2.0 External Examination
3.0 Preliminary Examination
3.1 Visual Acuity

3.2 Ocular Motility (versions,
vergence, fixation)
3.3 Pupillary reflexes (direct,
indirect,
consensual
accommodative)
3.4 Ocular Dominance
3.5 Interpupillary Distance
3.6 Negative
Convergence
and
Positive
3.7 Negative and

Accommodation
Positive
4.0 Objective clinical procedures such

as opthalmoscopy, biomicroscopy,
ophthalmometry, and retinoscopy
Reference Books:
- Optometry: Science, Techniques and
Clinical Management
by Mark Rosenfield MCOptom PhD
FAAO and Nicola Logan MCOptom PhD
(Jun 22, 2009)
- Primary Care Optometry (Grosvenor,
Primary Care Optometry)
by Theodore P. Grosvenor (Nov 2,
2006)
Course Evaluation:
Practical exam
20%
Final exam
50%

Course Title:
Optometry 11
Level: 4
Credit
188
definitive diagnosis and correction of

refractive anomalies of the human eye.
hours: (2+2)
Prerequisite:
OPTO261

2006)
Course Evaluation:
Course description
Practical optometry
5.0 Subjective Testing
5.1 Monocular Subjective Techniques
(fogging, determination and refinement
of astigmatic correction, determination
of spherical component, bichrome test)
5.2 Binocular Subjective Techniques
(Biochrome balancing, Turville Infinity
Balance Test, Prism Dissociation Test,
Balancing Technique with Polarizing
filters)
5.3 Equalization Techniques
6.0 All other tests necessary to assess
the refractive, accommodative and
binocular vision status
6.1 Phorometric Tests
Reference Books:
Clinical Management
(Jun 22, 2009)
Practical exam
Final exam
Course Title:
Optometry 111
20%
50%
Level: 5
Credit
hours: (2+2)
Prerequisite:
OPTO 262
Course description
Continuation of Optometry I and II. The
clinical assessment of the refractive
state of the eye at near is studied in
detail. This includes tests of
accommodation and vergence and their
interaction. Integration of the full
distance and near refractive sequence
is developed.
Reference Books:
Clinical Management
(Jun 22, 2009)
189
Continuation of Optometry I. The goal

of this course is the development by
the student of a sound theoretical basis
for the clinical assessment of the
refractive status of the eye at distance
by
"subjective"
methods
of
examination. There is also an
introduction to near vision testing.

2006)

Clinical Management
Course Evaluation:

(Jun 22, 2009)
Practical exam
20%
Final exam
50%
Level: 1
Course Title:
Refractive and
Binocular Case
Analysis
Prerequisite: OPTO
363
Course description
As a result of the materials presented
in this course and previously acquired
information, the student will be able to
develop a diagnosis and spectacle
therapy plan in an effort to solve a
patient's vision problem(s). The
methods
taught
will
include
conventional, graphic, and O.E.P.
analysis. The course emphasis will be
for the student to learn the relative
values of specific tests and approaches
and their inter-relationships. In
addition to the traditional "21 point
analysis" examination procedures,
students will become familiar with the
technique and application of such
topics as the cycloplegic refraction, the
pseudophakic examination, and the
Mohindra Technique.
Reference Books:

2006)
Course Evaluation:
Practical exam
20%
Final exam
50%
Level: 8
Course
Title:Strabismus and
Amblyopia
Prerequisite: OPTO
355
Course description:
Introduction to amblyopia terminology,
diagnosis, prognosis, and therapy. The
mechanisms underlying the sensory, motor, and
perceptual abnormalities in the amblyopic eye
are discussed, appropriate diagnostic batteries
are considered, and strategies for remediation
are developed. Identification and classification
of both paralytic and non-paralytic types of
strabismus. Evaluation of motor components of
strabismus to classify the strabismus according
to direction, ACA ratio, and etiology and
evaluation of the sensory components of
strabismus, (i.e., quality of fusion, type of fusion
and retinal correspondence). Treatment of the
190
various types of strabismic patients using lenses,

prisms, surgery and/or pharmaceutical agents.
Using a seminar/workshop format, emphasis is

placed on the ethical implications of
professional practice.
Reference Books:
by Theodore P. Grosvenor (Nov 2, 2006)

- The Wills Eye Manual: Office and Emergency
Room Diagnosis and Treatment of Eye Disease
(Rhee, The Wills Eye Manual) by Justis P. Ehlers,
Chirag P. Shah, Gregory L. Fenton, and Eliza N.
Hoskins (Feb 20, 2008)
Course Evaluation:
Mid term exam
Final exam
20%
50%
Level: 11
Course Title: practice

development and
adminstration
Credit hours: (1+0)1
Prerequisite: OPTO
486
Course description:
This course is designed to provide educational
information and exercises that facilitate the
acquisition of knowledge and skills necessary for
entering independent practice.
Students will be taught modern business
principles and be able to select their preferred
mode of practice.
This course coincides with the introduction of
students to patient care in a clinical setting.
Emphasis is placed on enhancing a students
interpersonal skills and professionalism as part
of patient care.
Doctor/patient communication methods are

practiced and clinicians are taught how to
enable patients to fully evaluate the
consequences of various treatment and
management options.
The business concepts of public relations and
practice marketing, patient retention, recall and
office production monitoring are presented.
Clinical-legal aspects from record keeping,
patient confidentiality, documentation, coding
and billing, record release, and PDA (Patients
with Disabilities Act) issues are also covered.
This course provides learning experiences for
students in planning personal and professional
goals, and in the financial arrangements
necessary to reach these goals.
Personal finance strategies are introduced to
manage debt and prepare for future business
goals.
Career choices using the Doctor of Optometry
degree, modes and scope of optometric
practice, as well as the advantages and
disadvantages of the various paths are
discussed.
Objectives
The desired outcome of the course is that the
student will be able to select and enter the best
practice situation to meet his/her personal goals
upon graduation.
Each student will prepare a loan proposal to
secure funding for the practice opportunity
chosen.
Course Contents
1.
2.
Demographics
Employment Options
191
- Primary Care Optometry (Grosvenor, Primary

Care Optometry)
Mid term exams 40%

Final exam
60%
References
Business aspects of Optometry By John G Glasse
Level: 12
Course Title: Vision

Rehabilitation
Credit hours: 3 (2+1)
Prerequisite: OPTO473
Course description:
Evaluation of the low vision patient.
The low vision examination including
case history, visual acuity, externals,
retinoscopy, subjective and functional
testing. Prescribing, training in the use
of and dispensing of low vision devices.
Optics of low vision devices.
Interdisciplinary approach to low vision.
a) Definition-old, new, proposed

b) Grades of low vision
c) Statistics/ Epidemiology
e) Low vision optics
size/
Optics of Galilian & Keplarian

telescope
advantage/disadvantage,
significance of exit & entrance
pupil. Optics of spectacle
magnifier/
determination/
calculation/
disadvantage/advantage.Optic
s
of
stand
magnifier,
significance of equivalent
viewing
distance
&
calculations.
Telescope- distance/ near/
telemicroscope/ monocular/
binocular/
bioptic.
Determination of decentration
of
lenses
/prism/calculation/Lebensons
formula/simple diotricformula.
Hand
held
magnifierilluminated/ non-illuminated.
Spectacle magnifier / half eye/ prism
correction/ bar magnifier/ CCTV/
magni-cam/ low vision imaging system
or V-max / contact lens & IOL
telescope.
f) Low vision examination:
Course contents:
d)
Relation
between
impairment & handicapped
Magnification-relative
distance/
relative
approach/angular
disorder,
Task/ Goal oriented historymedical/ visual/ psychological

history/
task
analysis/
mobility/distance vision/ near
vision
/
daily
living/
illumination/ work & school.
Visual acuity measurementdistance/ near/ use of log MAR
chart ( distance & near)/ light
house, picture chart/ visual
field/ Amsler chart/ contrast
192
3. Starting A private Practice

4. practice financing
5. organizing an office
6. managing office staff
7. Recall System
Course evaluation:
sensitivity/ overview of glare

testing.
1.The Art & Practice of Low Vision , By

Freeman & Jose, Butterwort Pub.
Low vision refraction.
2.Understanding Low Vision , AFB

Publication
optical/
non-optical/
rehabilitation services.
Nonoptical
devicespen/umbrella/ boldline note
book/ illumination/ letter
writer/
environmental modification/
signature
guide/
needle
threader/ eccentric viewing
strategies.
h) Overview of Rehabilitation Services:definition/ implementation/
vocational
guidance/educational
guidance/
mobility
&
orientation training / special
teacher/ special school/ Braille
system/
integrated
system/referral
centeractivity/ support/ loan.
i) Overview of systematic / retinal
diseases in relation to low vision:acromatopsia/
LMBB
syndrome/ labers congenital
anomaly/ down syndrome/
retinitis pigmentosa/ diabetic
retinopathy/ optic atrophy/
albinism/ aniridia.
j) Counseling of low vision patient/
parents/ guardians/relatives.
Reference Books:
3.Low Vision, By Fayea E.E

Course Evaluation:
Practical exam
20%
Final exam
50%
Level: 9
Course Title: Pediatric

and Special population
Optometry
Credit hours: (2+0)
Prerequisite:
OPTO
465, OPTO 391
Course description:
This behavioral and clinically oriented
course is intended to give the third year
professional student an opportunity to
establish
a
comprehensive
understanding of the optometric
experience with pediatric patients and
other special populations. The course
goal is to develop an understanding
and appreciation of a pediatric oriented
examination so that the clinician can
better utilize cognitive and behavioral
characteristics of children and other
special populations.
Objectives
After the course, the student should:
1) describe the vision development of
children and use examination
193
g) Assessment & prescription of low

vision devices-
Course content
The course contains the following
parts:
1- Vision development
2- Eye diseases and eye
complications in children.
3- Examination methodology,
binocular vision,
4- Children and contact lenses,
5- Vision dimness technique and
children, and screening.
6- The diagnostic medication and
its use,
7- Studies of the topography and
aberrations of the eye,
8- The use of Gonioscopy lens
and 90D lens,
Visual field examination, pressure
measurements techniques for
examination of the retina.
The course is divided in three parts:
1) Clinical work comprises
attendance in compulsory
demonstrations, exercises and
clinical work.
2) Comprises submission and
presentation of group assignment
and individual work.
3) Theoretical understanding.
Comprises a theoretical
understanding and application of
the subject-specific contents of the

course.
Course evaluation:
Mid term exams 40%
Final exam
60%
Course symbol: PHG301
Level: 6

Pharmacology
Credit hours:2 (2+0)
Prerequisite:
Course Outline:
This course will provide the essential
knowledge needed to understand the
pharmacokinetic
and
pharmacodynamic i.e mechanism of
drug action and
receptor interaction. This will provide
the basic knowledge that the
optometrist
needs
to
use
pharmacuetical agents effectively and
to know their adverse effects.
Course contents
1.1 Introduction and sources of drugs
1.2 Routes of drug administration
1.3 Phrmacokinetics
1.4 Pharmacodynamic i.e mechanism of
drug action (drug receptor interaction)
1.5 Adverse drug reactions
Course objectives
should be able to:
194
methodology in relation to the age and

mental capacity of the child,
2) take care of (examine, treat
optometrically, and refer) children with
eye diseases and other medical
conditions affecting the eyes,
3) take care of (examine, treat
optometrically and refer) children that
run the risk of developing or suffer
from binocular disorders, and
4) describe and carry out additional
studies of children with reading and
writing disabilities.
a-
Know an introduction of
pharmacology and sources of
drugs .
b- Understand the routes of drug
administration.
c- Understand
the
Phrmacokinetics of the drugs
d- Understand pharmacodynamic
i.e mechanism of drug action
(drug receptor interaction).
e- Understand the adverse drug
reactions.
Teaching Methods:
effectively and safely. The goal is to

provide an understanding of
pharmacological action that may be
related to ocular side effects from
medications.
Course contents
1.1 Autonomic Nervous System
a) Introduction.
b) Neutrotransmitters
c) Cholinergic drugs
- Lectures
- Discussion
d) Adrenergic drugs
e) Skeletal muscle relaxants
Evaluation Means:
1.2 Cardiovascular System
- First semester examination:
15%
- Second semester examination:
15%
- Continuous assessment
10%
60%
Reading List:
a) Antihypertensive drugs
b) Drugs useful in Angina
c) Diuretics
d) Anticoagulants
e) Thrombolytics
Ophthalmologic Drug Guide by Douglas

J. Rhee, Kathryn A. Colby, Lucia Sobrin,
and Christopher J. Rapuano (Dec 3,
2010)
1.3 Central Nervous System

a) Sedative Hypnotics drugs
b) General Anesthetics drugs
Level: 7
Course Title:Ocular
Pharmacology (1)
Credit hours: (2+0)
c) Local anesthetics drugs
Prerequisite: PHG 301
d) Analgesics (opioids)
e) Analgesics (Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs; NSAIDs)
1.4 Chemotherapy
Course Outline:
This course is to present principles that
will enable the optometrist to use
systemic related ocular drugs
a) Introduction
b) Antibiotics
c) Antifungal
195
d) Antiviral
e) Antitubercular
Written
10%
Written
60%
f) Antileprotic
Refrences
g) Anticancer drugs
a) Corticosterids
b) Antidiabetics
c) Antithyroid
1.6 Antihistamine drugs
a) H-1 blocker
b) Mast cell stabilizer

2010)
Level: 1

Pharmacology (2)
Prerequisite: OPTO
471
Course objectives
should be able to:
a-
The optometrist should be

able to use systemic related
ocular drugs effectively and
safely Understand the routes
of drug administration.
b- The optometrist should be
able
to
understand
of
pharmacological action that
may be related to ocular side
effects from medications.
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
- Discussion
Evaluation Means:
Written
15%
Written
15%
Course Outline:
The purpose of this course is to present
principles
and
comprehensive
information that will enable the
optometrist
to
use
ocular
pharmaceutical agents effectively and
safely. A logical organization makes it
easy to find essential information.
Complete coverage of the basic
fundamentals of pharmacology such as
ocular drug delivery and ocular drug
formulations. Comprehensive reviews
of the pharmacology of specific classes
of agents such as the cycloplegics,
antiglaucoma drugs, anti-inflammatory
drugs, ocular irrigating solutions, antiinfective and contact lens care
products.
COURSE CONTENTS
2.1 Ocular preparations, formulations
and requirements of ideal agents
196
1.5 Hormones
DIAGNOSTIC
AND
APPLICATIONS
OF
OPTHALMOLOGY.

should be able to:
a-
The optometrist should be

able
to
use
ocular
pharmaceutical
agents
effectively and safely.
b- The optometrist should be
able to complete coverage the
basic
fundamentals
of
pharmacology such as ocular
drug delivery and ocular drug
formulations.
c- The optometrist should get a
comprehensive reviews of the
pharmacology of
specific
classes of agents such as the
cycloplegics,
d- antiglaucoma drugs, antiinflammatory drugs, ocular
irrigating
solutions,
antiinfective and contact lens care
products.
THERAPUTIC
DRUGS
IN
2.3 Agents used to aid diagnosis

2.4 Drugs and biological agents used in
ocular surgery
2.5 Anesthetics used in ophthalmic
procedures
2.6 Drugs for treatment of glaucoma,
accommodative esotropia and ocular
myasthenia
2.7 Pharmacotherapy of ocular
infections-Bacterial, Viral, Fungal,
Chlamydial
2.8 Drugs used in inflammatory
disorders of the eye.
2.9 Drugs for treatment of
degenerative disorders of the eye
2.10 Immuno-modulators in ophthalmic
practice
2.11 Use of other agents in ophthalmic
practice.
Teaching Methods:
- Lectures
- Discussion
Evaluation Means:
15%
a) Enzymes
15%
b)Vitamins
10%
c)Trace elements
d) Antioxidants
e) Wetting agents
f) Tear substitute
COURSE OBJECTIVES
60%
Reading List:
2010)
197
2.2 Ocular pharmacokinetics-Methods

of drug administration, Special drug
delivery systems.
Level: 8

Vision Therapy
8- Monocular fixation; correspondence

9- Strabismus surgery
Prerequisite: OPTO
391
10- Prism; managing constant

strabismus
11- Therapy outlines and cases
Course description:
Diagnosis, prognosis, and orthoptic
treatment of anomalies of binocular
vision,including the optical, motor,
sensory, integrative, and perceptual
systems
Course contents:
The course will consist of three parts
a. non-strabismic binocular vision and
accommodative disorders
Scheiman M, Wick B. Clinical

Management of Binocular
Vision: Heterophoric,
Accommodative, and Eye
Movement Disorders, Second
Edition.
Philadelphia:
Lippincott,
Williams, and
Wilkins.
Alder's physiology of the eye:
clinical application , by
th
Kaufman, 10 edition, Mosby
Course Evaluation:

Practical exam
20%
Final exam
50%
b. amblyopia
c. strabismus
Tentative lecture schedule:
1- Review of case analysis; introduction
to vision therapy procedures
2- Training fusional vergence; Testing
and training with stereoscopes

Medicine and Systemic
Disease
Level: 9
Credit hours: (2+0)
Prerequisite: MDL 232
3- Training accommodation
4- Diagnosis and treatment of eye
movement disorders
5- Computer training procedures;
Suppression;vertical imbalances; Other
topics
6- Vision therapy in a private practice
7- Amblyopia
Course description:
This course is an introduction to clinical
systemic diseases and eye ,which
covers ,
History, physical examination,
investigations, differential diagnosis
and management
Course contents:
198
Textbook:
1. Arterial Hypertension
7. Tuberculosis
i) Pathophysiology, classification,
clinical examination, diagnosis,
complications, management.
i) Etiology, pathology, clinical features,

pulmonary TB, diagnosis,
complications, treatment of
tuberculosis involving the eye.
ii) Hypertension and the eye.

2. Diabetes mellitus
i) Pathophysiology, classification,
clinical features, diagnosis,
complications, management.
8. Tropical Disease and the Eye

i) Leprosy.
ii) Syphilis.
iii) Malaria.
3. Acquired Heart Disease Embolism

i) Rheumatic heart disease
9. Vitamin deficiency and the eye

10. Neurological disease and the eye
ii) Subacute bacterial endocarditis.
i) Classification of neurological
diseases.
iii) Heart disease & the eye.
ii) Demyelinating diseases
4. Malignancy
iii) Visual pathway lesions
i) Definitions, nomenclature,
characteristics of benign & malignant
neoplasms.
iv) Papiloedema.
ii) Grading and staging of cancer,

diagnosis, priniples of treatment.
12. Phacomatoses & the eye.
iii) Neoplasia and the eye.

5. Connective Tissue Disease
i) Anatomy and pathophysiology:
Arthritis.
ii) Eye and connective tissue disease.
6. Thyroid Disease
11. Genetic disorders and the eye.
Reference books:
1. Clinical Ophthalmology Jack J.
Kanski (Butterworth-Heniman)
Course Evaluation:
Final exam
60%
Level: 5
ii) Classification of thyroid disease
Course Title:
Optometric
Procedures( 1)
iii) Diagnosis, complications, clinical

features, management of thyroid
disease involving eye.
Prerequisite: OPTO
i) Anatomy and physiology of the

thyroid gland.
199
ii) Diabetes mellitus and the eye.
1.11 Projection charts
262
1.12 Illumination of the consulting

room special instruments
course description:
1.13 Brightness acuity tester
1.14 Vision analyzer
UNIT-2: OTHER INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Slit lamp
2.2 Tonometer Princioles, uses and
types
2.3 Ophthalmoscopes and related
devices
UNIT-3: SPECIAL EQUIPMENTS
3.1 Fundus camera
Course contents:
3.2 Orthoptic instruments
UNIT-1: REFRACTIVE INSTRUMENTS
3.3 Colour vision testing devices
1.1 Test charts standards, choice of test

charts
3.4 Fields of vision and screening

devices
1.2 Trail case lenses-Best form lenses

1.3 Reractor head units, optical
considerations of refractor units
3.5 Opthalmic ultra sonography ultrasound/ A scan/ Bscan/ UBM

3.6 Electodiagnostics - ERG/VPG/EOG
1.4 Trial frame design
3.7 Nervefiber analyzer
1.5 Near vision difficulties with units

and trial frame
3.8 Scanning laser devices

Reference books:
1.6 Retinoscope-types available

1.7 Adjustments of retionscopes
special features
The Optician's Manual: A Treatise On the

Science and Practice of Optometry
by Christian Henry Brown (Feb 26, 2010)
1.8 Cylinder retinoscopy

1.9 Interpretation of objective findings
1.10 Interpretation of objective testspolarising and displacement etc,
stimulant test
Clinics in optometry: a compilation of eye

clinics covering fully all errors of refraction
and anomalies of muscles, with methods of
examination, tests ... A text-book of the
practice of optometry.
200
This course is designed to serve as the

introduction into advanced diagnostic
and therapeutic procedures as well as
an overview of diseases and disorders
of the anterior segment. Along with the
continued enhancement of those skills
acquired in the methods sequence in
the first year, the intern will be
introduced to slitlamp biomicroscopy
instrumentation and techniques, the
use of diagnostic pharmaceuticals and
the examination and treatment of the
ophthalmic patient, instrumentation
and technique utilized in applanation
Course Evaluation:
Mid term exams 50%
Final exam
50%
Level: 5

Screenings I
Course description:
Students are provided the opportunity to
practice clinical techniques learned in courses,
thus bridging the gap between classroom
learning and clinical practice. Students are
brought into public schools to experience the
visual and social environment of children.
Students play an integral role in deciding if a
child needs further visual evaluation. Students
interact with real patients early in their
optometric careers.
Course objective:
The course is initiated with self study, exercises,
a theoretical overview and demonstrations. The
theoretical overview is made through different
tuition forms (Case methodology, whole-group
lectures etc). The students are given a possibility
to train practical skills but must take a great
responsibility themselves.
practical tests in diagnostic examination

techniques is required. In case of absence from
demonstrations, exercises and clinical work,
compensation is discussed with course the
director. The part is graded according to the
scale Fail/Pass/Pass with distinction.
In the part Assignments, a presentation and
approval of the group assignment are required.
The part is graded according to the scale
Fail/Pass.
The part Theoretical understanding is examined
through written/oral examinations. The part is
graded according to the scale
Failed/Passed/Passed with distinction. For
admission to the examination in Theoretical
understanding, it is required that the part
Assignments are submitted and that
supplementation of the part Clinical work is
completed.
When a student fails an examination, there will
be an opportunity for a new examination. All in
all, 6 opportunities for a new examination are
provided for all parts
Reference books:
Clinics in optometry: a compilation of eye clinics
covering fully all errors of refraction and
anomalies of muscles, with methods of
examination, tests ... A text-book of the practice
of optometry.
by Christian Henry Brown (Aug 9, 2010)
Examination
Clinical Procedures in Optometry
The examination comprises:

1) Clinical examination
2) Assignments.
3) Written/Oral examination.
In the part Clinical work, attendance at
demonstrations, exercises and clinical work, and
by J. Boyd Eskridge, John F. Amos, and Jimmy D.

Bartlett
Course Evaluation:
Practical exam
60%
201
Final exam
40%
Level: 1

Screenings II
Credit hours: (0+2)
Course
Title:Optometric
Procedures II
Credit hours: (2+1)
Prerequisite: 381
Prerequisite: OPTO
382
Course description:
Continuation of Clinical Screenings 1.
The student continues clinical practice
with real subjects in schools and public
health centers at work, sport or elderly
centers facilities.
Reference books:
The Optician's Manual: A Treatise On
the Science and Practice of Optometry
by Christian Henry Brown (Feb 26,
2010)
Clinics in optometry: a compilation of
eye clinics covering fully all errors of
refraction and anomalies of muscles,
with methods of examination, tests ... A
text-book of the practice of optometry.
Designed as a continuation of optometric

Procedures I and deals with more advanced
clinical diagnostic and treatment procedures
related to examination of the retina and the
diagnosis of retinal disease. The course will
cover a broad range of clinical skills including
Binocular Indirect ophthalmoscopy, 90D and
78D lens examination, Goldmann Contact Lens,
etc. Diagnostic testing such as Laser
Interferometry, PAM, and Ultra Sonography will
also be reviewed.
Course contents:
UNIT-4: CLINICAL EXAMINATION OF
THE VISUAL SYSTEM
4.1 History of the ophthalmic subject
4.2 Ocular symptoms, the past
prescriptions-its influence
4.3 Visual acuity testing-distance and
near and colour vision
4.4 Examination of muscle balance
Clinical Procedures in Optometry
4.5 Examination of eye lids, conjunctiva

& sclera
by J. Boyd Eskridge, John F. Amos, and

Jimmy D. Bartlett
Course Evaluation:
Practical exam
60%
Final exam
40%
Level: 5
4.6 Examination of cornea, lens

4.7 Examination of iris, ciliary body and
pupil
UNIT-5: SPECIAL EXAMINATIONS
5.1Examination of intraocular pressure
& Examination of angle of anterior
chamber
202
Course description:
5.2 Ophthalmoscopy (direct and

indirect)
Prerequisite: OPTO
484
5.3 Examination of fundus
5.5 Examination of orbit

5.6 Macular function test
5.7 Visual. Field charting (central
andperiphers)
5.8 Neuro-opthalmological examination
Reference books:
- Clinical Procedures in Optometry
Course description:
Development and enhancement of
clinical diagnostic and treatment
methods taught from Optometric
Procedures I and II will be emphasized,
along with a variety of therapeutic
techniques. These procedures will
include corneal foreign body removal,
pressure patching, epilation, dilation
and irrigation of the lacrimal system,
and punctal plug insertion, etc.
Proficiency is expected in all ocular
health assessment techniques by the
end of the quarter. In addition to
patient examinations, along with
initiation of the credential process for
patient care in the third year will occur.
Course contents:
UNIT-6: SPECIAL EQUIPMENTS
6.1 Fundus camera
6.2 Orthoptic instruments

Jimmy D. Bartlett (Apr 1991)
6.3 Colour vision testing devices
Course Evaluation:
6.4 Fields of vision and screening

devices

Practical exam
Final exam
30%
50%
Level: 8
Course
Title:Optometric
Procedures III
6.5 Opthalmic ultra sonography ultrasound/ A scan/ Bscan/ UBM

6.6 Electodiagnostics - ERG/VPG/EOG
6.7 Nervefiber analyzer
6.8 Scanning laser devices
Reference books:
203
5.4 Examination of lacrimal system

- Business Aspects of Optometry:

Association of Practice Management
Educators by APME, John G. Classe OD JD,
Lawrence S. Thal OD MBA, and Roger D.
Kamen OD MS (Aug 26, 2003)
- Optometry Practice Start Up Business Plan

NEW! by Bplanxchange (Sep 21, 2010) Kindle eBook
- Clinical Procedures in Optometry
Course Evaluation:

Jimmy D. Bartlett (Apr 1991)

Practical exam
30%
Final exam
50%

Practical exam
30%
Final exam
50%
Level:10

Orientation
Prerequisite: OPTO
391
Course description:
Included in this orientation will be
emergency care procedures to include
a laboratory (20 hours), infection
control
procedures
(4
hours),
diagnostic coding (7 hours), and ethics
(5 hours).
Reference books:
- Optometry Practice Start Up Business Plan
NEW! by Bplanxchange (Sep 21, 2010) Kindle eBook
Level: 9
Course Title:
Optometric Clinic I
Credit hours: (0+2)
Course description:
This program is designed to afford the
intern a broad exposure to all facets of
primary care in optometry. Rotations
include clinical responsibilities in the
area of primary care, and ophthalmic
dispensing. During these rotations, the
intern will have direct patient care
responsibilities in the University
Optometric
Center
under
the
supervision of clinical faculty. The
rotations are designed to allow the
intern increasing levels of clinical
responsibility
and
patient
care
opportunities.
Course contents:
1. Ophthalmic Case Historian:
204
OFAAPPLIED
CCOLLEGE
OLLEGE OF
PPLIEDM
MEDICAL
EDICALSSCIENCES
CIENCES
Course Evaluation:
Demographic data, chief complaints,

secondary complaints, ocular history,
medical history, drugs and medications,
family ocular history, family medical
history,social history, review of system,
few example of history writing.
of refractive error, stenopaic slit

refraction, measurement of vertex
distance, distometer, use of subjective
autorefractor.
8. Different methods of measuring
amplitude of accommodation.
2. Recording Visual Acuity:

Distance Snellens and log MAR. nearpoints/M/RS, use of Baily-lovie word
reading chart.
3. Objective Refraction:
Streak Retinoscopy all procedures to
use streak retinoscope; static and
dynamic
retinoscopy,
different
methods of dynamic retinoscopy
MEM, Notts, Sheards, Low and high
neutral, Bells, Cross, Taits. Other
methods
of
retinoscopy-Radical,
Near(Mahandra), Chromoretinoscopy,
String Lensbar, use of objective and
autorefractor.
4. Subjective Refraction:
Monocular Distance Classic fogging,
testing of astigmatism under fog fixed
astigmatic dial (clock dial), rotary
astigmatic dial, combination of fixed
and rotary dial (Fan and Block test),
J.C.C. Duochrome or Bichrome,
Binocular balancing alternate
occlusion,
prism
dissociation,
dissociated duochrome balance, Borish
dissociated fogging, equalization
5. Binocular Distance T.I.B. (Turville
Infinity Balance), Polarized Target and
polarized filter, fogging.
9. Correction of Presbyopia Different

methods of stimulation of tentative
presbyopic addition amplitude of
accommodation,
J.C.C.,
NRA-PRA
balance, Bichrome, Plus Build-up, based
on age,
10. Dynamic retinoscopy. Occupational
consideration, finalization of odd for
near and intermediate different options
of correction.
11. Measurement
significance.
of
IPD
and
12. Final discussion with the patient.

13. Writing prescription of power and
counseling
References:
1 Clinics in optometry: a compilation of
text-book of the practice of optometry
2. Primary care Optometry Theodore
Butterworth-heinemann.
3. Clinical Procedures in Optometry
Eskridge, Amos, Bartlett.-J. B. Lippincott
Co.
6. Near subjective refraction.

7. Cycloplegic refraction, cycloidemia,
sudden unfogging , Borish delayed
spherical end point, pinhole estimation
4. The Ocular Examination :

Measurement and Findings Karla
Zadmik
Course Evaluation:
205
j) Patient with low vision.
Practical exam
k)
Patient
Anisokonia)
Final exam
30%
with
anisometropia(
40%
Level: 10
Course Title:
Optometric Clinic II
l) Monocular & binocular subjective

refraction.
Clinical Refraction ( Practical )
Course description:
A continuation of Optometry Clinic I.
Course contents:
a) Assessment of children Vision &
Paediatric evaluation, diagnosis &
management.
b) Strabismus & Aniblyopia.
c) Non- Strabismic Biuoculan Disorders.
d) Neuro- Optometric Rehabilitation.
e) Evaluation, Diagnosis & Optometric
management of children with mental
retardation C.P. Dyslexia,
Multiple Sensory Motor Haudicap.
Recording VA
Practice of Streak Retinoscopy
Direct Opthalmoscopy-Normal
Fundus
Subjective refraction fogging,
clockdial, fan, JCC, prism balance, TIB,
duochrome, cyclodeimia, Slit
refraction
Measurement of amplitude of
accommodation.
Presbyopic add
Writing prescription.
References:
f) Visual Disorders in senior citizens,

evaluation, diagnosis+ management.
g) Sports vision.

h) Refraction in special cases (

pseudophakia , aphakia, irregular
corneal astigmatism, coloboma of iris,
choroids, retina, nystagmus, post R.K.,
PRK, LASIK)

Co.
i) Congenital cataract, glaucoma.
206
Prerequisite: OPTO
487
History writing

Zadmik
Level: 10
Course Title: Open Eye

Clinic and Emergency
procedures
8. Ocular emergencies
a) Foreign body
b) Eye Pain
c) Watering
d) Injuries-perforating, non perforating
& chemical
References:
Course description:
The clinic includes general procedures
in dealing with primary care methods in
patient handling. Procedures of general
health assessment and treatments are
taught as well as those in relation to
eye and head emergency cases such as
foreign body removals and other
injuries to the anterior segment of the
eye and orbit.
Course contents
1. Concept of public health.
2. Principles of primary, secondary and
tertiary care.

3. Public Health and Community
Optometry
by Robert D. Newcomb and Edwin C.
Marshall (Jul 1990)
Zadmik
Course Evaluation:
3. Planning of health services.

4. Health economics
Final exam
5. Health manpower developmenta)Basic O.T Practices
b) Familiarity with use of Operating
Microscope
6. NPCB and refractive blindness
optometrists role as primary health
care provides.
7. Health cares insurance including role
of TPA.
60%
Level: 6

Assessment and
Diagnosis
Credit hours: 3 (2+1)
Prerequisite: opto364
207
Course description:
7.glaucoma posterior segment.
Introduction on normal versus

abnormal anterior and posterior
segment disease presentations by
ocular assesmant and diagnosis.
Course contents
Anterior segment disease.
8.retinal dystrophy.
9.degnerative myopia.
10. Age related macular
degenerative.
11.retinal detachment.
12.leukocoria.
1.
Eyelid.
13.optic nerve disease.
Stye
Chalazion
Entropion
Ectropion
Blepharitis

Ptosis
Neoplasia
2- Conjunctiva.
-bacterial conjunctivitis
-viral conjunctivitis
-allergic conjunctivitis

Co.
Zadmik
-degeneration
Course Evaluation:
-follicular conjunctivitis
3- Cornea
-keratitis
Practical exam
30%
Final exam
50%
-keratoconus
-dystrophy
-degenerayion
4.sclera. -scleratis
5.dry eye.
Level: 7
Course Title: Cornea

and Contact lenses I
6.lens -cataract.
208
References:
f) Contact lens terminology. RGP & soft

lens design. FDA classification of
contact lens material.
Course description:
g) Patient selection & prescreening.

Indications & contra indications of
contact lens.
Cornea and Contact lenses I

Course contents
h) Soft spherical contact lens fitting &

Assesment.
i) Soft contact
maintenance.
lens
case
&
j) Spherical RGP contact lens fitting &

assessment.
k) RGP contact
maintenance.
lens
care
&
Contact Lens I ( Practical )

a) Routine clinical procedure for
contact lens patient & selection of
contact lens.
b)
Keratometry
Biomicroscopy.
&
slit
lamp
a) Contact lens history & development.

Benefits of contact lens over spectacle.
Manufacturing
c) Spherical soft & Spherical RGP

contact lens fitting: selection of contact
lens Base curve, diameter &
methods-spin cast, Lethe cut, Cast

modeling.
Power & fitting Assessment .
b) Slit lamp Examination technique

c) Corncal topography- Keratometry &
Extended Keratometry
d) Contact lens optics-Contact lens &
spectacle lens. Back vertex calculation.
Contact lens & Tear
lens system.
d) Insertion & Removal of soft & RGP

contact lens.
e) Contact lens & maintenance.
REFERENCES:
1. Fiting Guide for Rigid and Soft
Contact Lenses H. A. Stein, Slatt, M. L.
Freeman (Mosby).
2. IACLE Module.
e) Classification of contact lens & its

material ( soft & RGP ); Material
property.
209
The goal of this course is to introduce

students to the general history of
contact
lens
development,
manufacturing,
and
utilization.
Physiological
interaction
and
adaptation of the cornea to a fitted soft
contact lens will be examined. Soft
contact lens selection, fitting, and
evaluation will be presented in detail.
Management of both functional and
physiological
problems
will
be
considered through changes in lens
oxygen permeability and fitting and
astigmatic lens problem solving will be
given. A complete review of soft lens
care and solution systems will be
presented.
3. Contact Lenses (The CLAO Guide to

Basic Science and Clinical Practice).
Kenddall/Hunt Publishing Co.
4. Text Book of Contact Lenses V. K.
Dada (Jaypee).
Course Evaluation:
2 Mid Term exams 20%
Practical exam
30%
Final exam
50%
3. Contact lens fitting in children.

4. RGP lenses low D.K. and high D.K.
lenses.
5. Instructions regarding handling and
care of lenses.
6. Cosmetic and prosthetic contact
lenses.
7. Extended wear lenses versus Daily
wear
Level: 8

and Contact Lenses II
9. Contact lens
Multifocal.
Course description:
The goal of this course is to introduce
students to the principles of rigid
contact lens fitting and preservation of
corneal health. Students will be taught
a variety of rigid lens fitting approaches
and selection of the appropriate lens
design based on the pre-fitting data.
Application of spherical, aspheric and
bitoric rigid lenses for a variety of
normal and diseased corneal conditions
will be discussed. Instruction on how
parameter alterations effect the
success or failure of rigid lens wear.
Management, corneal abnormalities
with rigid lenses will be discussed.
Course contents:
1. Contact lens fitting in astigmatism.
2. Contact lens fitting in keratokonus.
Toric, Bifocal,
10. Therapeutic lenses / Bandage

lenses.
11. Contact lens solutions principle of
action, compositions
12. Ordering contact lenses writing
prescription to the lab.
13. Contact lens modifications of
finished lenses (RGP).
14. Checking the parameters.
15. Recent advances in contact lenses.
16. Follow up examinations
17. Contact lens complications and
their management.
18. Prosthetic eye fitting procedures &
conformers.
REFERENCES:
Freeman (Mosby).
2. IACLE Module.
210
8. Disposable lenses


Freeman (Mosby).

Dada (Jaypee).
2. IACLE Module.
Course Evaluation:
30%
Final exam
50%
Level: 11

and Contact lenses III

Dada (Jaypee).
Course Evaluation:
Practical exam
30%
Final exam
50%
Level: 9
Course Title:Geriatric
Optometry
Course description:
Continuation of cornea and contact
lens II This course will introduce the
principles of advanced rigid contact
lens fitting. The application of a variety
of specialty rigid and soft lens designs
will be reviewed, and selection of the
appropriate lens design based on the
pre-fitting data. Contact lens fitting
techniques for the management of
keratoconus, bifocal correction, post
refractive surgery, post corneal
transplant correction, orthokeratology,
adult and pediatric aphakia, prosthetic
soft and rigid lens correction will be
offered. Use of state-of-the-art
computer corneal mapping and other
diagnostic techniques will be presented
as tools to help fit and manage the
abnormal cornea.
REFERENCES:
Course description:
This course introduces the principles of
vision rehabilitation with respect to the
geriatric and visually impaired
populations.
The topics presented include the
clinical characteristics of aging, etiology
and visual impairment, demographics
and psychosocial factors of geriatric
and visually impaired patients, the case
history and clinical examination of
these patients, and optics of treatment
options for the visually impaired.
The laboratory presents examination
procedures and techniques utilized for
geriatric and visually impaired patients
211
Practical exam
Objectives
The students will be introduced to
problems unique to the geriatric
population and the characteristics of
visual problems as well as social,
environmental and other factors
affecting them and possible solutions.
COURSE CONTENTS:
1- Overview
2- Vision screenings
a. Communication
b. Patient Information
c. Pre and Postexamination
Procedures
d. pharmacokinetics.
3- Assessing and Managing the
older Patient
a. Non-visual
Assessment
b. ocular health
assessment
4- Normal Vision Problems In The
Elderly
5- Geriatric Ocular Diseases
6- Continue Geriatric Ocular
Diseases
References
Practical exam
30%
Final exam
50%
Level: 10
Course Title: Anterior

Segment Disease
Credit hours: (2+1)
Course contents:
This third segment of the Ocular
Disease Track emphasizes anterior
segment ocular disease. The lecture
material
encompasses
conditions
involving
the
eyelids,
adnexa,
conjunctiva, cornea, sclera, anterior
chamber, iris, and lens. The course
provides extensive discussion of the
symptomatology,
clinical
signs,
diagnosis,
pathogenesis,
pathophysiology, systemic disease
relationships, and treatment of
degenerative,
hypersensitivity,
infectious, and inflammatory conditions
affecting these structures. During the
course, students are expected to be
able to differentially diagnose and
manage these ocular entities in patient
management
case
presentations
including the proper utilization of
pharmaceutical agents.
General Ophthalmology
Daniel G. Vaughan
by
Level: 9
The Ophthalmic assistant

Stein. Slatt. Stein
by
Course Title:
Glaucoma
Course Evaluation:
Prerequisite: OPTO
457
212
in traditional and non-traditional

settings; motility procedures; geriatric
case management; and an introduction
to rehabilitation optics and optical
systems for visual impairment.
Epidemiology, classification and types

of glaucoma. Theories of optic nerve
damage, visual fields, tonometry,
tonography and gonioscopy. Theories
and practice of glaucoma therapy
including
medical
and
surgical
approaches.
Course contents:
1. Introduction to glaucoma
a. Epidemiology
b. Heridity
c. Definition & classification of
Glaucoma
2. Intra Ocular pressure and Aqueous
humor dynamics
3. Clinical Evaluation
7. Medical management of glaucoma

8. Surgery therapy f or glaucoma
9. Newer advances in the management
of glaucoma
Reference Books:
1. M Bruce Shields (MBS): Text Book of
Glaucoma, Williams & Wilkins, London.
2. Marc Leiberman: Simplified Guide to
Computerized Perimetry
Course Evaluation:
Mid term exams 40%
Final exam
60%
Level: 12
Course Title: Posterior

Segment Disease
a. History and General examination

b. Gonioscopy
c. Optic nerve head analysis

d. Visual fields
4. Childhood Glaucoma
5. Open angle glaucoma
a. The glaucoma suspect
b. Open angle glaucoma without
elevated IOP
c. primary open angle glaucoma
d. Secondary open angle glaucoma
6. Angle closure glaucoma
a. Primary angle closure glaucoma
b. Secondary angle closure glaucoma
Course Description:
This course examines the diagnosis and
management of diseases of the
posterior segment, including glaucoma
and diseases of the retina, vitreous, and
posterior uvea. Emphasis is placed
upon the advanced optometric
management of these diseases. The
role of the optometrist in the
therapeutic management of these
diseases is maximized to the fullest
extent of optometric training. In some
instances, education beyond current
optometric practice is introduced in an
effort to lay the foundation for future
amplification of optometric licensure
and prepare the student and graduate
213
Course description:
Learning Objectives:
At the conclusion of the course, the
student will be able to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Accurately diagnose disorders of

the posterior segment and
institute appropriate management.
Visually recognize retinal vascular
disease, understand the involved
pathophysiology,
and
initiate
appropriate management.
Visually
recognize
peripheral
retinal disease, understand the
involved pathophysiology, and
initiate appropriate management.
Visually
recognize
retinal
inflammatory
disease
and
understand
the
involved
pathophysiology,
and
initiate
Visually recognize acquired and
hereditary
maculopathies,
understand
the
involved
pathophysiology,
and
initiate
Understand
the
relationship
between systemic disease and
retinal disease and identify
characteristic fundus findings of
commonly encountered systemic
diseases.
Understand advanced diagnostic
testing modalities of automated
visual fields testing, fluorescein
angiography,
and
diagnostic
imaging for glaucoma and retinal
disease.
Understand the principles behind
therapeutic laser use for glaucoma
and retinal disease.
Diabetic Retinopathy
Diabetic Retinopathy
Hypertensive Retinopathy;
Vascular Occlusions
Retinal
Retinal Vascular Occlusions

Retinal Vascular Occlusions
Retinal Breaks and Detachments
Acquired Maculopathies
Proficiencies
Proficiencies
Acquired
Oncology
Maculopathies;
Ocular
Hereditary Maculopathies
New Retinal Technologies
Retinal Potpourri
Posterior Uveitis
Posterior Uveiti
Course contents:
Posterior Segment Anomalies
Fluorescein angiography
214
practitioner to function in the everchanging profession.
Level: 12
Laser Peripheral
Indications:
Course Title: Laser and

surgical Management
of Eye Disease
Credit hours: (2+0)
Argon Laser LPI:
Iridotomy
(LPI):
Nd:YAG Laser LPI:

Glaucoma Surgery -Trabeculectomy
Prerequisite:
OPTO344, OPT O473
Considerations for Surgery
Pre and post-operative management of

the ophthalmic patient. It covers a wide
range of procedures including
oculoplastics, cornea, glaucoma,
strabismus, cataract, and retina.
Maximal medical therapy

and progression
Poor patient compliance
with medications
Failure or contraindication
of LT
Need for very low IOP
Signs of Surgical Failure
Course description:
Course contents:
Specific Laser- Tissue Interactions:
Photocoagulation:
Photovaporization:
Photodisruption:
Complications Associated with Anterior
Segment Laser Procedures:
Laser Therapy
Glaucoma:
for
Open
Angle
Argon Laser Trabeculoplasty (ALT):
Thermal laser alteration of the

trabecular meshwork to increase
aqueous
Pressure Lowering Effect of ALT:
Selective Laser Trabeculoplasty (SLT)
Laser Therapy
Glaucoma:
for
Closed
Angle
Argon Laser Iridoplasty:
215
Raise awareness of community health and

prevention methods needed to maintain oral
health.
Contribute to the continuing dental education
for all dentists.
Conduct scientific research to find appropriate
solutions to the problems of oral and dental
health in the community.
Provide dental and technical advice to various
sectors in the field.
Prepare specialized staff in different fields of
dentistry through the Graduate Program.
Nationally distinct college in dental education

and applied researches, in support of the
promotion of oral and dental health in Qassim
Society.
Mission:
Graduation of highly skilled dentists with higher
scientific and research skills, (who are
committed to continuous education and the
development of the profession to meet the
needs of the labor market) , provide a dental
treatment that is consistent with the
international quality standards in the field of
Dentistry, perform a distinct awareness role
within the community, and to strengthen the
national and international partnership.
Objectives:
Prepare and graduate dentists at a high level
of knowledge and clinical skills to provide
services in all areas of Dentistry.
Fill labor market needs of dentists.
To provide distinct therapeutic services for
patients in all disciplines of dentistry by
students under the supervision of a team of
teachers who has the scientific and practical
experience, and who are able to use the
modern technologies in the areas of
treatment and diagnosis.
College of Dentistry, Qassim University is one of

the modern colleges among Saudi Arabia. The
Royal Decree to establish the college was issued
on 18 / 1 / 1426 Hijri. The college had received
its first batch of students starting from the
academic year 1428-1429 Hijri.
Enrolled student must pass the preparatory year
and shall be assigned by the Deanship of
Admissions and Registration in the University,
and then it is required to pass qualifying skill
tests of the College as well as the personal
interview.
Based on the decision of the Council of Higher
Education No. 9/57/1431, college departments
were restructured to be: Basic Oral and Medical
Sciences Department (BOM), Community Oral
Health and Epidemiology Department (COE),
Maxillofacial Surgery and Diagnostic Sciences
Department (MDS), Conservative Dental
Sciences Department (CDS), Prosthetic Dental
Sciences Department (PDS), Ortho-Pedodontics
Department (OPD), Periodontology and Oral
Medicine Department (POM), and Dental
Informatics and Dental Education Department
(DIE)
The study plan follows the rules of the yearly
figures as the college education system is based
on problem-based learning. Study language is
English. Study duration is five years after the
preparatory year followed by a clinical training
internship year, and it is divided into three
phases: Basic Phase: first and second years,
Clinical Phase: third, fourth, and fifth years, and
216
About:
Vision:
Internship Phase: sixth clinical training year after

graduation.
Degrees:
Bachelor (B.D.S)
Khan
Irfan Ullah Khan
Associate Prof.
Amr El-Karargy
Associate Prof.
Said El-Attar
Associate Prof.
Hamdy Selim
Associate Prof.
M. Abd El-Monem
Associate Prof.
Hamdy Metwaly
Assistant Prof.
Abdulhaleem
Abdulhameed
Assistant Prof.
Alaa Abd El-Hamid
Assistant Prof.
Shoaib Haider
Assistant Prof.
Moustafa Omran
Assistant Prof.
A. El-Leethy
Assistant Prof.
Ghada Bassiouny
Assistant Prof.
Lamis Hussein
Assistant Prof.
Ola Sakr
Assistant Prof.
Ashfaq Rahim
Assistant Prof.
Hazem Abbas
Assistant Prof.
Mahmoud Salama
Assistant Prof.
Sahar Abd Eh-Halim
Assistant Prof.
Shahzad Ali
Assistant Prof.
Mohammed Salman
Assistant Prof.
Mahmoud Rabii
Assistant Prof.
Zeyad El-Saghir
Assistant Prof.
Nabila Sedky
Assistant Prof.
Maha Mekkawy
Assistant Prof.
Dental Surgery (B.D.S)
Faculty:
Mohammed
Almohaimeed
Dean,
Assistant Prof.
Mansour
Almohaimeed
Vice-Dean,
Assistant Prof.
Mohammed El-Toni
Professor
Osama Sweedan
Professor
Abdel Wahab Samaha
Professor
Ahmed Massoud
Professor
Mohammed Barakat
Professor
Maher El-Tonsi
Professor
Gamal Hassan
Professor
Amira El-Nozahy
Professor
Ragia El-Prince
Professor
Tahany Hamdy
Professor
Hanaa El-Gazaerly
Professor
Shokreya Ismail
Professor
Hany Daas
Associate Prof.
Mohammed
Khalil
Programs:
Associate Prof.
217
Zahid Iqbal
Assistant Prof.
Ghamadan Sabry
Lecturer
Hazem Mourad
Lecturer
Mohammed Riyadh
Lecturer
Yasser Araby
Lecturer
Walid Samir
Lecturer
Study Plan:
Wael Zakareya
Lecturer
First Year
Faisal Baloch
Lecturer
Course
Code
Mohammed Ramadan
Lecturer
Atef Ghobashy
Lecturer
Ramy El-Moazen
Lecturer
Moustafa El-Zeky
Lecturer
Hisham Hassan
Lecturer
Mohammed Saber
Lecturer
Azza Abo Rabeh
Lecturer
Samir El Borolosy
Lecturer
Salsabil Gaber
Lecturer
Abd Elhalim Hassan
Lecturer
Tarek Halawa
Lecturer
Mai Salah
Lecturer
Shaimaa Said
Lecturer
Karim Hommos
Lecturer
Abd El-Rahman Obeid
Lecturer
Omneya Abd El-Kader
Lecturer
Amira Samir
Lecturer
Mohammed El-Abd
Lecturer
Maher Walid
Lecturer
Credit
IC 101
Islamic Culture (1)
IC 102
Islamic Culture (2)
ARAB
101
Arabic Language
Skills
ARAB
103
Arabic Editing
DENT
111
Dental Education
DENT
112
Cell Structure &

Function
DENT
113
Head & Neck:
DENT
114
Genetics, Growth,
& Development
DENT
115
Principles of
Diseases
DENT
121
Presentation Skills
(1)
DENT
122
Community
Dentistry (1)
DENT
131
Dental Skills (1)
Course Title
Structure &
Function
218
38
Dental practice
*Each student must finish 12 elective units and

6 free units
Second Year
Course
Code
Course Title
Islamic Culture (3)
IC 104
Islamic Culture (4)
DENT 211
Body Systems in
Health & Disease
11
DENT 212
General Surgery
DENT 213
Neuroscience
DENT 214
Principles of Dental
Sciences
Presentation Skills
(2)
Community
Dentistry (2)
Community
Dentistry (3)
Emergency
Medicine for Dental
Students
Dental Skills (2)
TOTAL
37
DENT 222
DENT 223
DENT 224
DENT 231
Third Year
Course
Code
DENT 311
Course Title
Introduction to
Restorative (1)
DENT 313
Restorative (2)
DENT 321
Presentation Skills
(3)
DENT 322
Community
Dentistry (4)
DENT 323
Ethics in Dentistry
DENT 331
Dental Skills (3)
11
DENT 341
Dental Clinical
Practice (1)
TOTAL
32
Credit
IC 103
DENT 221
DENT 312
TOTAL
Fourth Year
Course
Code
Course Title
Credit
DENT 411
Surgical
Management
DENT 412
Child & Adolescent

Care
DENT 413
Management of
Oral & Maxillofacial
Diseases (1)
DENT 414
Management of
Diseases (2)
DENT 421
Presentation Skills
(4)
DENT 422
Community
Dentistry (5)
DENT 423
Restorative (3)
Credit
219
Dental Skills (4)
DENT 441
Dental Clinical
Practice (2)
12
TOTAL
31
Fifth Year
Course
Code
Course Title
Credit
DENT 415
Dental
Implantology
DENT 416
Maxillofacial
Surgery &
Rehabilitation
DENT 425
Presentation Skills
(5)
DENT 426
Problem Solving in
Dentistry
DENT 427
Orthodontic
Treatment for
Adults
DENT 428
Practice
Management
DENT 445
Total Patient Care
15
TOTAL
23
Course Description:
DENT 111: Dental Education (2h)
The idea of the problem based learning [PBL]
will be discussed in the beginning of this course
to clarify the modality of its application in the
medico-dental practice.
This course is designed to review the dental
history & provide students with the basic rules
and elements of a dental word, including word
roots, prefixes, suffixes and combining forms.

The student will be able to analyze, spell,
pronounce and build dental terms according to
word parts and descriptions.
In order to enhance the student's knowledge of
dental science, various terminologies including
dental & medical terms are introduced & also
using of computerized & internet exercises.
Principles of Medical & Dental ethics are
involved in this course; the dentist can evolve
his duties & rights towards his profession & be
able for decision making.
During this course a practical model for verbal &
non- verbal communication will be introduced
and
induces
advice
for
managing
communication in everyday clinical situations,
together with interactive workshops.
DENT 112: Cell Structure & Function (5h)
This course is designed to ensure that dental
student acquire sound knowledge in various
integrated areas of cell biology, biochemistry,
physiology and general histology.
Some areas of the mentioned disciplines have
been covered less extensively than others to
suite the needs of a dental student.
DENT 113: Head & Neck: Structure & Function
(5h)
This course is an entrance requirement for
preclinical and clinical dental programs.
Students study the anatomy, physiology of the
head and neck, and occlusion of the teeth. The
course includes introductions to basic
terminology and tooth structure, and extends to
a survey of all of the oral systems. All material
discussed with direct relationship to a wellcharacterized dental clinical case.
Oral secretions and salivary glands function, TMJ
and static occlusion will be included in this
course.
DENT 114: Genetics, Growth, and Development
(6h)
The purpose of this course is to introduce the
student to basic concepts of growth and
220
DENT 431
DENT 115: Principles of Diseases (6h)

This course includes the basic principles of
disease
and
relevant
histopathology.
Considerable
emphasis
is
given
to
understanding
mechanisms
underlying
alterations at the cell and subcellular levels. The
parameter of cell injury, inflammation,
immunopathology, repair and regeneration,
carcinogenesis, hemodynamic disturbances, and
nutritional diseases are studied. Correlations of
systemic diseases of importance in dentistry are
emphasized. This course will provide the student
with a working understanding of pharmacology
and pharmacotherapeutics as applied to dental
practice.
DENT 121: Scientific presentation skills (1) (1h)
In the field of dentistry, knowledge and
technical skills are not the only prerequisites for
good practice. An ability to communicate
effectively, to use active listening, to gather and
impart information effectively, and to
demonstrate
empathy,
rapport,
ethical
awareness is crucial.
The aim of this course is improve skill and
behavior that help the students to communicate
more effectively, present with confidence and
enhance personnel impact.
In this course, the students gain a
comprehensive and proven set of skill that helps
them to work effectively with colleagues and
develop expertise.
DENT 122: Community Dentistry (1) (1h)
The course has been designed to introduce to
the dental undergraduates the basic concepts
about community dentistry, oral health
promotion and education. The implications of
the system of Primary Health Care to the
provision of oral health care to communities are

discussed.
DENT 123: The Art of Sculpture in Dentistry (1h)
student to basic concepts of Perceptual Skills
and Visual Arts Vocabulary and developed their
ability and taste of the artistic skills in order to
develop competencies and creative skills in
problem
solving,
communication,
and
management of time and resources that
contribute to lifelong learning and career skills.
They also learn about careers in and related to
the visual arts.
DENT 124: Development of Dental Students
(1h)
Student Development is dedicated to ensuring
students' college success and motivating their
journey toward lifelong learning. It will enable
students to develop their own plan for personal,
academic and career success through selfevaluation, application of specific techniques,
and classroom activities. These activities will
help students acquire effective study strategies,
increase critical and creative thinking skills,
establish short-term and long-term goals, and
learn to manage time more efficiently. This is a
course about making choices, especially those
about setting and meeting personal, academic
and career goals.
The Mind Map is a dynamic and exciting tool to
help all thinking and planning becomes a
smarter and faster activity. The creation of a
Mind Map is a revolutionary way to tap into the
infinite resources in student's brain, to make
appropriate decisions, and to understand their
feelings.
DENT 125: Technology and Acquired
Knowledge for Dental Students (2h)
This course is an elective course, designed to
equip the student with an understanding of the
theoretical and practical basis for good elearning. Emphasis is on learning theories,
learning technologies, and e-learning design.
221
development, maturational, aging processes of

the tissues, systems within the craniofacial
complex, and deviation and variation from the
normal growth and development in order to
prepare the student for the following Preclinical
and Clinical stages.
DENT 131: Dental Skills (1) (2h)

The course layout the foundation for developing
technical artistic skills by the dental student and
related these skills to his clinical performance.
DENT 132: Digital Editing of Dental Record (2h)
In this course, the student gains knowledge of
the use of computer aided design technology.
This is mainly achieved through training the
student on the advanced potentials of various
programs mainly; Photoshop, Flash, Power Point
and Microsoft Publisher in preparing accurate
and high quality projects such as that enable
them to present their ideas and concept in a
professional manner.
DENT 133: Management of Scientific Meeting
(1h)
Due to the value of the scientific meeting as a
mechanism for a unique form of personal
interchange we aim from this course to explain
how we can organize and gain experienced in
the business of running a conference,
symposium, workshop and tutorial sessions and
eager for information, guidelines, and tips on
running a scientific meeting smoothly and
successfully.
DENT 211: Body Systems in Health & Disease

(11h)
integrated areas of Anatomy, Histology,
Pathology,
Microbiology,
Biochemistry,
Pharmacology and Physiological basis of the
human body systems, and the most common
health problems that has a direct or indirect
relation to his practice as a dentist. These will
include the common Internal medicine, and the
Dermatology.
DENT 212: General Surgery (2h)
Pathology,
Microbiology,
Biochemistry,
include the General surgery, Ear Nose and
throat, and Ophthalmology.
DENT 213: Neuroscience (4h)
This comprehensive, multidisciplinary course is
dedicated to the understanding of the main
functions of the nervous system, the principles
of sensory and motor functions and to
understand pain and its management.
Instruction includes training in local anesthesia
and nitrous oxide administration. Lecture topics
include pain transmission, neurotransmitters,
theories of pain perception, and treatment
procedures for patients suffering from acute or
chronic pain. Consideration is given to the use of
drugs, biofeedback, hypnosis, and surgery for
treatment of pain.
DENT 214: Principles of Dental Sciences (6h)
This course is designed to assist in the transition
from the didactic and preclinical portion of the
curriculum to the clinical phase, with the
ultimate goal of developing competent dentists.
Competent dentists demonstrate appropriate
222
DENT 126: Dentist Community

Communication (1h)
The role of the dentist does not depend only on
the treatment of patients but also to educate
the community through various media, whether
print, audio or video. Press is not just a means of
communication but is an influential force
derives its effectiveness from the power of the
words that settle in the minds and respond to
the hopes of nations and ambitious people.
This decision will include the training of students
to the basic rules of writing press releases and
will help students to improve the drafting skills
of news reporting have also increase the selfconfidence in the dialogue and interview others.
DENT 221: Scientific Presentation Skills (2)(1h)

demonstrate
empathy,
rapport,
ethical
develop expertise.
DENT 222: Community Dentistry (2)(1h)
This course has been designed to introduce to
undergraduates the basic concepts and methods
of conducting research. The lectures will be
supplemented by some practical exercises to
enhance the ability of students to actually apply
these concepts and methods.
The course has been designed to highlight the
relevance of the basic concepts of biostatistics
to oral epidemiology and dental research. It will
include data coding, entry and analysis using
SPSS (Statistical Package for Social Sciences).The
course will facilitate students in acquiring skills
of drawing inferences from data and of
evaluating the statistics presented in scientific

papers.
DENT 224: Emergency Medicine for Dental
Students (2h)
Life-threatening emergencies can occur
anytime, anywhere and to anyone. Such
situations are somewhat more likely to occur
within the confines of the dental office due to
the increased level of stress which is so often
present.
In this course the areas which are considered
vital to a proper understanding of Emergency
Medicine will be discussed. This will include a
discussion of a thorough review of the office
emergency kit (medications and equipment),
basic life support including CPR and air way
management. Additionally, it will include the
recognition and management of specific
emergency situations that may be faced in the
dental clinic like altered consciousness, acute
chest pain, seizures, shock, hypertensive crisis,
acute severe asthma, hypo and hyperglycemia
and local anesthetic toxicity.
DENT 225: Scientific Editing for Dental
Periodicals (1h)
Scientific editing will provide students with the
basic principles needed to perform writing and
editing services to the scientific community. The
students will also be expected and encouraged
to demonstrate the maturity and judgment for
research articles and posters, as well as critical
data evaluations that will increase the chances
of publication.
DENT 226: Alternative Dentistry (1h)
This Alternative Dentistry course is an approach
to Dentistry that promotes health and wellness
instead of the treatment of disease. This
approach to Dentistry encompasses both
modern science and knowledge drawn from the
worlds great traditions on natural healing. It is
sometimes called "Biological" dentistry or
"Biocompatible" dentistry. Alternative Dentistry
acknowledges and deals with the mind, body,
223
patient management skills, professionalism and

integrity in the delivery of dental care, and
critical thinking necessary for life-long learning.
The students are introduced to basic concepts of
clinical patient care and are provided
opportunities to observe and model future
behaviors as they observe faculty and student
dentists deliver appropriate care in a
compassionate manner.
Epidemiology of dental caries and periodontal
disease and their indices will be discussed in the
block.
fearful child, and as dental newsletters and

publications will be discussed.
DENT 227: Laboratory Techniques in Oral and

Maxillofacial Pathology (2h)
This elective course will focus on the basic as
well as the advanced laboratory techniques in
the field of oral & maxillofacial pathology. Some
techniques
(Laser,
Implants
&
Anutoradiography) will encourage students,
dentists and oral surgeons to conduct research
on human as well as on experimental animal
models, and to use computer programs to
analyze the microscopic findings in diagnosis
and research. In addition, this course will shed a
light on the methods of protection against
infection, physical, chemical, biological and
irradiation hazards in the dental clinics and the
laboratory.
DENT 311: Introduction to Dental Practice (2h)

This course is designed to ensure that the
student acquired sound knowledge in various
integrated areas of diagnosis and filling system,
operative dentistry, periodontics, infection
control, handling instruments and local
anesthesia before real patient clinical work.
Some of these areas had been covered
previously and needs to be integrated together.

This course will introduce the students to the
field of operative dentistry and periodontology.
The course will stress on maintaining the
required hand skills regarding grasping
techniques of
the
hand-piece,
cavity
preparation, filling materials and techniques.
The simulation of the human head will allow the
student to apply these procedures clinically on
the patients.
DENT 232: Photography in Dentistry (1h)
dental students to basic concepts of dental
photography. Clinical photography has its
greatest applications as a record-keeping system
and as an aid in conveying information. The slide
projection of clinical materials is an
indispensable tool for use in self-evaluation,
patient education, and effective communication
with colleagues. The documentation of patient
management is a permanent record used not only
by the resident during his training but also by the
faculty on all levels of education. The use of
photography as photo magic for calming the
DENT 312: Restorative 1 (5h)

Dental restorative dentistry is among the most
important branches of dentistry. The Restorative
1 course is didactic course. This course is
intended to provide information to the students
about the followed steps for patients asking a
prosthetic treatment, starting from diagnosis up
to preprosthetic preparation prior receiving final
impression.
block.
Restorative 2 is a didactic course which is
proposed to expose the students to the
modalities of the preparation & construction of
the various restorations including operative
dentistry, endodontics, fixed & removable
prosthodontic restorations.
The presented course will introduce the student
to the didactic background of the restorative
treatment for dental patients; The management
of these patients will be presented to the
student. The course will stress on how the way
of handling of the patient is very important for
the clinical success of dental restorations.
DENT 321 Scientific Presentation Skills (3)
(1h)
224
and spirit of the patient, not just his or her

"Teeth".

The preventive dentistry course introduces the
students to the philosophy and methods of
prevention of oral diseases that can be applied
on an individual level and on a mass scale. The
course emphasizes upon an understanding of
the scientific basis of preventive measures and
their rational use considering the patients and
community need as well as relative
effectiveness and efficacy of these measures.
During the course the students learn and
practice different techniques involved in the
application of preventive agents used in dental
practice and community dental care.
DENT 323: Ethics in Dentistry (1h)
The Ethics in Dentistry provides an introduction
to the importance of the doctor-patient
relationship and to the process of ethical
decision-making. The topics of informed
consent, assessment of patient competence,
truth telling, confidentiality, and end-of-life
decisions are examined in several clinical
contexts such as acute care, pediatrics,
geriatrics, and rehabilitation medicine.
The Ethics in Dentistry provides is central to the
practice of dentistry and is essential for the
delivery of high-quality health care in the
diagnosis and treatment of disease. A patient
must have confidence in the competence of
their dentist and must feel that they can confide
in him or her. For most dentists, the
establishment of good rapport with a patient is
important. The doctor-patient relationship

forms one of the foundations of contemporary
medical ethics. Most dental schools and
universities teach dental students from the
beginning, even before they start clinics, to
maintain a professional rapport with patients,
uphold patients dignity, and respect their
privacy.
DENT 324: Management of Occupational
Hazards (1h)
Dentists, as well as dental personnel, are
constantly exposed to a number of specific
occupational hazards. These cause the
appearance of various ailments, specific to the
profession, which develop and intensify with
years. Musculoskeletal pain is the frequent
complaint of dental personnel and is more
frequently in the cervical area (neck and
shoulders) with a significant association
between the number of working hours per week
and musculoskeletal pain in all locations (back,
upper limb, lower limb).
This didactic course is designed to teach the
students how to avoid these professional
hazards by applying specialized physical
exercises.
DENT 325: Nanodentistry (1h)
Nanotechnology will have future medical
applications leading to the emergence of
nanomedicine and nanodentistry. Nanodentistry
will make it possible to maintain a near perfect
oral health through the use of nanomaterials,
biotechnology, including tissue engineering and
nanorobotics. The nanorobotic functions may be
controlled by an onboard nanocomputer that
executes preprogrammed instructions in
response to local sensor stimuli.
The outline of this course is to familiarize the
students with the current and prospective
applications of nanotechnology in Dentistry.
DENT 326: Comparative Dentistry (1h)
This course is designed to provide the dental
student with knowledge regarding the
225

demonstrate
empathy,
rapport,
ethical
develop expertise.
DENT 327: The Art of Dental Therapeutics (2)

The purpose of this course is to review selected
pharmacologic areas with potential clinical
relevance in the practice of dentistry. The
application of important pharmacologic
concepts to therapeutic prescribing decisions
will be discussed. Students will improve their
general knowledge concerning the medications
that they may prescribe, and those drugs known
taken by their patients. Drug specific topics will
include mechanism of action, indication, dosing,
drug interactions and prescribing concerns for
dental patients. This course will also provide
updates on analgesic and antibiotic selection
and therapy, Over the Counter (OTC) drugs and
their implications in dental practice,, pain and
anxiety control and last trends in pharmacologic
research.
DENT 328 Dental Technology (2h)
This is an introductory course that is suitable for
dental students, dental assisting, and other
dental health occupations.
The course emphasizes the knowledge of dental
students about how to fabricate dental
restorations, prostheses and appliances to a
high standard of precision.
The course includes: Introductory techniques,
Applied Dental Materials, Dental Anatomy &
Physiology, Steps of fabricating Removable
Complete & Partial Dentures, Cast Restorations,
Removable Orthodontics, Ceramic Restorations,
Bonded Restorations, Fixed and Functional
Orthodontics, Advanced Dental Assignments,
and Maxillofacial Prosthodontic appliances such
as obturators.
During the last part of the course, the student
will undertake periods of work placements
normally at the dental clinics of Qassim
University. The placement periods will enable
him to gain the necessary experience in
producing
appliances,
prostheses for patients.
restorations
and
DENT 329: Dental Informatics (1h)

Dental informatics is the application of
computer and information sciences to improve
dental practice, research, education, and
management; it is a relatively new field with
significant potential for supporting dentistrys
many facets.
This course has two primary objectives. The first
one is will introduce students to basics of
computers and the most common computer
applications. Basic computer skills will help
students use computer-aided instruction
software in the basic sciences. The skills
acquired through this course will be
immediately useful in other parts of the curriculum.
The second course, "Dental Informatics,"
concentrates on using computers in the dental
office and should be offered in the junior or
senior year. Topics include components and
functions of practice management programs;
computer based oral health records, digital
imaging, and buying and managing computer
systems.
So participants will begin with conceiving an
informatics
course,
continue
to
the
development of a full course proposal, and
explore implementation and evaluation issues.
DENT 331 Dental Skills (3)(11h)
Dental Skill (3) is a preclinical course designed to
familiarize the students with the theoretical and
technical laboratory procedure which are
required during treatment of patient who will
receive removable prosthesis.
Regarding preclinical endodontic, the course will
introduce the student, under simulated clinical
conditions, to the skills necessary to perform
successful root canal treatment of teeth.
Concerning preclinical operative dentistry, the
students will gain knowledge and practice,
under simulated clinical conditions, necessary
for pin and post retained non-cast restorations
226
experimental animals which can be used in

dental research, how to choose the animal and
how to deal with them during surgery.
DENT 332 Principles of Dental Equipment

Maintenance (1h)
the principle of dental equipment maintenance,
and learn some fundamental techniques and
tricks used to optimize preventive maintenance
programs in dental field. This is mainly achieved
through recognition the major components of
each piece, operate each piece of equipments
and perform routine user maintenance on
equipment.
DENT 333 Recent Trends in Oral and
Maxillofacial Pathology (2)
This course is planned to teach and train the
student the various advanced aspects of oral &
maxillofacial pathology. It covers the basic and
the most recent principles of pathologic
processes in the form of lectures, and laboratory
sessions on essential of both conventional &
experimental pathology. Extensive studies will
be based on current theories in the literature:
nature & variations, in health and disease.
Analysis and interpretation of clinical,
radiographic and microscopic data of the
studied oral lesions will be extensively
discussed. Biopsy service, written report and
the role of computers in clinical pathology are
strongly emphasized in this elective course.
DENT 341: Dental Clinical Practice (1)(5h)
The course involves dental clinics for operative,
periodontics, endodontics, and, fixed and
removable prosthesis and primary care. In this
course, students should restore and treat cases
for both first three specialties and in the same
time dealing with the patients when they come
to the clinic asking for primary care treatment.
The student in this course is allowed to treat any

carious lesions including anterior and posterior
teeth. Regarding periodontics, the student is
allowed to do scaling and root planning, and
some advanced types of treatments. The course
deals with the basic principles of complete
denture fabrication as well as the diagnosis and
treatment of a completely edentulous patient.
DENT 411: Surgical Management (2h)
This course is designed to serve the specialties
of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery, & Oral
Radiology. The student will enhance his
knowledge in patient evaluation &diagnosis, and
explain how to perform simple & complicated
extraction of erupted teeth as well as managing
impacted teeth. The foundation knowledge and
skills acquired through these experiences
contribute to the development of a general
dentist competent in basic oral surgery.
DENT 412: Child & Adolescent Care (4h)
Introduction to clinical pediatric dentistry,
including behavior management, oral diagnosis,
preventive dentistry, care of infants and
toddlers, dental anomalies, radiography,
anesthesia, restorative procedures, pulp
therapy, space maintenance, oral surgery for the
primary dentition, and traumatic injuries in the
primary and permanent dentitions.
The course is structured so the student may gain
experience in the skills necessary to integrate
orthodontic treatment within the context of
general dental practice. These include a
comprehensive clinical evaluation, selecting the
correct diagnostic records, developing a list of
the patient's orthodontic problems, formulating
treatment objectives and establishing a
treatment plan that will include the integration
of orthodontic treatment with other aspects of
dental care when appropriate. The student will
also gain familiarity with the biomechanical and
patient management principles of orthodontic
treatment so they may provide their patients
with accurate information about the benefits,
risks, practices and alternatives available to
227
.Also, the course will introduce the students to

the field of designs of cavity and tooth
preparations for cast restorations.
Concerning fixed prosthodontics, the student
will learn in the preclinical simulator to perform
all types of preparation and the steps for
performing crowns and bridges.
both
simple
and
complex
DENT 413: Management of Oral & Maxillofacial

Diseases (1) (3h)
This course is consists of a series of lectures in a
more advanced aspects of Oral and Maxillofacial
Surgery such as surgical extraction of impacted
teeth, preprosthetic surgery, diagnostic biopsy,
early treatment of odontogenic infections, and
surgical orthodontic treatment etc. The aim of
this program is to provide the students with a
basic understanding of and the diagnostic
capability to approach these more advanced
aspects, of surgery which customarily are dealt
with by Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons.
The pathology, clinical aspects, differential
diagnosis and management of these conditions
are discussed. In the laboratory sessions the
histopathological appearances of the most
significant lesions are used as an aid in
understanding the biological aspects of oral
disease. The seminar periods are used to
integrate knowledge of the pathology with oral
medicine and to impart a system of diagnosis
and treatment based on the understanding of
disease.
Diseases (2) (3h)
The course has been designed to develop an
understanding and introduce the students to
Surgery such as cysts of the oral cavity, maxillary
sinus problems, tempromandibular joint
disorders, odontogenic and non odontogenic
tumours of the oral cavity. The foundation
knowledge acquired through this course
contribute to the development of diagnostic
aspects of surgery which customarily is dealt

disease.
DENT 415: Dental Implantology (1h)
This course is a didactic course, designed to
introduce the students to the science of
multidisciplinary implant dentistry. Emphasis is
on patient evaluation, diagnosis and treatment
planning, implant selection, surgical procedures,
prosthodontic
restorations,
patient
management, and follow-up care.
DENT 416: Maxillofacial Surgery &
Rehabilitation (3h)
multidisciplinary Maxillo-facial dentistry. It
provide a basic theory background, to assist the
development of skills in diagnosis, treatment
planning, active surgical care and postoperative
management. It is also dedicated to prosthetic
correction and management of maxillofacial
defects acquired from the surgical ablation of
cancer, traumatic injuries or congenital birth
defects and alterations in growth and
development.
It focuses on the prosthodontic rehabilitation of
patients with loss and compromise of facial
anatomy, i.e., ocular, orbital, nasal, auricular,
combined intraoral/extraoral and other related
facial deformities.
(1h)
demonstrate
empathy,
rapport,
ethical
228
patients with
malocclusions.
DENT 422 Community Dentistry (5) (2h)

understanding and give an exercise to the
students about the practical implications of the
basic concepts of research methodology, oral
health education and promotion; and preventive
care of individual patients. It will discuss the
significance and application of evidence-based
dentistry, ethics, geriatric and forensic dentistry.
The course will improve critical thinking and
organizational skills of dental undergraduates.
The course will also enhance the ability of
students to work as a viable member of a health
team.
DENT 423 Restorative 3 (1h)
This didactic course is designed to prepare the
students for the management of the patients
with various restorations including operative
dentistry, endodontics, removable & fixed
prosthodontic restorations in addition to
periodontal treatment.
The student will gain didactic knowledge for the
management of dental patients with each of the
previously mentioned discipline. The course will
concentrate on the various treatment modalities
with the proper handling of the dental patients.
DENT 424: Biotechnology in Dentistry (1h)
Tissue engineering is the use of a combination of
cells, engineering and materials methods, and
suitable biochemical and pysiochemical factors
to improve or replace functions.
It will have a considerable effect on dental
practice during the next years. The
greatest effects will likely be related to the
repair and replacement of mineralized tissues,
the promotion of oral wound healing and the

use of gene transfer adjunctively.
This course will provide a general review of the
principles underlying key tissue engineering
strategies, as well as the typical components
used. Several examples of preclinical and clinical
progress are presented. These include passive
approaches, such as dental implants, and
inductive approaches that activate cells with
specific molecular signals.
DENT 425: Scientific Presentation Skills (5) (1h)
demonstrate
empathy,
rapport,
ethical
develop expertise.
DENT 426: Problem Solving in Dentistry (1h)
Our college use the problem based learning
(PBL) as a learning method in the curriculum,
and now we are going to introduce the problem
solving course as a method to increase the
students skill in both diagnosis and dental
treatment. A problem based approach also help
the students recognize knowledge in their minds
and link between different areas and
constructing a knowledge matrix which can be
more readily recalled and applied.
DENT 427: Orthodontic Treatment for Adults
(1h)
This is a didactic course include a
229

develop expertise.
DENT 428: Practice Management (1h)

This course in practice management is designed
to teach the fundamentals of developing and
running a successful dental practice. The course
is taught by dentists and practice management
consultants to insure that up-to-date and
practical material is presented. Special subject
areas of concentration are used in preparing
students for residency programs, fees, and
third-party payment, collections, associateships
and partnerships, hiring, and retaining a five-star
dental team. The classes are taught in a relaxed
atmosphere for maximum student enjoyment
and learning. The overall goal is to make the
information as relevant to the student today as
it will be in the future.
The laboratory exercises in this course
emphasize the fabrication and utilization of
contemporary orthodontic and pedodontic
appliances.
DENT 432: Recent Modalities in Dental
Radiology (2h)
A number of medical imaging modalities have
been developed in recent years and these
continue to be developed at a great rate. With
these advanced imaging techniques as
computed tomography (CT) scanning, Cone
beam CT (CBCT), magnetic resonance imaging
(MRI), Ultrasonography, and digital imaging, the
field of dental radiology has greatly expanded.
The dental professional should have some
familiarity with these newer imaging systems
because patients may have to be referred for
such imaging or copies of the images may be
brought to the office by the patient for opinions
and interpretation. Therefore an overview of
these imaging systems is included in this course.
DENT 441 Dental Clinical Practice (2) (12h)

The purpose of this clinical course is to reinforce
and refine the students knowledge and skills
required for the clinical practice of dentistry in
the following subjects: Operative, Periodontics,
Endodontics, Fixed and removable Prosthesis,
Oral Surgery.
As part of their educational experience, dental
students must demonstrate competence in
behavioral and patient management skills, in
addition to the technical skills and knowledge
that will be required of a graduated, licensed
dental practitioner.
This course is designed to observe, evaluate,
and
subsequently
assist
students
in
understanding
and
practicing
proper
comprehensive patient care and management.
The course focuses, in particular, on refinement
and integration of the following skills introduced
in the first, second, and third years:
Ethical and professional behavior
Patient management, including comprehensive
and timely care
Proper infection control techniques before,
during, and following patient treatment
Appropriate record keeping and management of
patient records.
DENT 442: Advanced Periodontics Clinics (2h)
The course is planned so that the student will be
exposed to various surgical periodontal
approaches.
This course will particularly focus on the
increasingly requested aesthetic procedures;
make sure that the dental student will attain a
pragmatic approach to mucogingival plastic
surgery through imparting knowledge and
expertise.
DENT 443: Advanced Endodontics Clinics (2h)
This course is designed in a way that the
students will acquire knowledge to understand
the implication of microsurgery in endodontics.
At this level, emphasis will be more on didactic
teaching than developing psychomotor skills or
problem solving attitude. The course will
230

dental care when appropriate.
DENT 444: Advanced Cosmetics Clinics (2h)

In modern day living, esthetics is a prime
demand of dental patients. With advent of new
materials and modern technology, many options
have become available to practicing dentists to
satisfy their patients genuine demand.
This course is designed to teach the students
current treatment modalities available to bring
dental esthetics through bleaching. It has a
didactic component along with clinical
observation of under-treatment patients in
operative dentistry department of the Qassim
University Dental Hospital.
DENT 445: Total Patient Care (15h)
Total patient care course is a comprehensive
clinical course concerning the patients
management with all various dental clinical
disciplines including endodontics, fixed &
removable prosthodontics, oral surgery, oral
medicine
&
pathology,
pedodontics,
orthodontics & special dental care. The student
will be trained to propose the treatment plan &
treat the dental patients from A to Z utilizing
infection control program. The student will be
able to treat & follow up the advanced dental
cases under the supervision of interdisciplinary
staff members.
The process of developing a treatment plan

from the database will be thoroughly explored.
DENT 447: Advanced Implant Dentistry Clinics
(2h)
This course is a clinical course, designed to
introduce the students to the clinical skill of
on patient evaluation and selection, diagnosis
and treatment planning, implant selection,
surgical procedures for implant placement,
prosthodontic
restorations,
patient
DENT 448: Advanced Oral & Maxillofacial
Surgery Clinics (2h)
introduce the students to the clinical skill of the
advanced oral and maxillofacial surgery cases.
Emphasis is on surgical techniques (fractures,
orthognathic surgery, distraction osteogenesis,
and
reconstructionetc),
patient
DENT 449: Advanced Pedodontics Clinics (2h)
This course is designed to give the student
advanced knowledge about different types of
preventive and interceptive appliances, and
ensure that they acquire knowledge about
different management techniques to control
difficult, physically and medically compromised
children.
DENT 446: Advanced Orthodontics Clinics (2h)

This is a two-hour credit seminar course offered
at the graduate level within the specialty
program in orthodontics. The course provides
in-depth information concerning methods and
rationale for gathering a comprehensive data
base for orthodontic patients. Analysis and
interpretation of the database is approached by
using the orthogonal analysis technique and
from interdisciplinary perspectives, such as
orthognathic surgery and facial pain, as well.
231
provide comprehensive knowledge about

premedication, presurgical preparation and soft
tissue management and apical resection in cases
where conventional root canal therapy has fail.
Vision:
About:
Nationally distinct college in dental education

and applied researches, in support of the
promotion of oral and dental health in Qassim
Society.
College of Dentistry in Al Rass is a newly

established college, which is affiliated to Qassim
University. It follows the same curriculum as the
College of Dentistry in the main campus.
Enrolled student must pass the preparatory year
and shall be assigned by the Deanship of
Admissions and Registration in the University,
and then it is required to pass qualifying skill
tests of the College as well as the personal
interview.
Based on the decision of the Council of Higher
Education No. 9/57/1431, college departments
were restructured to be: Basic Oral and Medical
Sciences Department (BOM), Community Oral
Health and Epidemiology Department (COE),
Maxillofacial Surgery and Diagnostic Sciences
Department (MDS), Conservative Dental
Sciences Department (CDS), Prosthetic Dental
Sciences Department (PDS), Ortho-Pedodontics
Department (OPD), Periodontology and Oral
Medicine Department (POM), and Dental
Informatics and Dental Education Department
(DIE)
The study plan follows the rules of the yearly
figures as the college education system is based
on problem-based learning. Study language is
English. Study duration is five years after the
preparatory year followed by a clinical training
internship year, and it is divided into three
phases: Basic Phase: first and second years,
Clinical Phase: third, fourth, and fifth years, and
Mission:
Graduation of highly skilled dentists with higher
scientific and research skills, (who are
committed to continuous education and the
development of the profession to meet the
needs of the labor market) , provide a dental
treatment that is consistent with the
international quality standards in the field of
Dentistry, perform a distinct awareness role
within the community, and to strengthen the
national and international partnership.
Objectives:
Prepare and graduate dentists at a high level
of knowledge and clinical skills to provide
services in all areas of Dentistry.
Fill labor market needs of dentists.
To provide distinct therapeutic services for
patients in all disciplines of dentistry by
students under the supervision of a team of
teachers who has the scientific and practical
experience, and who are able to use the
modern technologies in the areas of
treatment and diagnosis.
232
Raise awareness of community health and

prevention methods needed to maintain oral
health.
Contribute to the continuing dental education
for all dentists.
Conduct scientific research to find appropriate
solutions to the problems of oral and dental
health in the community.
Provide dental and technical advice to various
sectors in the field.
Prepare specialized staff in different fields of
dentistry through the Graduate Program.
Internship Phase: sixth clinical training year after

graduation.
DENT
131
Dental Skills (1)
Degrees:
TOTAL
38
Bachelor (B.D.S)
*Each student must finish 12 elective units and
6 free units
Programs:
Dental Surgery (B.D.S)
Second Year
Course
Code
First Year
Course
Code
Course Title
Credit
IC 101
Islamic Culture (1)
IC 102
Islamic Culture (2)
ARAB
101
Arabic Language
Skills
ARAB
103
Arabic Editing
DENT
111
Dental Education
DENT
112
Cell Structure &

Function
DENT
113
Head & Neck:
DENT
114
Genetics, Growth,
& Development
DENT
115
Principles of
Diseases
DENT
121
Presentation Skills
(1)
DENT
122
Community
Dentistry (1)
Course Title
Credit
IC 103
Islamic Culture (3)
IC 104
Islamic Culture (4)
DENT 211
Body Systems in
Health & Disease
11
DENT 212
General Surgery
DENT 213
Neuroscience
DENT 214
Principles of Dental
Sciences
DENT 221
Presentation Skills
(2)
DENT 222
Community
Dentistry (2)
DENT 223
Community
Dentistry (3)
DENT 224
Emergency
Medicine for Dental
Students
DENT 231
Dental Skills (2)
TOTAL
37
Study Plan:
Structure &
Function
Third Year
Course
Course Title
Credit
233
Code
DENT 423
Restorative (3)
DENT 431
Dental Skills (4)
DENT 441
DENT 311
Introduction to
Dental practice
Restorative (1)
Dental Clinical
Practice (2)
12
DENT 312
DENT 313
Restorative (2)
TOTAL
31
DENT 321
Presentation Skills
(3)
DENT 322
Community
Dentistry (4)
Course
Code
DENT 323
Ethics in Dentistry
DENT 415
DENT 331
Dental Skills (3)
11
Dental
Implantology
DENT 341
Dental Clinical
Practice (1)
DENT 416
Maxillofacial
Surgery &
Rehabilitation
TOTAL
32
DENT 425
Presentation Skills
(5)
DENT 426
Problem Solving in
Dentistry
DENT 427
Orthodontic
Treatment for
Adults
Fifth Year
Course
Code
Course Title
Credit
Credit
DENT 411
Surgical
Management
DENT 412
Child & Adolescent

Care
DENT 428
Practice
Management
DENT 413
Management of
Diseases (1)
DENT 445
Total Patient Care
15
TOTAL
23
Management of
Diseases (2)
DENT 421
Presentation Skills
(4)
DENT 422
Community
Dentistry (5)
DENT 414
Fourth Year
Course Title
Course Description:
DENT 111: Dental Education (2h)
The idea of the problem based learning [PBL]
will be discussed in the beginning of this course
to clarify the modality of its application in the
medico-dental practice.
234
DENT 112: Cell Structure & Function (5h)

integrated areas of cell biology, biochemistry,
physiology and general histology.
Some areas of the mentioned disciplines have
been covered less extensively than others to
suite the needs of a dental student.
DENT 113: Head & Neck: Structure & Function
(5h)
This course is an entrance requirement for
preclinical and clinical dental programs.
Students study the anatomy, physiology of the
head and neck, and occlusion of the teeth. The
course includes introductions to basic
terminology and tooth structure, and extends to
a survey of all of the oral systems. All material
discussed with direct relationship to a wellcharacterized dental clinical case.
Oral secretions and salivary glands function, TMJ
and static occlusion will be included in this
course.
DENT 114: Genetics, Growth, and Development

(6h)
student to basic concepts of growth and
development, maturational, aging processes of
the tissues, systems within the craniofacial
complex, and deviation and variation from the
normal growth and development in order to
prepare the student for the following Preclinical
and Clinical stages.
DENT 115: Principles of Diseases (6h)
This course includes the basic principles of
disease
and
relevant
histopathology.
Considerable
emphasis
is
given
to
understanding
mechanisms
underlying
alterations at the cell and subcellular levels. The
parameter of cell injury, inflammation,
immunopathology, repair and regeneration,
carcinogenesis, hemodynamic disturbances, and
nutritional diseases are studied. Correlations of
systemic diseases of importance in dentistry are
emphasized. This course will provide the student
with a working understanding of pharmacology
and pharmacotherapeutics as applied to dental
practice.
DENT 121: Scientific presentation skills (1) (1h)
demonstrate
empathy,
rapport,
ethical
develop expertise.
235
This course is designed to review the dental

history & provide students with the basic rules
and elements of a dental word, including word
roots, prefixes, suffixes and combining forms.
The student will be able to analyze, spell,
pronounce and build dental terms according to
word parts and descriptions.
In order to enhance the student's knowledge of
dental science, various terminologies including
dental & medical terms are introduced & also
using of computerized & internet exercises.
Principles of Medical & Dental ethics are
involved in this course; the dentist can evolve
his duties & rights towards his profession & be
able for decision making.
During this course a practical model for verbal &
non- verbal communication will be introduced
and
induces
advice
for
managing
communication in everyday clinical situations,
together with interactive workshops.
DENT 123: The Art of Sculpture in Dentistry (1h)

student to basic concepts of Perceptual Skills
and Visual Arts Vocabulary and developed their
ability and taste of the artistic skills in order to
develop competencies and creative skills in
problem
solving,
communication,
and
management of time and resources that
contribute to lifelong learning and career skills.
They also learn about careers in and related to
the visual arts.
DENT 124: Development of Dental Students
(1h)
Student Development is dedicated to ensuring
students' college success and motivating their
journey toward lifelong learning. It will enable
students to develop their own plan for personal,
academic and career success through selfevaluation, application of specific techniques,
and classroom activities. These activities will
help students acquire effective study strategies,
increase critical and creative thinking skills,
establish short-term and long-term goals, and
learn to manage time more efficiently. This is a
course about making choices, especially those
about setting and meeting personal, academic
and career goals.
The Mind Map is a dynamic and exciting tool to
help all thinking and planning becomes a
smarter and faster activity. The creation of a
Mind Map is a revolutionary way to tap into the
infinite resources in student's brain, to make
appropriate decisions, and to understand their
feelings.
DENT 125: Technology and Acquired
Knowledge for Dental Students (2h)
This course is an elective course, designed to

equip the student with an understanding of the
theoretical and practical basis for good elearning. Emphasis is on learning theories,
learning technologies, and e-learning design.
DENT 126: Dentist Community
Communication (1h)
The role of the dentist does not depend only on
the treatment of patients but also to educate
the community through various media, whether
print, audio or video. Press is not just a means of
communication but is an influential force
derives its effectiveness from the power of the
words that settle in the minds and respond to
the hopes of nations and ambitious people.
This decision will include the training of students
to the basic rules of writing press releases and
will help students to improve the drafting skills
of news reporting have also increase the selfconfidence in the dialogue and interview others.
The course layout the foundation for developing
technical artistic skills by the dental student and
related these skills to his clinical performance.
DENT 132: Digital Editing of Dental Record (2h)
the use of computer aided design technology.
This is mainly achieved through training the
student on the advanced potentials of various
programs mainly; Photoshop, Flash, Power Point
and Microsoft Publisher in preparing accurate
and high quality projects such as that enable
them to present their ideas and concept in a
professional manner.
DENT 133: Management of Scientific Meeting
(1h)
Due to the value of the scientific meeting as a
mechanism for a unique form of personal
interchange we aim from this course to explain
how we can organize and gain experienced in
the business of running a conference,
symposium, workshop and tutorial sessions and
236
The course has been designed to introduce to

the dental undergraduates the basic concepts
about community dentistry, oral health
promotion and education. The implications of
the system of Primary Health Care to the
provision of oral health care to communities are
discussed.
DENT 211: Body Systems in Health & Disease

(11h)
Pathology,
Microbiology,
Biochemistry,
include the common Internal medicine, and the
Dermatology.
DENT 212: General Surgery (2h)
Pathology,
Microbiology,
Biochemistry,
include the General surgery, Ear Nose and
throat, and Ophthalmology.
DENT 213: Neuroscience (4h)
This comprehensive, multidisciplinary course is
dedicated to the understanding of the main
functions of the nervous system, the principles
of sensory and motor functions and to
understand pain and its management.
Instruction includes training in local anesthesia
and nitrous oxide administration. Lecture topics
include pain transmission, neurotransmitters,
theories of pain perception, and treatment
procedures for patients suffering from acute or
chronic pain. Consideration is given to the use of
drugs, biofeedback, hypnosis, and surgery for
treatment of pain.
DENT 214: Principles of Dental Sciences (6h)
This course is designed to assist in the transition

from the didactic and preclinical portion of the
curriculum to the clinical phase, with the
ultimate goal of developing competent dentists.
Competent dentists demonstrate appropriate
patient management skills, professionalism and
integrity in the delivery of dental care, and
critical thinking necessary for life-long learning.
The students are introduced to basic concepts of
clinical patient care and are provided
opportunities to observe and model future
behaviors as they observe faculty and student
dentists deliver appropriate care in a
compassionate manner.
block.
DENT 221: Scientific Presentation Skills (2)(1h)
demonstrate
empathy,
rapport,
ethical
develop expertise.
DENT 222: Community Dentistry (2)(1h)
This course has been designed to introduce to
undergraduates the basic concepts and methods
of conducting research. The lectures will be
supplemented by some practical exercises to
enhance the ability of students to actually apply
these concepts and methods.
The course has been designed to highlight the
relevance of the basic concepts of biostatistics
237
eager for information, guidelines, and tips on

running a scientific meeting smoothly and
successfully.
modern science and knowledge drawn from the

worlds great traditions on natural healing. It is
sometimes called "Biological" dentistry or
"Biocompatible" dentistry. Alternative Dentistry
acknowledges and deals with the mind, body,
and spirit of the patient, not just his or her
"Teeth".
DENT 224: Emergency Medicine for Dental

Students (2h)
Life-threatening emergencies can occur
anytime, anywhere and to anyone. Such
situations are somewhat more likely to occur
within the confines of the dental office due to
the increased level of stress which is so often
present.
In this course the areas which are considered
vital to a proper understanding of Emergency
Medicine will be discussed. This will include a
discussion of a thorough review of the office
emergency kit (medications and equipment),
basic life support including CPR and air way
management. Additionally, it will include the
recognition and management of specific
emergency situations that may be faced in the
dental clinic like altered consciousness, acute
chest pain, seizures, shock, hypertensive crisis,
acute severe asthma, hypo and hyperglycemia
and local anesthetic toxicity.
DENT 227: Laboratory Techniques in Oral and

Maxillofacial Pathology (2h)
This elective course will focus on the basic as
well as the advanced laboratory techniques in
the field of oral & maxillofacial pathology. Some
techniques
(Laser,
Implants
&
Anutoradiography) will encourage students,
dentists and oral surgeons to conduct research
on human as well as on experimental animal
models, and to use computer programs to
analyze the microscopic findings in diagnosis
and research. In addition, this course will shed a
light on the methods of protection against
infection, physical, chemical, biological and
irradiation hazards in the dental clinics and the
laboratory.
DENT 225: Scientific Editing for Dental

Periodicals (1h)
Scientific editing will provide students with the
basic principles needed to perform writing and
editing services to the scientific community. The
students will also be expected and encouraged
to demonstrate the maturity and judgment for
research articles and posters, as well as critical
data evaluations that will increase the chances
of publication.
DENT 226: Alternative Dentistry (1h)
This Alternative Dentistry course is an approach
to Dentistry that promotes health and wellness
instead of the treatment of disease. This
approach to Dentistry encompasses both

This course will introduce the students to the
field of operative dentistry and periodontology.
The course will stress on maintaining the
required hand skills regarding grasping
techniques of
the
hand-piece,
cavity
preparation, filling materials and techniques.
The simulation of the human head will allow the
student to apply these procedures clinically on
the patients.
DENT 232: Photography in Dentistry (1h)
dental students to basic concepts of dental
photography. Clinical photography has its
greatest applications as a record-keeping system
and as an aid in conveying information. The slide
projection of clinical materials is an
indispensable tool for use in self-evaluation,
patient education, and effective communication
with colleagues. The documentation of patient
238
to oral epidemiology and dental research. It will

include data coding, entry and analysis using
SPSS (Statistical Package for Social Sciences).The
course will facilitate students in acquiring skills
of drawing inferences from data and of
evaluating the statistics presented in scientific
papers.
DENT 311: Introduction to Dental Practice (2h)

This course is designed to ensure that the
student acquired sound knowledge in various
integrated areas of diagnosis and filling system,
operative dentistry, periodontics, infection
control, handling instruments and local
anesthesia before real patient clinical work.
Some of these areas had been covered
previously and needs to be integrated together.
Dental restorative dentistry is among the most
important branches of dentistry. The Restorative
1 course is didactic course. This course is
intended to provide information to the students
about the followed steps for patients asking a
prosthetic treatment, starting from diagnosis up
to preprosthetic preparation prior receiving final
impression.
block.
Restorative 2 is a didactic course which is
proposed to expose the students to the
modalities of the preparation & construction of
the various restorations including operative
dentistry, endodontics, fixed & removable
prosthodontic restorations.
The presented course will introduce the student
to the didactic background of the restorative
treatment for dental patients; The management
of these patients will be presented to the
student. The course will stress on how the way
of handling of the patient is very important for
the clinical success of dental restorations.

(1h)
demonstrate
empathy,
rapport,
ethical
develop expertise.
The preventive dentistry course introduces the
students to the philosophy and methods of
prevention of oral diseases that can be applied
on an individual level and on a mass scale. The
course emphasizes upon an understanding of
the scientific basis of preventive measures and
their rational use considering the patients and
community need as well as relative
effectiveness and efficacy of these measures.
During the course the students learn and
practice different techniques involved in the
application of preventive agents used in dental
practice and community dental care.
DENT 323: Ethics in Dentistry (1h)
The Ethics in Dentistry provides an introduction
to the importance of the doctor-patient
relationship and to the process of ethical
decision-making. The topics of informed
consent, assessment of patient competence,
truth telling, confidentiality, and end-of-life
decisions are examined in several clinical
contexts such as acute care, pediatrics,
geriatrics, and rehabilitation medicine.
The Ethics in Dentistry provides is central to the
practice of dentistry and is essential for the
delivery of high-quality health care in the
239
management is a permanent record used not only

by the resident during his training but also by the
faculty on all levels of education. The use of
photography as photo magic for calming the
fearful child, and as dental newsletters and
publications will be discussed.
DENT 324: Management of Occupational

Hazards (1h)
Dentists, as well as dental personnel, are
constantly exposed to a number of specific
occupational hazards. These cause the
appearance of various ailments, specific to the
profession, which develop and intensify with
years. Musculoskeletal pain is the frequent
complaint of dental personnel and is more
frequently in the cervical area (neck and
shoulders) with a significant association
between the number of working hours per week
and musculoskeletal pain in all locations (back,
upper limb, lower limb).
This didactic course is designed to teach the
students how to avoid these professional
hazards by applying specialized physical
exercises.
DENT 325: Nanodentistry (1h)
Nanotechnology will have future medical
applications leading to the emergence of
nanomedicine and nanodentistry. Nanodentistry
will make it possible to maintain a near perfect
oral health through the use of nanomaterials,
biotechnology, including tissue engineering and
nanorobotics. The nanorobotic functions may be
controlled by an onboard nanocomputer that
executes preprogrammed instructions in
response to local sensor stimuli.
The outline of this course is to familiarize the

students with the current and prospective
applications of nanotechnology in Dentistry.
DENT 326: Comparative Dentistry (1h)
This course is designed to provide the dental
student with knowledge regarding the
experimental animals which can be used in
dental research, how to choose the animal and
how to deal with them during surgery.
DENT 327: The Art of Dental Therapeutics (2)
The purpose of this course is to review selected
pharmacologic areas with potential clinical
relevance in the practice of dentistry. The
application of important pharmacologic
concepts to therapeutic prescribing decisions
will be discussed. Students will improve their
general knowledge concerning the medications
that they may prescribe, and those drugs known
taken by their patients. Drug specific topics will
include mechanism of action, indication, dosing,
drug interactions and prescribing concerns for
dental patients. This course will also provide
updates on analgesic and antibiotic selection
and therapy, Over the Counter (OTC) drugs and
their implications in dental practice,, pain and
anxiety control and last trends in pharmacologic
research.
DENT 328 Dental Technology (2h)
This is an introductory course that is suitable for
dental students, dental assisting, and other
dental health occupations.
The course emphasizes the knowledge of dental
students about how to fabricate dental
restorations, prostheses and appliances to a
high standard of precision.
The course includes: Introductory techniques,
Applied Dental Materials, Dental Anatomy &
Physiology, Steps of fabricating Removable
Complete & Partial Dentures, Cast Restorations,
Removable Orthodontics, Ceramic Restorations,
Bonded Restorations, Fixed and Functional
Orthodontics, Advanced Dental Assignments,
240
diagnosis and treatment of disease. A patient

must have confidence in the competence of
their dentist and must feel that they can confide
in him or her. For most dentists, the
establishment of good rapport with a patient is
important. The doctor-patient relationship
forms one of the foundations of contemporary
medical ethics. Most dental schools and
universities teach dental students from the
beginning, even before they start clinics, to
maintain a professional rapport with patients,
uphold patients dignity, and respect their
privacy.
DENT 329: Dental Informatics (1h)

Dental informatics is the application of
computer and information sciences to improve
dental practice, research, education, and
management; it is a relatively new field with
significant potential for supporting dentistrys
many facets.
This course has two primary objectives. The first
one is will introduce students to basics of
computers and the most common computer
applications. Basic computer skills will help
students use computer-aided instruction
software in the basic sciences. The skills
acquired through this course will be
immediately useful in other parts of the curriculum.
The second course, "Dental Informatics,"
concentrates on using computers in the dental
office and should be offered in the junior or
senior year. Topics include components and
functions of practice management programs;
computer based oral health records, digital
imaging, and buying and managing computer
systems.
So participants will begin with conceiving an
informatics
course,
continue
to
the
development of a full course proposal, and
explore implementation and evaluation issues.
DENT 331 Dental Skills (3)(11h)
Dental Skill (3) is a preclinical course designed to
familiarize the students with the theoretical and
technical laboratory procedure which are
required during treatment of patient who will
receive removable prosthesis.
Regarding preclinical endodontic, the course will

introduce the student, under simulated clinical
conditions, to the skills necessary to perform
successful root canal treatment of teeth.
Concerning preclinical operative dentistry, the
students will gain knowledge and practice,
under simulated clinical conditions, necessary
for pin and post retained non-cast restorations
.Also, the course will introduce the students to
the field of designs of cavity and tooth
preparations for cast restorations.
Concerning fixed prosthodontics, the student
will learn in the preclinical simulator to perform
all types of preparation and the steps for
performing crowns and bridges.
DENT 332 Principles of Dental Equipment
Maintenance (1h)
the principle of dental equipment maintenance,
and learn some fundamental techniques and
tricks used to optimize preventive maintenance
programs in dental field. This is mainly achieved
through recognition the major components of
each piece, operate each piece of equipments
and perform routine user maintenance on
equipment.
DENT 333 Recent Trends in Oral and
Maxillofacial Pathology (2)
This course is planned to teach and train the
student the various advanced aspects of oral &
maxillofacial pathology. It covers the basic and
the most recent principles of pathologic
processes in the form of lectures, and laboratory
sessions on essential of both conventional &
experimental pathology. Extensive studies will
be based on current theories in the literature:
nature & variations, in health and disease.
Analysis and interpretation of clinical,
radiographic and microscopic data of the
studied oral lesions will be extensively
discussed. Biopsy service, written report and
the role of computers in clinical pathology are
strongly emphasized in this elective course.
241
and Maxillofacial Prosthodontic appliances such

as obturators.
During the last part of the course, the student
will undertake periods of work placements
normally at the dental clinics of Qassim
University. The placement periods will enable
him to gain the necessary experience in
producing
appliances,
restorations
and
prostheses for patients.
DENT 411: Surgical Management (2h)

This course is designed to serve the specialties
of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery, & Oral
Radiology. The student will enhance his
knowledge in patient evaluation &diagnosis, and
explain how to perform simple & complicated
extraction of erupted teeth as well as managing
impacted teeth. The foundation knowledge and
skills acquired through these experiences
contribute to the development of a general
dentist competent in basic oral surgery.
DENT 412: Child & Adolescent Care (4h)
Introduction to clinical pediatric dentistry,
including behavior management, oral diagnosis,
preventive dentistry, care of infants and
toddlers, dental anomalies, radiography,
anesthesia, restorative procedures, pulp
therapy, space maintenance, oral surgery for the
primary dentition, and traumatic injuries in the
primary and permanent dentitions.
The course is structured so the student may gain
experience in the skills necessary to integrate
orthodontic treatment within the context of
general dental practice. These include a

dental care when appropriate. The student will
also gain familiarity with the biomechanical and
patient management principles of orthodontic
treatment so they may provide their patients
with accurate information about the benefits,
risks, practices and alternatives available to
patients with both simple and complex
malocclusions.
Diseases (1) (3h)
This course is consists of a series of lectures in a
Surgery such as surgical extraction of impacted
teeth, preprosthetic surgery, diagnostic biopsy,
early treatment of odontogenic infections, and
surgical orthodontic treatment etc. The aim of
this program is to provide the students with a
basic understanding of and the diagnostic
aspects, of surgery which customarily are dealt
disease.
Diseases (2) (3h)
understanding and introduce the students to
Surgery such as cysts of the oral cavity, maxillary
sinus problems, tempromandibular joint
disorders, odontogenic and non odontogenic
tumours of the oral cavity. The foundation
knowledge acquired through this course
242
DENT 341: Dental Clinical Practice (1)(5h)

The course involves dental clinics for operative,
periodontics, endodontics, and, fixed and
removable prosthesis and primary care. In this
course, students should restore and treat cases
for both first three specialties and in the same
time dealing with the patients when they come
to the clinic asking for primary care treatment.
The student in this course is allowed to treat any
carious lesions including anterior and posterior
teeth. Regarding periodontics, the student is
allowed to do scaling and root planning, and
some advanced types of treatments. The course
deals with the basic principles of complete
denture fabrication as well as the diagnosis and
treatment of a completely edentulous patient.
DENT 415: Dental Implantology (1h)

on patient evaluation, diagnosis and treatment
planning, implant selection, surgical procedures,
prosthodontic
restorations,
patient
DENT 416: Maxillofacial Surgery &
Rehabilitation (3h)
multidisciplinary Maxillo-facial dentistry. It
provide a basic theory background, to assist the
development of skills in diagnosis, treatment
planning, active surgical care and postoperative
management. It is also dedicated to prosthetic
correction and management of maxillofacial
defects acquired from the surgical ablation of
cancer, traumatic injuries or congenital birth
defects and alterations in growth and
development.
It focuses on the prosthodontic rehabilitation of
patients with loss and compromise of facial
anatomy, i.e., ocular, orbital, nasal, auricular,
combined intraoral/extraoral and other related
facial deformities.

(1h)
demonstrate
empathy,
rapport,
ethical
develop expertise.
DENT 422 Community Dentistry (5) (2h)
understanding and give an exercise to the
students about the practical implications of the
basic concepts of research methodology, oral
health education and promotion; and preventive
care of individual patients. It will discuss the
significance and application of evidence-based
dentistry, ethics, geriatric and forensic dentistry.
The course will improve critical thinking and
organizational skills of dental undergraduates.
The course will also enhance the ability of
students to work as a viable member of a health
team.
DENT 423 Restorative 3 (1h)
This didactic course is designed to prepare the
students for the management of the patients
with various restorations including operative
dentistry, endodontics, removable & fixed
prosthodontic restorations in addition to
periodontal treatment.
The student will gain didactic knowledge for the
management of dental patients with each of the
previously mentioned discipline. The course will
concentrate on the various treatment modalities
with the proper handling of the dental patients.
243
contribute to the development of diagnostic

aspects of surgery which customarily is dealt
disease.
DENT 425: Scientific Presentation Skills (5) (1h)

demonstrate
empathy,
rapport,
ethical
develop expertise.
DENT 426: Problem Solving in Dentistry (1h)
Our college use the problem based learning
(PBL) as a learning method in the curriculum,
and now we are going to introduce the problem
solving course as a method to increase the
students skill in both diagnosis and dental
treatment. A problem based approach also help
the students recognize knowledge in their minds
and link between different areas and
constructing a knowledge matrix which can be

more readily recalled and applied.
DENT 427: Orthodontic Treatment for Adults
(1h)
This is a didactic course include a
dental care when appropriate.
DENT 428: Practice Management (1h)
This course in practice management is designed
to teach the fundamentals of developing and
running a successful dental practice. The course
is taught by dentists and practice management
consultants to insure that up-to-date and
practical material is presented. Special subject
areas of concentration are used in preparing
students for residency programs, fees, and
third-party payment, collections, associateships
and partnerships, hiring, and retaining a five-star
dental team. The classes are taught in a relaxed
atmosphere for maximum student enjoyment
and learning. The overall goal is to make the
information as relevant to the student today as
it will be in the future.
The laboratory exercises in this course
emphasize the fabrication and utilization of
contemporary orthodontic and pedodontic
appliances.
DENT 432: Recent Modalities in Dental
Radiology (2h)
A number of medical imaging modalities have
been developed in recent years and these
continue to be developed at a great rate. With
these advanced imaging techniques as
computed tomography (CT) scanning, Cone
beam CT (CBCT), magnetic resonance imaging
(MRI), Ultrasonography, and digital imaging, the
244
DENT 424: Biotechnology in Dentistry (1h)

Tissue engineering is the use of a combination of
cells, engineering and materials methods, and
suitable biochemical and pysiochemical factors
to improve or replace functions.
It will have a considerable effect on dental
practice during the next years. The
greatest effects will likely be related to the
repair and replacement of mineralized tissues,
the promotion of oral wound healing and the
use of gene transfer adjunctively.
This course will provide a general review of the
principles underlying key tissue engineering
strategies, as well as the typical components
used. Several examples of preclinical and clinical
progress are presented. These include passive
approaches, such as dental implants, and
inductive approaches that activate cells with
specific molecular signals.
DENT 441 Dental Clinical Practice (2) (12h)

The purpose of this clinical course is to reinforce
and refine the students knowledge and skills
required for the clinical practice of dentistry in
the following subjects: Operative, Periodontics,
Endodontics, Fixed and removable Prosthesis,
Oral Surgery.
As part of their educational experience, dental
students must demonstrate competence in
behavioral and patient management skills, in
addition to the technical skills and knowledge
that will be required of a graduated, licensed
dental practitioner.
This course is designed to observe, evaluate,
and
subsequently
assist
students
in
understanding
and
practicing
proper
comprehensive patient care and management.
The course focuses, in particular, on refinement
and integration of the following skills introduced
in the first, second, and third years:
Ethical and professional behavior
Patient management, including comprehensive
and timely care
Proper infection control techniques before,
during, and following patient treatment
Appropriate record keeping and management of
patient records.
DENT 442: Advanced Periodontics Clinics (2h)
The course is planned so that the student will be
exposed to various surgical periodontal
approaches.
This course will particularly focus on the
increasingly requested aesthetic procedures;
make sure that the dental student will attain a
pragmatic approach to mucogingival plastic
surgery through imparting knowledge and

expertise.
DENT 443: Advanced Endodontics Clinics (2h)
This course is designed in a way that the
students will acquire knowledge to understand
the implication of microsurgery in endodontics.
At this level, emphasis will be more on didactic
teaching than developing psychomotor skills or
problem solving attitude. The course will
provide comprehensive knowledge about
premedication, presurgical preparation and soft
tissue management and apical resection in cases
where conventional root canal therapy has fail.
DENT 444: Advanced Cosmetics Clinics (2h)
In modern day living, esthetics is a prime
demand of dental patients. With advent of new
materials and modern technology, many options
have become available to practicing dentists to
satisfy their patients genuine demand.
This course is designed to teach the students
current treatment modalities available to bring
dental esthetics through bleaching. It has a
didactic component along with clinical
observation of under-treatment patients in
operative dentistry department of the Qassim
University Dental Hospital.
DENT 445: Total Patient Care (15h)
Total patient care course is a comprehensive
clinical course concerning the patients
management with all various dental clinical
disciplines including endodontics, fixed &
removable prosthodontics, oral surgery, oral
medicine
&
pathology,
pedodontics,
orthodontics & special dental care. The student
will be trained to propose the treatment plan &
treat the dental patients from A to Z utilizing
infection control program. The student will be
able to treat & follow up the advanced dental
cases under the supervision of interdisciplinary
staff members.
DENT 446: Advanced Orthodontics Clinics (2h)
245
field of dental radiology has greatly expanded.

The dental professional should have some
familiarity with these newer imaging systems
because patients may have to be referred for
such imaging or copies of the images may be
brought to the office by the patient for opinions
and interpretation. Therefore an overview of
these imaging systems is included in this course.
This is a two-hour credit seminar course offered

at the graduate level within the specialty
program in orthodontics. The course provides
in-depth information concerning methods and
rationale for gathering a comprehensive data
base for orthodontic patients. Analysis and
interpretation of the database is approached by
using the orthogonal analysis technique and
from interdisciplinary perspectives, such as
orthognathic surgery and facial pain, as well.
The process of developing a treatment plan
from the database will be thoroughly explored.
DENT 447: Advanced Implant Dentistry Clinics

(2h)
introduce the students to the clinical skill of
on patient evaluation and selection, diagnosis
and treatment planning, implant selection,
surgical procedures for implant placement,
prosthodontic
restorations,
patient
DENT 448: Advanced Oral & Maxillofacial
Surgery Clinics (2h)
introduce the students to the clinical skill of the
advanced oral and maxillofacial surgery cases.
Emphasis is on surgical techniques (fractures,
orthognathic surgery, distraction osteogenesis,
and
reconstructionetc),
patient
DENT 449: Advanced Pedodontics Clinics (2h)
This course is designed to give the student
advanced knowledge about different types of
preventive and interceptive appliances, and
ensure that they acquire knowledge about
different management techniques to control
difficult, physically and medically compromised
children.
246
4.
5.
6.
principles of rehabilitation in the field

of health care.
Contribution in the development of
knowledge and profession in the field
of medical rehabilitation through the
promotion of scientific research
practice.
Upgrading the administrative and
technical facilities in the college.
Exchange of experience with colleges
and counterpart institutions within and
outside the Kingdom.
College of
Medical Rehabilitation
College of Medical Rehabilitation will grant a

bachelor degree in new specialties that will be
contributed to improve the quality of health:
1. Physical Therapy
Vision:
2. Speech and Hearing disorders

Achievement of regional and national
excellence in academic and research fields in the
areas of medical rehabilitation to meet the
health's aspirations of the community.
Mission:
Providing academic programs that approved for
preparation of qualified health contributors who
will raise the level of health care introduced to
the community in the areas of medical
rehabilitation through using the latest academic
and administrative programs that supported by
a modern techniques to improve performance
and provide opportunities that will enable the
students to obtain a high level of professional
knowledge and problem solving skills. And
actively participate in ultimate applied research
in the areas of medical rehabilitation.
2.
3.
4. Prosthetics and Orthotics.

5. Sports Medicine.
And includes also Psychological and Mental
Rehabilitation (service department does not
grant a degree).
Degrees:
Bachelor Degree
Programs
BA degree program in
Physiotherapy (DPT)
Faculty Members
Aims:
1.
3. Occupational Therapy
Raising the quality of learning and

excellence in disciplines of medical
rehabilitation and to seek accreditation
of national and international levels.
Achievement of outstanding levels of
skills, experience and ethical standards
in the practice of medical rehabilitation
for students.
Strengthening the role of faculty in the
service of society and establishing the
Naheed Pano
Professor
Enas N. Morgan.
Assist. Prof.
Awatif H. Sedeek
Assist Prof.
Fatehyia G. Al-Sayeed
Assist. Prof
Hanan Al-Samhaan
Ateka
247
College of Medical Rehabilitation in Buraidah
About:
Meznah
114
Study Plan:
STAT 115
Level-1
ANAT
116
Course
Code
Course Title
IC 101
Credit
Islamic Culture
Language Skills
Biostatistics
3(2+1)
Principle of Anatomy
3 (2+1)
PHSL 117
Principle of Physiology -1
3(2+1)
MDL 118
Principle of Medical
3(2+1)
ARAB 101
Microbiology
PHYS
114
CHEM 110
BIOL
113
General Physics
3 (4+1)
HLTH
127
General Chemistry
3 (4+1)
Human Biology
2 (3+1)
HLTH
125
Medical Profession Ethics
Level-3
Course
Code
Course Title
Credi
t
IC 103
Islamic Culture (3)
ARAB 103
Arabic Editing
DPT 221
Introduction to medical
rehabilitation
DPT 222
Medical Communication Skills
ANAT 211
Clinical Anatomy (2+1)
3(2+1)
PHSL 212
Principle of Physiology -2-
3(2
Medical Terminology
HLTH
126
Health care System and

vocational safety
3 (2+1)
Level-2
Course
Code
Course Title
Credit
IC 102
Islamic Culture (4)
CHEM
Principles of Biochemistry
3 (2+1)
248
Course
Code
Course Title
Credit
College elective group 2
Course
Code
Course Title
Credit
IC 104
Political System in Islam
ANAT 213
Neuro-Anatomy
DPT 223
Pathology
NERO 217
Neuro-Sciences Lab
3 (2+1)
Department Elective group 1
Introduction to Physical Therapy

interventions
DPT
313
Hydrotherapy
4 (3+1)
AID 218 Emergency and first Aid
3 (2+1)
DPT 210 Musculoskeletal Anatomy
3 (2+1)
3(1+2)
DPT 213
DPT
314
Therapeutic Exercises
NUT
310
Nutritional Assessment
Exercise Physiology
4(3+1)
Level-5
3
Level-6
MDL233
ANAT 214
Course
Code
Medical Biochemistry (2+1)
Development across life span
Course Title
Credit
DPT 315
Electrotherapy and PT
interventions
DPT 316
Medical and Surgical

Orthopedics
3(2+1)
Level-4
249
DPT
312
DPT 317
Orthopedics and Rheumatology

for Physical Therapists
DPT 318
Clinical practice in Orthopedics
DPT 421 Differential Diagnosis for General

Medical Conditions
DPT 319
Physical Therapy for Burn and

Surgical conditions
3(2+1)
Course
Code
Level-7
Course
Code
Course Title
Credit
DPT 431
Cardiovascular Disorders for

Physical Therapists
DPT 432 Respiratory Disorders for Physical

Therapists
DPT 433
PHRM
413
Clinical practice in
Cardiopulmonary
Pharmacology
OT 411 I Introduction to Occupational

therapy
PSYC
412
Rehabilitation Psychology
Course Title
Credit
PROS
414
Introduction to Prosthetics and

Orthotics
DPT 450
Geriatric Rehabilitation
2
DPT 422 Neurology Disorders for Physical
Therapists -1-
DPT 423 Clinical practice in Neurology -1-
DPT 424
3
Medical Imaging
Level-9
Course
Code
Course Title
Credit
250
Level-8
DPT 425
Neurology Disorders for Physical

Therapists -2-
DPT 426
Clinical practice in Neurology -2-
DPT 440
Pediatric Disorders for Physical

Therapists
3
General Chemistry; CHEM 110 3hr. (2+1)
DPT 442
Research Methods and Critical

appraisal
Level-10
Credit
This course introduce the student to general

concepts of chemical calculations, molecular
weight, chemical reactions in
aqueous
solutions,
energy
and
its
transformation, chemical bonds, the cyclic table,
thermal chemistry, properties of substances and
aqueous solutions and chemical mobility.
General Physics;PHYS 114: 3hr (2+1):
PROS 415
Assistive Technology in
Rehabilitation
DPT 443
Clinical practice -1-
1
DPT 444
Assistive Technology in
Rehabilitation
Independent Study
This course aims to explore the nature of the

physical environment and explains how natural
phenomena occur in terms of mathematics. A
physics student will learn how to collect data,
organize findings into a readable format and
then report on the outcomes of that observed
data. This
course is divided into a lecture
portion and a laboratory work portion. Lectures
explain
the
theories
behind
certain
phenomenon and how to use algebra to prove
theorems. Laboratory work gives the student a
hands-on experience with the scientific method
and observing physics theories in action.
Human Biology; BIOL 113: 4 hr (3+1)
This course will introduce, at an entry level,
the understanding of various cell structures and
251
Clinical practice in Pediatrics
Course Title
PROS 415
Course Description:
DPT 441
Course
Code
Medical Terminology; HLTH 125: 2hr

This course covers the linguistic structural
basis for scientific and medical terminology in
Latin and English and explanation of the main
terms in different applications of medical
science specialties to enable advanced students
in different branches and graduates deal easily
with physicians and other workers in different
specialties. The course also aims at acquainting
students with the pronunciation, writing and
understanding of general principal medical
terms and abbreviations corresponding to their
Arabic homologues.
Health care System and Vocational Safety;
HLTH 126: 3 (2+1)
Introduction to applied health sciences,
concept of health and factors affecting it, the
general hierarchy of health services and their
current and future needs, ethics of practice of
the different health professions.
Principles of Biochemistry; CHEM 114:
3 hr (2+1)
This course offers detailed study of the
chemical compositions and the biological
functions of the main biochemical molecules
including carbohydrates, proteins, lipids and
their components, enzymes and different types
of hormones. It also includes methods of
practical qualitative and quantitative assays to
discover these molecules.
Biostatistics; STAT 115: 3 hr (2+1)
This course presents detailed description of
characters types, displaying and presenting
data, measures of central tendency, measures of

dispersion, principles of probability, random
variables and probability distribution, bimodal
distribution, natural distribution, confidence
intervals for mean, median, ratios and various
statistics tests .
Principles of Anatomy; ANAT 116: 3 hr (2+1).
This course represents introduction to
anatomy of different regions and organs of
human body. Systemic anatomy of: joints,
lymph,
digestive,
urinary,
reproductive,
cardiovascular, respiratory, nervous (CNS and
autonomic), musculoskeletal, endocrine, and
embryology.
Principles of Physiology; PHSL 117: 3hr (2+1).
This course is aimed to understand the basis
of various physiological functions of the body
from the cell as the smallest functional
component of the body to the function of
various organs, systems. Further, these systems
will be studied with objective to enhance the
concept of integrative physiology, as functions
of these systems, to the most part, they are
interrelated.
Principles of Microbiology; MDL 118: 3 hr (2+1)
This course covers the general principles of
microbiology including classification of different
groups of microbes, morphology of each group
and study of their characters. Also the study
includes a brief introduction to the infectious
diseases regarding their types, causative
microbial agents and methods of their control
together with study of food and air
microbiology.
Medical Profession Ethics; HLTH 127: 2hr
This course covers the principles and
standards for the health professional practice
and clarifies the duties of health practitioners,
towards the patients, the community and his
colleagues. It also introduces the knowledge
252
functions,
eukaryotes
vs.
prokaryotes,
embryology.
Introduction to Medical Rehabilitation; DPT

221: 2hrs
This course provides students with an
introduction to the profession of rehabilitation
services. The course examines the history,
philosophy, and legal basis for rehabilitation
services and independent living programs. Roles
of the rehabilitation professional are also
emphasized. An overview of the rehabilitation
process and employment opportunities will be
presented
Medical Communication Skills; DPT 222: 2hrs
This course introduces the students to the
skills that necessary for them to be able of using
the communication strategies to inform and
influence individual and community decisions
that enhance health. It also links the domains of
communication and health and is increasingly
recognized as a necessary element of efforts to
improve personal and public health.
Clinical Anatomy; ANAT 211: 3hrs (2+1)
The aim of the clinical anatomy course is to
enable students to study specifically clinicallyrelated aspects of gross anatomy before they
are due to embark on their clinical studies. The
course aims are to refresh students knowledge
of the gross anatomy studied in level 2, to
provide instruction on all areas of the body in
relation to the extent that clinical problems
arise there, and to demonstrate for each area
common uses to which anatomical knowledge
needs to be put; for examination of patients, for
diagnosis of structural problems, and for the
performance of simple clinical procedures
expected of clinical students.
Principle of Physiology -2-; PHSL 212: 3hrs

(2+1).
This subject is designed to study the way the
body interacts with the environment via the
muscular and nervous systems. Overall, the
material presented will explain the way
movements are controlled, sensations recorded
and interpreted, and the way body
communicates with its external environment.
There is also an emphasis on the clinical aspects
of neuromuscular conditions.
Medical Biochemistry; MDL233: 3hrs (2+1)
This
course
presents
introductory
biochemistry relevant to human health and
disease that forms part of the foundation of
modern medical practice. The molecular
correlation with disease is emphasized
throughout the course.
Development Across Life Span; ANAT 214: 2hrs
This course examines human growth and
development over the life span to understand
the nature and needs of individuals at all
developmental levels. Emphasis is on normal
growth and milestones in the physical,
emotional, cognitive, behavioral, and moral
development of individuals including learning
and personality development. Topics covered
include theories of development and transitions
across the life span for individuals and families,
theories related to learning and personality
development, factors influencing both normal
and abnormal development, strategies to
facilitate optimum development, and ethical
and legal considerations
Pathology; DPT 223: 3hrs
This course contains introduction to general
and basic knowledge of diseases, their etiology,
pathogenesis, general morphological and
changes
at
gross,
microscopic
and
submicroscopic levels as well as the prognosis of
the disease.
253
about a set of directives that guide the

professional and ethical behavior as well as
instilling the spirit of the initiative to improve
and change the attributes that must be provided
in the hearts of the medical community.
The neuro-anatomy course provides a broad

overview of the structure and function of the
central nervous system, with a principal focus on
issues relevant to clinical neurology. The main
objectives of the course are to (1) provide the
students with a basic working knowledge and
language of the central nervous system and (2)
to present the basic functional neuro-anatomy
required to understand and interpret the
neurological exam.
This course will introduce the students to a

number of common emergency situations and
their respective First Aid responses.
Musculoskeletal Anatomy; DPT 210: 3hrs (2+1)
Provides an introduction to the functional
anatomy of the human body with emphasis on
the
musculoskeletal
system,
peripheral
vasculature and major nerve trunks. In addition,
it provides a firm basis for later courses in
organ-based anatomy and neuro-anatomy.
Neuro-Sciences Lab; NERO 217: 1hr
Exercise Physiology; DPT 213: 2hrs
The laboratory course consists of two

components: 1) wet and computer labs. The wet
labs use fixed specimens of whole brains and
brain sections to provide a general overview of
the 3-D structure of the brain. This is then
expanded upon by the computer labs which
examine brain anatomy at a detailed view of the
regional anatomy of the brain and spinal cord.
The computer "Neuroanatomy Laboratory
Assistant" is a sophisticated, interactive
laboratory exercise and atlas which will guide
the students through images of brain regions,
highlighting the structures that they are
expected to see and understand. 2) The
neurologic exam includes a careful history and
physical examination to determine if a lesion
exists, its site and its cause. The careful appraisal
of the history of complaints and symptoms will
include time, mode, and progression of onset as
well as a family history. Patient complaints may
include weakness, pain, headache, seizures,
dizziness, numbness, visual abnormality, etc.
The exam involves an evaluation of mental
status, cranial and spinal nerves, sensory, motor
and reflex responses. Locating the lesion is
important to the physician as well as to the
student in Neuro-anatomy.
The aim of this course is to understand the

principles by which exercise and human
movement affect human physiology, the
physiological adaptations to exercise and
training, the influence that human physiology
has on exercise and movement capacity as well
as the regulation of exercise performance.
Emergency and first Aid; AID 218: 3 hrs (2+1).
Introduction to Physical Therapy Interventions;

DPT 312: 4 hrs (3+1).
This course aimed to provide the student a)
knowledge and skills about the therapeutic
intervention that utilized physical agents
including heat, cold, light, sound, water,
electricity and electromagnetic waves in the
treatment of acute and chronic diseases and
injuries. b) Introduction to wound care, burn
care and infection control. Emphasis on the
application and the safe appropriate use of
treatment modalities. Hydrotherapy; DPT 313:
3hrs (1+2).
The ultimate goal of this course is to help the
students to understand the principles of
hydrotherapy as a major part of the physical
agents that the students will use to achieve their
goals of treatment. This course will include both
theoretical and practical parts. Where the
students will be trained on the principles of
water exercises in the practical part, and in the
theoretical part the students will be introduced
to the physical properties, terminology,
254
Neuro-Anatomy; ANAT 213:3 hrs
Therapeutic Exercises; DPT 314: 4hr (3+1)

Provides students with the opportunity to apply
and analyze therapeutic exercise techniques in
order to formulate exercise programs for
diverse patient and client populations. Students
will be encouraged to discuss and build upon
their knowledge of basic therapeutic techniques
attained from previous coursework and clinical
training experiences. Advanced techniques will
be demonstrated and practiced in lab. Students
will evaluate, set goals, develop therapeutic
exercise programs and measure outcomes.
Issues regarding frequency, intensity and
duration of treatment will be discussed
throughout the course.
Nutritional Assessment; NUT 310: 3hrs
The aim of this course is to understand the
methods of human nutritional assessment,
including dietary, anthropometric, biochemical
and haematological techniques, and physical
examination. Principles of precision, accuracy,
and interpretation of results for individuals and
populations
Electrotherapy and PT interventions; DPT 315:
4hr
Presents principles of electrophysics and the
application to the human body in health and
disease and relates principles to the use of
electrophysiologic stimulators and testing
equipment in physical therapy clinical practice.
Discusses properties of excitable membranes
and effects of electrical stimulation on muscle
and nerve tissue. Promotes evidence-based
practice through analysis of appropriate
literature.
Covers
electrotherapeutic
management of impairments and pathology of
musculoskeletal system, neuromuscular system,
cardiopulmonary system and the integument.
Explores the role of electrotherapy as adjunctive
modality in a comprehensive physical therapy
treatment plan. Discusses fundamental skills for

application of biphasic pulsed current,
monophasic pulsed current, uninterrupted
direct
current,
interferential
electrical
stimulation,
Russian
stimulation,
microstimulation (MENS), transcutaneous nerve
stimulation (TENS), neurostimulation (NMES),
functional electrical stimulation (FES) and
iontophoresis. Introduce biofeedback and
electrodiagnostic testing: nerve conduction
velocity (NCV) and electromyography (EMG).
Medical and Surgical Orthopedic; DPT 316: 3hrs
The purpose of this course will be on
introducing the student to the different
orthopedic cases that will be seen in the
practical fields, with discussing the proper
assessment, special considerations, and the
appropriate physical therapy intervention for
these cases.
Orthopedics and Rheumatology for Physical
Therapists; DPT 317: 3hrs
This course aims to introduce the student to the
different of rheumatologic, inflammatory and
autoimmune
diseases-conditions involving
joints, soft tissues and connective tissues.
Including the art of diagnosis, clinical
management and treatment.
Clinical practice in Orthopedics; DPT 318:2hrs
This course is designed to provide opportunities
by which the students develop a level of
integration between theoretical knowledge and
skills in physical therapy evaluation and
treatment
of
actual
patients
with
musculoskeletal disorders in out-patient's
physical therapy departments as well as inpatient's orthopaedic departments. The student
will acquire sufficient skills and experiences in
clinical practice based on the theoretical and
academic knowledge in the field of physical
therapy for the common orthopaedic,
rheumatic, traumatic and surgical conditions.
255
indications contraindications, and application

techniques of hydrotherapy
Physical Therapy for Burn

conditions; DPT 319: 3hrs (2+1)
and
Surgical
The ultimate aim of this course is to provide the

students with the necessary knowledge and
skills needed to deal with burn and the pre-post
surgical conditions
256
About:
College of Medicine
Vision:
To be a leading national and internationally
accredited and recognized college in innovative
medical education. This is accomplished by
adopting a didactic strategy of problem-based,
self-directed, student-centered learning, and
community-oriented education. Promoting
faculty development, research and collaboration
with national and international partners.
Mission:
To prepare competent and compassionate
physicians who are able to meet and respond to
the
changing
health-care
needs
and
expectations of the community, through
innovative medical education, research, and
health services collaborating with local and
international partners.
Values:
Team spirit and leadership, Professionalism,
High Standards, Life-long learning, Innovation,
creativity and adaptability, Partnership and
commitment to community.
The curriculum is oriented towards training

students to undertake the responsibilities of a
physician of first contact who is capable of
looking after preventive, promotive, curative
and rehabilitative aspects of medicine.
Curriculum aims to ensure that our graduates
have a good working understanding of
biological, psychological and social mechanisms
and processes, as well as their impact on health
and disease, based on principles of learning
drawn from cognitive psychology.
Degrees:
Undergraduate
Postgraduate
Programs:
The Undergraduate Medical Curriculum
College of Medicine adopts a communityoriented, problem-based learning curriculum
where people, patients and problems are
studied from a number of standpoints. Problembased learning (PBL) is integrated with
appropriate training in clinical skills and
community-based
learning
experiences.
Emphasis is given to critical thinking and selfdirected learning.
The undergraduate curriculum is designed to
realize the mission and the institutional
objectives of the College as outlined above and
is based on the objectives (attributes and
257
College of Medicine
College of Medicine in Qassim University was

established in the academic year 2000-2001,and
became a regional leader in medical education.
It is the first medical college in Saudi Arabia
adopts the Problem-Based learning (PBl)
curriculum, as well as integration within basic
sciences and between basic and clinical
sciences.
Objectives (Attributes and Competencies) of

the Graduate
At the end of the program each student
is expected to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Utilize his skills in information

management effectively to retrieve
relevant information, analyze it
critically and apply it to the
solution of clinical/health problems
in a scientific reasoning manner;
Use an evidence-based approach
to apply the most effective and upto-date knowledge, skills, values
and attitudes in his medical
practice and in his pursuit of
postgraduate studies and life-long
learning;
Identify, diagnose, evaluate and
manage common or serious health
problems competently in individual
patients,
families
and
the
community with special reference
to Saudi Arabia including provision
of care for high-risk groups and
follow-up measures;
Educate and counsel patients and
others (especially in the promotion
of health and healthy life style,
prevention of disease and securing
consent)
using
effective
communication skills;
Observe medical ethics strictly in his
practice, in the efficient and
optimum use of available resources
and their equitable allocation
especially
for
minority,
disadvantaged and high-risk groups.
Help patients adjust to their
condition when managing clinical
problems with due consideration to
the family and social environment
and the personal needs, limitations

and abilities of each patient;
7. Refer cases beyond his capacity
whenever required and extend
support, empathy, respect and
friendliness to the patient, family
members and relatives without
traversing
the
bounds
of
professionalism and medical ethics;
8. Diagnose and manage common
emergencies
and
deal
with
unfamiliar situations;
9. Work effectively and harmoniously
within a health team that includes
physicians, other health and healthrelated personnel and community
members or agencies;
10. Participate in peer review activities
and
respond
positively
to
constructive criticism;
11. Act as a change agent and
contribute
to
community
development with special reference
to the development and success of
health care programs and health
institutions;
12. Conduct relevant health research
(especially health system research)
to contribute to the solution of
health problems and the evolution
of medicine.
Curriculum Structure and Timetable

Curriculum phases
The undergraduate program is 6 years (Twelve
semesters followed by 1 year of clinical rotatory
internship) and is preceded by Preparatory
Phase of 1 year (divided into 2 semesters). The
undergraduate program is divided into 3 phases
namely, Integrated Organ System Phase, Clinical
Phase and Clinical Internship
Preparatory Phase:
Students are eligible to enter the college of
258
College of Medicine
competencies) of the graduate of the College as

shown below.
medicine after completion the University

Preparatory Year.
Dr. Syed Nauman Bazmi Inam
Associate Prof.
Dr. Ahmad Noor Udin Al-Qasbi
Prof.
Phase 1: Integrated organ-system phase

Phase 2: Clinical phase
Dr. Al- Mutiz Al-Mansi
Assistant Prof.
Phase 3: Clerkship phase

Dr. Al-Tahami Abdul Majeed
Faculty Members:
Prof.
Dr. Fauzi Khalil Mohammad Sharaf
Dr. Hasham Saad Mohammad Saad
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Khalild Mohammad Hasaneen
Prof.
Dr. Mohammda Nadir Tahir Ullam
Prof.
Dr. Asam ul Syed Musa Barima
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Mohammad Al-Khatim Mohammad AlSamani

Prof.
Dr. Salah Rashdi Ahmad
Dr. Jamal Abdul Azeem Ahmad Hamra
Prof.
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Majdi Al-Babli
Dr. Jalees Farhan
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Mohsin Mohammad Al-Khiat Assistant Prof.
Dr. Raheel Shafee
Associate Prof.
Dr. Ghulam Yasin Malik
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Jalal Ali Bilal
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Yasir Salim Nasrullah Saleh
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Arshad Mahmood Malik
Associate Prof.
Dr. Azadin Anwar Al-Syed Saleh Associate Prof.
Dr. Abdul Mannan Khan Rao
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Mohammad Al-Syed Handavi
Dr. Al-Syed Aldeeb Mahni Hamooda
Dr. Naji Mohammad Biomi
Prof.
Prof.
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Abdul Majeed Mohammad Imam

Associate Prof.
Dr. Abdul Raheem Mohammad Abdul Hafeez
Makki
Associate Prof.
Dr. Irshad Ahmad Khorshi
Associate Prof.
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Ahmad Abdul Salam Sateen
Prof.
Dr. Asif Syed
Prof.
Dr. Ashraf Saad Abu Halawa
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Atiya Mohammad Jabar
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Aiman Al Jidaa
Associate Prof.
Dr. Waseem Iqbal
Prof.
Dr. Sajjad Ahmad Salati
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Abdul Munam Hafiz Salim
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Mohammad Shahzad Maaraj Assistant Prof.

Dr. Mustafa Mahmood Mahmood Khazer
Assistant Prof.
259
College of Medicine
Associate Prof.
Faculty Female:
Dr. Wullaa Usman Al-Shabravee Assistant Prof.
Dr. Ulla Mahmood Farghali Imran
Afreena Raza
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Shamshad Beeqom Lonee
Associate Prof.
Dr. Faiza Shaukat
Dr. Sahar Rifaat Ibraheem Al-Ghindoor
Assistant Prof.
Lecturer
Dr. Eman Mohammad Abdul Ghani
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Fatin Abbas
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Rija Hamad Mohammad Salamah
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Marwah Salah
Lecturer
Dr. Suzan Faisal
Assistant Prof.
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Muneeb Jahan
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Amani Saeed Usman
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Azah Al-Sharbeeni
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Suzan Ameen Saleh
Associate Prof.
Dr. Manaal Baseeoni
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Ikhlaas Usman
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Dalia Rifaat Al-Baeeoni
Associate Prof.
Dr. Khadija Fathee Dandash
Prof.
Dr. Amani Abdul Wahab Al-Malah

Assistant Prof.
Dr. Zaherah Saadia Intikhab Mahmood
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Enaas Ahmad Al-Bandari
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Maha Mohammad Al-Syed Al-Kholi

Associate Prof.
Dr. Ghadah Mahmood Abdul Hameed Ahmad
Khalil
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Ufaf Shaaban Abdul Rahman Imran Prof.
Study Plan:
Curriculum Timetable
Phase I Integration of Basic Sciences
Year 1:
Year
and
meS
eetee
elteee
and
Cre
dit
Symbol
ho
urs
Distr
ibuti
on of
hour
s
Concepts and CMD 211

process
of
learning
2+1
Man,
his
environment
and
metabolism
4+3
elteee trtoe
Dr. Manal Kamal Abdul Samee

Assistant Prof.
Dr. Uzma Zafar
Dr. Anjom Kul Maimoon
Assistant Prof.
Prof.
Dr. Hannan Sabree
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Ulla Mujahid Yousaf
Associate Prof.
Year
1,
Sem
C
M
D
213
260
College of Medicine
Dr. Maha Imam Ahmad
Lecturer
Growth
and CMD 212
development
3&
4
Arabic
Language I
AR
AB
10
1
2+3
ters:
5&6
Economic
system in
Islam*
ICIII
103
2+0
CM
D
312
3+4
2+0
of CMD 221
3+3
Cardiovas
cular
System
3+4
4+5
Respirator
y system
CMD 321
Musculoskelet CMD 222

al system and
integumentary
0+2
Health
and HIC-1 211
illness in the
community -I*
0+2
Health
HIC-2 311
and illness
in
the
communit
y -2*
Clinical
1*
0+2
Clinical
skills-2*
0+2
10
1
2+0
2+0
Islam
and IC-II 102
community
organization*
2+0
Total Hours
40
Principles
disease
skills- CMD 214
Islamic Study I
ICI
CMD 313
Principles
ICof political IV
system in
Islam*
104
Total
Hours
39
Year 3:
Year 2:
Year
and
meSeet
ee
elteee
trtoe
elteee
and
Cre
dit
Symbol
ho
urs
Distr
ibuti
on of
hour
s
4+5
Reproduct CMD 322

ion
and
Endocrine
Year
2,
Semes
Hemopoie CMD 311

tic
and
Immune
systems
5+3
Year
and
meS
eetee
elteee
and
Cre
dit
Symbol
ho
urs
Distr
ibuti
on of
hour
s
CMD 332
4+4
Urinary system CMD 341
3+2
Arabic
Language III
10
3
2+0
CMD 331
10
5+5
elteee trtoe
Gastrointestin
al system
Year
3,
Sem
este
Nervous
system
AR
AB
261
College of Medicine
este
rs:
7&
8
Integrated
Multi-systems
and
Therapeutics
CMD 342
10
5+5
Health
and HIC-3 331
illness in the
community 3*
Clinical
3*
skills- CMD 333
0+2
Clinical
4*
skills- MED 341
0+2
Total Hours
1+1
Dermatology
DER 411
M
1+1
Year
and
meS
eetee
elteee
and
Cre
dit
Symbol
ho
urs
Distr
ibuti
on of
hour
s
PED 431
11
2+9
Family
and FCM 431
Community
Medicine
2+4
Obstetrics and OBG 441

Gynecology
N
2+6
Psychiatry
PSYC 441
2+2
Emergency
Medicine
EMR 441
1+3
Forensic
Medicine*
CMD 431
1+1
Medical
Ethics*
CMD 441
2+1
elteee trtoe
Pediatrics
41
Year 4:
Year
5,
Sem
este
rs:
elteee
and
Cre
dit
Symbol
ho
urs
Distr
ibuti
on of
hour
s
MED 411
1
4+0
MED 412
2
11
SUR 421
G
11
ORT 421
H
Ear, Nose and ENT 421

Throat
1+2
Premed
Ophthalmolog
y
1+2
Integration
elteee trtoe
Medicine -1
Medicine -2
Surgery
Orthopedics
OPH 421
T
41
Year 5:
Clinical Phase
9&
10
Total hours
Phase II
Year
4,
Sem
este
rs:
IMG 421
0+2
* Longitudinal courses
Year
and
meS
eetee
Medical
Radiology
11
& 12
0+11
Total hours
38
2+9
* Longitudinal courses
1+4
Summary of distribution of credit hours by

curriculum phases and academic years:
Phase
Year
Credit hours
Preparatory
Year
00
First
40
262
College of Medicine
rs:
Second
39
Third
41
Clerkship
(Clinical
training)
Fourth
41
Fifth
38
Total credit hours for

graduation
199
Phase I. Basic Medical Sciences

Phase 1: Organ System Phase: medical years 1,
2 and 3 (semesters 3 to 8)
Organization
The Organ system phase, after an introduction
to the principles of medical education,
addresses the concepts and principles in the
field of medicine and their application in an
integrated manner. The main aim of the phase is
for students to explain the basic mechanisms of
common health problems in terms of structure,
function, pathogenesis and the psychosocial,
ethical and cultural dimensions. They are also
expected to interpret data and diagnose some
of these problems. Although management is
partly addressed with details of drug treatment,
the major part of it is deferred to the clerkship
period.
The block system is a form of concentrated
study where students and faculty focus on the
block that is on at the time. The blocks follow in
sequence one after the other. In each block a
variety of teaching/learning methods are used
with emphasis on problem-based learning (PBL).
Students are trained, not only on campus
(including basic science labs and skillslab), but
also in health facility/community-based settings.
For the latter there is, in addition, an optional
course of four weeks where students are
assigned each to one of these facilities ( usually
a small hospital or health centre) to perform
predefined tasks/skills in a logbook and submit a

short report.
There are two courses (Health and Illness in the
Community and Professional Skills) which run
longitudinally over the three years (2 credit
hours each for 6 semesters) in addition to a
university required course (Islamic Studies) (2
credit hours for the first four semesters of the
phase).
In Professional Skills students are trained initially
in the skillslab to acquire the basic clinical skills
at an early stage of the program before
application and training on real patients.
The Health and Illness in the Community is a
community-based education (CBE) program
conducted in health centers in close
collaboration with Al-Qassim Health System
(Continuing Education Centre of the PHC
Directorate).
The block/course booklet
Each of these blocks has a booklet
containing the required details for students
and faculty along the following format:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Course title, symbol and number.

Duration (credit hours)
Coordinator, co-coordinator and
student coordinator
Responsible
multidisciplinary
group (MDG)
Intended students
Prerequisites
Rationale/Justification
Objectives
especially
specific
instructional objectives (SIOs)
Education strategies and methods(
and detailed timetable)
Evaluation
and
assessment
methods
Required resources
References and other learning
materials
The block booklet after final
preparation as such by the MDG is
handed to each student in the first
263
College of Medicine
of
Basic
Sciences
(Body
Systems)
The block/course MDG selects the problems

for PBL according to defined selection
criteria:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Common or
serious (high
mortality);
Preventable/treatable;
Holistic/integrated;
Compatible (appropriate for level);
Clinically current and motivating.
Each problem is assigned to a problem

coordinator (a coordinator may be responsible
for more than one problem). The problem
coordinator meets with the resource people to
decide on the specific objectives of the problem.
The problem is then written according to a
certain format and peers reviewed and/or
edited by an education expert.
In each semester the students are divided into
small groups of 8-12 students. A tutor is
assigned to each group to facilitate the learning
process. Each week the students go through one
problem, which constitutes the focus of learning
for the week.
Evaluation and Assessment in Phase 1 (the
organ systems phase)
The assessment follows the course unit system
and is based on the various blocks in the
semester. This method is applied in all Phase I
courses. The final marks for the block are
composed of a continuous assessment portion
of 40% and a final assessment of 60%.
Both formative and summative evaluation are in
practice. For the former certain forms and
questionnaires are completed by concerned

faculty and students respectively on the
problems, seminars and lectures. Students are
also asked to rate faculty and evaluate the
programs through completing questionnaires
and through open discussion sessions. There are
in addition some mid-course/block tests.
For summative evaluation, a variety of methods
are used for written exams: modified essay
questions, multiple choice questions (one-bestanswer type A) and structured- short- answer
questions.
Oral exam is also applied for
Multisystem and Therapeutic Block. This is done
by means of Structural Oral Exam (SOE).
Description of Course:
CMD 211: Medical Education Block
Duration and Credits: 3 Weeks - 3 Credit Hours

(2+1)
Rational /Justification:
There is a growing tendency to renovate the
methods of learning and teaching to conform to
high quality standards. With an explosive
overflow of knowledge, the need for capable
and highly effective ways of acquiring, updating
and retrieving knowledge becomes imperative.
Herein emerges the value of problem based
learning as a cognitive method that represents
the utmost attainable standard in learning.
Particularly in medical institutions, self directed
learning and problem solving abilities lend
themselves to development of lifelong learning,
that is the pressing demand of today and future
doctors.
To promote the above skills at an early stage,
early exposure to the acquisition and practice of
inquiry, group interaction and efficient exchange
of information should be made and practiced in
proper educational environment.
264
College of Medicine
session of the block/ module and it

is the responsibility of the student
to
realize
the
objectives
irrespective of the education
activities offered in the block as
these objectives represent the
minimum required competencies
for the block.
ProblemBased Learning (PBL)
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES:

By the end of this course students are
expected to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CMD 213:
Metabolism
Be aware of their responsibility in

learning and become motivated
and willing to be self-learners.
Understand the problem-solving
environment of the College (basic
definitions and components of the
adopted
educational
policy,
learning through small groups,
integrating basic and clinical
sciences,
making
optimum
utilization
of
the
available
instructional
resources
and
critically
appraising
learning
materials and methods).
Acquire the skills of mutual
interactive communication in the
class and the skills of seeking
relevant information from different
reference resources and learning
through small groups.
Develop positive attitudes towards
the learning process in general
(and independent, self-directed
learning in particular) and towards
peers/colleagues and the society.
Build up effective study habits to
accommodate
information
overflow and utilization of
affordable resources.
Introduce students to medical
terminology and basic biology
issues.
Man,
his
Environment
and
Duration and Credits: 7 weeks - 7 Credit Hours

(3+4)
Throughout his history, man could live and build

civilization in widely different environments;
ranging from North Pole, rain forests, deserts,
islands, to Tibet. This reflects the great
adaptability
potentials of
humans to
environments. With modern life, man has also
added new environments such as mining, diving
and aviation; he could even live in spaceships for
months.
Man is unique in the aspect that if his
adaptability potentials are not enough to adapt
to the environment, he makes the environment
according to him; humans have changed their
environment through hunting, farming, mining,
and bringing invasive species with them as they
traveled to new lands. Industrialization and
urbanization probably have several effects on
human life; better sanitation and availability of
more food surely have their beneficial effects,
on the other hand, pollution, chemical and
industrial wastes could be very harmful.
The environment also affects humans in
numerous ways. The availability of nutrients
from the local environment affects the
physiological characteristics of humans.
Improved nutrition has contributed to increased
height in developed countries. Similarly, the
external environment affects the milieu
intereur, or the internal environment, of the
human body continuously. All the body systems
are working in tandem to achieve homeostasis,
which enables the individual to lead a disease
free life.
Homeostasis is essentially dependant on
integrity of the barriers between the body and
the environment, the nervous system and the
endocrine functions. Endocrine glands play their
role through control of various systemic effects
and metabolic pathways in the target organs,
thus metabolism is intimately related to
homeostasis. The anabolic and catabolic
pathways of protein, carbohydrates, and lipids
depend upon hormones, vitamins, minerals,
enzymes and coenzymes. These metabolic
265
College of Medicine

with the basic knowledge and behavioral skills
enabling them to proceed smoothly and pursue
their learning effectively in their new system of
education in the College of Medicine, at Qassim
University.
Humans are not the only habitants on earth;

plants, animals and insects share us on our
planet. However, microorganisms may be more
close to us and have their effect on us than
other types of life on the earth. They were
responsible for the major causes of death
throughout history; smallpox, flu, cholera,
tuberculosis, malaria, plagues, measles, etc.
Advances in health services, sanitation, and
nutrition have made better human life
worldwide and virtually eliminated infectious
diseases as serious threats in industrialized
nations. Yet, influenza, HIV-AIDS, diarrheal
diseases, tuberculosis, measles, and malaria
remain primary killers in Africa and other
developing regions. Many of these diseases are
related to poor environmental practices,
including land and water use. Water-borne
diseases are estimated to cause five million
deaths a year, particularly affecting children and
the elderly. Although their fame as causing
troubles, some live with man in symbiosis. Flora
may be more important and advantageous to
human beings then they perceive.
Therefore, students are expected to be armed
with
reasonable
knowledge
about
environmental hazards, the potentialities of
human adaptability on the cellular, tissue and
organ levels to his environment, and the
outstanding role of metabolism in homeostasis.

By the end of this block, the students are
expected to be able to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Understand
the
internal
environment, homeostasis, the
fluid electrolyte balance, the acidbase balance, and energy balance
under different conditions.
Recognize ecological perspectives
in
human-environment
relationship health consequences
of exposure to variety of potential
hazards (physical, chemical and
biological) in the environment.
Recognize the composition and
functions of body fluid, buffers and
buffering mechanisms.
Recognize the major causes of
disturbances of fluid-electrolyte
balance as and basic principles of
correction of these disturbances.
Understand
the
general
organization of the nervous system
and its role in homeostasis.
Recognize
the
structure,
composition and functions of the
biological membranes.
List structures acting as protective
barriers between the human body
and its environment, and briefly
mention how various barriers
perform
their
function
of
protection.
a.
Understand the effect of hot

and cold environment, and the
bodys ability to adapt to it.
b. Be familiar with the
acclimatization to high
altitude, deep-sea diving
and other hyperbaric
conditions.
c. Understand the biological
spectrum of disease and
pollution of the external
environment.
d. Recognize the agent-hostenvironment triad on
disease occurrence, the
transmission of disease
and the incubation and
latent period.
e. Understand the effects of
external environment on
endemic, epidemic and
pandemic diseases, in
266
College of Medicine
pathways are interrelated in various situations,

they are essential for growth, wear and tear
processes, providing energy needed for various
biological functions. Thus, metabolism is one of
our tools for stabilization of the milieu intereur.
Inborn errors of metabolism, various metabolic
disorders and vitamin deficiencies constitute an
important part of clinical practice.
CMD 212: Growth and Development
Duration and Credits: 5 Weeks - 5 Credit Hours

(2+3)
The term growth and development refers to the
process by which fertilized ovum attains its adult
size. Growth refers to the complete life cycle of
human beings from fertilization to old age. The
social, cultural, health needs and other services
vary in all the various stages of human life cycle.
Growth refers to the physical changes that occur
in the human body, development is the
functional potential achieved by the body.
There is interplay of several factors that
determine how much the biological potential an
individual is able to attain. For example some of
these factors before birth may be health of the
mothers, quality and appropriateness of health
care provided to mothers during their early
lifecycle and antenatal and postnatal periods.
Social and environmental factors, nutritional
factors, both maternal and of the child, are
equally important along with psychological
factors, child care practices, emotional factors,
endocrinal and genetic factors. All these are
important determinants of health in the human
life cycle and need to be understood and
appreciated.
The period of maximum growth in life is during
the initial early phases of life and later when
growth spurts occur before attaining full adult
size. Weight and length/height for age is a good
anthropometric measurement for growth.
Regular growth monitoring can provide
opportunities for timely and effective
intervention to combat any insult to the process
of growth. Furthermore, proper nutrition like
breastfeeding and proper weaning is extremely
crucial to proper growth.
The Development aspect is also closely woven

with the physical aspects of growth.
Environmental, cultural and social stimulation
plays an important role in acquiring the
milestones, which are indicators of functional
maturation.
In the early phase of life,
267
College of Medicine
addition
to
an
investigation
of
an
epidemic and distribution
and frequency of diseases.
f. Be aware with the food
and water-borne diseases,
their impact on the
individual, his family and
the
community,
and
outline
the
basic
principles of treatment of
diarrheal disorders
g. Recognize
the
basic
principles
of
foreign
substance
and
drug
metabolism.
h. Understand the basic
principles
of
carbohydrate, lipid, and
protein metabolism and
the associated role of
enzymes,
co-enzymes,
and co-factors.
i. Understand the process of
metabolic
inter
relationship.
j. Understand he basic
principles of restriction /
replacement
and
supportive therapy for
cases of inborn errors of
metabolism.
k. Integrate and interpret
the theoretical knowledge
from pharmacology and
other
disciplines
(physiology, biochemistry
and pathology) with the
clinical
knowledge
resulting in acquiring the
ability of management of,
and skills of prescribing
medications for diseases
relevant to environmental
hazards.
Lastly, a student of medical science needs to be

aware that as a consequence of better health
care, improvement in living standards, the
population
of
elderly
is
increasing
internationally.
In Saudi Arabia, the life
expectancy has increased to over 71.The Saudi
medical graduates of tomorrow will be faced
with dealing with the care of elderly in far
greater numbers and, therefore, need to be
oriented to the care of elderly.
By the end of this block students are expected
to:
1. Understand the male and female
organs of reproduction (gross
and histological), Endometrium
and its cyclical shedding during
menstruation, the ovulatory
cycle,
spermatogenesis the
formation of semen and its
conducting system and the
hormonal regulation of these
different phenomena.
2. Understand the areas of
fertilization and implantation,
early
embryological
development i.e. organogenesis,
formation and structure of
placenta and umbilical cord and
the gestational sac.
3. Be familiar with the intrauterine
development of the fetus. They
will also learn about the
physiological changes occurring
in normal pregnancy, the
different stages of pregnancy
and maternal changes during
pregnancy, the special calorie
requirement and the dietary
supplements
for
pregnant
mothers; and the biochemical
basis of nutrition.
4. Be
familiar
with
the
development of breast as a
gland, the secretion transport,
and expression of breast milk
along with the hormonal control
of these phenomena and the
composition of breast milk, its
superiority over the formula
milk, and its benefits to the
neonate.
5. Acquire knowledge about the
developmental stages in early
childhood,
the
different
milestones and the ages at which
they are normally reached, the
dentition and ossification of
bones, the dietary needs of
growing children and the
supplements required at this
age.
6. Be
familiar
with
the
immunization - its protective
role in preventing the incidence
of vaccine preventable childhood
diseases and the impact of drugs
on infants and mothers during
pregnancy and lactation.
7. Understand the physical and
psychological changes during
adolescence and the hormonal
basis of the pubertal changes
with emphasis on the physical
changes and menarche.
8. Recognize the degenerative
process associated with ageing
and hence its specific health
needs.
CMD 221: Principles of Disease
(3+3)
Pathology is considered the basis of disease.

This block on Principles of Disease is, therefore,
a vital one since its main objective is to provide
students with sufficient knowledge of basic
concepts of pathology and microbiology with
some inputs from molecular biology and
268
College of Medicine
neurological and behavioral maturation is

difficult to differentiate while in later life it is
possible to measure intellectual functions
through communication skills and ability to
handle abstract and symbolic material.

1.
2.
Understand and explain the basic

concepts of general pathology,
microbiology,
biochemistry,
general
pharmacology,
and
community health issues related in
particular to infectious diseases
and cancer.
Correlate pathologic processes
with signs and symptoms of
disease,
understand
the
mechanism
of
disease
(pathogenesis) and, independently,
think of the methods of prevention
of disease.
CMD 222: Musculoskeletal and Integumentary

System
Duration and Credits: 9 weeks (7 weeks
musculoskeletal and 2 weeks Integumentary) - 9
Credit Hours (4+5)
Rational/Justification:
The study of the musculoskeletal system is
important for medical students at this stage
because it provides a spectrum of different
structures (bones, muscles and joints) which
constitute considerable proportion of the body
function. The main function of the
musculoskeletal system is the mechanical
support for movement. In addition to this main
function it is as vital to life as any organ system
because it plays an essential role in mineral
homeostasis, temperature homeostasis and

houses hematopoietic elements.
Problems of the musculoskeletal system
constitute an important part of medical practice.
Road traffic accidents are a common cause of
traumatic lesions which involve bones , joints ,
muscles and nerves. It leads to serious
complications. Osteomyelitis is a serious disease
which needs rapid diagnosis and treatment to
avoid its complications. Osteoarthritis is the
most common type of joint disease in which a
lot of money is spent for its treatment and lost
days of work. So, it is very important to study
the normal and pathological conditions related
to this system.
For more than a century, skin was considered
merely a protective covering for more delicate
and functionally complex internal viscera. The
skin was important primarily as a passive barrier
to fluid loss and mechanical injury. With the
rather sudden advances in the field of medicine,
during the past three decades, we have come to
realize that it is a much more complex organ in
which precisely regulated cellular and molecular
interactions govern many crucial responses to
our environment. We now know that the skin is
composed of' a number of interdependent cell
types and structures that work toward a
common protective goal. Neural structures and
the protective effects of pain sensations warn of
potentially damaging physical factors in the
environment and have recently been found to
assist in regulation of immunocompetent cells.
Sweat glands help in temperature regulation
and hair follicles contain epithelial stem cells
essential for regeneration of superficial skin
layers that have been disrupted by a variety of
injurious external and internal agents.
We are conscious of the fact that the skin is
frequently damaged because it is right in the
'firing line' and the second is that each of the
various cell types that it contains can 'go wrong'
and develop its own degenerative and
269
College of Medicine
pharmacology. The need for this block is to

precede the integrated blocks on systems is
therefore quite obvious. Basic concepts of
processes like infections, inflammations and
neoplasia which cause most of the morbidity
and mortality in the world are introduced in the
block to prepare the ground for the more indepth study of the various organ systems of the
body.
3.
Unfortunately, skin disease is often considered

the domain of the dermatologist who is
generally trained in a manner similar to and with
a philosophy similar to that of specialists in
internal medicine. It is often forgotten that
about 10-20% of the patients that a general
practitioner sees in his clinic are skin conditions.
In most countries diseases contracted from
sexual contact (venereal diseases) are also
considered to be within the domain of
dermatology. Many systemic diseases such as
diabetes mellitus, amyloidosis, and lupus
erythematosus may also affect the skin and for
that reason the skin is considered as the window
through which we can glimpse into the functions
of many organs and where we observe changes
due to diseases of many of the viscera.
5.
In addition, a significant amount of surgery

relates to skin conditions. Skin disorders are not
often acute conditions but cause considerable
discomfort and much disability. The disability
caused is physical, emotional and socioeconomic
and patients are much helped by an
appreciation of this. There is also the worry
created by conditions that are not really
diseases or if they are diseases, are not very
serious as far as physical health is concerned.
13.

1. Understand the basic normal structure
and function of the musculoskeletal
(MSK) system.
2. Be familiar with the pathological
changes occurring in bones, joints,
muscles and nerves in disease
condition.
4.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Understand the role of imaging

techniques and laboratory
investigations in diagnosis of diseases
of the MSK system.
Be aquianted with the treatment of
common disease conditions affecting
the MSK system and the principles of
the therapeutics of skin diseases
Understand the impact of MSK
disorders on a patient's functional and
employability and consequently on
health care utilization and delivery.
Understand the structure and functions
of the skin and its appendages.
Recognize biochemical basis of alpha
keratins, hair and nail proteins.
Explain synthesis of melanin and define
the melanocytes and their disorders.
Understand mechanisms and pathways
involved in pain of superficial origin and
in itching (Pruritis)
Be familiar with the basic pathologic
changes in the skin.
Understand immunological
mechanisms in relation to skin.
Know nature and effects of
microbiologic organisms affecting the
skin.
Understand the biochemical basis of
muscle contraction and the biochemical
structure of extracellular matrix and
the metabolism of calcium, phosphate,
and purine bases and explain their role
in musculoskeletal system.
Health and Illness in the Community

(longitudinal)
Health and illness in the community are three
courses: HIC-1(211), HIC-2 (311) and HIC3(331) (all are longitudinal throughout Phase
II)
Introduction:
The purpose of these courses is to expose the

students to the problems of the community in
order to understand the principles of care of
270
College of Medicine
neoplastic disorders. This last point is

compounded by the ready visibility of skin so
that minor deviations from normal give rise to a
particular set of signs. The net effect is that
there seems to be a large number of skin
diseases.
The teaching and learning strategies adopted for

achieving the objectives are through integrated,
problem based, community-based, field training
including general and health systems research.
Most of the objectives are achieved through
integration with the organ-system blocks, while
some of the objectives are realized through
hands-on training in the PHC centers.
Longitudinal modules are designed to support
the field based and research training.
HIC-1 211: Health and Illness in the Community
Duration: longitudinal throughout year one- 2
Credit Hours (0+2)
The course is essential for the students for
understanding of health and its determinants
together with the factors responsible for disease
to imbibe the philosophy of holistic care and
comprehensive care through primary health
care approach. Therefore, an orientation to the
health system of Saudi Arabia is important and
training in actual health system especially the
PHC centers is necessary to translate the
theoretical training in the medical college into
practice in the PHC system.
Training in the PHC centers that are based in the
actual community setting provide students an
opportunity to have an insight to the advantages
of having a primary level care facility as well as
appreciate the unexploited potentials of the
PHC system.
In addition, it is important for the students to

study the theoretical background of care of the
under-five in order to maximize learning in the
PHC center. The course is based on theoretical
sessions in the College and practical training in
the PHC centers. Each child health activity in the
PHC center is structured.
This course is offered to facilitate students to
acquire the knowledge and skills for providing
basic promotive, preventive and selected
curative care to children less than five years of
age.
1.
Recognize the larger spectrum of

interventions
through
their
understanding
of
the
interrelationship
of
factors
influencing health and causing
disease.
2. Understand the health system of
Saudi
Arabia
with
especial
emphasis on primary health care
(PHC).
3. Be familiar with the basic health
care for children under-five at the
PHC.
Clinical Skills (longitudinal)
Clinical Skills are three longitudinal courses CMD
214; CMD 313; and CMD 333 throughout phase
II
Clinical Skills are four courses throughout phase
II. Professional skills program is one of the most
important strands in the College curriculum.
Medicine is not a theoretical science, it is a
practical one. For this reason, to be a good
doctor you must not only have a certain amount
of knowledge, but you should also be capable of
practicing what you know. This cannot be
achieved without acquiring the required skills
271
College of Medicine
defined populations, based on cost-effective

and scientifically sound methods. The aim is
also to produce doctors who can understand
health in socio-psychological and economic
milieu and devise a holistic approach towards
care of the individuals, families and
communities. The approach is to impart handson training for conducting operational and other
research as well as critically appraising scientific
literature for keeping updated.
The main aim is to improve the clinical skills of

medical students in general and preclinical
students in particular before their contact with
the patients in hospitals and health units in the
clinical
phase.
The
program
extends
longitudinally throughout the curriculum from
year 2 to year 4 and is coordinated with the
block/system and the learning problems. In this
way the basic clinical skills (social, lab. and
clinical) are acquired early in the program to
give enough time for their perfection before
graduation. Clinical skill courses are conducted
in Clinical Skill Unit in the college.
By the end of this block, the students
are expected to be able to:
1.
2.
Training the students on most of

the important clinical skills, very
early in their study, in a
standardized way.
Training on clinical skills using
either
simulated
patients
(students) or models by means of
checklists.
Steps of training on a clinical skill:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
(peer examination), or on the

model according to the steps
outlined in the check list.
The way in which the trainer
performs the steps of the skill is
the standard way on which both
training and assessment will be
conducted. For this reason,
standard check lists are available
for all students and tutors at the
beginning of the class (there is no
objection for students to know
other methods of examination but
the standard method agreed here
is the only one that would be
followed during assessment).
Students perform the skill under
supervision of the trainer.
The trainer informs students about
their mistakes (feed-back).
Each skill lasts from 1-2 weeks,
followed by assessment.
CMD 214: Clinical Skills I

Duration: longitudinal throughout year one- 2
Credit Hours (0+2)
Evaluation Methods:
Continuous (On-going) Assessment
40%
Final End of Block Evaluation
60%
IC-103: Islamic Study III (The political system in
Islam)
IC-104: Islamic Study IV
The
students
acquire
the
theoretical background related to
the skill. This is supplemented by a
lecture delivered by a consultant,
followed by demonstration of
steps of the skill in a patient
(volunteer) or a model.
The trainer in his class (a group of
7-10 students) demonstrates the
steps of skill on one of the students
272
College of Medicine
for it. Unfortunately, deterioration of the clinical

skills level of medical graduates has recently
been noted which could be due to difficulty in
training on the patients due to humane,
religious, or social reasons or allotment of less
time for training. For the previous reasons,
developing clinical skills units in medical schools
has become mandatory in the study of
medicine.
CMD 322: Endocrine and Reproductive System

(4+5)

1.
Endocrine glands constitute one of the

important communication systems sending
chemical messages to various organs of the
body. These messages not only control various
systemic effects but also metabolic pathways in
the target organs .Thus endocrine glands are
ultimately and intimately related to metabolism
and homeostasis.
2.
3.
Thyroid, gonads and zona fasciculata of adrenal

cortex are controlled by pituitary and
hypothalamus by feedback mechanisms.
Pancreas, Parathyroid and zona glomerulosa of
adrenal cortex are controlled respectively by
+
+
+
glucose, Ca , Na and K levels in the blood.
Adrenal medulla and pineal gland are mainly
controlled by neural mechanisms.
4.
Any organic or functional abnormality in these

organs or in their control mechanisms produces
various metabolic and systemic derangements
constituting various syndromes and disease
states.
7.
Diabetes is the leading endocrine disorder which

causes not only significant mortality but also
morbidity. Thyroid disorders are also common
including goiters related to iodine metabolism.
Fast air travels and shift systems in industries
may produce disturbances in circadian rhythms
related to pineal gland.
Reproduction is mainly controlled by
endocrines. Hypothalomo-hypophysial-gonadal
axis is one of the important feedback
mechanisms in endocrinology. Role of
endocrines in fertilization, implantation,
gestation, parturition and lactation is to be fully
appreciated by the students
5.
6.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Understand the anatomy, histology

and development of individual
endocrine glands.
Understand
the
structures,
biosynthesis,
regulation
of
secretion, mechanism of action,
and functions (metabolic and
systemic) of individual hormones.
Be familiar with the investigations
to assess the endocrine glands
functions
Undrstand
the
physiological,
anatomical, developmental or
genetic basis of various signs and
symptoms in endocrine disorders.
Understand the pathophysiological
changes that affect the endocrine
glands.
Understand and describe various
control mechanisms and their
clinical significance.
Understand
the
anatomy,
development,
histology,
and
functions of male genital system
Understand
the
anatomy,
development,
histology,
and
functions of female genital system.
Recognize the endocrine function
of placenta.
Recognize the biochemical nature
of sex hormones, their structures,
synthesis, transport, mechanism of
action, metabolism and excretion
changes that affect the male and
female
reproductive
system,
including pregnancy, parturition
and lactation
changes that affect breast and
placenta
Be familiar with the lab
investigations to assess the
reproductive problems in both sex.
Understand
the
general
management
of
common
reproductive disorders including
273
College of Medicine
16.
17.
18.
19.
CMD 311: Hemopoietic and Immune Systems

Duration and Credits: 8 weeks - 8 Credit
Hours (5+3)
Blood, as it flows into every part of the body, is
an organ of multiple roles craftsman of all jobs.
This block helps provide students with the
necessary understanding of the functions and
alterations of function of the blood. Basic
knowledge of development of blood elements
and the factors that control that development
are prerequisites to this understanding.
Students are also required to be acquainted
with the common blood diseases, e.g. iron
deficiency anaemia, sickle cell anaemia,
thalasaemia, etc and their community impact
and management. These diseases are fairly
common in Saudi Arabia and often accompany
many other diseases.
Smallpox was once considered to be a deadly
disease. However, successful immunization
against this virus had led WHO to conclude that
perhaps, smallpox may have been eliminated
from the planet of earth. Currently, vaccination
programs against polio virus are practiced in
many countries of the world for protection

against the crippling disease it causes. Similarly,
immunization against hepatitis-B virus has been
introduced in the recent past. Each year millions
of Hujjaj come from different parts of the world
to Makkah Moazmah; and vaccination for
protection against many communicable diseases
such as meningitis, yellow fever, cholera etc is
required before entry into the Kingdom.
In this era the world population faces new
emerging ailments; such as allergies, severe
acute respiratory syndrome (SARS), avian flu,
AIDS and cancers, all of which cut across the
theme of immune system. Hence the knowledge
of how the bodys immune system reacts,
protects or hyper-reacts to various pathogens
carries great significance.
The system is complex and displays several
remarkable characteristics. At the heart of it lies
its ability to distinguish between self and
nonself. The bodys immune defenses do not
normally attack tissues that carry a self
identity. Rather, immune cells and other body
cells coexist peacefully in a state known as selftolerance. Any substance capable of triggering
an immune response is called antigen. An
antigen can be a virus, a bacterium, a fungus, or
a parasite, or even a portion or product of one
of these organisms. Tissues or cells from
another individual, except an identical twin who
cells carry identical self-markers, also act as
antigens. Because the immune system
recognizes transplanted tissues as nonself, it
rejects them. The body even rejects nourishing
proteins unless they are first broken down by
the digestive system into their primary, nonantigenic building blocks. The success of this
system in defending the body relies on an
incredibly elaborate and dynamic regulatorycommunications network. Millions and millions
of cells, organized into sets and subsets, pass
information back and forth to recognize the
entry of an invader and work in harmony to
eliminate the foreign invader. The result is a
274
College of Medicine
15.
the pharmacological uses of

hormones and drugs used in
common reproductive disorders
disorders, their administration,
dose, degradation, complication,
interactions and toxicity.
Understand different ways of
contraception.
Understand
the
magnitude,
screening, prevention, and control
measures for endocrinal disorders
Recognize the disease patterns and
special needs of women of child
bearing age
Recommend strategies to address
needs of women of child bearing
age.
Understand and interpret the
measures used in demography.
In abnormal situations, the immune system can

wrongly identify self as nonself and execute
a misdirected immune attack. The result can be
a so-called autoimmune disease such as
rheumatoid arthritis or systemic lupus
erythematosus. In some people an apparently
harmless substance such as ragweed pollen or
cat hair or certain food items can provoke the
immune system to set off the inappropriate and
harmful response known as hypersensitivity,
commonly known as allergy; in fact, it is the
bodys attempt to violently defend itself against
foreign entity. This may at occasions cause lethal
effects on the body itself.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Acquire the basic knowledge of

structure and function of the
organs of the body related to
hematopoeisis and lymphopoiesis.
Understand the basic knowledge of
abnormal conditions related to
both Blood and Immune systems.
Acquire knowledge about iron
metabolism, iron disorders, heme
structure and synthesis; and the
basic knowledge of hemolytic
anaemias.
Acquire the knowledge of drugs
used in the management of the
main problems associated with
these two systems.
Recognize the community aspects
related to these problems and to
solving the related problems of
major community importance.
To continue living, all aerobic organisms need
continuous supply of oxygen and other nutrients
to their different tissues and organs to be
metabolized there. This metabolism supplies
tissues with the required energy and builds up
substrates as well as a wide range of waste
products that may cause severe tissue damage if
not directly eliminated!
By using blood as a transporting tool, cardiovascular system (CVS) plays this bi-directional
role. It delivers blood containing oxygen and
nutrients substances to the tissues and delivers
waste products to organs of elimination or
metabolism.
This vital role of the system is accomplished by a
few hundred miles of vascular structures
(arteries, capillaries and veins) and a reliable
pump (heart) which must beat regularly for a
lifetime. Any factor that disturbs this basic
function will contribute to the increased
morbidity and mortality which is related firstly
to the cardiovascular diseases among the
different societies all over the world.
Although these factors may differ from one
society to the other, most of them can be
eliminated in our societies simply by modifying
our habits and lifestyle. Examples include taking
balanced diet (amount and type), ceasing
smoking and alcohol consumption, regular
moderate physical activities and early
management of any disease. All these are part
of our religious traditions.
1.
CMD 312: Cardiovascular System

Duration and credits: 7 weeks - 7 Credit Hours
(3+4)
Understand the basic anatomy and

histology of the heart and identify
on an appropriate model or
diagram:
a. The location of the heart
275
College of Medicine
sensitive system of checks and balances that

produces an immune response that is prompt,
appropriate, effective, and self-limiting.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
management of common CVS

problems including primary and
secondary prevention.
CMD 321: Respiratory system

Duration and credits: 7 Weeks 7 Credit Hours
(3+4)
The respiratory system is one of the most
essential components of a living organism. In
humans, the lungs fulfill this essential function
by providing a source of oxygen for the body as
well as help to rid the body of carbon dioxide. In
doing so the respiratory system inhales an array
of pollutants and infectious agents. Many a
times these infectious agents colonize the lung
tissue and cause severe respiratory ailments. In
the developing countries, relatively high
mortality is associated with high incidence of
respiratory diseases. In many of these countries
there is a special national health program for
acute respiratory infections (ARI) in which
pneumonia often contributes the leading cause
of death for infants and children less than five
years.
Internationally the major respiratory disorders
currently rank among the 10 leading causes of
death worldwide i.e. pneumonia (third), chronic
obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD; fifth),
tuberculosis (TB; sixth) and lung cancer (ninth).
Projections for 2010 even predict an increase in
mortality due to COPD, TB and lung cancer, with
COPD becoming the third leading cause of death
worldwide. In addition, asthma is currently the
most frequent chronic disease affecting
children, as well as adults
In the past few years new life threatening
respiratory infections have emerged in different
parts of the world i.e. severe acute respiratory
syndrome(SARS) had caused panic in the south
east Asian countries as well as in the western
hemisphere. Avian flu has also emerged as life
276
College of Medicine
within the body

The chambers and valves
of the heart
c. Structure of the heart wall
d. The coronary circulation
e. The conducting system of
the heart.
Recognize the body's major
arteries and veins and name the
body region supplied by each.
Understand the basic anatomy,
physiology and function of the
vascular system:
a. Arterial and arterioles
system
b. Venous and capillary
system.
Be familiar with the normal
development of CVS and foetal
circulation and its changes after
birth.
Understand the pump and valve
function and the hemodynamic
properties of the cardiac cycle:
a. Systole and diastole
b. The components and the
chronological events in
the cardiac cycle
c. Cardiac output.
Be acquainted with the following
cardiovascular hemodynamics:
a. Pulse
b. Blood pressure
c. Systemic
peripheral
resistance.
Recognize the unique features of
special circulations of the body:
brain, coronary and portal.
Understand the fuel supply and
metabolism of the heart.
Understand the lipoprotein and
cholesterol metabolism and their
role in cardiovascular diseases.
Understand the electrical impulse
generation and conduction of the
heart and peripheral pumping
mechanism.
Recognize the common health
problems in the CVS.
Be familiar with the rationale of
common investigations applied to
the CVS.
Understand
the
general
b.
4.
The increasing abuse of the environment leading

to air pollution and respiratory diseases of
occupations together with the prevailing
unhealthy life style with special reference to
smoking gives further justification for the study
of this block.
Through the study of this block, the students are
expected to recognize the major respiratory
illnesses in the Kingdom, understand the
structure, function of the system, and explain
the underlying mechanisms in the pathogenesis
of these diseases. The students are also
expected to devise treatment regimens and
preventive measures to control the spread of
these diseases in the community.
1.
2.
3.
Understand the mechanism of

respiration
and
airflow
obstruction
including
the
anatomy and histology of
respiratory
system,
lung
volumes, tissue elasticity and
surface tension in respiration in
addition to factors determining
airway caliber.
Understand
the
basic
pathological mechanisms in
airway
obstruction
with
principles of treatment of airway
obstruction.
Be familiar with the process of
gas exchange including the
pulmonary circulation, alveolar
ventilation and PCO2, role of
ventilation in acid- base balance
and blood pH, features of
hemoglobin dissociation curve
and
relationship
of
ventilation/perfusion in addition
5.
to gas exchange disturbances

and environmental pollution as
cause
of
gas
exchange
disturbances.
Recognize the lung defenses and
lung injury i.e. non-specific and
immunological
defenses
in
respiratory
system,
characteristics of respiratory
pathogens (pyogenic and TB),
pathology
of
respiratory
infections, epidemiology of
respiratory infections.
Understand the drug therapy of
common respiratory disorders.

Duration: longitudinal throughout year two- 2
Credit Hours (0+2)
The course content in HIC 311 is intended to
build the foundations for research as well as
supporting field activities in the Primary Health
Care (PHC) center. Epidemiology is one of the
basic tools for scientific, medical research. It
helps
in
identifying
the
distribution,
determinants and dynamics of disease in human
population,
thus
enables
the
health
professionals to adopt appropriate interventions
for promotive, preventive curative and
rehabilitative care.
The students need to understand the basic
concepts of epidemiology so that they can apply
them in designing small research project as well
as in understanding and evaluating medical
literature.
Health care managers and service providers,
whether dealing with communities or clinical
services, are required to conduct research to
ascertain the status, needs and other aspects of
health care for evidence- based decision making
and effective and efficient services. Also an
introduction to the basics of the study of
277
College of Medicine
threatening disease for humans in the past six

months. Such respiratory infections spread like a
wild fire as every droplet that is exhaled can be
a source of infection for another person.
Furthermore, practice of evidence-based

medicine is now regarded essential for quality
services. Hands-on experience of designing,
conducting, analyzing, and reporting a research
study, is thus an important part of the medical
curriculum. Proper planning for investigating a
problem requires following a well recognized
sequence of steps. HIC 311 provides a hands-on
training for following these steps to complete a
research protocol for conducting research in the
following year (Year 3- HIC 331).
HIC 311 also covers the essential elements of

reproductive health that are practiced in the
PHC program and provides an orientation to
other issues of reproductive health and safe
motherhood in order to facilitate their learning
at the PHC level where they are encountered.
Adolescent health is also covered in HIC 311. It is
well recognized that the psychosocial needs of
adolescents differ from those of other age
groups. Inappropriate handling at this critical
stage of development may lead to serious
consequences ranging from deviant behavior to
indulgence in criminal activities. Therefore an
understanding of the adolescent health
problems is important in order to recognize the
impact of changing environment on the
adolescent. It is important for appropriate
community-orientation for students to realize
the importance of adolescent health and to
identify the gaps in the health system at the PHC
level to deal with such problems and
recommend strategies to deal with the problem.
By the end of this block, the
students are expected to be able
to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Understand the importance of

epidemiology in the practice
of medicine and its need for
comprehending
medical
literature
for
updating
knowledge.
Plan and write a protocol for a
research study.
Understand the `measures
used in demography.
Recognize
the
disease
patterns and special needs of
women of child bearing age.
Recommend strategies to
address the needs of women
of child bearing age.
Recognize the special needs of
adolescents and recommend
culturally
acceptable
strategies to deal with them.
CMD 313: Clinical Skills II

Duration: longitudinal throughout year two- 2
Credit Hours (0+2)
ARAB-103: Expository Writing 2(2+0)
CMD 332: Gastrointestinal System

Duration and credits: 8 weeks - 8 Credit Hours
(4+4)
The study of this system is of utmost importance
since it involves the diseases that we come
across during whole span of life, diseases of
common occurrence ranging from minor to
severe ones. It includes also those problems that
require explorative laparotomy for their
diagnosis. It involves a complex set of organs
and various associated glands and poses a great
challenge to the doctor especially when
confronted with a case of acute abdomen.
278
College of Medicine
demography is essential for medical students to

understand and interpret the terms used in the
study of populations.
The system is also involved in changes that

occur in other systems of the body , of primary
importance. It is the system where our food on
which we depend for our life is taken care of :
ingestion, digestion, absorption etc, in addition
to the fact that it also includes the liver (vital
organs) and biliary system. It is affected by a
diversity of diseases of various congenital,
inflammatory and malignant natures, in addition
to various bacterial, viral, fungal and parasitic
infections which are also of common
occurrence. Of common occurrence also in GIT
are many of the medical and surgical
emergencies. The student should, therefore,
know the GIT thoroughly well, its structure,
functions, pathogenesis and how to deal
effectively with these conditions.
In this block the aim is that the students will be

able to learn the scientific basis of various
conditions affecting the urinary system so as a
better clinical management of the patients can
be done.
Many urinary problems like infections, lithiasis

and tumors affect a large number of populations
although these are preventable or can be
diagnosed and treated early by doing simple
tests. And if these diseases are not treated
earlier it can leads to renal failure which is a
cause for a lot of economical and social stress
for the family, community and country.
The weather conditions in Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia like long hot climates, existence of desert
and scanty water supply favors the stone
formation in urinary tract. And also recurrent
urinary tract infections, hypertension, and
bladder reflex can cause problems. Early
identification and treatment of these problems
is desired to reduce the mortality and morbidity
of urinary diseases. Student should, therefore,
be well equipped with the basic knowledge of
these health problems and their underlying
mechanisms and with the skills of taking them
both at the level of the individual and the level
of the family /community.
CMD 341: Urinary System
Duration and credits: 5 weeks - 5Credit Hours

(3+2)

279
College of Medicine

1. Be aware of prevalence and
preventive measures of the common
gastrointestinal tract and related
accessory organs
2. Know the structural and topographic
organization of the gastrointestinal
tract and related accessory organs
3. Realize the functional organization
and related mechanisms of action
effective in the gastro-intestinal tract
and related accessory organs
4. Understand
the
common
dysfunctional and morbid changes of
the gastrointestinal tract and related
accessory organs
5. Be familiar with the common clinical
and laboratory methods of diagnosis
and general lines of management of
the common disorders of the
gastrointestinal tract and related
accessory organs.
Developmentally and anatomically, the genital

and urinary systems are close to each other. The
genital system has an important role in
reproduction and will be considered in
Endocrine and Reproduction Block. The organs
of urinary system consist of kidneys, ureters,
urinary bladder and urethra. The prostate gland
although is not an organ of urinary system but
from the study point of view it is considered as a
part of it because the diseases affecting it
usually result in urinary problems.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Understand the anatomy of urinary

system and its relation to other
systems.
Understand the development of
urinary system and its congenital
malformations.
Recognize
the
microscopic
structure of different parts of
urinary system and its relation to
function and disease.
Be familiar with the functions of
the kidney and understand the
urea synthesis and Creatinine
metabolism.
Be familiar with the role of renal
system in buffer system.
Understand the pathogenesis of
common diseases affecting urinary
system including the parasitic
infection.
Be familiar with the drugs affecting
urinary
system
and
the
pharmacology of drugs used in
treatment of renal diseases.
Recognize the prevention of
common renal diseases and care of
patients with renal failure.
Understand the etiology, mode of
transmission,
prevention
and
control of renal diseases of public
health importance.
CMD 331: Nervous System, Special Senses

and Behavior
Duration and Credits: 10 weeks -10 Credit
Hours (5+5)
The nervous system is highly complex and
interconnected network of neurons and
supporting neuroglia. Neural tissue is extremely
delicate and the characteristics of the extracellular environment must be kept within
narrow homeostatic limits. When homeostatic
regulatory mechanisms breakdown; under the
stress of genetic or environmental factors,
infection or trauma, symptoms of neurological
disorders appear. Literally hundreds of disorders
affect the nervous system. A neurological

examination attempts to trace the source of the
problem through evaluation of the sensory,
motor, behavioral, and cognitive functions of
the nervous system. The nervous system is the
master controlling system of the body. It is
responsible for all behaviors - indeed every
thought, action, and emotion reflects its activity.
Diseases like congenital malformations of the
brain and spinal cord are often seen in Saudi
Arabia and our students should be able to
manage such patients and council parents with
such children. In the past such diseases were not
diagnosed early and the patients were left
untreated, but in the present era of modern
technology, the presence of highly sophisticated
diagnostic techniques has made it possible for
the early detection, diagnosis and management
of such patients. Infectious diseases of the
nervous system like poliomyelitis, encephalitis,
meningitis etc which can cause morbidity and
mortality, can be prevented and managed if
appropriate measures are taken.
Cerebro-vascular accidents (CVAs) are a major
threat to the community and the family of a
person. Psychological, psychosocial and
behavioral problems on the other hand, are also
hazardous for the community. They need to be
managed and dealt with cautiously. Meningitis is
a great hazard during Hajj season. Every year
there is a fear of epidemic. Appropriate
vaccination, awareness program for community
and other preventive measures are adopted to
prevent it. Knowledge of drugs that can
effectively cross the blood brain barrier is very
vital for the good management of nervous
system diseases. Tumors of brain, benign or
malignant, are also very common in this part of
the world.
The doctor of tomorrow should be able to
identify the pathologies of the nervous system
for the purpose of management. The use of
magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), positron
emission tomography (PET), digital subtraction
280
College of Medicine
1.
There are also systemic diseases which affect

the nervous system, like diabetes and
hypertension etc. It is therefore very crucial to
know the structure, function, biochemistry and
malfunction of the nervous system and be able
to deal with its disorders.
Most of the doctors in general practice come
across patients with eye diseases and diseases
of the ear, nose and throat (ENT). Similarly the
psychological and behavioral disorders are also
not uncommon. Blindness and hearing
impairment are the topics of the day. Therefore
the training of the students from the beginning
should include the relevant material from these
specialties with major emphasis on the
prevalent problems of Saudi Arabia.
1. Be familiar with the organs of
the nervous system, and its
components
2. Understand
the
various
functions of the nervous system
components and special senses
3. Recognize
pathological
deviations that may affect the
functions of nervous system
components and consequences
of these changes
4. Understand
the
underlying
patho-physiological basis of
common
neurological
and
special sense disorders.
5. Understand the synthesis and
degradation
of
neurotransmitters
and
neuropeptides.
6. Be familiar with the drugs used
in the management of common
neurological and psychological
disorders
7.
8.
Be aware of some basic

neurological and special senses
tests
and
investigations
necessary in diagnosis of
common disorders of the
nervous system including CSF
analysis.
Recognize the psychological,
social and economic impacts of
some common neurological
disorders in the community.
CMD 342: Integrated Multi-Systems and

Therapeutics
Duration and credits: 10 weeks - 10 Credit
Hours (5+5)
This course is intended to consolidate the
knowledge and skills gained in previous
individual organ system blocks/courses in an
integrated and holistic approach to the human
body. Although the main emphasis in this block
is still to consider basic sciences in some depth,
clinical problems are also emphasized. A good
deal is also given to the different laboratory
tests to enable the students to judge the lab
results and integrate them with the patient
problem. During this block a chance is given to
students to access hospital for real patients to
integrate the previously acquired clinical skills in
the skill lab with those of hospital work i.e. a
good bridge is established between basic
science studies in previous blocks and the real
clinical work in the hospital in a smooth and
natural fashion.
In addition to selected relevant topics for
seminars to reflect self learning and team work,
clinical presentations for real-patient problems
obtained from the hospital are also provided to
enable students to be familiar with clinical work.
During this block clinical therapeutics for
different problems are emphasized.
The
problems selected for the study during this
course emphasize multi-system disorders such
as miliary tuberculosis and most of the chronic
281
College of Medicine
angiography (DSA), computerized tomography

(CT) scans, electro-encephalography (EEG), etc
have improved the quality of life in many of such
patients.
as
diabetes
mellitus
and

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Recognize the human body as an

integrated system.
Understand the common disorders
which affect multi-systems and the
human body on different life cycles.
Recognize the impact of social,
psychological and cultural factors on
disease.
Be familiar with the principles of
management, rehabilitation, health
promotion and prevention of
disease.
Recognize the concepts of teamworking and holistic approach in
dealing with health problems.
Recognize the concepts of multiprofessional and interdisciplinary
approaches.
Application and linking the
theoretical knowledge that the
student has been taught in
pharmacology, mainly, and other
disciplines (physiology, biochemistry
and pathology) with the clinical
phase which is translated in the form
of management of different diseases
(the final outcome of the academic
phase)
Preparing the student for the clinical
phase as regards management of
common diseases like DM,
hypertension, HF, anemias,
thromboembolic diseases,
dyslipidemias, gout and common
infections including, diagnosis,
prescription, follow up and
monitoring the therapy.
Recognize the aspects of herbal
therapy and complementary
medicine.

2(0+2)
Duration: longitudinal throughout year three- 2
Credit Hours (0+2)
The course content in HIC 331 is intended to
strengthen the knowledge base for research as
well as supporting field activities in the PHC
center. Basic concepts of analytic epidemiology
are required for answering research questions
requiring analytic epidemiological study designs.
Applied biostatistics is essential for analyzing
and interpreting data obtained during the
research project. Practice of evidence-based
medicine is now becoming the norm. Therefore,
in order to understand medical literature as well
as to collect, analyze, organize and interpret
data and use information in a meaningful
manner, understanding of basic biostatistics is
essential for medical students.
Conducting a research study provides students
the opportunity to practice acquisition of
research skills that may be applicable in health
care settings such as at the PHC level of care. In
addition, courses on occupational health
problems provide orientation to hazards at work
places such as industries and hospitals and
facilitate learning of determinants and dynamics
of problems related to occupational health.
This course also examines the different
dimensions of care of the elderly and is required
students to be able to identify the services gap
at the PHC level as well as the special needs of
this population sub-group.
1.
Conduct a research study.
282
College of Medicine
diseases such
hypertension.
2.
3.
4.
Write and present the

report of the research
study.
Recognize the features of
selected
occupational
diseases and the need for
occupational
health
services in order to deal
with them appropriately.
Recognize the needs of
the elderly and measures
to address them.
5.
6.
7.
Be able to use the clinical

information to arrive at diagnostic
and therapeutic plans.
Be able to present clinical
information accurately in written and
verbal reports.
Develop self-awareness about one's
own attitudes, beliefs and behaviors
that influence his/her practice as a
physician.
Phase II
Phase 2 [Clerkship Phase] (Medical years 4 and
5; semesters 9-12
CMD 333: Clinical Skills III 2(0+2)
MED 341: Clinical Skills IV 2(0+2)

Credit Hours (0+2)
Rational/Justification
To introduce the art of eliciting a proper history
and practice the standard technique of
examination in order to demonstrate the clinical
signs in real patients with full attention to
ethical aspects of clinical medicine
The main emphasis of this phase is on practical

clinical training in the various fields of medicine
including mental health, ambulatory/emergency
medicine and family medicine. Students are
exposed to the environment they are going to
work in after graduation. They are required to
function as sub-interns and take limited
responsibility in the management of patients
and when they are on call. In this capacity they
are expected to:
1.
2.
3.

4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Communicate
effectively
with
patients and their families to identify
problems and provide scientifically
and socially acceptable solution.
Practice
professionalism
with
patients and colleagues.
Conduct a medical interview to
collect relevant clinical information
and
identify
the
patient's
perspective.
Perform a physical examination to
identify important findings while
respecting a patient's dignity.
Interview, examine and clerk

patients;
Discuss cases with colleagues
and senior staff;
Counsel and health educate
patients and their families and
follow them up;
Participate in rounds, clinics,
and procedures.
Care should be taken to ensure that the training

encompasses all the levels of health care:
primary, secondary as well as tertiary and not be
limited to bed-side teaching alone.
Clerkship Organization
Students are divided into four main rotations
covering the four major specialties; but covered
within these, as shown below, are other
specialties and subspecialties considered as part
of the major discipline, with or without specified
duration, or standing on their own as separate
283
College of Medicine
Introduction
Credit Hours (0+2)
courses with defined credit hours. Examples of

the former are:
Endemic
diseases,
gastroenterology, cardiology,
nephrology
(no
specified
duration) and dermatology (2
weeks duration each) with
medicine (rotation A);
Urology, anesthesiology (no
specified
duration)
and
otolaryngology
and
ophthalmology (two weeks
duration
each)
and
orthopedics (4 weeks) with
surgery (rotation B); while
examples of the latter are:
Family
medicine
(six
weeks/credit hours) with
pediatrics (rotation C); and
ambulatory/emergency
medicine (eight weeks/credit
hours)
and
mental
health/psychiatry
(four
weeks/credit hours) with
OB/GYN (rotation D).
There are, in addition, longitudinal courses with

specified credit hours: Radiology in semesters 9
and 10 and Islamic medical ethics in semesters
11-12, Forensic medicine in semesters 11and 12
(two credit hours each).
Each week there is a combined session for all
the groups to meet together to present and
discuss special cases, their research projects,
selected articles for the journal club etc.
Clerkship Rotations, Semesters 9-12
The rotations are as follows with each semester
of 18 weeks duration.
A. Medicine 18 weeks
(including dermatology, 2
wks)
B. Surgery 18 weeks
(including: orthopedics, 4
wks, otolarygology 2 wks
and ophthalmology 2 wks)
C. Pediatrics 10 weeks +
family medicine 6 wks
Semester
9
Semester
10
Semester
11
Semester
12
Longitudinal courses semesters 9 and

10: Medical Radiology
Longitudinal for semesters 11 and 12:
Islamic medical ethics (IME) and
Forensic medicine (Forensic science
and toxicology)
MED 411: Medicine-1
MED 412: Medicine-2
DERM 411
Duration and credits: General Medicine 16
weeks (16 CHs), Dermatology 2 weeks (2 CHs), in
Semesters 9 or 10
Intended Students: Semesters 9 and 10
The basic aim of health care is that patients,
irrespective of all their gender, age, colors,
religion, socio-economic background etc.,
receive the physicians kind care and full
attention and be treated humanely, with due
respect and their own dignity. The physician
should have the required knowledge, skills and
professionalism, to carry out his/her duties to
help them. Modern educational philosophies
assume that a medical student is an active
learner and emphasize independent learning
and team work attitudes.
Studying internal medicine is the cornerstone
of medical practice. Knowledge and skills
learned in internal medicine enable the
students to deal with the majority of problems
related to other specialties and subspecialties.
284
College of Medicine
D. OBGYN 10 weeks+ mental

health 4 wks and
ambulatory/emergency
medicine 4 wks.
The study of internal medicine helps the

students adopt a holistic approach to patient
problems. The subspecialties, within the medical
clerkship (neurology, cardiology, dermatology
and oncology) study in depth aspects or rapidly
expanding areas within the medical practice.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Show
responsible
and
compassionate behavior with the
patient and family considering the
cultural, social and economic
background, and in dealing with all
levels of education and abilities.
Master
the
required
communication
skills
for
appropriate history taking and
medical examination.
Appreciate the role of perfect
understanding of basic sciences
(anatomy,
physiology,
and
biochemistry) and the underlying
pathophysiological
processes
relevant to medical practice in
diagnosis and management of
common illnesses in patient and
community.
Be
acquainted
with
the
epidemiological profile of the
population and society, their
heritage and cultural, social,
geographic
and
economic
characteristics, and relationship of
all those to medical disease
etiology and management.
Have the knowledge and skills
necessary to identify and manage
the health problems of a patient:
emergency situations, common
endemic or epidemic diseases and
disabilities,
including
health
promotion, prevention, treatment,
rehabilitation and follow up.
6.
7.
8.
Opt for the wise selection of the

most appropriate and costeffective investigations to reach
the proper diagnosis, considering
the patient rights and abilities and
the capabilities of the health
system.
Interact effectively with the health
team (and appreciate the role of
others) in providing medical
services.
Continue independent learning and
pursue postgraduate studies.
9.
IMG 421: Clerkship in Radiology and Medical
Imaging
Duration and credits: 2 CH, longitudinal
Semesters 9 and 10
Rationale /Justification
The science and practice of radiology and
imaging have expanded enormously in the last
four decades. Almost all diseases require
imaging either for diagnosis, staging, routine or
interventional management or follow up. All
disciplines in medical practice ask the help of
radiologists to select an algorithm of the most
suitable and prudent imaging modalities to solve
a patients problem. Medical students and
interns find themselves, in all departments
including Accident and Emergency, with images
of various parts of the body that require
knowledge of imaging techniques, imaging
anatomy and diagnostic imaging features. The
diagnostic decision sometimes has to be prompt
and accurate to take the necessary management
choices by the clinician. Basic knowledge of
imaging methods, indications, anatomy and
diagnosis are important for medical students.
For Pre-Clinical Phase:
By the end of this phase the students
should be able to:
285
College of Medicine
Most of the training in this clerkship is focused

on secondary and tertiary levels of health care,
which have to complement, rather than
replace, the primary level.
2.
3.
4.
Identify normal structures of body

over the plain x-rays, contrast
studies and CT scan.
Know the common radiological
investigations with regard to basic
mechanism, common uses,
advantages and disadvantages.
Correlate common pathological
process over the different
radiological modalities.
Be aware of the harmful and
beneficial effects of x-rays.

For Clinical Phase:
By the end of this course the students
should be able to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Know the brief details of all

common and recent radiological
investigations as regard to the
mechanism, indications, contraindications, limitations, advantages
and disadvantages.
Read and recognize normal
structures of the body on the plain
x-rays. Students should have
sufficient knowledge to diagnose
the common problems over the xray.
Recognize normal and abnormal
findings over the contrast studies.
They should be able to diagnose
common problems seen in contrast
studies
and
fluoroscopic
examinations.
Utilize radiological investigations to
solve the common problems of
patients with evidence-based
approach.
Be aware of best use of ultrasound,
CT scan and MRI in the body in
terms of diagnosis of disease
process.
Clerkship in Surgery
SURG 421: Surgery

ORTH 421: Orthopedic Surgery
ENT 421: Ear Nose and Throat
OPHT 421: Ophthalmology

Duration and credits: 18 weeks (18 CHs),
including orthopedics (4), ophthalmology (2),
and ENT (2).
The basic aim of health care is that patients,
irrespective of all their gender, age, color,
religion, socioeconomic background etc. deserve
the physicians kind care and full attention, hope
to be treated humanely, with due respect to
their dignity. The surgeon should have the
required, skills and professionalism, to carry out
his/her duties to help them. Modern
educational philosophies assume that a medical
student is an active learner and emphasize
independent learning and team work.
Injuries and road traffic accidents constitute a
large share of health problems in any
community, particularly in Saudi Arabia.
Studying surgery is an essential component of
medical training and a daily activity of a
practicing physician. Knowledge and skills
learned in surgery enable the students to deal
with surgical emergencies and life-saving
situations as well as with other cold problems of
removal of non-functioning organs or
unnecessary benign or malignant growths, or
replacing or reconstructing shape or function.
Surgical training in subspecialties like
orthopedics,
ophthalmology
and
otorhinolaryngology helps in facing very specific
components of surgery and dealt with in this
clerkship. Most of the training in this clerkship is
focused on secondary and tertiary levels of
health care, which have to complement, rather
than replace, primary level.
While studying surgery the student should adopt
a holistic approach to patient problems, which
may require attention to medical illnesses while
the patient is in the surgical ward. This is why
the General Objectives and the Specific Basic
Clinical Skills are nearly the same as those in
Medical Clerkship. Close consultations and
286
College of Medicine
1.

By the end of the Surgical Clerkship the student
should:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Show
responsible
and
compassionate behavior with
the patient and family
considering the cultural, social
and economic background,
and in dealing with all levels of
education and abilities.
Use
the
required
communication skills for taking
appropriate
history
and
conducting
medical
examination.
Appreciate the role of perfect
understanding of basic science
(anatomy, physiology and
biochemistry)
and
the
underlying pathophysiological
processes relevant to surgical
practice, in the diagnosis and
management of common
illnesses in patient and
community.
Be acquainted with the
geographic and economic
characteristics,
and
relationship of all those to
surgical disease etiology and
management.
necessary to identify the
health problems of a patient:
emergency
situations,
common endemic or epidemic
diseases
and
disabilities,
including health promotion,
prevention,
treatment,
Opt for the wise selection of
the most appropriate and
cost-effective investigations to
reach the proper diagnosis,
considering the patient rights
and
abilities
and
the
capabilities of the health
system,
especially
when
weighing the pros and cons of
surgical intervention
7. Interact effectively with the
surgical and other health
teams (and appreciate the role
of others) in providing medical
and surgical services
8. Continue
independent
learning in surgery and pursue
postgraduate studies.
OBGYN 441: Obstetrics and Gynecology
Duration and credits: 8 weeks
Rationale/Justification:
The basic concept in health care is that patients,
irrespective of all their gender, age colors,
religions and socioeconomic background etc,
deserve the physicians kind care and full
attention, hope to be treated humanely, with
due respect to their dignity. The physician
should have adequate knowledge, skills and
professionalism, to carry out his/her duties to
help them. Modern educational philosophies
assume that a medical student is an active
learner and emphasize independent learning
and team work.
Family is the social unit of the community.
Family
health
concerns
include:
the
reproductive process, child rearing, nutrition,
infectious diseases, health education and
environmental hygiene. The role and
responsibilities of women in this spectrum are
crucial. Women health, if guaranteed, will
assure achieving important requirements of a
healthy functioning family. The provision and
evaluation of maternal health requires
knowledge of the reproductive processes. This
requires basic knowledge on structure and
function of the female genital system, the role
played by endocrine organs, the issues of
fertility and infertility.
During conception and child bearing, the health
of the mother is subjected to numerous risks,
which can be reduced by intervention by the
287
College of Medicine
timely referral of medical cases is for the benefit

of the patient.
Studying obstetrics and gynecology is an

important activity in preserving the human race.
The discipline is expanding rapidly and student
has to have basic knowledge and readiness to
add on from the daily discoveries in this field.
Reproductive health is an area of controversies
where cultures intersect and contradict. The
family and motherhood has a very special place
in Islam. A Muslim obstetrician and gynecologist
have a lot to offer to world wisdom and
knowledge on philosophies and ethical limits of
reproductive biology. These issues will be
touched upon in this course, and, at the same
time, in the course of Islamic Medical Ethics
(ETHIC 411).
4.
5.

By the end of this course the student
should be able to develop the attitudes
and acquire knowledge and skills about
the following general competencies:
1.
2.
3.
Patient care: the student must

be able to provide patient care
that
is
compassionate,
appropriate, and effective for
the prevention and treatment
of health problems and the
promotion of health and
rehabilitation. He/she shows
ability and enthusiasm to
promote health through health
education and support and
provision of primary health
programs (A)
Medical knowledge: the student
must demonstrate knowledge
about established and evolving
biochemical,
clinical,
and
cognate (epidemiologic and
social-behavioral) sciences and
the
application
of
this
knowledge to patient care (K3,
C3).
Patients-based learning and
improvement: the student must
6.
be able to investigate and

evaluate the patient care
practices,
appraise
and
assimilate scientific evidence,
and improve the patient care
practices.
He/she
should
continue independent learning
in family and reproductive
sciences and practice, and
pursue postgraduate studies (A,
C3, P4)
Interpersonal
and
communication
skills:
the
student must be able to
demonstrate interpersonal and
communication skills that result
in
effective
information
exchanges and teaming with
patients, their families, and
professional associates (A, P3).
Professionalism: the student
must
demonstrate
a
commitment to carrying out
professional
responsibilities
adherence to ethical principles,
and sensitivity to a diverse
patient population (A, P3).
System-based practice: the
student must demonstrate an
awareness
of
and
responsiveness to the larger
context and system of health
care and the ability to
effectively call on system
resources to provide care that is
of optimal value (A, P2).
PED 431: Pediatrics

Duration and credits: 10 weeks (10 CHs),
Semesters 11 or 12
The basic concept in health care is that patients,
irrespective of their gender, age, colors, religion,
socio-economic background etc., receive the
physicians kind care and full attention, to be
treated humanely, with due respect to their own
dignity. The physician should have the required,
knowledge, skills and professionalism, to carry
288
College of Medicine
health profession if the latter adopts a

multidisciplinary approach sharing the burden
with other disciplines concerned with
population studies, economics, social behavior,
and equity in distribution of resources.
Children constitute over 50% of the population

and they suffer from almost the same medical
and surgical illnesses as do adults, in addition to
specific childhood illnesses, which are mainly
due to vulnerability to infections, poverty,
malnutrition,
congenital
malformations,
metabolic diseases, neonatal problems or abuse.
Studying pediatrics is essential because
management and prevention of childhood
diseases decreases the rates of morbidity and
mortality in children, which are important
indicators of development and quality of life.
Knowledge and skills learned in pediatric
training enable the students to deal with the
majority of problems related to other specialties
and subspecialties. Most of the training in this
clerkship is exposure to secondary and tertiary
levels of health care, which have to
complement, rather than replace, primary level
of the disease spectrum. In pediatrics primary
care is exceptionally important, because most of
the origin or consequences of childhood
diseases are in the community. Therefore, the
study of pediatrics requires the student to adopt
holistic approach to patient problems, looking at
other members of the family, school and
community at large. The subspecialties within
the medical clerkship (neurology, cardiology,
dermatology and oncology etc) are as well
important in pediatrics.
By the end of this course the student should
develop the attitudes and acquire
knowledge and skills which qualify him/her
to:
1. Show
responsible
and
compassionate behavior with the
child and family considering the
cultural, social and economic
background, and in dealing with all
levels of education and abilities.
2. Use the required communication
skills for taking appropriate history
and
conducting
medical
examination.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Appreciate the role perfect

understanding of basic science
(e.g. anatomy, physiology and
biochemistry) and the underlying
pathophysiological) relevant to
pediatric practice in the diagnosis
and management of common child
illnesses.
Be
acquainted
with
the
geographic
and
economic
characteristics, and relationship of
all those to child health and
disease etiology and management.
which help him/her to observe and
maintain the healthy physical,
psychological and educational
development of the child.
necessary to identify the problems
of child health and their
management, including emergency
situations, common child diseases
of endemic or epidemic etiologies,
and disabilities, including health
promotion preventions, treatment,
Opt for the wise selection of the
most appropriate and costeffective
abilities
and
the
capabilities of the health system.
Interact effectively with the child
health team and other teams (and
appreciate the role of others) in
providing child health services.
Continue independent learning in
pediatric sciences and practice,
and pursue postgraduate studies.
FCM 431: Family and Community Medicine

Duration and Credits: 6 weeks 6 (2+4)
Rational/justification:
Over the past 30 years family physicians have
provided personal health care in the context of
family, influenced medical education and
289
College of Medicine
out his/her duties to help them. Modern

educational philosophies assume that a medical
student is an active learner and emphasize
independent learning and team work attitudes.
Family medicine is now a recognized specialty in

many countries of the world requiring intense
residency training program ranging from 2 to 4
years. In the US Family Medicine gained
recognition as a distinct specialty in 1969. Family
medicine is a discipline that provides holistic and
comprehensive health care in the context of the
family and its environment.
In the developing countries, family medicine is
an evolving specialty.
Trained family
practitioners
to
provide
holistic
and
comprehensive care are still not available in
sufficient numbers in the developing countries,
therefore, such care is often provided by general
practitioners (GPs) with varying training
background. The GPs are often the first level of
care givers (primary care physicians) and
because of the lack in appropriate training, their
competencies and skills do not match the
expectations of the clients.
A trained family physician is an expert in dealing
with the common problems, recognizes the
conditions that need referral for appropriate
level of care, maintains linkage of the referred
cases with the referral sites and health
personnel and has the skills to provide follow-up
care; thus ensuring continuity of care. He is also
well versed with the bio-social factors
influencing health and his training in
communication skills provides him an edge over
his other colleagues in gaining confidence of the
family and community.
The emphasis of family practice is broad based
care of the person and family with a humanistic
approach integrated with evolving new
technologies for provision of longitudinal health
care. Family Practice is a health oriented,
comprehensive and holistic approach rather
than a narrow disease oriented focus.
Following will highlight the role of Family

Physicians.
Continuity of Care:
Family Physicians are committed to
providing care to patients and their families
over time whether in hospital or in
ambulatory (out-patient) setting. Family
practice includes well-patient visits, acute
care, follow-up for chronic disease
monitoring and management, and palliative
care when intervention is no longer
indicated. This long-term contact allows for
the development of a relationship with
individuals and their families which
improves medical care.
Coordination of Care:
The Family Physician identifies other
practitioners and health resources that are
needed to care for the patient and
coordinates the care and services which
they provide. Thus family physicians work
within a broader system of health care
which meets the needs of our patients.
Comprehensiveness of Approach:
Family Physicians not only view patients
from the biological perspective, but also
from a psychological point of view. The biopsycho-social model influences how we
interact with our patients and what we
expect the outcome of a successful
interaction to be. This patient-centered
approach strengthens the possibility that
the patients health will improve over time.
Community:
Family Physicians are not only oriented to
the individuals psychological state, but also
to their social context, as well as,
considering their occupation, community,
family and cultural issues. This may involve
sometimes
informing
the
health
department when the physician suspects a
new epidemic of a disease, notifying the
employer of potential health problems at a
290
College of Medicine
changed the nature of health care in North

America, Canada, England and many other
countries.
work site, or utilizing community resources

to support patient care.
The family physician thus assumes an
important role in acting as bridge between
the community and health and other
resources for the benefit of the individual,
families, and communities.
care to individuals, families

and communities
PSYC 441: Psychiatry and Mental Health

Duration and credit hours: 4 weeks (4 credit
hours).
Common Ambulatory (out-patients) Family

Practice problems:
This rotation will introduce the students to
the principles and practice of family
medicine. The core content is determined
by the common problems that present to
family physicians.
At the end of the rotation, the students should
be able to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Explain the basic principles

and philosophy of Family
Practice.
Describe the differentiating
characteristics
of
family
medicine
and
internal
medicine.
Apply
holistic
and
comprehensive health care in
the context of continuity of
care
and
promotive,
preventive,
curative
and
rehabilitative care through an
organized team approach.
Give the rationale for trained
family physicians at the
Primary Health Care level for
improved health care.
Explain the extended role of
family physician in providing
Mental health (psychiatric) disorders represent

disturbance in thinking, emotion and behavior.
They result from a complex of psychological,
physical, social, cultural and hereditary
influences. Because of this complex etiology,
and the increasing burden of this group of
diseases, a move has developed to bring
mentally ill patients, out of the health
institutions, back into the families and society
i.e. deinstitutionalization, where the family and
some self-help groups are active in the
community. This is for patients who are not a
danger to themselves or society. Therefore, the
patients are coming back to the primary health
care level, where a general physician is expected
to deal with them, and follow up and monitor
the daily, life-long prescriptions and their
complications.
Rapid advances are going on in knowledge of
the intricate mechanisms in the structure and
function of the human brain, the relationship of
certain parts of the brain or its chemicals with
mental illness and in the classification and
diagnostic criteria of disease. These have
expanded the pure medical component of the
specialty, added to similar advances in
psychology and behavior. Medical students and
practitioners find themselves in need of reading
complex background of scientific material that
has to be simplified to help practice and boost
the special clinical skills needed in psychiatry.
Studying psychiatry and caring for mental health
is absolutely necessary, not only because of the
evident psychiatric illnesses, which require
consulting a specialized physician, but because
291
College of Medicine
Rationale/justification
Many infectious (AIDS) and chronic diseases
are not totally curable at this stage of
prevailing knowledge. Thus prevention
assumes an important role and family
physicians, being most close to the family
and community discharge this responsibility
most cost-effectively and efficiently.

At the end of this course, the students
should be able to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Use the standard classification and

terminology known in mental
health care.
Appreciate the comprehensiveness
of
care,
and
wholistic
(biopsychosocial) approach in
psychiatry where behavior and
somatic illness are very much
related to underlying psychological
abnormalities.
Utilize his/her knowledge of family
and society to understand
psychiatric illness, and use family
bonds and society helpers in
management and rehabilitation.
Find the epidemiology and burden
of mental illness in his/her
country, and the contributing
factors to increasing or decreasing
tendencies.
Obtain relevant history, thorough
mental
status
examination,
focusing on clinical presentation,
elicit physical sign and request
informative investigations to reach
a suitable diagnosis for the mental
condition,
aware
of
the
implications of misdiagnosed or
underestimated or overestimated
danger of a mentally ill patient on
the society, and, at the same time,
considering the consequences on
his/her wrong diagnosis on the
individual and family.
Appreciate the role of health team
in mental health, where nonmedical staff are involved,
accepting, most of the time,
leadership responsibilities.
CMD 431: Forensic Medicine

Credit hours: 2 (1+1).
Rationale/justification
Forensic science Medical Jurisprudence is a
branch of medicine that serves justice by
examining material evidence related to civil and
criminal context from biomedical aspects. It can
be defined as the application of medical
knowledge to the administration of law. A lot of
questions concerning medicine arise from the
administration of law. Among them, cause of
death, timing of death, identification, paternity,
trauma, abortion, infanticide and asphyxia are
the most popular subjects in forensic medicine.
Forensic science makes use of other different
medical and non-medical sub-specialties as
forensic anthropology, forensic chemistry,
forensic entomology, forensic medicine legal
medicine, forensic odontology, forensic
osteology,
forensic
pathology,
forensic
photography, forensic psychiatry, forensic
psychology,
forensic
radiology,
forensic
serology, forensic toxicology etc.
The study and subsequent practice of forensic
science entails a very successful medical art that
utilizes all possible available means from simple
microscopy to most sophisticated techniques eg
DNA techniques.
By the end of this course, the students should
be able to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Diagnose death.
Identify sex and race.
Examine different stains
e.g. blood stain, semen,
milk, and excreta.
Classify wounds from the
medico-legal point of
view.
292
College of Medicine
many patients, arriving at the primary care level,

present organic complaints that can only be
explained on the bases of psychological
disturbance.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Recognize causes and

types of head injuries and
factors affecting them.
Identify and describe
firearm injuries.
Recognize and describe
injuries due to physical
agents.
Deal with sexual assaults,
abortion, and miscarriage.
Diagnose causes of death
in different age groups
and to describe the post
mortem changes.
Understand and deal with
preventive
and
environmental toxicology
including
forensic
toxicology.
Understand and deal with
clinical poisoning cases.
Study and learn antidotes
to the most common toxic
agents.
Focus on the international
medicine as domestic
violence (child abuse) in
Forensic medicine and
Lead poisoning in children
in clinical Toxicology.
GENERALINSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES:
These are the same as the general objectives of
medical or surgical clerkships.
CMD 441: Medical Ethics
College of Medicine
5.
EMR 441: Emergency Medicine

Duration and credits: 4 weeks (4 CHs)
Rationale/Justification:
There is nothing more important to the
practicing doctor than saving the human life,
next is relieving patients suffering, irrespective
of his/her ability to reach the accurate diagnosis.
In situations of emergency, very specific
characteristic have to prevail in the doctors
behavior. Most essential is feeling the urgency
and move in few minutes to the patient, and act
accordingly. No time for work, since if the
emergency requires then the doctor has to stay
most of the time in the accident and emergency
department. A keen sense of responsibility to
human life and suffering is very important.
293
2.
3.
4.
5.
College of Medicine &

Applied Medical Sciences in
Unaizah
Vision
The College of Medicine and Appliaed Medical
Sciences in Unaizah at Qassim University (QU)
envisions being a globally recognized learning
institution, committed to graduating healthcare
professionals,
supporting
sustainable
development of health care in Qassim region,
contributing to advance a knowledge based
society in health sciences.
Mission
The college of Medicine and Applied Mediccal
Sciences in Unaizah is committed to excellence
in healthcare education, research and
community service, providing a high quality
student-centered healthcare education through
graduating competent and compassionate
professionals able to meet and respond to the
changing health care needs and expectations of
the Saudi community, in collaboration with
national and international partners
6.
Provide the highest quality healthcare

education and obtaining national and
international academic accreditation.
Raising
the
aptitude
and
competitiveness
of
healthcare
students.
Raising the effectiveness of community
services and applied research to fulfill
the needs of development.
Raising the institutional administrative,
technological
and
informational
performance.
Enhancement of cooperation and
partnership in local, national and
international institutions.
Raising the rates of efficiency,
satisfaction and retention of human
resources.
About
The College of Mecicine and Applied Medical
Sciences has been recently started. The college
is currently offering a basic program in Nursing.
It provides a community based and community
oriented educational program that adopts the
problem based learning approach in teaching
and learning as an educational strategy.
Integration between the nursing disciplines
together with the medical sciences and
humanities is an integral issue of the program.
This program philosophy gives a great
opportunity for students to be responsible
about their own learning and a great ability to
graduate highly competent nurses able to be
lifelong learners. Being a community based
program, nursing students perform their clinical
training in the available health care settings in
Qassim region including ministry of health
hospitals and primary health care units. Being a
community oriented program, allows a
continuous revision of the program to include
emerging priority health problem.
Objectives
Degrees
-Bachelor
294
College of Medicine & Applied Medical Sciences in Unaizah
1.
Islamic Study III
2 (2+0)
BS Degree Prpgram: Nursing
ARAB 103
Expository Writing
2 (2+0)
Study Plan
NURS 211
Adult Nursing I
7(4+3)
Year 1
NURC 241
Nursing
Nutrition
3 (2+1)
NURS 212
Pathophysiology
2 (2+0)
NURS 213
Chronicity in Health
Care
2(2+0)
IC-104
Islamic Study IV
2 (2+0)
NURS 214
Adult Nursing II
7 (4+3)
NURS 215
Human Bioscience
in Nursing
3 (2+1)
NURC 242
Health Promotion
and Risk Reduction
2(1+1)
NURS 216
Health Assessment
in Clinical Practice I
2(2+0)
NURS 217
Perioperative
Nursing
2 (2+0)
Course
Symbol
Course
Credit
Hours
IC 101
Islamic Study I
2 (2+0)
ARAB 101
Arabic Language
Skills
2 (2+0)
NURE 121
Nursing Education
3 (2+1)
NURS 111
Body Structure and

Function
8 (5+3)
Basic Concepts of
Nursing Care
3 (2+1)
IC 102
Islamic Study II
2 (2+0)
CMD 212
Growth and
Development
5(3+2)
CMD 221
Principles of
Diseases
6 (3+3)
NURC 141
Health Care System
2 (2+0)
NURC 142
Nursing
Epidemiology
2 (2+0)
NURC 143
Nursing
Psychosocial
Science
2 (2+0)
NURS 112
Total
Course
Credit
Hours
36
Year 3
NURM
331
NURE 321
Year 2
Course
Symbol
Total
Course
Symbol
37
Applied
Credit
Hours
Course
Maternal
Nursing
Health
Nursing
Professional
Communication
7(4+3)
2 (2+0)
295
IC-103
Programs:
NURE 322
Nursing Informatics
2 (1+1)
NURE 323
Nursing Leadership
and Management
4 (2+2)
NURM
332
NURE 121 Nursing Education (3h)

3
Child
and
Adolescent Nursing
7 (4+3)
NURE 324
Nursing Ethics
2 (2+0)
NURC 341
Nursing
Biostatistics
2 (1+1)
Nursing Elective II
Free Hours
Total
35
Year 4
Course
Symbol
Course
NURS 411
Critical care nursing
7(4+3)
NURC 441
Psychiatric &
Mental Health
Nursing
5 (3+2)
Nursing Research I
2 (2+0)
NURE 421
Free Hours
Credit
Hours
NURC 442
Community Health
Nursing
6 (4+2)
NURC 443
Geriatric Nursing
3 (2+1)
NURE 422
Nursing Research II
4(1+3)
Nursing Elective III
Total
33
Nursing Education is a key part of the work of

health care professionals through provision of
patient, peer and student teaching. Problem
Based Learning (PBL) is the key educational
strategy of Qassim College of Nursing. In PBL,
learners are progressively given more and more
responsibility for their own education and
become increasingly independent of the teacher
for their education. PBL produces independent
learners who can continue to learn on their own
in life and in their chosen careers. The
responsibility of the teacher in PBL is to provide
the educational materials and guidance that
facilitate learning. The Nursing Education Course
will provide a two weeks overview of PBL. Also,
Understanding teaching and learning theories
and approaches is fundamental to delivering
effective teaching. This course aims to introduce
students to teaching and learning for clinical
practice. It will explore theory underpinning
teaching and learning as well as provide
opportunities for skills development in planning
and delivering teaching.
NURS 111 Body Structure and Function (8h)
Body Structure and Function is an
undergraduate level course that integrates basic
science topics in an interdisciplinary approach,
in which the essential principles of human
anatomy and physiology are presented,
including basic biochemistry, cell and tissue
studies, and an overview of all the body systems
dealing with the structure and function of the
human body and mechanisms for maintaining
homeostasis within it. Included is the study of
cells, tissues, and the integumentary, skeletal,
muscular and nervous systems, cardiovascular,
lymphatic, respiratory, digestive, and urinary
systems, as well as the concepts of
development, metabolism, fluid and electrolyte
balance, and acid-base balance are included.
296
Nursing Elective I
Course Description:
NURS 112 Basic Concepts of Nursing Care (3h)

Basic Concepts of Nursing Care, is an
undergraduate level course in the nursing
speciality, designed to provide students with basic
knowledge, skills and attitude, essential to act as
professional nurses in caring with adult patients in
different health care settings.
Acquisition of the basic concepts and
principles of nursing care is the backbone of
nursing education and an introduction of the
bachelor degree nursing student to nursing
practice and the roles of the nurse. The content of
this course emphasizes fundamental nursing
concepts which provide the foundation of all
nursing courses. Through this course the student
will be able to identify human responses relative
to an individual's health and nursing care,
describe the determinants of health and wellness
that impact these human responses, the basic
concepts and principles relevant to meeting
individual nutritional needs, fluid and electrolytes,
sleep/sensory, microbial/safety, elimination,
respiratory, circulatory/thermoregulatory and
mobility ones. Overview of nursing as a profession
and principles of documentation including
reporting and recording will be dealt with.
CMD 212 Growth and Development (5h)
Growth and Development is an undergraduate
level course that deals with with development of
the human being from conception through the
older adult. It covers physical, mental, and
social phases of development at each stage of
life. It entails the transition from cells to tissues
and organismal biology through introduction of
embryology together with physiology histology,
biochemistry, pharmacology and gross anatomy
in an integrated fashion. Among the major
themes of study are nervous and endocrine

control and regulation of body functions,
maintenance systems of the body, and
reproduction and early development, which are
integrated into nursing studies. Basic medical
genetics covering DNA and chromosome
structure and function will also be dealt with
CMD 221 Principles of Diseases (6h)
The registered nurse in a practitioner role is
expected to undertake actions that meet the
health care needs of individual patients/clients,
their families and significant others at selected
points of contact when an individual is
presenting with an episode of illness. Principles
of Diseases is an undergraduate level course
that provides the student nurse with knowledge
pertinent to aspects of pathology, microbiology,
immunology, biochemistry as well knowledge of
clinical diagnosis by laboratory methods in
relation to organic functions and body systems.
Pharmacological basis of drugs used in
inflammation, infections and cancers will also be
dealt with.
NURC 141 Health Care System (2h)
Health Care System, is an undergraduate level
nursing course that present basic information,
knowledge, skills needed by the nurse to
understand the holistic approach to healthcare for
individuals, families, groups and communities in
order to meet their growing health needs in the
21st century. The course explores factors that
mitigate against health and explores how people
conceptualize health and health promotion in a
range of contexts including Primary Health Care,
roles and responsibilities of Key team members,
multi-agency working in Public Health and Primary
Care and interface between Primary Care and
Acute Care.
The health care system course as integrated with
the growth and development and principle of
diseases courses simultaneously, will give the
students an overview of the different phases of
297
Discussions
on
temperature
regulation,
metabolism as well as fluid, electrolytes and
acid-base balance are included The course also
includes an introduction to the general
pharmacological concepts.
NURC 142 Nursing Epidemiology (2h)

Epidemiology, is an undergraduate level course in
the nursing curriculum, that presents basic
information, knowledge and skills about the
infectious disease process, mode of transmission
and most common endemic and quarantinable
diseases. Students will acquire a thorough
knowledge about concept of health and disease
and general epidemiology of infectious and noninfectious diseases, incidence, morbidity and
mortality of females and infants in KSA. Also, it
guides students to know the risk factors in
relation to puerperal sepsis and its relation to
maternal mortality, diseases prevalence in the
children under five years and in school age. This
course provides an understanding of the
fundamentals of epidemiology, surveillance
procedures and an introduction to statistical
analysis methods. Students will acquire a sound
foundation in investigative methods as relevant to
outbreaks of infectious diseases. Throughout this
course, students will recognize obligatory vaccines
during childhood in
KSA, realize and gain
knowledge about adolescent health problems
and their effects on patient, family and
community. Students will also acquire knowledge
about the health needs of elderly in the society

and health care facilities provided for them.
NURC 143 Nursing Psychosocial Science (2h)
Psychosocial Science is an undergraduate level
course, designed to enable students to acquire
knowledge, skills and attitudes necessary to help
them provide effective psychological and social
care for children, adolescents, women during
prenatal , natal, postnatal and menopausal
periods and to elderly as well. The rationale of
this course is to allow students to develop
academic and professional knowledge base
relevant to psychosocial nursing, based on
psychological and social theoretical frameworks.
Students will be able to identify how the social
context of an individuals environment
influences health state and health status and
explore ways in a practice setting in which
psychological
factors
interact
with
environmental and social factors in relation to
health and illness.
NURS 211 Adult Nursing I (7h)
This Adult Nursing I course is an undergraduate
level course which introduces holistic nursing
care of adults experiencing acute or chronic
illness in selected structured settings. This
course is aiming at offering student nurses with
relevant teaching / learning opportunities that
give them the chance to acquire the necessary
knowledge and problem solving skills which
assist them in planning comprehensive safe
nursing care to patients who are suffering from
medical health problems in special areas. The
nursing process is the theoretical framework of
this course. Promoting, and maintaining physical
psychosocial integrity of patients is emphasized.
NURC241 Nursing Applied Nutrition (3h)
Applied Nutrition is an undergraduate level
nursing course that deals with the study of food
in relation to health. Improved nutrition has
contributed to increased height in developed
countries. All the body systems are working in
298
human life from early embryological development,

fetal growth, infancy and childhood, adolescence
and finally the inevitable ageing. This will be
followed by the actions undertaken by the nurse
practitioner to meet the health care needs of
individual patients/clients, their families and
significant others at selected points of contact
when an individual is presenting with an episode
of illness, within the principles of diseases course.
The students will become familiar with the special
features of all these issues and will also gain
knowledge about the role of a health care provider
at different phases and state of human life in
accordance to the specific needs each stage
demands. It will help students to dentify in a
practice setting, services likely to be of value in
improving the health of individuals or groups.
Essentials of normal nutrition and their

relationships to the health of individuals and
families are concepts that serve as a basis for
the development of an understanding of the
therapeutic application of dietary principles and
the nurses role and responsibility in this facet of
patient care.
manifestations, diagnosis, and treatments of

those diseases, examining the interrelated
effects of organ systems when one
pathophysiology occurs. Knowledge of normal
anatomy, histology and physiology are essential
for understanding the pathophysiology of
disease. Therefore, students are expected to
have knowledge in those areas sufficient to
understand course content in pathophysiology
NURS 213 Chronicity in Health Care (2h)
This unit focuses on multi-disciplinary care and
models of care delivery with an emphasis on
ageing, chronic and life limiting illness. With the
evolving role of the nurse as primary care
providers it introduces the student to the issues
facing older people and will include healthy
ageing, the ageing process, polypharmacy,
lifestyle issues, advanced health assessment
related to people with complex health needs and
legal and ethical issues associated with aging,
chronic illness and palliative care.
NURS 212 Pathophysiology (2h)

NURS 214 Adult Nursing II (7h)
The pathophysiology course is an undergraduate
course designed to provide students with an in
depth study of the abnormal physiology
associated with disease, the pathologic
processes (pathogenesis) of disease and how
that disease affects the human organism. The
focus of this course is on nursing care of clients
through the adult life span with acute or chronic
dysfunctional
health
patterns
involving
respiratory,
cardiac,
renal,
nervous,
gasterointestinal
and
musculoskeletal
impairment in need of medical and/or surgical
intervention. The pathologies to be studied will
be diseases that have the greatest effect on KSA
society, with an emphasis on those complex
pathologies that are most commonly
encountered by health care providers. The study
approach will be around major body systems
and common diseases characteristic of those
major body systems focussing on changes in
normal physiology that constitutes disease with
a secondary focus on the etiologies,
This Adult Nursing II course is an undergraduate

relevant teaching learning opportunities that
surgical health problems in special areas.
Systems
studied
include
respiratory,
cardiovascular,
musculoskeletal,
urinary,
neurological and endocrine. Perioperative care
will be dealt with. Pain management and wound
assessment and integrity are explored.
Promoting,
and
maintaining
physical,
Problem formulation facilitates the integration
and application of pharmacological principles
and associated drug groups underpinned by
299
coordination to achieve homeostasis, which

enables the individual to lead a disease-free life.
The course covers nutrients and other
substances and their action, and interaction and
balance in relation to health and diseases and
the process by which organism ingests, digests,
absorbs, transports, utilizes and excretes food
substances. Energy requirement changes related
to lifespan changes are addressed. Dietary
modulation as a therapeutic strategy to manage
intervening variables is emphasized. It also
focusses on the therapeutic and food service
aspects of the delivery of nutritional services in
hospitals and other healthcare institutions.
NURS 215 Human Bioscience in Nursing (3h)

This course provides study for nervous and
endocrine control and regulation of body
functions, maintenance systems of the body,
and reproduction and early development, which
are integrated into nursing studies. The unit
develops further the critical evaluation of
evidence and an awareness of the changing
nature of knowledge in the health sciences.
Topics include the structure and functions of the
nervous system; the autonomic functions of the
nervous system the structure and function of
the respiratory system; the structure and
function of the urinary system; the structure and
function of the digestive system; the structure
and function of the reproductive system; the
major changes in embryonic development in
early pregnancy; and an introduction to
pharmacology. An integrated approach in case
scenarios provides inter-professional learning
opportunities.
NURC 242 Health Promotion and Risk
Reduction (2h)
Health promotion and risk reduction is an
undergraduate level course that enables nursing
students to gain an understanding of the
concepts of health, healthy lifestyle behavior,
health promotion, levels of prevention, diversity
and risk; factors that influence health and
healthy lifestyle behaviors; basic dynamics of
behavioral change; and substantive content in
nutrition, physical activity, and psychological
well-being. Theoretical and empirical support for
promoting health and reducing risk behaviors is
examined as a basis for understanding ways that
diverse individuals can positively influence their

own health and wellness. The role of
professional nursing in promoting health
behavior is examined. Using substantive content,
exemplar behaviors of nutrition, physical activity,
and coping and adaptive behaviors will be
examined from the students perspective to gain
an understanding of their contribution to health
and wellness. Underlying dynamics, such as selfefficacy and resilience, will be examined within
the context of the theoretical and empirical
literature and standards for the nursing
profession. Students will examine potential
strategies for influencing health behavior change
NURS 216 Health Assessment in Clinical
Practice (2h)
The Health Assessment in Clinical Practice course
is an undergraduate level nursing course that
deals with concepts, principles & techniques of
history taking using various tools, physical
examination (head to toe), psychosocial
assessment and interpretation of laboratory
findings to arrive at a nursing diagnosis on the
client across the lifespan in varied settings. It
incorporates a holistic perspective for care. and
examines fundamental knowledge and skills in
preparation for the care of individuals who have
developed health problems. Emphasis is placed
on systematic methods for health assessment of
clients and the development of appropriate plans
for care intervention and the evaluation of that
care. Clinical practice experience is an integral
component of this course and concentrates on
the attainment of fundamental client care skills.
Students are expected to develop a sound
knowledge to the nursing needs of clients.
NURS 217 Perioperative Nursing (2h)
The Perioperative Nursing course will provide
student nurses with basic knowledge and clinical
skills necessary to function independently in an
entry level Perioperative Nursing position.
Course content includes principles of aseptic
technique, patient safety, universal protocol, and
300
human pathophysiology related to the body

system under review The clinical practicum
component provides opportunities to develop
competency in a range of skills learnt in the
simulated laboratory environment as well as in
the clinical hospital settings. The nursing process
will be utilized throughout this course for both
teaching and learning enhancement.
NURM 331 Maternal Health Nursing (7h)

Maternal health nursing is a course where the
focus continues to be on the family-centered
approach to nursing care, with a greater depth
for understanding the previously acquired
knowledge and skills on the study of women
during different cycles of their lives including
childbearing, childrearing, and menopausal
periods. Knowledge of reproductive health, safe
motherhood and gynecological aspects are
essential for the planning and implementation of
care
during
preconception,
conception,
antenatal, and postnatal periods. Knowledge
from biophysical sciences, humanities and
growth and development are essential for the
provision of holistic care for women and their
families within hospital and community settings.
Non reproductive health problems as cultural
aspects relevant to health of women will be
discussed.
NURE 321 Nursing Professional Communication
(2h)
Students in this course will focus on basic
communication skills essential for working with
clients of various ages and health care
professionals. Content includes interpersonal
communications and group dynamics. Students
will practice communication skills with
individuals, within groups, and through
electronic media.
NURE 322 Nursing Informatics (2h)
This course deals with the use of information
technology system and data standards based on
nursing informatics principles/theories. It
further deals with the utilization of clinical
information systems in the management and

decision-making of patient care. A laboratory
session shall be provided for practice
application. This course focuses on providing a
foundation on information management and
processing principles used to support the data,
information, and knowledge needs in the
provision and delivery of nursing and health
care. Topics include computer-based patient
record, healthcare and nursing languages,
minimum data sets, telehealth, computermediated decision support, education, and
research.
NURE 323 Nursing Leadership and
Management (4h)
Leadership and Management in Nursing is an
speciality , This course designed to help students
to develop expertise in the field of nursing
management and to work as nurse managers at
different levels in the health care system. This
course prepares the students to assume their
nursing leadership and management roles with
focus on their interactions with the health care
tea students with management theories,
organizational behavior theories and leadership
styles that are relevant to the practice of nursing
management. It explores the elements of the
management process as well as change
management strategies and their applications. It
enhances students leadership skills in
maintaining best practices and standards of
care. Nursing units in hospitals are the
framework used for the application of the
theories and knowledge base. The course is
designed to facilitate understanding on key skills
employed by nurse leaders and managers and
their development of critical analytical thinking
in evaluating and interpreting management
challenges and practices
MURM 332 Child and Adolescent Nursing (7h)
Child and Adolescent Nursing is a theoretical and
clinical course focuses on the care of children
301
the nursing process in the perioperative setting.

The course will also address ethical, moral, and
legal issues as well as specific considerations for
various types of procedures and specialty
services in the circulating role.
NURE 324 Nursing Ethics (2h)

The course consists of the study of the laws,
regulations, and ethical considerations related
to the provision of safe and effective
professional nursing care; with attention given
to the impact of the political process on the
regulations surrounding the practice of nursing.
The course also focuses on ethical concepts,
theories, and values applied in ethical decisionmaking that are related to a variety of ethical
dilemmas in nursing practice and health care. It
promotes an examination of legal concepts and
regulations under which professional nurses
practice and notes that ethical and legal issues
are often not mutually exclusive. Student self
assessment is encouraged in order to facilitate
each student to become accountable and
responsible for professional, personal, ethical,
and legal growth and development within the
practice of nursing.
the practical application of data to address

nursing issues, rather than theoretical and
mathematical development. Students will learn
how to choose and apply statistical tools to data
sources, when and how statistical tools can be
used to analyze data, and how to interpret
others quantitative studies.
NURS 411 Critical care nursing (7h)
Critical care Nursing, is an undergraduate level
course in the nursing specialty, designed to
provide students with basic knowledge, skills
and attitude, essential to act as professional
nurses in caring patients with cardiovascular,
respiratory, renal, neurological and gastrointestinal problems requiring critical care in
different critical care units specialty, not only
physical problems, but also psychosocial issues
for such patients.
The course also equips students with adequate
knowledge about various diagnostic tests
performed for critically ill patients; indication
and nursing interventions of various drugs used
in critical care; nutritional management of
critically ill patients; advanced nursing skills
required in critical care. Therefore, students will
be capable of developing a list of the patient's
problems, formulating correct nursing diagnosis,
setting realistic objectives and establishing a
relevant nursing intervention that will include
the integration of all body of knowledge that
was previously taught in the context of
professional ethical and legal issues in critical
care.
NURC 341 Nursing Biostatistics (2h)
NURC 441 Psychiatric & Mental Health Nursing

(5h)
Biostatistics is an undergraduate level course

designed to provide a broad overview of
biostatistics methods as well as applications
commonly used for nursing research. Topics
covered include measurement and categorizing
variables, use and misuse of descriptive statistics,
testing hypotheses, and applying commonly used
statistical tests. An emphasis will be placed on
Psychiatric and Mental Health Nursing is an

undergraduate level course which provides the
opportunity for the student to develop
fundamental knowledge, skills and attitudes
relevant to the restoration and maintenance of
optimal mental health. Students will be expected
to assess people with mental health problems
302
from birth through adolescence. The effects of

acute and chronic illness on growth and
development are studied in the acute and
community care setting. Education of the child
and family on health promotion, disease
prevention, and safety issues are addressed.
Attention will be given to the implementation of
the nursing process in the care of healthy children
as well as children with different health problem.
In addition, ethical issues are discussed regarding
the relationship to the child and family, including
issues such as child abuse, informed consent, and
the impact of diverse cultural and spiritual beliefs
on health care decisions in the family.
NURE 421 Nursing Research I (2h)

This is an introductory course intended to equip
the nursing students with concepts, principles in
research starting from an overview of the major
phases of the research process. The course will
include discussion from formulation to
dissemination of research findings, focus on the
formulation of a research problem to the
selection of the research design, planning and
choosing the appropriate research tool for data
gathering. This course will require the
student/group to present a research proposal in
a colloquium to apply knowledge and
demonstrate skills and attitude in the
conceptual, design and planning phases of the
research process.
NURC 442 Community Health Nursing (6h)
Community Health Nursing is an undergraduate
course that will focus on the role of the
community health nurse in working with
individuals,
families,
communities,
and
populations. It will examine in detail current
frameworks of illness prevention, health
promotion, and community development.
Nursing roles in a variety of health promotion
approaches will be examined. These will include
the medical approach, behavioral change

strategies, educational strategies, empowerment
and advocacy, and social change related to socioeconomic environment. The theoretical concepts
will be linked to a discussion of current examples
of community health promotion programs and
research
NURC 443 Geriatric Nursing (3h)
This course will focus on providing the student
with nursing principles as relevant to the care of
the geriatric patient. The nursing roles of
provider of care and member within the
discipline of nursing are emphasized as they
apply to gerontological nursing. The nursing
process serves as a guide for implementing
nursing care and evaluating human response to
actual or potential health problems of the
geriatric population. Included is a development
of a knowledge base in the areas of physiological,
sociological, psychological, and emotional
changes which occur with the aging process.
Integrated throughout the course are concepts
relating to illness prevalent in the geriatric
populace as well as therapeutic regimes.
Curriculum
threads
of
pharmacology,
communication, critical thinking, and client
teaching are integrated throughout the course.
NURE 422 Nursing Research II (4h)
The course is a continuation of Nursing Research
I designed to help students to conduct research
study in nursing independently by using the
scientific method of research in designing a
research proposal and collecting data. It also will
help students to interpret the results in a
meaningful way in health related matters &
utilize research findings to improve nursing
practice.
NURS 311 Oncology Nursing (3h) Elective
Oncology nursing is an undergraduate elective
nursing course designed to assist students in
developing
expertise
and
in-depth
understanding in the field of oncology Nursing.
303
and to identify, prioritize and implement

appropriate evidence based interventions. Topics
covered in this course include: mental health
and illness, psychiatric assessment, legal and
ethical care, psychotropic medications, the
mental health system, the consumer and carer
movement, acute psychosis, mood disorders,
peri-natal
mental
disorders,
personality
disorders, eating disorders, delirium and
dementia, anxiety disorders and substancerelated disorders. Emphasis is placed upon
empowerment of the individual and caregiver
using the stress/vulnerability model and carer
based
management.
The
course
also
encompasses management of aggression, crisis
intervention, case management and the
importance of self care.
NURS 312 Concepts in Pain Management (3h)

Elective
Concepts in pain management is an
undergraduate elective nursing course designed
to provide the opportunity for students from a
variety of disciplines to explore the issues and
concepts in caring for adults, older adults and
their families. Course content will be based on
key concepts related to guided in systems of
care; communication, roles and relationships;
pain and symptom management; legal and
ethical issues and well-being, while considering
psychosocial, spiritual diseases and cultural
aspects of care. Application of theories and
concepts across the span of adult life to include
specific medical surgical conditions. Emphasis
will be placed on integrating previously learned
cognitive,
psychomotor,
and
affective
knowledge in the care of the individual client,
her/his family, as well as groups and
communities through application of the nursing
process.
NURS 313 Renal Dialysis Nursing (3h) Elective
Renal dialysis nursing is an undergraduate
elective nursing course designed to prepare
future professional nurses with the skills and
knowledge to appropriately assess, treat, and
evaluate in a timely renal dialysis patients with
electrolyte, acid-base . Students apply the
nursing process and prioritize nursing care for a
renal dialysis patients with multiple need
imbalances. Also, they will recognize and apply
the role of the nurse in the management of
renal patient pre, intra and following dialysis.
NURS 314 Alternative and Complementary

therapy (3h) Elective
Alternative therapy is an undergraduate elective
nursing course that introduces students to a
variety of complementary and alternative
medicine topics including
homeopathy,
aromatherapy, massage therapy, acupuncture
and Traditional Chinese Medicine using an
evidence-based approach. Special attention will
be focused on plants that have been used for
the treatment of human diseases such as
cancer, heart and nervous system disorders, and
other diseases. The students will have a good
basic background in the different systems of
herbal medicine and other types of alternative
medicine.
NURM333 Reproductive Health (3h) Elective

This course introduces the student nurse to the
reproductive health of males and females from
adolescence to the elderly. It provides students
the opportunity to apply critical thinking and
clinical judgments to the health care of the
childbearing family from a holistic and
humanistic perspective. The theories of nursing
and the nursing process are integrated in the
promotion and maintenance of reproductive
health and in the management of clients with
reproductive system conditions. Concurrent
clinical portion of this course offers students the
opportunity to apply theory, nursing process,
critical thinking, and to develop psychomotor
skills related to the care of clients. Practical
sessions take place in hospitals, prenatal clinics,
selected homes and schools.
NURM 334 Midwifery (3h) Elective
Midwifery is an undergraduate elective nursing
course designed to equip students with an
understanding in a number of subject areas that
inform midwifery theory, practice and
education. Students can possess the skills
304
It will help students to develop advanced skills

for Nursing intervention in various oncological
conditions. It will enable the student to function
as oncology nurse practitioner/specialist and
provide quality care. It will further enable the
student to function as educator, manager, and
researcher in the field of oncology nursing.
course designed to introduce students to the

application of management principles in the role
of the nurse manager. Nurse managers oversee
teams of registered nurses and nurse
practitioners, often stationed on a single hospital
floor or within a specific hospital department.
Nurse managers and administrators begin their
careers as registered nurses, and, through
experience, they develop the skills necessary to
become effective managers. So, students must
be prepared to have excellent leadership and
communication skills as they will often interact
as nurse managers with hospital administrators
and health care professionals in variou
specialties.
They
should understand the
challenges facing today's health care industry
and are able to work within the system .
NURE 325 Nursing Management of Human

Resources(3h) Elective
Children with special needs is an undergraduate

elective nursing course designed to provide
students with a general overview of the various
categories
of
special
needs of children and adolescents. The course
will cover the theoretical foundations of working
with children, and families who are abused or
neglected in addition to children with
developmental or genetic disabilities. All
students will be divided into small groups; each
group will focus on a particular type of special
need,
relevant
assessment
procedures,
treatment objectives, current practices, and the
role of nurse/caregiver in various settings for
those children and their families. Methods of
teaching will include class notes, lectures, class
discussion, and small group exercises designed
to promote critical thinking and understanding
of the relevance of the topics to students own
work in the field.
Nursing Management of Human Resources is an

to introduce students to the strategic role of
human resource management. Decisions are
made in organizations in the HR department
about who to hire, what training to give them,
how to reward them. Since the managers are
responsible for selection, training, performance
management, and compensation decisions, so
the student should be trained to identify as
future employees and future managers to
understand their responsibilities regarding HR
management. This means that the student
should do the readings, think about the issues,
and be prepared to contribute and participate in
exercises, and practicing the skills necessary to
perform to class discussions.
NURM 431 Children with special needs (3h)

Elective
NURE 326 Organization and Administration for

the Nurse Manager (3h) Elective
NURC 444 Palliative Care (3h) Elective
Organization and Administration for the Nurse

Manager is an undergraduate elective nursing
Palliative Care is open to a wide range of

professionals who wish an experience in
delivering a palliative care approach. Students
305
necessary for knowledge, and developing

midwifery practice. This course aims to provide
an academic base to the understanding and
development of midwifery and maternity care.
Students in this course can be expected to
provide quality midwifery and maternity care
and promote and develop excellence in their
practice setting. This course presents specialized
knowledge of current theories and techniques in
nurse-midwifery care. The emphasis is on the
development of nurse-midwifery management
skills in the care of women from diverse
backgrounds who are at low risk for
complications of pregnancy. The focus is on
primary care, gynecological, antepartal,
intrapartal, or postpartal care and the care of
newborns. An additional focus of this course is
on well woman care throughout the lifespan.
NURS 412 Advanced Critical Care Nursing (3h)

Elective
Advanced critical care nursing is an
undergraduate elective course designed to
equip
students with adequate knowledge
about the advanced concepts and principles of
critical nursing care specialty. Through this
course, the students will also gain familiarity
with the updated critical care devices such as
mechanical ventilators, infusion pumps,
monitors etc, and provide comprehensive
nursing care for such patients who are
connected with these devices.
NURC 445
Management of occupational
hazards (3h) Elective
Management of occupational hazards is an
undergraduate level nursing elective course
which enables students to have an overview
about the discipline of Occupational Health
Nursing (OHN). It prepares students to use their
nursing skills to focus on hazard control, health
promotion and safety for workers, employers
and communities' while working with
experienced peers as part of a multidisciplinary
team. The course will enlarge the student's
knowledge about possible career opportunities
in this regard, including positions in
management,
consulting,
research
and
education in diverse locations which include
corporate headquarters, museums, and
industries as well as hospitals. Occupational
health nurses also manage travel clinics and
employee health clinics.
NURC 446 Counseling Skills
professionals (3h) Elective
for
health
Counseling skills for health professionals is an

undergraduate elective nursing course that
provides students with a historical background to
the current practice of community counseling. In
addition, the course discusses the counselor and
client relationship in the context of the multiple
systems that influence the function and behavior
of the community counselor. Students will learn
skills necessary for counselor practice including
understanding the nature of health delivery
systems, agency management, outcome oriented
treatment planning, counselor advocacy and
time management. Finally, students will learn
the process of grant writing as a critical skill in
continuing the mission of agency counseling in
communities.
NURM 432 Surgical Pediatric Nursing (3h)
Elective
Surgical pediatric nursing is an undergraduate
elective nursing course designed to assist
students in developing expertise and in depth
understanding in the field of Surgery in Pediatric
Nursing. This course is primarily concerned with
the assessment, diagnosis and treatment of
surgical disorders of children, taking into
consideration the most common surgical
disorders of infants and children. The practicum
part of this course aims to provide guided
clinical training experience, knowledge, and
skills required for the preparation of nursing
students in the nursing care of newborns,
infants, and children in surgical settings. The
nursing process will be utilized in implementing
the plan of care
306
will be employed in an area where the principles

of palliative care are applied in caring for
individuals with lifethreatening illness and their
families. The aim of the course is to strengthen
and develop the knowledge, skills, competencies
and attitudes of students, thus enabling them to
fulfill their highest potential in the personal,
professional and practice arena. It also aims to
make a valuable contribution to the
development of Palliative Care knowledge,
research and practice. The design is such that it
will promote collaboration between disciplines
working with individuals with palliative care
needs and their families. Students passing this
course are expected to promote and develop
excellence in their practice setting.
7.
Provide the highest quality nursing

education and obtaining national and
international academic accreditation.
8. Raising
the
aptitude
and
competitiveness of nursing students.
9. Raising the effectiveness of community
services and applied research to fulfill
the needs of development.
10. Raising the institutional administrative,
technological
and
informational
performance.
11. Enhancement of cooperation and
partnership in local, national and
international institutions.
12. Raising the rates of efficiency,
satisfaction and retention of human
resources.
Vision
About
The college of nursing is committed to

excellence in nursing education, research and
community service, providing a high quality
student-centered nursing education through
graduating competent and compassionate
nurses able to meet and respond to the
changing health care needs and expectations of
the Saudi community, in collaboration with
national and international partners
The College of Nursing provides a community

based and community oriented educational
program that adopts the problem based
learning approach in teaching and learning as an
educational strategy. Integration between the
nursing disciplines together with the medical
sciences and humanities is an integral issue of
the program. This program philosophy gives a
great opportunity for students to be responsible
about their own learning and a great ability to
graduate highly competent nurses able to be
lifelong learners. Being a community based
program, nursing students perform their clinical
training in the available health care settings in
Qassim region including ministry of health
hospitals and primary health care units. Being a
community oriented program, allows a
continuous revision of the program to include
emerging priority health problem. This
demonstrates great relevance of the program to
the mission of the institution.
Objectives
Degrees
The College of Nursing (CON) at Qassim

University (QU) envisions being a globally
recognized learning institution, committed to
graduating nurses competitive professionals,
supporting sustainable development of health
care in Qassim region, contributing to advance a
knowledge based society in nursing and health
sciences.
Mission
-Bachelor
307
College of Nursing
College of Nursing
Programs:
NURS 112
Basic Concepts of
Nursing Care
3 (2+1)
IC 102
Islamic Study II
2 (2+0)
CMD 212
Growth and
Development
5(3+2)
CMD 221
Principles of
Diseases
6 (3+3)
Faculty Members:
Khaled Fahd Al-Hosis
Assistant Prof.
Hoda Wadie El-Gawly
Professor
Lamiaa Ismail Keshk
Assistant Prof.
Fathia Ahmed Mersal
Assistant Prof.
NURC 141
Health Care System
2 (2+0)
Hanan Mohamed Tork
Assistant Prof.
NURC 142
Nursing
Epidemiology
2 (2+0)
NURC 143
Nursing
Psychosocial
Science
2 (2+0)
Dalia Salah El-Din
Assistant Prof.
Shereen Ahmed Kelawa
Assistant Prof. .
Badria Mostafa ElSeddik
Lecturer
Lorna Espiritu Vallar
Lecturer
Princess Canlas Balajadia
Lecturer
Fritzie Joy Gayosa Juen
Lecturer
Year 2
Lucille Lapena Bautista
Lecturer
Course
Symbol
Cheryl Manito Reyes
Lecturer
Christina Marie Go Siquioco
Lecturer
Total
IC-103
Study Plan
Year 1
37
Credit
Hours
Course
Islamic Study III
2 (2+0)
ARAB 103
Expository Writing
2 (2+0)
NURS 211
Adult Nursing I
7(4+3)
NURC 241
Nursing
Nutrition
3 (2+1)
Credit
Hours
Applied
Course
Symbol
Course
IC 101
Islamic Study I
2 (2+0)
NURS 212
Pathophysiology
2 (2+0)
ARAB 101
Arabic Language
Skills
2 (2+0)
NURS 213
Chronicity in Health
Care
2(2+0)
NURE 121
Nursing Education
3 (2+1)
IC-104
Islamic Study IV
2 (2+0)
NURS 111
Body Structure and

Function
8 (5+3)
NURS 214
Adult Nursing II
7 (4+3)
308
College of Nursing
BS Degree Prpgram: Nursing
NURS 215
Human Bioscience
in Nursing
3 (2+1)
NURC 242
Health Promotion
and Risk Reduction
2(1+1)
NURS 217
Health Assessment
in Clinical Practice I
2(2+0)
Perioperative
Nursing
2 (2+0)
Total
Year 4
Course
Symbol
Course
NURS 411
Critical care nursing
7(4+3)
NURC 441
Psychiatric &
Mental Health
Nursing
5 (3+2)
NURM
331
NURE 421
Nursing Research I
2 (2+0)
Free Hours
Credit
Hours
Course
Maternal
Nursing
Health
7(4+3)
Nursing
Professional
Communication
2 (2+0)
NURE 322
Nursing Informatics
2 (1+1)
NURE 323
Nursing Leadership
and Management
4 (2+2)
NURE 321
Nursing Elective I
NURM
332
Credit
Hours
36
Year 3
Course
Symbol
35
NURC 442
Community Health
Nursing
6 (4+2)
NURC 443
Geriatric Nursing
3 (2+1)
NURE 422
Nursing Research II
4(1+3)
Nursing Elective III
Total
33
Course Description:
NURE 121 Nursing Education (3h)
Child
and
Adolescent Nursing
7 (4+3)
NURE 324
Nursing Ethics
2 (2+0)
NURC 341
Nursing
Biostatistics
2 (1+1)
Nursing Elective II
Free Hours
Nursing Education is a key part of the work of

health care professionals through provision of
patient, peer and student teaching. Problem
Based Learning (PBL) is the key educational
strategy of Qassim College of Nursing. In PBL,
learners are progressively given more and more
responsibility for their own education and
become increasingly independent of the teacher
for their education. PBL produces independent
learners who can continue to learn on their own
in life and in their chosen careers. The
responsibility of the teacher in PBL is to provide
the educational materials and guidance that
facilitate learning. The Nursing Education Course
309
College of Nursing
NURS 216
Total
NURS 111 Body Structure and Function (8h)

Body Structure and Function is an
undergraduate level course that integrates basic
science topics in an interdisciplinary approach,
in which the essential principles of human
anatomy and physiology are presented,
including basic biochemistry, cell and tissue
studies, and an overview of all the body systems
dealing with the structure and function of the
human body and mechanisms for maintaining
homeostasis within it. Included is the study of
cells, tissues, and the integumentary, skeletal,
muscular and nervous systems, cardiovascular,
lymphatic, respiratory, digestive, and urinary
systems, as well as the concepts of
development, metabolism, fluid and electrolyte
balance, and acid-base balance are included.
Discussions
on
temperature
regulation,
metabolism as well as fluid, electrolytes and
acid-base balance are included The course also
includes an introduction to the general
pharmacological concepts.
NURS 112 Basic Concepts of Nursing Care (3h)
Basic Concepts of Nursing Care, is an
speciality, designed to provide students with basic
knowledge, skills and attitude, essential to act as
professional nurses in caring with adult patients in
different health care settings.
Acquisition of the basic concepts and
principles of nursing care is the backbone of
nursing education and an introduction of the
bachelor degree nursing student to nursing
practice and the roles of the nurse. The content of
this course emphasizes fundamental nursing

concepts which provide the foundation of all
nursing courses. Through this course the student
will be able to identify human responses relative
to an individual's health and nursing care,
describe the determinants of health and wellness
that impact these human responses, the basic
concepts and principles relevant to meeting
individual nutritional needs, fluid and electrolytes,
sleep/sensory, microbial/safety, elimination,
respiratory, circulatory/thermoregulatory and
mobility ones. Overview of nursing as a profession
and principles of documentation including
reporting and recording will be dealt with.
CMD 212 Growth and Development (5h)
Growth and Development is an undergraduate
level course that deals with with development of
the human being from conception through the
older adult. It covers physical, mental, and
social phases of development at each stage of
life. It entails the transition from cells to tissues
and organismal biology through introduction of
embryology together with physiology histology,
biochemistry, pharmacology and gross anatomy
in an integrated fashion. Among the major
themes of study are nervous and endocrine
control and regulation of body functions,
maintenance systems of the body, and
reproduction and early development, which are
integrated into nursing studies. Basic medical
genetics covering DNA and chromosome
structure and function will also be dealt with
CMD 221 Principles of Diseases (6h)
The registered nurse in a practitioner role is
expected to undertake actions that meet the
health care needs of individual patients/clients,
their families and significant others at selected
points of contact when an individual is
presenting with an episode of illness. Principles
of Diseases is an undergraduate level course
that provides the student nurse with knowledge
pertinent to aspects of pathology, microbiology,
immunology, biochemistry as well knowledge of
310
College of Nursing
will provide a two weeks overview of PBL. Also,

Understanding teaching and learning theories
and approaches is fundamental to delivering
effective teaching. This course aims to introduce
students to teaching and learning for clinical
practice. It will explore theory underpinning
teaching and learning as well as provide
opportunities for skills development in planning
and delivering teaching.
NURC 141 Health Care System (2h)

Health Care System, is an undergraduate level
nursing course that present basic information,
knowledge, skills needed by the nurse to
understand the holistic approach to healthcare for
individuals, families, groups and communities in
order to meet their growing health needs in the
21st century. The course explores factors that
mitigate against health and explores how people
conceptualize health and health promotion in a
range of contexts including Primary Health Care,
roles and responsibilities of Key team members,
multi-agency working in Public Health and Primary
Care and interface between Primary Care and
Acute Care.
The health care system course as integrated with
the growth and development and principle of
diseases courses simultaneously, will give the
students an overview of the different phases of
human life from early embryological development,
fetal growth, infancy and childhood, adolescence
and finally the inevitable ageing. This will be
followed by the actions undertaken by the nurse
practitioner to meet the health care needs of
individual patients/clients, their families and
significant others at selected points of contact
when an individual is presenting with an episode
of illness, within the principles of diseases course.
The students will become familiar with the special
features of all these issues and will also gain
knowledge about the role of a health care provider
at different phases and state of human life in
accordance to the specific needs each stage
demands. It will help students to dentify in a
practice setting, services likely to be of value in
improving the health of individuals or groups.
NURC 142 Nursing Epidemiology (2h)
Epidemiology, is an undergraduate level course in

the nursing curriculum, that presents basic
information, knowledge and skills about the
infectious disease process, mode of transmission
and most common endemic and quarantinable
diseases. Students will acquire a thorough
knowledge about concept of health and disease
and general epidemiology of infectious and noninfectious diseases, incidence, morbidity and
mortality of females and infants in KSA. Also, it
guides students to know the risk factors in
relation to puerperal sepsis and its relation to
maternal mortality, diseases prevalence in the
children under five years and in school age. This
course provides an understanding of the
fundamentals of epidemiology, surveillance
procedures and an introduction to statistical
analysis methods. Students will acquire a sound
foundation in investigative methods as relevant to
outbreaks of infectious diseases. Throughout this
course, students will recognize obligatory vaccines
during childhood in
KSA, realize and gain
knowledge about adolescent health problems
and their effects on patient, family and
community. Students will also acquire knowledge
about the health needs of elderly in the society
and health care facilities provided for them.
NURC 143 Nursing Psychosocial Science (2h)
Psychosocial Science is an undergraduate level
course, designed to enable students to acquire
knowledge, skills and attitudes necessary to help
them provide effective psychological and social
care for children, adolescents, women during
prenatal , natal, postnatal and menopausal
periods and to elderly as well. The rationale of
this course is to allow students to develop
academic and professional knowledge base
relevant to psychosocial nursing, based on
psychological and social theoretical frameworks.
Students will be able to identify how the social
context of an individuals environment
influences health state and health status and
explore ways in a practice setting in which
psychological
factors
interact
with
311
College of Nursing
clinical diagnosis by laboratory methods in

relation to organic functions and body systems.
Pharmacological basis of drugs used in
inflammation, infections and cancers will also be
dealt with.
the nurses role and responsibility in this facet of

patient care.
NURS 211 Adult Nursing I (7h)
NURS 212 Pathophysiology (2h)
This Adult Nursing I course is an undergraduate

relevant teaching / learning opportunities that
medical health problems in special areas. The
nursing process is the theoretical framework of
this course. Promoting, and maintaining physical
The pathophysiology course is an undergraduate

course designed to provide students with an in
depth study of the abnormal physiology
associated with disease, the pathologic
processes (pathogenesis) of disease and how
that disease affects the human organism. The
focus of this course is on nursing care of clients
through the adult life span with acute or chronic
dysfunctional
health
patterns
involving
respiratory,
cardiac,
renal,
nervous,
gasterointestinal
and
musculoskeletal
impairment in need of medical and/or surgical
intervention. The pathologies to be studied will
be diseases that have the greatest effect on KSA
society, with an emphasis on those complex
pathologies that are most commonly
encountered by health care providers. The study
approach will be around major body systems
and common diseases characteristic of those
major body systems focussing on changes in
normal physiology that constitutes disease with
a secondary focus on the etiologies,
manifestations, diagnosis, and treatments of
those diseases, examining the interrelated
effects of organ systems when one
pathophysiology occurs. Knowledge of normal
anatomy, histology and physiology are essential
for understanding the pathophysiology of
disease. Therefore, students are expected to
have knowledge in those areas sufficient to
understand course content in pathophysiology
NURC241 Nursing Applied Nutrition (3h)

Applied Nutrition is an undergraduate level
nursing course that deals with the study of food
in relation to health. Improved nutrition has
contributed to increased height in developed
countries. All the body systems are working in
coordination to achieve homeostasis, which
enables the individual to lead a disease-free life.
The course covers nutrients and other
substances and their action, and interaction and
balance in relation to health and diseases and
the process by which organism ingests, digests,
absorbs, transports, utilizes and excretes food
substances. Energy requirement changes related
to lifespan changes are addressed. Dietary
modulation as a therapeutic strategy to manage
intervening variables is emphasized. It also
focusses on the therapeutic and food service
aspects of the delivery of nutritional services in
hospitals and other healthcare institutions.
Essentials of normal nutrition and their
relationships to the health of individuals and
families are concepts that serve as a basis for
the development of an understanding of the
therapeutic application of dietary principles and
NURS 213 Chronicity in Health Care (2h)

This unit focuses on multi-disciplinary care and
models of care delivery with an emphasis on
ageing, chronic and life limiting illness. With the
evolving role of the nurse as primary care
providers it introduces the student to the issues
facing older people and will include healthy
ageing, the ageing process, polypharmacy,
lifestyle issues, advanced health assessment
312
College of Nursing
environmental and social factors in relation to

health and illness.
NURS 214 Adult Nursing II (7h)

This Adult Nursing II course is an undergraduate
relevant teaching learning opportunities that
surgical health problems in special areas.
Systems
studied
include
respiratory,
cardiovascular,
musculoskeletal,
urinary,
neurological and endocrine. Perioperative care
will be dealt with. Pain management and wound
assessment and integrity are explored.
Promoting,
and
maintaining
physical,
Problem formulation facilitates the integration
and application of pharmacological principles
and associated drug groups underpinned by
human pathophysiology related to the body
system under review The clinical practicum
component provides opportunities to develop
competency in a range of skills learnt in the
simulated laboratory environment as well as in
the clinical hospital settings. The nursing process
will be utilized throughout this course for both
teaching and learning enhancement.
NURS 215 Human Bioscience in Nursing (3h)
This course provides study for nervous and
endocrine control and regulation of body
functions, maintenance systems of the body,
and reproduction and early development, which
are integrated into nursing studies. The unit
develops further the critical evaluation of
evidence and an awareness of the changing
nature of knowledge in the health sciences.
Topics include the structure and functions of the
nervous system; the autonomic functions of the

nervous system the structure and function of
the respiratory system; the structure and
function of the urinary system; the structure and
function of the digestive system; the structure
and function of the reproductive system; the
major changes in embryonic development in
early pregnancy; and an introduction to
pharmacology. An integrated approach in case
scenarios provides inter-professional learning
opportunities.
NURC 242 Health Promotion and Risk
Reduction (2h)
Health promotion and risk reduction is an
undergraduate level course that enables nursing
students to gain an understanding of the
concepts of health, healthy lifestyle behavior,
health promotion, levels of prevention, diversity
and risk; factors that influence health and
healthy lifestyle behaviors; basic dynamics of
behavioral change; and substantive content in
nutrition, physical activity, and psychological
well-being. Theoretical and empirical support for
promoting health and reducing risk behaviors is
examined as a basis for understanding ways that
diverse individuals can positively influence their
own health and wellness. The role of
professional nursing in promoting health
behavior is examined. Using substantive content,
exemplar behaviors of nutrition, physical activity,
and coping and adaptive behaviors will be
examined from the students perspective to gain
an understanding of their contribution to health
and wellness. Underlying dynamics, such as selfefficacy and resilience, will be examined within
the context of the theoretical and empirical
literature and standards for the nursing
profession. Students will examine potential
strategies for influencing health behavior change
NURS 216 Health Assessment in Clinical
Practice (2h)
The Health Assessment in Clinical Practice course
is an undergraduate level nursing course that
313
College of Nursing
related to people with complex health needs and

legal and ethical issues associated with aging,
chronic illness and palliative care.
NURS 217 Perioperative Nursing (2h)

The Perioperative Nursing course will provide
student nurses with basic knowledge and clinical
skills necessary to function independently in an
entry level Perioperative Nursing position.
Course content includes principles of aseptic
technique, patient safety, universal protocol, and
the nursing process in the perioperative setting.
The course will also address ethical, moral, and
legal issues as well as specific considerations for
various types of procedures and specialty
services in the circulating role.
NURM 331 Maternal Health Nursing (7h)

Maternal health nursing is a course where the
focus continues to be on the family-centered
approach to nursing care, with a greater depth
for understanding the previously acquired
knowledge and skills on the study of women
during different cycles of their lives including
childbearing, childrearing, and menopausal
periods. Knowledge of reproductive health, safe
motherhood and gynecological aspects are
essential for the planning and implementation of
care
during
preconception,
conception,
antenatal, and postnatal periods. Knowledge
from biophysical sciences, humanities and
growth and development are essential for the
provision of holistic care for women and their
families within hospital and community settings.
Non reproductive health problems as cultural
aspects relevant to health of women will be
discussed.
NURE 321 Nursing Professional Communication
(2h)
Students in this course will focus on basic
communication skills essential for working with
clients of various ages and health care
professionals. Content includes interpersonal
communications and group dynamics. Students
will practice communication skills with
individuals, within groups, and through
electronic media.
NURE 322 Nursing Informatics (2h)
This course deals with the use of information
technology system and data standards based on
nursing informatics principles/theories. It
further deals with the utilization of clinical
information systems in the management and
decision-making of patient care. A laboratory
session shall be provided for practice
application. This course focuses on providing a
foundation on information management and
processing principles used to support the data,
information, and knowledge needs in the
provision and delivery of nursing and health
care. Topics include computer-based patient
record, healthcare and nursing languages,
minimum data sets, telehealth, computermediated decision support, education, and
research.
NURE 323 Nursing Leadership and
Management (4h)
Leadership and Management in Nursing is an
speciality , This course designed to help students
314
College of Nursing
deals with concepts, principles & techniques of

history taking using various tools, physical
examination (head to toe), psychosocial
assessment and interpretation of laboratory
findings to arrive at a nursing diagnosis on the
client across the lifespan in varied settings. It
incorporates a holistic perspective for care. and
examines fundamental knowledge and skills in
preparation for the care of individuals who have
developed health problems. Emphasis is placed
on systematic methods for health assessment of
clients and the development of appropriate plans
for care intervention and the evaluation of that
care. Clinical practice experience is an integral
component of this course and concentrates on
the attainment of fundamental client care skills.
Students are expected to develop a sound
knowledge to the nursing needs of clients.
MURM 332 Child and Adolescent Nursing (7h)

Child and Adolescent Nursing is a theoretical and
clinical course focuses on the care of children
from birth through adolescence. The effects of
acute and chronic illness on growth and
development are studied in the acute and
community care setting. Education of the child
and family on health promotion, disease
prevention, and safety issues are addressed.
Attention will be given to the implementation of
the nursing process in the care of healthy children
as well as children with different health problem.
In addition, ethical issues are discussed regarding
the relationship to the child and family, including
issues such as child abuse, informed consent, and
the impact of diverse cultural and spiritual beliefs
on health care decisions in the family.
NURE 324 Nursing Ethics (2h)
The course consists of the study of the laws,
regulations, and ethical considerations related
to the provision of safe and effective
professional nursing care; with attention given

to the impact of the political process on the
regulations surrounding the practice of nursing.
The course also focuses on ethical concepts,
theories, and values applied in ethical decisionmaking that are related to a variety of ethical
dilemmas in nursing practice and health care. It
promotes an examination of legal concepts and
regulations under which professional nurses
practice and notes that ethical and legal issues
are often not mutually exclusive. Student self
assessment is encouraged in order to facilitate
each student to become accountable and
responsible for professional, personal, ethical,
and legal growth and development within the
practice of nursing.
NURC 341 Nursing Biostatistics (2h)
Biostatistics is an undergraduate level course
designed to provide a broad overview of
biostatistics methods as well as applications
commonly used for nursing research. Topics
covered include measurement and categorizing
variables, use and misuse of descriptive statistics,
testing hypotheses, and applying commonly used
statistical tests. An emphasis will be placed on
the practical application of data to address
nursing issues, rather than theoretical and
mathematical development. Students will learn
how to choose and apply statistical tools to data
sources, when and how statistical tools can be
used to analyze data, and how to interpret
others quantitative studies.
NURS 411 Critical care nursing (7h)
Critical care Nursing, is an undergraduate level
course in the nursing specialty, designed to
provide students with basic knowledge, skills
and attitude, essential to act as professional
nurses in caring patients with cardiovascular,
respiratory, renal, neurological and gastrointestinal problems requiring critical care in
different critical care units specialty, not only
physical problems, but also psychosocial issues
for such patients.
315
College of Nursing
to develop expertise in the field of nursing

management and to work as nurse managers at
different levels in the health care system. This
course prepares the students to assume their
nursing leadership and management roles with
focus on their interactions with the health care
tea students with management theories,
organizational behavior theories and leadership
styles that are relevant to the practice of nursing
management. It explores the elements of the
management process as well as change
management strategies and their applications. It
enhances students leadership skills in
maintaining best practices and standards of
care. Nursing units in hospitals are the
framework used for the application of the
theories and knowledge base. The course is
designed to facilitate understanding on key skills
employed by nurse leaders and managers and
their development of critical analytical thinking
in evaluating and interpreting management
challenges and practices
This is an introductory course intended to equip

the nursing students with concepts, principles in
research starting from an overview of the major
phases of the research process. The course will
include discussion from formulation to
dissemination of research findings, focus on the
formulation of a research problem to the
selection of the research design, planning and
choosing the appropriate research tool for data
gathering. This course will require the
student/group to present a research proposal in
a colloquium to apply knowledge and
demonstrate skills and attitude in the
conceptual, design and planning phases of the
research process.
NURC 441 Psychiatric & Mental Health Nursing

(5h)
NURC 442 Community Health Nursing (6h)
Psychiatric and Mental Health Nursing is an

undergraduate level course which provides the
opportunity for the student to develop
fundamental knowledge, skills and attitudes
relevant to the restoration and maintenance of
optimal mental health. Students will be expected
to assess people with mental health problems
and to identify, prioritize and implement
appropriate evidence based interventions. Topics
covered in this course include: mental health
and illness, psychiatric assessment, legal and
ethical care, psychotropic medications, the
mental health system, the consumer and carer
movement, acute psychosis, mood disorders,
peri-natal
mental
disorders,
personality
disorders, eating disorders, delirium and
dementia, anxiety disorders and substancerelated disorders. Emphasis is placed upon
empowerment of the individual and caregiver
using the stress/vulnerability model and carer
based
management.
The
course
also
encompasses management of aggression, crisis
intervention, case management and the
importance of self care.
NURE 421 Nursing Research I (2h)
Community Health Nursing is an undergraduate

course that will focus on the role of the
community health nurse in working with
individuals,
families,
communities,
and
populations. It will examine in detail current
frameworks of illness prevention, health
promotion, and community development.
Nursing roles in a variety of health promotion
approaches will be examined. These will include
the medical approach, behavioral change
strategies, educational strategies, empowerment
and advocacy, and social change related to socioeconomic environment. The theoretical concepts
will be linked to a discussion of current examples
of community health promotion programs and
research
NURC 443 Geriatric Nursing (3h)
This course will focus on providing the student
with nursing principles as relevant to the care of
the geriatric patient. The nursing roles of
provider of care and member within the
discipline of nursing are emphasized as they
apply to gerontological nursing. The nursing
process serves as a guide for implementing
nursing care and evaluating human response to
actual or potential health problems of the
geriatric population. Included is a development
316
College of Nursing
The course also equips students with adequate

knowledge about various diagnostic tests
performed for critically ill patients; indication
and nursing interventions of various drugs used
in critical care; nutritional management of
critically ill patients; advanced nursing skills
required in critical care. Therefore, students will
be capable of developing a list of the patient's
problems, formulating correct nursing diagnosis,
setting realistic objectives and establishing a
relevant nursing intervention that will include
the integration of all body of knowledge that
was previously taught in the context of
professional ethical and legal issues in critical
care.
NURE 422 Nursing Research II (4h)

The course is a continuation of Nursing Research
I designed to help students to conduct research
study in nursing independently by using the
scientific method of research in designing a
research proposal and collecting data. It also will
help students to interpret the results in a
meaningful way in health related matters &
utilize research findings to improve nursing
practice.
NURS 311 Oncology Nursing (3h) Elective
Oncology nursing is an undergraduate elective
nursing course designed to assist students in
developing
expertise
and
in-depth
understanding in the field of oncology Nursing.
It will help students to develop advanced skills
for Nursing intervention in various oncological
conditions. It will enable the student to function
as oncology nurse practitioner/specialist and
provide quality care. It will further enable the
student to function as educator, manager, and
researcher in the field of oncology nursing.
NURS 312 Concepts in Pain Management (3h)
Elective
Concepts in pain management is an
to provide the opportunity for students from a
variety of disciplines to explore the issues and
concepts in caring for adults, older adults and
their families. Course content will be based on
key concepts related to guided in systems of
care; communication, roles and relationships;
pain and symptom management; legal and
ethical issues and well-being, while considering

psychosocial, spiritual diseases and cultural
aspects of care. Application of theories and
concepts across the span of adult life to include
specific medical surgical conditions. Emphasis
will be placed on integrating previously learned
cognitive,
psychomotor,
and
affective
knowledge in the care of the individual client,
her/his family, as well as groups and
communities through application of the nursing
process.
NURS 313 Renal Dialysis Nursing (3h) Elective
Renal dialysis nursing is an undergraduate
elective nursing course designed to prepare
future professional nurses with the skills and
knowledge to appropriately assess, treat, and
evaluate in a timely renal dialysis patients with
electrolyte, acid-base . Students apply the
nursing process and prioritize nursing care for a
renal dialysis patients with multiple need
imbalances. Also, they will recognize and apply
the role of the nurse in the management of
renal patient pre, intra and following dialysis.
NURS 314 Alternative and Complementary
therapy (3h) Elective
Alternative therapy is an undergraduate elective
nursing course that introduces students to a
variety of complementary and alternative
medicine topics including
homeopathy,
aromatherapy, massage therapy, acupuncture
and Traditional Chinese Medicine using an
evidence-based approach. Special attention will
be focused on plants that have been used for
the treatment of human diseases such as
cancer, heart and nervous system disorders, and
other diseases. The students will have a good
basic background in the different systems of
herbal medicine and other types of alternative
medicine.
NURM333 Reproductive Health (3h) Elective
317
College of Nursing
of a knowledge base in the areas of physiological,

sociological, psychological, and emotional
changes which occur with the aging process.
Integrated throughout the course are concepts
relating to illness prevalent in the geriatric
populace as well as therapeutic regimes.
Curriculum
threads
of
pharmacology,
communication, critical thinking, and client
teaching are integrated throughout the course.
NURM 334 Midwifery (3h) Elective

Midwifery is an undergraduate elective nursing
course designed to equip students with an
understanding in a number of subject areas that
inform midwifery theory, practice and
education. Students can possess the skills
necessary for knowledge, and developing
midwifery practice. This course aims to provide
an academic base to the understanding and
development of midwifery and maternity care.
Students in this course can be expected to
provide quality midwifery and maternity care
and promote and develop excellence in their
practice setting. This course presents specialized
knowledge of current theories and techniques in
nurse-midwifery care. The emphasis is on the
development of nurse-midwifery management
skills in the care of women from diverse
backgrounds who are at low risk for
complications of pregnancy. The focus is on
primary care, gynecological, antepartal,
intrapartal, or postpartal care and the care of
newborns. An additional focus of this course is
on well woman care throughout the lifespan.
NURE 325 Nursing Management of Human

Resources(3h) Elective
Nursing Management of Human Resources is an
to introduce students to the strategic role of
human resource management. Decisions are
made in organizations in the HR department
about who to hire, what training to give them,
how to reward them. Since the managers are
responsible for selection, training, performance
management, and compensation decisions, so
the student should be trained to identify as
future employees and future managers to
understand their responsibilities regarding HR
management. This means that the student
should do the readings, think about the issues,
and be prepared to contribute and participate in
exercises, and practicing the skills necessary to
perform to class discussions.
NURE 326 Organization and Administration for
the Nurse Manager (3h) Elective
Organization and Administration for the Nurse
Manager is an undergraduate elective nursing
course designed to introduce students to the
application of management principles in the role
of the nurse manager. Nurse managers oversee
teams of registered nurses and nurse
practitioners, often stationed on a single hospital
floor or within a specific hospital department.
Nurse managers and administrators begin their
careers as registered nurses, and, through
experience, they develop the skills necessary to
become effective managers. So, students must
be prepared to have excellent leadership and
communication skills as they will often interact
as nurse managers with hospital administrators
and health care professionals in variou
specialties.
They
should understand the
challenges facing today's health care industry
and are able to work within the system .
NURM 431 Children with special needs (3h)
Elective
318
College of Nursing
This course introduces the student nurse to the

reproductive health of males and females from
adolescence to the elderly. It provides students
the opportunity to apply critical thinking and
clinical judgments to the health care of the
childbearing family from a holistic and
humanistic perspective. The theories of nursing
and the nursing process are integrated in the
promotion and maintenance of reproductive
health and in the management of clients with
reproductive system conditions. Concurrent
clinical portion of this course offers students the
opportunity to apply theory, nursing process,
critical thinking, and to develop psychomotor
skills related to the care of clients. Practical
sessions take place in hospitals, prenatal clinics,
selected homes and schools.
NURC 444 Palliative Care (3h) Elective

Palliative Care is open to a wide range of
professionals who wish an experience in
delivering a palliative care approach. Students
will be employed in an area where the principles
of palliative care are applied in caring for
individuals with lifethreatening illness and their
families. The aim of the course is to strengthen
and develop the knowledge, skills, competencies
and attitudes of students, thus enabling them to
fulfill their highest potential in the personal,
professional and practice arena. It also aims to
make a valuable contribution to the
development of Palliative Care knowledge,
research and practice. The design is such that it
will promote collaboration between disciplines
working with individuals with palliative care
needs and their families. Students passing this
course are expected to promote and develop
excellence in their practice setting.
NURS 412 Advanced Critical Care Nursing (3h)
Elective
Advanced critical care nursing is an

undergraduate elective course designed to
equip
students with adequate knowledge
about the advanced concepts and principles of
critical nursing care specialty. Through this
course, the students will also gain familiarity
with the updated critical care devices such as
mechanical ventilators, infusion pumps,
monitors etc, and provide comprehensive
nursing care for such patients who are
connected with these devices.
NURC 445
Management of occupational
hazards (3h) Elective
Management of occupational hazards is an
undergraduate level nursing elective course
which enables students to have an overview
about the discipline of Occupational Health
Nursing (OHN). It prepares students to use their
nursing skills to focus on hazard control, health
promotion and safety for workers, employers
and communities' while working with
experienced peers as part of a multidisciplinary
team. The course will enlarge the student's
knowledge about possible career opportunities
in this regard, including positions in
management,
consulting,
research
and
education in diverse locations which include
corporate headquarters, museums, and
industries as well as hospitals. Occupational
health nurses also manage travel clinics and
employee health clinics.
NURC 446 Counseling Skills
professionals (3h) Elective
for
health
Counseling skills for health professionals is an

undergraduate elective nursing course that
provides students with a historical background to
the current practice of community counseling. In
addition, the course discusses the counselor and
client relationship in the context of the multiple
systems that influence the function and behavior
of the community counselor. Students will learn
skills necessary for counselor practice including
319
College of Nursing
Children with special needs is an undergraduate

elective nursing course designed to provide
students with a general overview of the various
categories
of
special
needs of children and adolescents. The course
will cover the theoretical foundations of working
with children, and families who are abused or
neglected in addition to children with
developmental or genetic disabilities. All
students will be divided into small groups; each
group will focus on a particular type of special
need,
relevant
assessment
procedures,
treatment objectives, current practices, and the
role of nurse/caregiver in various settings for
those children and their families. Methods of
teaching will include class notes, lectures, class
discussion, and small group exercises designed
to promote critical thinking and understanding
of the relevance of the topics to students own
work in the field.
understanding the nature of health delivery

systems, agency management, outcome oriented
treatment planning, counselor advocacy and
time management. Finally, students will learn
the process of grant writing as a critical skill in
continuing the mission of agency counseling in
communities.
NURM 432 Surgical Pediatric Nursing (3h)
Elective
College of Nursing
Surgical pediatric nursing is an undergraduate

elective nursing course designed to assist
students in developing expertise and in depth
understanding in the field of Surgery in Pediatric
Nursing. This course is primarily concerned with
the assessment, diagnosis and treatment of
surgical disorders of children, taking into
consideration the most common surgical
disorders of infants and children. The practicum
part of this course aims to provide guided
clinical training experience, knowledge, and
skills required for the preparation of nursing
students in the nursing care of newborns,
infants, and children in surgical settings. The
nursing process will be utilized in implementing
the plan of care
320
Vision:
For the college pharmacy to become a leader in
a timely and high quality pharmacy education
that is able to provide contemporary high
quality pharmaceutical education yielding
confident graduates and highly competent
pharmacists.
Mission:
To introduce up to date pharmaceutical care
practice
and
pharmaceutical
education
according to the best international standards
applicable in the area through practice and
research
oriented
patient-centered
practitioners.
Objectives:
The college of Pharmacy at Qassim University
will be working towards graduating clinical
pharmacists who are professionally confident,
motivated, and committed to achieve the
Gaining the best of available

pharmaceutical knowledge
Building the necessary pharmaceutical
and clinical skills that enable them to
provide the optimum pharmaceutical
care
Enabling themselves to be an effective
part of the health care system by
linking various basic as well as clinical
pharmaceutical sciences, and make
best use of that for the benefit of
individual patients and general
population
Continuously
developing
their
intellectual and professional abilities to
properly deal with arising challenges
locally and globally
Confidently selecting the appropriate

pharmaceutical field of clinical and/or
general pharmaceutical practice to
advance in higher education.
About:
The college of Pharmacy is one of the
exceptional Qassim University institutions which
is, as an integral part of health sciences, highly
concerned with the promotion, advancement,
and building of state-of-the-art health care
system for Saudi population
The start of the century has witnessed a rapid
advancement in pharmacy education resulting in
a number of creative therapeutic approaches for
treatment and production of medicines. Thus, it
has become inevitable for colleges of pharmacy,
including Qassim University College of Pharmacy
to coup with the demands of this tremendous
revolution and change. This emphasizes the
urgent need for advancements in strategic
planning and programs of the college, well
trained academic staff, establishment of
excellent laboratories, scientific research, and
graduate programs for quality research. All of
these top our priority agendas that we are
certain to achieve since the Kingdom is
determined to rekindle and spread the noble
virtue of learning through the generous funding
made available for the advancement of
education in the country.
The Pharmacist profession is no longer confined
to the classical sale of prescribed medicines.
Instead, todays pharmacist constitutes an
essential membership in all health care systems
and industry including treatment options and
planning, pharmaceutical industries, drug and
poison regulation, information, and monitoring
centers, research and development, and
consultancy.
The demand for pharmacists has been
increasing steadily in the market; however,
there is still a shortage of Saudi pharmacists.
321
College of Pharmacy
College of Pharmacy
The college strategy is focused on three plans;

namely, the student, the program, and the
society. The student is intensively trained and
well educated to reflect the attributes of
university graduates in terms of ethics,
punctuality, and entertainment of highest
quality knowledge that makes him go beyond
confined disciplinary expertise or technical
knowledge. The program courses are designed
based on timely and world-class approaches in
teaching and learning, and are consistent to
ACPE )American Council of Pharmaceutical
Education). With regard to society, the college
emphasizes the role of awareness and society
education in use and storage of drugs.
Masood Alam Khan
We always hope for success in our service to our

university and that our strategic plans would
lead to advanced level education
Riaz Ahmad Khan
Assistant Prof.
Ahmed Fathelrahman
Assistant Prof.
Osama H Abdalla Associate Prof.

Kamaleldin B Said
Associate Prof.
Manal Sulum Omar
Associate Prof.
Sanaa Ahmed
Associate Prof.
Shalam Hussain
Ibrahim Ali Awwad
Associate Prof.
Arif Khan
Assistant Prof.
Syed Imam Rabbani
Doctor
Umrana Mirza
Assistant Prof.
Syeda A. Farhana
Assistant Prof.
College of Pharmacy
Degree:
Associate Prof.
Bachelor
Mahmoud S Soliman
Assistant Prof.
Programs:
Yaser A AL-worafi
Assistant Prof.
Mostafa M Taha
Technician
PharmD program
Faculty Members:
Azza El Sherbiny Assistant Prof.
Mohammed Eajaz
Assistant Prof.
Sivakumar Gowder
Assistant Prof.
Hamzah Maswadeh
Assistant Prof.
Ayman Allahham Assistant Prof.

Hassan Al-shiyab Res & Teaching Assistant
Ehab S Elkhayat Associate Prof.
Bala Y Muhammad
Associate Prof.
Akram Mohammad
Associate Prof.
Monika k Sachdeva
Associate Prof.
Zakir Ullah
Lecturer
Abuzar Osman
Lecturer
Sana Fatima Khan
Lecturer
Shamshir Khan
Lecturer
Huda B H Ahmed
Lecturer
Nahid Abbas
Lecturer
Adel M Ahmed
Lecturer
Mohamad Yusuf
Lecturer
Mamoon H Syed
Lecturer
Omar Khan
Lecturer
322
Study Plan:
Analytical
Chemistry
Level 1
Total
Course Code
Course Title
101ARAB
Arabic
Languages
Skills
16
Credit
Level 3
135MATH
Medical
Terminology
210PHG
Mathematics
for Pharmacy
Human
Biology
Organic
Chemistry
Human
Anatomy and
Histology
106BIOL
103PHC
111ANAT
Total
17
Credit
Pre.req.
Biochemistry-1
103PHC
211PHG
Physiology-1
106BIOL
212PHT
Pharmaceutics1
135MATH
215PHC
Pharmacognosy
103PHC,
122PHC
216PHP
Computer for
Health Sciences
135MATH
217PHP
Pharmacy
Practice
120PHP
218PHG
General
Immunology
106BIOL
Total
17
Level 2
Course
Code
Course Title
120PHP
Intro. To
Pharmacy
Profession
101 IC
Introduction to
Islamic Culture
121PHP
Biostatistics
135MATH
122PHC
Pharm. Organic
Chemistry
103PHC
123PHT
Pharmaceutical
Microbiology
106BIOL
124PHC
Pharm.
103PHC
Credit
Pre.req.
Level 4
Course
Code
Course Title
220PHG
Credit
Pre.req.
Biochemistry11
210PHG
222PHG
Physiology-11
211PHG
225PHC
Med.Chemistry1
122PHC,
Pharmacology1
224PHG
124PHC
210PHG
323
College of Pharmacy
101 PHP
Course
Code
Course Title
225PHG
Molecular
Pharmacology
106BIOL
223PHT
Pharmaceutics11
212PHT,
135MATH
Total
17
Total
16
Course
Code
Course Title
Cre
dit
Pre.req.
330PHP
Pharmacotherapy
-1
310PHP
334PHG
Pharmacology-IV
324PHG
333PHG
Toxicology
224PHG
335PHT
Pharmaceutical
Biotechnology
212PHP
336PHT
Basic
Pharmacokinetics
135MAT
H
337PHT
Dispensing of
medication
323PHT
332PHC
Radiopharmacy
320PHC
338PHG
Pharmacogenomi
cs
324PHG
Total
17
Level 7
Level 7
315PHC
Course Title
Med. Chemistry
Credit
Pre.req.
225PHC
Pathophysiology1
314PHG
Pharmacology11
224PHG
315PHG
Chemotherapy
224PHG
310PHP
316PHC
Natural Products
102 IC
Islam & Costr. of

Society
Total
16
222PHG
215PHC
Level 6
Course
Code
Course Title
327PHC
Pharmacopeial
Analysis
Credit
Pre.req.
Level 8
124PHC
Course
Code
Course Title
345PHT
320PHC
Medical
Chemistry-III
315PHC
322PHP
PathophysiologhII
310PHP
323PHT
Pharmaceutics-III
223PHT
324PHG
Pharmacology-III
314PHG
325PHP
Scientific Writing
& Seminar-I
216PHP
Credi
t
Pre.req
.
Biopharmaceutics
335PHT
342PHP
Clinical
Communication
Skills
341PHP
Ethics in
Pharmacy
102 IC
340PHP
Pharmacotherapy
-II
330PHP
324
College of Pharmacy
Course
Code
344PHT
346PHP
103ARA
B
Drug and Poison

Info Serv. And
literature
evaluation
Over the counter

drugs
Patient
Assessment &
First aid
Expository
Writing
Total
17
216PHP
335PHT
Course Title
Credi
t
Pre.req
.
410PHP
Pharmacotherapy
-III
340PHP
Pharmacoecono
mics &
epidemiology
412PHP
Pharmacy
management
341PHP
413PHP
Evidence based
pharmacy
343PHP
414PHP
Psychology and
Health
106BIO
L
416PHP
Appl.
Pharmacokinetics
336PHT
103 IC
The Islamic
Economic System
Total
16
411PHP
Course Title
Clinical
Nutrition
135MAT
H
426PHP
Pharmacy law
421PHP
Scientific
writing &
Seminar-2
104 IC
Fundamentals
of the Islamic
Political System
424PHG
Drug of abuse
334PHG
420PHP
Pharmacothera
py-IV
410PHP
425PHP
Graduation
Project
343PHP
Total
16
325PHP
343PHP
Course Description:
Credi
Course Name: Medical Terminology

Code & Number: 102 PHP
Level: 1
Course Description: Medical Terminology is a
specialized language for the health care team so
that they may communicate in concise and
accurate way. The course introduces the most
common & important terminology in the fields
of medicine, dentistry and pharmacy based on
the main disciplines of medicine, dentistry and
pharmacy. The course will be conducted in
simple, easy & enjoyable interactive lectures. It
is an integrated course that will be shared by the
colleges of medicine, dentistry and pharmacy.
Course Name: Mathematics for Pharmacy
Code & Number: 135 MATH
Level: 1
Level 10
Course
423PHP
222PH
G
Level 9
Course
Code
Code
Pre.req.
325
College of Pharmacy
343PHP
Course Name: Human Biology

Code & Number: 106 BIOL
Level: 1
Course Description: This course serves as an
introduction to the basic principles of biology
with emphasis on structure and function at the
molecular and cellular levels. Topics include cell
structure and function, cellular respiration,
genetics and molecular biology. Much of
laboratory is devoted to a detailed study of the
histology, anatomy and physiology of body
Systems, for example, digestive, urogenital,
urinary system.
Course Name: Organic Chemistry
Code & Number: 103 PHC
Level: 1
Course Description:
This course is a comprehensive introduction in
all aspects of organic chemistry, for freshmen
students. The course will qualify the students
and prepare them with organic chemistry
knowledge to further their studies.
Course Name: Human Anatomy and Histology
Code & Number: 111 ANAT
Level: 1
Course Description: This course is intended to

introduce the student to the basic knowledge
regarding the structural anatomy and histology
of the various body Systems and organs. The
relation between the various systems and
organs will be outlined and discussed. Students
will also be introduced to basics of cytology,
general histology and organohistology of the
human body systems. In the practical classes,
the students will be using simulated plastic
human models to implement what is taught in
the theoretical lecture
Course Name: Introduction to Pharmacy
Profession
Level: 2
Course Description: This course is designed to
provide students with a broad perspective on
pharmacy as a profession in a changing health
care environment. Students will learn to think
critically about health and health care from the
patient's perspective and about the historical
and philosophical contexts of the profession as
it continues to evolve toward patient focused
care.
Course Name: Biostatistics
Code & Number: 121PHP
Level: 2
provide students with a basic understanding of
biostatistics. The course covers of descriptive
statistics with concepts of dispersion, central
tendency measurements. Graphical and tabular
displays are also covered. Simple inferential
statistics involving probability, sampling,
confidence intervals and tests of significance are
presented. Simple linear regression and
correlations are also covered. Understanding
concepts and rational for various methods are
emphasized with use of computer statistical
software (such as Excel, SPSS) for graphs and
calculations.
Course
Name:
Chemistry
Pharmaceutical
Organic
326
College of Pharmacy

provide calculus for students of pharmacy who
Intend to apply these concepts in their
professional course work. Students are expected
to develop an understanding of the derivative as
an instantaneous rate of change and use this
definition to find derivatives of many types of
functions and combinations of these functions
including algebraic, trigonometric, exponential
and logarithmic functions.
Then they are
expected to compute the maxima and minima of
some functions and plot them as well. They also
will develop the idea that integration is the
inverse operation to differentiation and will be
able to familiar with the integration techniques.
Students are also exposed to linear first-order
differential equations and their applications in
health sciences.
Course Name: Pharmaceutical Microbiology

Code & Number: 123 PHT
Level: 2
Course Description: The course provides an
overview of basic, and Medical Microbiology.
The study will be focused on the biological
characteristics of different groups of microbes
(Bacteria, Rickettsiae, Mycoplasma, Chlamydiae,
Viruses and Fungi); classification, nomenclature,
structure, nutrition, metabolism, cultivation,
growth and genetics. In addition, study of
etiological agent(s), mode of infection,
pathogenesis, laboratory diagnosis, prevention,
control, and treatment of the most medically
important infectious diseases.
Course Name: Pharmaceutical Analytical
Chemistry
Level: 2
Course Description: Analytical chemistry is a
measurement science consisting of a set of
powerful ideas and methods that are useful in
all fields of science and medicine. It may be
defined as the science and art of determining
the composition of materials in terms of the
elements or compounds contained in them. The
course will cover both chemical methods of
analysis with emphasis on volumetric category;
and physicochemical methods of analysis
(instrumental methods). Each part will then
cover several topics. The course will cover the
principle of each method, mathematical
treatments, laws, calculation, advantages and
limitations and finally, the applications of each
method. More attention will be given to its
application in the field of pharmaceutical

analysis
Course Name: Biochemistry-1
Code & Number: 210 PHG
Level: 3
Course Description: This course covers the
following topics in biochemistry: amino acids
and proteins, enzymes, biological oxidation,
porphyrins and nucleic acids. Clinical
correlations and the action of certain
therapeutic as well as toxic agents are explained
whenever possible.
Course Name: Physiology-I
Level: 3
Course Description: The course describes the
physiology of cell membrane, nerve and muscle,
autonomic nervous system, blood and
cardiovascular system with emphasis on the
human body.
Course Name: Pharmaceutics-I
Level: 3
Course Description: This subject is designed to
introduce first year pharmacy students to the
breadth and depth of the discipline of pharmacy
and pharmaceutics. In this course, the principles
of chemistry, physics and mathematics are
applied to the pharmaceutical sciences. Acidbase, solubility, partitioning, reaction kinetics
and stabilization of formulations will be
considered.
Course Name: Pharmacognosy
Level: 3
Course Description: Pharmacognosy course
aims to provide the knowledge and
understanding of the medicinal plants and to
encourage students to take a broad and
continuing interest in medicinal plants with
emphasis to those available in the Saudi Arabia.
327
College of Pharmacy

Level: 2
Course Description: This course will continue
covering the organic functional groups that were
not covered in the previous organic chemistry.
This will include the rest of aliphatic compounds,
aromatic
compounds
and
heterocyclic
chemistry, which will prepare the student
properly to medicinal chemistry.
Course Name: Computers for Health Sciences

Level: 3
provide the student with knowledge about
advanced computer technology and its
application in the healthcare field. It will also
introduce the student to technological
innovations in healthcare informatics as a
discipline, clinical decision-support systems,
medical
expert
systems,
telemedicine,
telepharmacy and Internet health applications.
The course will emphasize the use of
computerized health information retrieval
systems, the advanced features of the Internet
information resources, patient-related programs
and data manipulation software for application
in profession -related tasks.
Course Name: Molecular Pharmacology
Level: 3
Course Description: The course deals with the
molecular pharmacological aspects of action of
neurotransmitters and other endogenous
substances as well as the drugs affecting their
activity. The interactions of these endogenous
molecules with their specific receptors or
enzymes shall be covered as well as the
molecular effects of their respective agonists
and antagonists. Details of the mechanisms of
action, SAR, stereochemistry, and metabolism of
these agents shall be presented.
Course Name: General Immunology
Level: 3
Course Description: This course is an
introductory course on basic principles of
immunology focusing on the cellular and
molecular processes involved in innate (nonspecific) immunity and adaptive (specific)
immunity. The course includes descriptions of
the main elements of immunity, immune

responses1 development of immune cells,
interactions between humeral and cell mediated
immunity, and pathology resulting from immune
responses.
Course Name: Biochemistry-ll
Level: 4
Course Description: This course deals with the
metabolism of carbohydrates, lipids, proteins
and minerals. Clinical correlations and the action
of certain therapeutic as well as toxic agents are
explained, whenever possible. Much of the
laboratory is devoted to the determination of
blood and urine biochemical parameters.
Course Name: Physiology-Il
Level: 4
Course Description: With an emphasis on the
human body, this course describes the
physiology of respiratory, renal, digestive, and
central nervous system.
Course Name: Pharmacy Practice
Level: 4
introduce the student to the various roles
played by pharmacists In hospital and
community settings, and the ways in which
drugs are compared, selected1 and used in the
health care environment. The course also
presents
comprehensive
principles
of
contemporary institutional pharmacy operation
systems (e.g., a unit dose drug distribution
system, etc). The course will emphasize the
challenges that face pharmacy practice and the
Impact of automation in hospital and
community pharmacies.
Course Name: Medicinal Chemistry-I
Level: 4
328
College of Pharmacy
Introduce the student to the different types of

complementary and alternative medicine.
Course Name: Pharmacology-I

Level: 4
introduce the student to the general principles
of pharmacology with regard to the general
pharmacological terms and the principles of
drugs administration, absorption, distribution,
metabolism and excretion. It also deals with the
drugs actions and mechanisms. It covers all
aspects of the autonomic nervous system and
autacoids. The practical part of the course deals
with the verification of the actions of drugs
studied in the theoretical part of the courseusing isolated tissues from rodents and
anaesthetized animals.
Course Name: Pharmaceutics-II
Level: 4
Course Description: This course provides an
understanding of various dosage forms and drug
delivery systems, and how medicinal and
pharmaceutical substances are incorporated
into them. The fundamental principles of
interfacial phenomena, dispersion system,
rheology and their impacts on the preparation
and design of stable dosage forms will be
discussed.
Course Name: Medicinal Chemistry-II

Level: 5
Course Description: This course will handle the
relationship of chemical structure to biological
activity and the general structural features
required for a specific mechanism of action.
Topics of discussion will include the effects of
molecular modifications on receptor binding,
distribution and metabolism as they relate to
clinical response. Although the course outline
reflects a pharmacological classification, the
material covered will deal principally with the
chemical, structure and biophysical properties
as related to drug action at the molecular level
and will relate to therapeutic use.
Course Name: Pathophyslology-1
Level: 5
Course Description: Pathophysiology is the
study of disorders or altered functions, i.e. the
physiologic mechanisms altered by disease in
the
living
organism.
The
study
of
pathophysiology is essential to understand the
rationale for diagnosis and therapeutic
interventions in disease processes. The
framework is designed to present the general
concepts of disease processes. Then, the various
dysfunctions of an organ or organ system are
examined including cardiovascular, respiratory,
and gastrointestinal disorders and infectious
diseases.
Course Name: Pharmacology-ll
Level: 5
Course Description: This course is directed to
provide the student with knowledge regarding
the principles of neurochemical transmission in
the brain and spinal cord together with the
various neurotransmitters and their respective
receptors. It provides the student with
knowledge
regarding
the
general
actions,mechanisms and uses of general
329
College of Pharmacy
Course Description: As a result of advances

made in synthesis and separation methods and
in biochemical techniques, a more rational
approach to drug discovery has been possible,
namely one which involves the element of
design. This course handles chemical and
medicinal aspects of drug design, drug
development and drug action. Only the
chemistry and biochemistry background
information pertinent to understanding the
topics in this course are discussed. The course
focuses on a drug molecule and relates the
physicochemical properties of the drug
molecules to its absorption, distribution,
metabolism, and interaction with a receptor to
give a physiological response.
Course Name: Chemotherapy

Level: 5
provide the student with the general principles
of antimicrobial and antiparasites therapy. It
also deals with the study of antineoplastic drugs.
The course deals with the pharmacological
aspects of those chemotherapeutic agents that
are produced naturally, synthetically or
semisynthetically. The studies cover their
spectrum of activity, mechanisms, and side
effects when they are used in treatment of
bacterial, fungal or viral infections. Part of the
course also deals with those chemotherapeutic
agents that are currently used for treatment of
malaria, schistosomiasis, amoebiasis, filariasis,
ascariasis, oxyuriasis... etc. Part of the course is
directed towards the study of some
antineoplastic drugs used for treatment of
leukemia, solid or diffuse tumors.
Course Name: Natural products chemistry
Level: 5
Course Description: The course aims to provide
pharmacy students with a primary knowledge of
phytoceuticals and enable the student to gain an
understanding of the following general areas of
study: The different classes of the natural
compounds Methods of extraction, isolation,
identification, assay and pharmacological

activity and uses of natural compounds.
Course Name: Pharmacopeal Analysis
Level: 6
Course Description: The course is designed to
teach the student how to use the
Pharmacopoeia (specially the most famous
ones: USP, BP and EP). First, the student is
entitled to know how to identify pharmaceutical
compounds, either using chemical tests or
instrumental methods. Second, to check the
purity of these compounds and identifying the
impurities, whether general impurities (applying
limit tests) or related compounds. Third, how to
assay pharmaceutical compounds, either per se
or in pharmaceutical preparations. Special
interest will be given to the most frequently
adopted methods namely: potentiometric nonaqueous titration of the raw materials,
spectrophotometric analysis of the drugs In their
dosage forms and finally HPLC for both checking
the purity of the compounds and analysis of
their dosage forms. The course also includes
introduction to statistical evaluation of data.
Course Name: Medicinal Chemistry-III
Level: 6
Course Name: Pathophysiology-Il
330
College of Pharmacy
anaesthetics, central nervous system stimulants

and depressants,analgesics, antipsychotics,
antiepileptics,
antitussives,
antiemetics,
antidepressants,
antimaniacs,
and
antiparkinsonians. It also provides information
on the major side effects of the various drug
classes. The drugs will be analysed to permit the
choice of a certain agent for the treatment of a
certain disease. In the practical part of the
course the students will be allowed to perform
experiments in conscious animals (rodents) to
verify the actions of the drugs they studied in
the theoretical part of the course.
Course Name: Pharmaceutics-III

Level: 6
Course Description: Pharmaceutical products
are generally required to be free from
contamination with organisms. Such organisms
may cause spoilage by adversely affecting the
appearance of composition of pharmaceutical
products and may cause serious adverse effects
in patients. This course covers the principles and
techniques involved in the formulation,
preparation and evaluation of sterile dosage
forms. Methods of sterilization and applications
of aseptic techniques will also be studied.
Course Name: Pharmacology-III
Level: 6
Course Description: This course is concerned
with the study of the general actions and
mechanisms of actions of the various hormones
and the diseases that follow disturbances in
their normal release. Stress will be given to
utilization of the hormones themselves or their
synthetic analogues in the treatment of the
disorders. Another part of the course deals with
the mechanisms that are involved in the
appearance of hyperlipoproteinemias and
thrombi in the human body and the
precipitation of atherosclerosis and thrombosis.
Drugs and their mechanisms in the treatment of
these disorders will be discussed. The side
effects of the named drugs will be outlined.

Furthermore, the course involves the study of
the causes and the topical treatment of some
skin diseases such as vitiligo, psoriasis,
chloasma, ephelis, acne vulgaris1 warts, tinea
corporis, tinea cruris, tinea versicolor and tinea
pedis (Athlete's Foot). The mechanisms and the
limitations of the various drugs used will be
discussed. A certain part of the course deals
with the uses and mechanisms of action of some
antidiarrhoeals and laxatives.
Course Name: Scientific Writing and Seminar-I
Level: 6
Course Description: The purpose of this course
is to introduce basics of scientific presentation
and discussions of current issues in the
profession of clinical pharmacy. Emphasis will be
on general evaluation of drug literature, articles
for proper research, design and data
interpretation including use of multimedia,
slides, overheads, handouts and other visual
aids as well as methods of answering questions
from the audience
Course Name: Pharmacotherapy-l
Level: 7
is
to
integrate
the
pathophysiologic
abnormalities of disease states (Cardiovascular,
Pulmonary, and Infectious Diseases) with
concepts of drug action and therapy. State-ofthe-art pharmacotherapy will be reviewed with
pertinent pathophysiology and pharmacology.
Emphasis will be placed on drug selection,
dosing regimen design1 and therapeutic drug
monitoring to assess the attainment of
therapeutic efficacy and avoidance of adverse
reactions.
Course Name: Pharmacology-lV
Level: 7
331
College of Pharmacy
Level: 6
study of disorders or altered functions I.e. the
the
living
organism.
The
study
of
framework is designed to discuss various
dysfunctions of an organ or organ system
including renal, endocrine, musculoskeletal,
hematology and oncology and central nervous
system disorders.
Course Name: Toxicology

Level: 7
with the illustration of the general principles of
management of poisoning with dugs, chemicals
and heavy metals. It also deals with the general
mechanisms through which toxic substances
exert their effects at the molecular and cellular
level. Stress is given to those poisonings
following drug allergies and those that result
from interaction of chemicals with proteins,
enzyme, receptors or the genome. Part of the
course is concerned with the role of free radicals
in induction of diseases. Furthermore, the
student will be enlightened about those
intoxications resulting from exposure to
environmental pollutants, heavy metals, drugdrug interactions and drug4ood interactions.
The course also covers the mechanisms of
teratogenicity, mutagenicity and carcinogenicity.
Course Name: Pharmaceutical Biotechnology
Level: 7
Course Description: The student's basic
biochemistry and pharmacy education will be
expanded
with
current
concepts
in
biochemistry, molecular biology, analytical
techniques, drug development, delivery and
formulation relevant to the use and

development
of
biotechnology-derived
products, including protein and nucleic-based
pharmaceuticals. The course provides extensive
coverage of both basic science and applications
of biotechnology-produced pharmaceutical,
with special emphasis on their clinical use and
applications.
Course Name: Basic Pharmacokinetics
Level: 7
Course Description: The course will introduce
students
to
the
basic
concepts
of
pharmacokinetics with a special emphasis on
the
different
pharmacokinetic
models.
Absorption, distribution, metabolism and
excretion of dugs and calculations of
pharmacokinetic parameters of these processes
will be discussed.
Course Name: Dispensing of Medications
Level: 7
Course Description: In this course, students will
apply previously acquired knowledge to the
practice of dispensing medications. Comparative
evaluation of commonly prescribe ed and some
non-prescribed drugs will be discussed. Different
criteria used for selection of drugs and
pharmaceutical products will be emphasized.
Drug interactions and prescriptions for different
groups of patients will be discussed.
Course Name: Radiopharmacy
Level: 7
Course Description: This course will handle
Radiopharmacy as an area of specialty of
pharmacy practice. This will deal with the
atomic and nuclear structure and the reasons
that lead to the phenomenon of radioactivity.
This also includes the role of the radiopharmacy
and radiopharmacist in the production and
dispensing the radiopharmaceuticals and their
332
College of Pharmacy
Course Description: This course complements

studies to what has been studied in the previous
courses of pharmacology. It deals with drugs
that affect the immune1 ocular and nasal
Systems together with those drugs that aid in
the diagnosis of some diseases. The major part
of the course deals with recent treatments of
certain diseases and disorders such as
hemorrhoids, migraines, premature and
complicated deliveries, varicose veins, prostate
hypertrophy and erectile dysfunction. It also
deals with discussions of the various means
available for contraception in both males and
females together with the general principles of
gene therapy.
Course Name: Pharmacogenomics

Level: 7
Course Description: This course provided
pharmacy students with an understanding of
pharmacogenetics ranging from genetic
principles and the inheritance of complex traits
to specific examples of pharmacogenomics in
drug therapy.
Course Name: Biopharmaceutics
Level: 8
Course Description: This course will deal with
the effects of the physicochemical properties of
the drug, the formulation factors1 the dosage
form, the route of administration and the
physiological factors on the rate and extent of
systemic drug absorption. Oral and some other
non-oral delivery systems will be covered in this
course. Graphical and mathematical data
analysis will be employed throughout the curse
using on appropriate computer software (e.g.
Excel).
Course Name: Clinical Communication Skills
Level: 8
Course Description: This course emphasizes
specific tools and techniques for improving
listening skills, delivering effective messages and
bridging different communication styles.
Through interactive lectures, tutorial and
simulations students work in small or large
groups to apply communication tools and
strategies.
Course Name: Ethics in Pharmacy
Level: 8
Course Description: This course introduces the
student to the basic principles of ethics as they
pertain to health care in general and pharmacy
practice In particular. This course seeks to clarify

the obligations of pharmacists to use their
knowledge and skills for the benefit of others to
be fair and just in their services to the public. It
also serves as a tool for self-evaluation of
professional relations with other health care
givers in view of pharmacy law.
Course Name: Pharmacotherapy-Il
Level: 8
integrate the pathophysiologic abnormalities of
disease
states
(Gastroenterology,
Malnutrition/Nutritional
Support,
and
Nephrology) with concepts of drug action and
therapy. State-of-the-art pharmacotherapy will
be reviewed with pertinent pathophyslology and
pharmacology. Emphasis will be placed on drug
selection, dosing regimen design and
therapeutic drug monitoring to assess the
attainment of therapeutic efficacy and
avoidance of adverse reactions.
Course Name: Drug and Poison Information
Services
Level: 8
Course Description: The theoretical part is
designed to introduce the students to the
concept of drug Information, functions3 and
how to establish drug information centers. In
addition this part will expose the students to the
theoretical background required to locate,
evaluate and communicate drug information
using mainly secondary and tertiary resources.
In this case the student will be taught types of
literatures, classification of requests, and how to
prepare, formulate, and communicate an
answer. In the practical part, the students will
also be exposed to the various types of drug and
poison information requests, and be involved in
preparation of written response to each using
the official request form used by the center. In
addition, the student will learn how to write
drug monograph. Furthermore the student will
333
College of Pharmacy
use in diagnosis and treatment of various

specific illnesses.
Course Name: Over the Counter Drugs

Level: 8
Course Description: This course enables
pharmacy students to follow health care
practitioners, and consumers by making
available comprehensive, convenient and easyto-use compilation of information on
nonprescription drugs and drug products.
Students practice interviewing and counseling
skills, and continue to develop their skills in over
the counter drugs (OTC) counseling with new
topics, including some alternative medicine.
Emphasis will be placed on mechanism(s) of
action of the various drug classes, body
system(s) affected, clinical manifestations of
problems and the resulting adverse effects.
Course Name: Patient Assessment and First Aid
Level: 8
introduce the student to various physical
assessment techniques and tools necessary to
monitor drug therapy and assess common
complaints that may be experienced in the
delivery of pharmaceutical care. Formal lectures
will be conducted to introduce student to
equipment and techniques necessary to conduct
physical examination. Also, students will be able
to understand signs and symptoms and first aid
care for commonly encountered life-threatening
situations and emergencies.
Course Name: Pharmacotherapy-Ill
Level: 9
Course Description: This course is formulated to
disease states (Endocrinology1 Neurology1
Psychiatry, and Reproductive system) with
concepts of drug action and therapy. State-of-
the-art pharmacotherapy will be reviewed with

Emphasis will be placed on drug selection1
reactions.
Course Name: Pharmacoeconomics and
Pharmacoepidemiology
Level: 9
Course Description: This course Is designed to
provide a framework for the understanding and
application of the concepts and techniques of
pharmacoeconomics
and
pharmacoepidemology. The course also
emphasizes the importance of utilizing
Pharmacoeconomic and Pharmacoepidemiology
results when evaluating drug safety. It also
enables students to explore and assess vital
topics and trends regarding spontaneous
reporting systems, adverse drug reactions, and
post marketing surveillance (PMS).
Course Name: Pharmacy Management
Level: 9
introduce the principles of management as they
applied to professional pharmacy practice. The
course is intended to provide pharmacy
students with a basic understanding of the
practical aspects of managing a pharmacy
operation. This Includes the basic functions of
planning, organizing, directing, coordinating,
and controlling as they relate to fiscal,
personnel, and merchandize management. In
addition, the course will Introduce the student
to the principles and methods of human
resources management by teaching topics such
as recruitment, selection, orientation, training,
motivation, management by objectives, and
performance evaluation. It will also introduce
the student to principles and methods of
financial and operational management such as
334
College of Pharmacy
be taught and exposed to the various types of

secondary and tertiary resources and to the
searching technique required for each type.
Course Name: Evidence-Based Pharmacy

Level: 9
provide the understanding of the concept and
skills required to practice evidence--based
pharmacy (EBP) and pharmacotherapy. Handon-experience will include use of evidence-based databases, critical appraisal and how to
calculate and interpret statistical indicators used
in pharmaceutical and medical literature.
Course Name: Psychology & Health
Code & Number: 414 IC
Level: 9
Course Description: The first part of this course
will survey the major fields of psychology. Topics
will include cognition, personality, development,
social interaction, and abnormal behavior The
course will explore current approaches to
psychology, demonstration of the biological,
cognitive, and socio-cultural approaches to
psychology
combine
to
provide
a
comprehensive view of human behavior. The
second part of the course will focus on the
interaction of mind and body as it affects
physical and psychological well being. It
discusses the relationship between health care
provider and the patient as well as the role of
social support in disease etiology. This part of
the course will cover topics such as: Stress and
coping,
adjustment
to
illness,
psychoneuroimmmunology, and pain and pain
management.
Course Name: Applied Pharmacokinetics
Level: 9
provide the student with exposure to the
application
of
pharmacokinetic
and
pharmacodynamic principles of a variety of drug
classes to clinical situations. The first few
lectures will provide a review of clinical

pharmacokinetic principles and provide
background for the student to develop an
approach to therapeutic drug monitoring.
Situations and clinical conditions that are likely
to alter the concentration: time and/or
concentration: effect relationship will be
emphasized. The remainder of the course will
deal more specifically with the most common
drug classes where therapeutic drug monitoring
is applied in clinical practice.
Course Name: Clinical Nutrition& IV admix.
Level: 10
Course Description: Parenteral administration
of medications, once restricted to hospitals, is
becoming more common in all levels of patient
care. Sterile products preparation has expanded
outside of hospitals to both community
pharmacies
and
specialized
sterile
manufacturing centers. In this course, students
will become familiar with the requirements for
safe and efficient preparation of intravenous (IV)
admixtures, total parenteral nutrition (TPN), and
chemotherapy. He will learn how to use
appropriate aseptic technique to prepare some
types of parenteral admixtures.
Course Name: Pharmacy Law
Level: 10
materials of the pharmacy law, which deals with
the regulations of pharmacy practice and
trading in medicinal and pharmaceutical
products Issued by the Council of Ministers
letter number 335 and dated 7/3/1398 H and Its
various explanations. The course is one hour,
delivered by lecture through which the
followings will be discussed: pharmacy practice
Including registration of pharmacists and their
assistants,
pharmacies,
wholesale
drug
distribution
warehouses,
pharmaceutical
companies
and
Industries,
medicines
registration,
pharmaceutical
companies
registration and their scientific offices,
335
College of Pharmacy
principles of accounting, financial statements,

purchasing, and inventory control.
Course Name: Scientific Writing and Seminar-II

Level: 10
provide the student with an overview of the
current conventions and practices used in
scientific and technical writing in the field of
pharmacy and other health-related disciplines.
This course is considered as an intensive
introduction on how to prepare, write, edit and
review pharmacy research communications,
pharmacy reports, and patient education
materials. The student will also learn how to
present and convey his ideas with conviction,
poise and style. A limited questionnaire-type
field research project will be conducted by
students as a part of the course requirements.
Students will apply their acquired knowledge in
coding, recoding and analyzing collected data to
formulate, write, and present the results.
Course Name: Drugs of Abuse
Level: 10
the different cases of drugs of abuse whether
they are legal or illegal drugs. All these drugs
share the general properties of being able to
induce habituation, tolerance, dependence, and
addiction. The various factors that tend to
predispose youth to drug abuse will be
discussed together with the scientific strategies
to prevent youth from indulging in the habit of
drug abuse. The major part of the course will be
directed for discussion of the pharmacological
action, mechanisms and adverse reactions of
the drugs of abuse. Furthermore, the
discussions will include the various methods
available for treatment of addiction and
prevention of precipitation of the withdrawal
symptoms. Both lectures and seminars will be
utilized maximally to achieve the objectives of

the course.
Course Name: Pharmacotherapy-lV
Level: 10
Integrate the pathophysiologic abnormalities of
disease
states
(Oncology,
Hematology,
Dermatology, Rheumatology, Transplantation,
and Pediatrics) with concepts of drug action and
be reviewed with pertinent pathophysiology and
selection, dosing regimen design, and
Course Name: Graduation Project
Level: 10
Course Description: Topics will include research
design, data collection,
analysis, and
interpretation and formulation of research
results and describe their process in oral session
presentation.
336
College of Pharmacy
transitional provisional rules, penalties, and

regulations of poisons, narcotics, and psychiatric
medications under control.
College of Pharmacy in
Unaizah
Vision:
To introduce up to date pharmaceutical care

practice
and
pharmaceutical
education
according to the best international standards
applicable in the area through practice and
research
oriented
patient-centered
practitioners.
Objectives:
The college of Pharmacy at Qassim University
will be working towards graduating clinical
pharmacists who are professionally confident,
motivated, and committed to achieve the
Gaining the best of available

pharmaceutical knowledge
Building the necessary pharmaceutical
and clinical skills that enable them to
provide the optimum pharmaceutical
care
Enabling themselves to be an effective
part of the health care system by
linking various basic as well as clinical
pharmaceutical sciences, and make
best use of that for the benefit of
individual patients and general
population
Continuously
developing
their
intellectual and professional abilities to
properly deal with arising challenges
locally and globally
The college of Pharmacy in Unaizah is a new

college which is affiliated to Qassim University.
Its curriculum is identical to that of the College
of Pharmacy in the main campus. It is an integral
part of health sciences, highly concerned with
the promotion, advancement, and building of
state-of-the-art health care system for Saudi
population
The start of the century has witnessed a rapid
advancement in pharmacy education resulting in
a number of creative therapeutic approaches for
treatment and production of medicines. Thus, it
has become inevitable for colleges of pharmacy,
including Qassim University College of Pharmacy
to coup with the demands of this tremendous
revolution and change. This emphasizes the
urgent need for advancements in strategic
planning and programs of the college, well
trained academic staff, establishment of
excellent laboratories, scientific research, and
graduate programs for quality research. All of
these top our priority agendas that we are
certain to achieve since the Kingdom is
determined to rekindle and spread the noble
virtue of learning through the generous funding
made available for the advancement of
education in the country.
The Pharmacist profession is no longer confined
to the classical sale of prescribed medicines.
Instead, todays pharmacist constitutes an
essential membership in all health care systems
and industry including treatment options and
planning, pharmaceutical industries, drug and
poison regulation, information, and monitoring
centers, research and development, and
consultancy.
337
Mission:
Confidently selecting the appropriate

pharmaceutical field of clinical and/or
general pharmaceutical practice to
advance in higher education.
About:
For the college pharmacy to become a leader in

a timely and high quality pharmacy education
that is able to provide contemporary high
quality pharmaceutical education yielding
confident graduates and highly competent
pharmacists.
The college strategy is focused on three plans;

namely, the student, the program, and the
society. The student is intensively trained and
well educated to reflect the attributes of
university graduates in terms of ethics,
punctuality, and entertainment of highest
quality knowledge that makes him go beyond
confined disciplinary expertise or technical
knowledge. The program courses are designed
based on timely and world-class approaches in
teaching and learning, and are consistent to
ACPE )American Council of Pharmaceutical
Education). With regard to society, the college
emphasizes the role of awareness and society
education in use and storage of drugs.
Biology
103PHC
Organic
Chemistry
111ANAT
Human
Anatomy and
Histology
Total
17
Level 2
Course
Code
Course Title
Credit
120PHP
Intro. To
Pharmacy
Profession
Pre.req.
101 IC
Introduction to
Islamic Culture
We always hope for success in our service to our

university and that our strategic plans would
lead to advanced level education
121PHP
Biostatistics
135MATH
Degree:
122PHC
Pharm. Organic
Chemistry
103PHC
123PHT
Pharmaceutical
Microbiology
106BIOL
124PHC
103PHC
Study Plan:
Pharm.
Analytical
Chemistry
Level 1
Total
16
Bachelor
Programs:
PharmD program
Course Code
Course Title
101ARAB
Arabic
Languages
Skills
Credit
Level 3
Medical
Terminology
135MATH
Mathematics
for Pharmacy
106BIOL
Human
101 PHP
Course
Code
Course Title
210PHG
Credit
Pre.req.
Biochemistry-1
103PHC
211PHG
Physiology-1
106BIOL
212PHT
Pharmaceutics1
135MATH
338
The demand for pharmacists has been

increasing steadily in the market; however,
there is still a shortage of Saudi pharmacists.
215PHC
Pharmacognosy
103PHC,
314PHG
Pharmacology11
224PHG
315PHG
Chemotherapy
224PHG
316PHC
Natural Products
215PHC
102 IC
Islam & Costr. of

Society
Total
16
122PHC
Computer for
Health Sciences
217PHP
Pharmacy
Practice
120PHP
218PHG
General
Immunology
106BIOL
216PHP
135MATH
Level 6
17
Level 4
Course
Code
Course Title
220PHG
Course
Code
Course Title
Credit
Pre.req.
Credit
Pre.req.
327PHC
Pharmacopeial
Analysis
124PHC
Biochemistry11
210PHG
320PHC
Medical
Chemistry-III
315PHC
222PHG
Physiology-11
211PHG
322PHP
310PHP
225PHC
Med.Chemistry1
122PHC,
PathophysiologhII
323PHT
Pharmaceutics-III
223PHT
324PHG
Pharmacology-III
314PHG
325PHP
Scientific Writing
& Seminar-I
216PHP
Total
16
Course
Code
Course Title
Cre
dit
Pre.req.
124PHC
224PHG
225PHG
223PHT
Pharmacology1
Molecular
Pharmacology
Pharmaceutics11
210PHG
106BIOL
212PHT,
135MATH
Level 7
Total
17
Level 7
Course
Code
Course Title
315PHC
310PHP
Credit
Pre.req.
330PHP
Pharmacotherapy
-1
310PHP
Med. Chemistry
225PHC
334PHG
Pharmacology-IV
324PHG
Pathophysiology1
222PHG
333PHG
Toxicology
224PHG
339
Total
336PHT
Pharmaceutical
Biotechnology
Basic
Pharmacokinetics
212PHP
135MAT
H
337PHT
Dispensing of
medication
323PHT
332PHC
Radiopharmacy
320PHC
338PHG
Pharmacogenomi
cs
324PHG
Total
17
Level 9
Course
Code
Course Title
Credi
t
Pre.req
.
410PHP
Pharmacotherapy
-III
340PHP
411PHP
Pharmacoecono
mics &
epidemiology
343PHP
412PHP
Pharmacy
management
341PHP
413PHP
Evidence based
pharmacy
343PHP
Level 8
Course
Code
Course Title
Credi
t
Pre.req
.
414PHP
Psychology and
Health
106BIO
L
345PHT
Biopharmaceutics
335PHT
416PHP
336PHT
Clinical
Communication
Skills
Appl.
Pharmacokinetics
342PHP
103 IC
The Islamic
Economic System
341PHP
Ethics in
Pharmacy
102 IC
Total
16
340PHP
Pharmacotherapy
-II
330PHP
Drug and Poison

Info Serv. And
literature
evaluation
344PHT
Over the counter

drugs
335PHT
346PHP
Patient
Assessment &
First aid
222PH
G
Expository
Writing
Total
17
Level 10
343PHP
103ARA
B
Course
Code
Course Title
Credi
t
Pre.req.
423PHP
Clinical
Nutrition
135MAT
H
426PHP
Pharmacy law
421PHP
Scientific
writing &
Seminar-2
104 IC
Fundamentals
of the Islamic
Political System
424PHG
Drug of abuse
216PHP
325PHP
334PHG
340
335PHT
Pharmacothera
py-IV
410PHP
differential equations and their applications in

health sciences.
425PHP
Graduation
Project
343PHP
Total
16
Course Name: Human Biology

Code & Number: 106 BIOL
Level: 1
Course Description: This course serves as an
introduction to the basic principles of biology
with emphasis on structure and function at the
molecular and cellular levels. Topics include cell
structure and function, cellular respiration,
genetics and molecular biology. Much of
laboratory is devoted to a detailed study of the
histology, anatomy and physiology of body
Systems, for example, digestive, urogenital,
urinary system.
Course Description:
Course Name: Medical Terminology
Level: 1
Course Description: Medical Terminology is a
specialized language for the health care team so
that they may communicate in concise and
accurate way. The course introduces the most
common & important terminology in the fields
of medicine, dentistry and pharmacy based on
the main disciplines of medicine, dentistry and
pharmacy. The course will be conducted in
simple, easy & enjoyable interactive lectures. It
is an integrated course that will be shared by the
colleges of medicine, dentistry and pharmacy.
Course Name: Mathematics for Pharmacy
Code & Number: 135 MATH
Level: 1
provide calculus for students of pharmacy who
Intend to apply these concepts in their
professional course work. Students are expected
to develop an understanding of the derivative as
an instantaneous rate of change and use this
definition to find derivatives of many types of
functions and combinations of these functions
including algebraic, trigonometric, exponential
and logarithmic functions.
Then they are
expected to compute the maxima and minima of
some functions and plot them as well. They also
will develop the idea that integration is the
inverse operation to differentiation and will be
able to familiar with the integration techniques.
Students are also exposed to linear first-order
Course Name: Organic Chemistry

Level: 1
Course Description:
This course is a comprehensive introduction in
all aspects of organic chemistry, for freshmen
students. The course will qualify the students
and prepare them with organic chemistry
knowledge to further their studies.
Course Name: Human Anatomy and Histology
Code & Number: 111 ANAT
Level: 1
introduce the student to the basic knowledge
regarding the structural anatomy and histology
of the various body Systems and organs. The
relation between the various systems and
organs will be outlined and discussed. Students
will also be introduced to basics of cytology,
general histology and organohistology of the
human body systems. In the practical classes,
the students will be using simulated plastic
human models to implement what is taught in
the theoretical lecture
Course Name: Introduction to Pharmacy
Profession
Level: 2
341
420PHP
characteristics of different groups of microbes

(Bacteria, Rickettsiae, Mycoplasma, Chlamydiae,
Viruses and Fungi); classification, nomenclature,
structure, nutrition, metabolism, cultivation,
growth and genetics. In addition, study of
etiological agent(s), mode of infection,
pathogenesis, laboratory diagnosis, prevention,
control, and treatment of the most medically
important infectious diseases.
Course Name: Biostatistics

Code & Number: 121PHP
Level: 2
provide students with a basic understanding of
biostatistics. The course covers of descriptive
statistics with concepts of dispersion, central
tendency measurements. Graphical and tabular
displays are also covered. Simple inferential
statistics involving probability, sampling,
confidence intervals and tests of significance are
presented. Simple linear regression and
correlations are also covered. Understanding
concepts and rational for various methods are
emphasized with use of computer statistical
software (such as Excel, SPSS) for graphs and
calculations.
Course Name: Pharmaceutical Analytical

Chemistry
Level: 2
Course Description: Analytical chemistry is a
measurement science consisting of a set of
powerful ideas and methods that are useful in
all fields of science and medicine. It may be
defined as the science and art of determining
the composition of materials in terms of the
elements or compounds contained in them. The
course will cover both chemical methods of
analysis with emphasis on volumetric category;
and physicochemical methods of analysis
(instrumental methods). Each part will then
cover several topics. The course will cover the
principle of each method, mathematical
treatments, laws, calculation, advantages and
limitations and finally, the applications of each
method. More attention will be given to its
application in the field of pharmaceutical
analysis
Course
Name:
Pharmaceutical
Organic
Chemistry
Level: 2
Course Description: This course will continue
covering the organic functional groups that were
not covered in the previous organic chemistry.
This will include the rest of aliphatic compounds,
aromatic
compounds
and
heterocyclic
chemistry, which will prepare the student
properly to medicinal chemistry.
Course Name: Pharmaceutical Microbiology
Level: 2
Course Description: The course provides an
overview of basic, and Medical Microbiology.
The study will be focused on the biological
Course Name: Biochemistry-1

Level: 3
Course Description: This course covers the
following topics in biochemistry: amino acids
and proteins, enzymes, biological oxidation,
porphyrins and nucleic acids. Clinical
correlations and the action of certain
therapeutic as well as toxic agents are explained
whenever possible.
Course Name: Physiology-I
342

provide students with a broad perspective on
pharmacy as a profession in a changing health
care environment. Students will learn to think
critically about health and health care from the
patient's perspective and about the historical
and philosophical contexts of the profession as
it continues to evolve toward patient focused
care.
Course Name: Pharmaceutics-I

Level: 3
Course Description: This subject is designed to
introduce first year pharmacy students to the
breadth and depth of the discipline of pharmacy
and pharmaceutics. In this course, the principles
of chemistry, physics and mathematics are
applied to the pharmaceutical sciences. Acidbase, solubility, partitioning, reaction kinetics
and stabilization of formulations will be
considered.
Course Name: Pharmacognosy
Level: 3
Course Description: Pharmacognosy course
aims to provide the knowledge and
understanding of the medicinal plants and to
encourage students to take a broad and
continuing interest in medicinal plants with
emphasis to those available in the Saudi Arabia.
Introduce the student to the different types of
complementary and alternative medicine.
Course Name: Computers for Health Sciences
Level: 3
provide the student with knowledge about
advanced computer technology and its
application in the healthcare field. It will also
introduce the student to technological
innovations in healthcare informatics as a
discipline, clinical decision-support systems,
medical
expert
systems,
telemedicine,
telepharmacy and Internet health applications.
The course will emphasize the use of
computerized health information retrieval
systems, the advanced features of the Internet

information resources, patient-related programs
and data manipulation software for application
in profession -related tasks.
Course Name: Molecular Pharmacology
Level: 3
molecular pharmacological aspects of action of
neurotransmitters and other endogenous
substances as well as the drugs affecting their
activity. The interactions of these endogenous
molecules with their specific receptors or
enzymes shall be covered as well as the
molecular effects of their respective agonists
and antagonists. Details of the mechanisms of
action, SAR, stereochemistry, and metabolism of
these agents shall be presented.
Course Name: General Immunology
Level: 3
Course Description: This course is an
introductory course on basic principles of
immunology focusing on the cellular and
molecular processes involved in innate (nonspecific) immunity and adaptive (specific)
immunity. The course includes descriptions of
the main elements of immunity, immune
responses1 development of immune cells,
interactions between humeral and cell mediated
immunity, and pathology resulting from immune
responses.
Course Name: Biochemistry-ll
Level: 4
Course Description: This course deals with the
metabolism of carbohydrates, lipids, proteins
and minerals. Clinical correlations and the action
of certain therapeutic as well as toxic agents are
explained, whenever possible. Much of the
laboratory is devoted to the determination of
blood and urine biochemical parameters.
343
Level: 3
Course Description: The course describes the
physiology of cell membrane, nerve and muscle,
autonomic nervous system, blood and
cardiovascular system with emphasis on the
human body.
Course Name: Pharmacy Practice

Level: 4
introduce the student to the various roles
played by pharmacists In hospital and
community settings, and the ways in which
drugs are compared, selected1 and used in the
health care environment. The course also
presents
comprehensive
principles
of
contemporary institutional pharmacy operation
systems (e.g., a unit dose drug distribution
system, etc). The course will emphasize the
challenges that face pharmacy practice and the
Impact of automation in hospital and
community pharmacies.
Course Name: Medicinal Chemistry-I
Level: 4
Course Description: As a result of advances
made in synthesis and separation methods and
in biochemical techniques, a more rational
approach to drug discovery has been possible,
namely one which involves the element of
design. This course handles chemical and
medicinal aspects of drug design, drug
development and drug action. Only the
chemistry and biochemistry background
information pertinent to understanding the
topics in this course are discussed. The course
focuses on a drug molecule and relates the
physicochemical properties of the drug
molecules to its absorption, distribution,
metabolism, and interaction with a receptor to
give a physiological response.

Level: 4
introduce the student to the general principles
of pharmacology with regard to the general
pharmacological terms and the principles of
drugs administration, absorption, distribution,
metabolism and excretion. It also deals with the
drugs actions and mechanisms. It covers all
aspects of the autonomic nervous system and
autacoids. The practical part of the course deals
with the verification of the actions of drugs
studied in the theoretical part of the courseusing isolated tissues from rodents and
anaesthetized animals.
Course Name: Pharmaceutics-II
Level: 4
Course Description: This course provides an
understanding of various dosage forms and drug
delivery systems, and how medicinal and
pharmaceutical substances are incorporated
into them. The fundamental principles of
interfacial phenomena, dispersion system,
rheology and their impacts on the preparation
and design of stable dosage forms will be
discussed.
Course Name: Medicinal Chemistry-II
Level: 5
Course Name: Pharmacology-I
344
Course Name: Physiology-Il

Level: 4
Course Description: With an emphasis on the
human body, this course describes the
physiology of respiratory, renal, digestive, and
central nervous system.
Course Name: Pharmacology-ll

Level: 5
Course Description: This course is directed to
the principles of neurochemical transmission in
the brain and spinal cord together with the
various neurotransmitters and their respective
receptors. It provides the student with
knowledge
regarding
the
general
actions,mechanisms and uses of general
anaesthetics, central nervous system stimulants
and depressants,analgesics, antipsychotics,
antiepileptics,
antitussives,
antiemetics,
antidepressants,
antimaniacs,
and
antiparkinsonians. It also provides information
on the major side effects of the various drug
classes. The drugs will be analysed to permit the
choice of a certain agent for the treatment of a
certain disease. In the practical part of the
course the students will be allowed to perform
experiments in conscious animals (rodents) to
verify the actions of the drugs they studied in
the theoretical part of the course.
Course Name: Chemotherapy
Level: 5

provide the student with the general principles
of antimicrobial and antiparasites therapy. It
also deals with the study of antineoplastic drugs.
The course deals with the pharmacological
aspects of those chemotherapeutic agents that
are produced naturally, synthetically or
semisynthetically. The studies cover their
spectrum of activity, mechanisms, and side
effects when they are used in treatment of
bacterial, fungal or viral infections. Part of the
course also deals with those chemotherapeutic
agents that are currently used for treatment of
malaria, schistosomiasis, amoebiasis, filariasis,
ascariasis, oxyuriasis... etc. Part of the course is
directed towards the study of some
antineoplastic drugs used for treatment of
leukemia, solid or diffuse tumors.
Course Name: Natural products chemistry
Level: 5
Course Description: The course aims to provide
pharmacy students with a primary knowledge of
phytoceuticals and enable the student to gain an
understanding of the following general areas of
study: The different classes of the natural
compounds Methods of extraction, isolation,
identification, assay and pharmacological
activity and uses of natural compounds.
Course Name: Pharmacopeal Analysis
Level: 6
teach the student how to use the
Pharmacopoeia (specially the most famous
ones: USP, BP and EP). First, the student is
entitled to know how to identify pharmaceutical
compounds, either using chemical tests or
instrumental methods. Second, to check the
purity of these compounds and identifying the
impurities, whether general impurities (applying
limit tests) or related compounds. Third, how to
assay pharmaceutical compounds, either per se
or in pharmaceutical preparations. Special
345
Course Name: Pathophyslology-1

Level: 5
study of disorders or altered functions, i.e. the
the
living
organism.
The
study
of
framework is designed to present the general
concepts of disease processes. Then, the various
dysfunctions of an organ or organ system are
examined including cardiovascular, respiratory,
and gastrointestinal disorders and infectious
diseases.
Course Name: Medicinal Chemistry-III

Level: 6
Course Name: Pathophysiology-Il
Level: 6
study of disorders or altered functions I.e. the
the
living
organism.
The
study
of
framework is designed to discuss various
dysfunctions of an organ or organ system
including renal, endocrine, musculoskeletal,
hematology and oncology and central nervous
system disorders.
Course Name: Pharmaceutics-III
Level: 6
Course Description: Pharmaceutical products

are generally required to be free from
contamination with organisms. Such organisms
may cause spoilage by adversely affecting the
appearance of composition of pharmaceutical
products and may cause serious adverse effects
in patients. This course covers the principles and
techniques involved in the formulation,
preparation and evaluation of sterile dosage
forms. Methods of sterilization and applications
of aseptic techniques will also be studied.
Course Name: Pharmacology-III
Level: 6
with the study of the general actions and
mechanisms of actions of the various hormones
and the diseases that follow disturbances in
their normal release. Stress will be given to
utilization of the hormones themselves or their
synthetic analogues in the treatment of the
disorders. Another part of the course deals with
the mechanisms that are involved in the
appearance of hyperlipoproteinemias and
thrombi in the human body and the
precipitation of atherosclerosis and thrombosis.
Drugs and their mechanisms in the treatment of
these disorders will be discussed. The side
effects of the named drugs will be outlined.
Furthermore, the course involves the study of
the causes and the topical treatment of some
skin diseases such as vitiligo, psoriasis,
chloasma, ephelis, acne vulgaris1 warts, tinea
corporis, tinea cruris, tinea versicolor and tinea
pedis (Athlete's Foot). The mechanisms and the
limitations of the various drugs used will be
discussed. A certain part of the course deals
with the uses and mechanisms of action of some
antidiarrhoeals and laxatives.
Course Name: Scientific Writing and Seminar-I
Level: 6
is to introduce basics of scientific presentation
346
interest will be given to the most frequently

adopted methods namely: potentiometric nonaqueous titration of the raw materials,
spectrophotometric analysis of the drugs In their
dosage forms and finally HPLC for both checking
the purity of the compounds and analysis of
their dosage forms. The course also includes
introduction to statistical evaluation of data.
Course Name: Pharmacotherapy-l

Level: 7
is
to
integrate
the
pathophysiologic
abnormalities of disease states (Cardiovascular,
Pulmonary, and Infectious Diseases) with
Emphasis will be placed on drug selection,
reactions.
Course Name: Pharmacology-lV
Level: 7
Course Description: This course complements
studies to what has been studied in the previous
courses of pharmacology. It deals with drugs
that affect the immune1 ocular and nasal
Systems together with those drugs that aid in
the diagnosis of some diseases. The major part
of the course deals with recent treatments of
certain diseases and disorders such as
hemorrhoids, migraines, premature and
complicated deliveries, varicose veins, prostate
hypertrophy and erectile dysfunction. It also
deals with discussions of the various means
available for contraception in both males and
females together with the general principles of
gene therapy.
Course Name: Toxicology
Level: 7
with the illustration of the general principles of
management of poisoning with dugs, chemicals
and heavy metals. It also deals with the general
mechanisms through which toxic substances
exert their effects at the molecular and cellular
level. Stress is given to those poisonings
following drug allergies and those that result
from interaction of chemicals with proteins,
enzyme, receptors or the genome. Part of the
course is concerned with the role of free radicals
in induction of diseases. Furthermore, the
student will be enlightened about those
intoxications resulting from exposure to
environmental pollutants, heavy metals, drugdrug interactions and drug4ood interactions.
The course also covers the mechanisms of
teratogenicity, mutagenicity and carcinogenicity.
Course Name: Pharmaceutical Biotechnology
Level: 7
Course Description: The student's basic
biochemistry and pharmacy education will be
expanded
with
current
concepts
in
biochemistry, molecular biology, analytical
techniques, drug development, delivery and
formulation relevant to the use and
development
of
biotechnology-derived
products, including protein and nucleic-based
pharmaceuticals. The course provides extensive
coverage of both basic science and applications
of biotechnology-produced pharmaceutical,
with special emphasis on their clinical use and
applications.
Course Name: Basic Pharmacokinetics
Level: 7
Course Description: The course will introduce
students
to
the
basic
concepts
of
pharmacokinetics with a special emphasis on
the
different
pharmacokinetic
models.
Absorption, distribution, metabolism and
excretion of dugs and calculations of
347
and discussions of current issues in the

profession of clinical pharmacy. Emphasis will be
on general evaluation of drug literature, articles
for proper research, design and data
interpretation including use of multimedia,
slides, overheads, handouts and other visual
aids as well as methods of answering questions
from the audience
Course Name: Dispensing of Medications

Level: 7
Course Description: In this course, students will
apply previously acquired knowledge to the
practice of dispensing medications. Comparative
evaluation of commonly prescribe ed and some
non-prescribed drugs will be discussed. Different
criteria used for selection of drugs and
pharmaceutical products will be emphasized.
Drug interactions and prescriptions for different
groups of patients will be discussed.
Course Name: Radiopharmacy
Level: 7
Course Description: This course will handle
Radiopharmacy as an area of specialty of
pharmacy practice. This will deal with the
atomic and nuclear structure and the reasons
that lead to the phenomenon of radioactivity.
This also includes the role of the radiopharmacy
and radiopharmacist in the production and
dispensing the radiopharmaceuticals and their
use in diagnosis and treatment of various
specific illnesses.
Course Name: Pharmacogenomics
Level: 7
Course Description: This course provided
pharmacy students with an understanding of
pharmacogenetics ranging from genetic
principles and the inheritance of complex traits
to specific examples of pharmacogenomics in
drug therapy.
Course Name: Biopharmaceutics
Level: 8
Course Description: This course will deal with
the effects of the physicochemical properties of
the drug, the formulation factors1 the dosage
form, the route of administration and the

physiological factors on the rate and extent of
systemic drug absorption. Oral and some other
non-oral delivery systems will be covered in this
course. Graphical and mathematical data
analysis will be employed throughout the curse
using on appropriate computer software (e.g.
Excel).
Course Name: Clinical Communication Skills
Level: 8
Course Description: This course emphasizes
specific tools and techniques for improving
listening skills, delivering effective messages and
bridging different communication styles.
Through interactive lectures, tutorial and
simulations students work in small or large
groups to apply communication tools and
strategies.
Course Name: Ethics in Pharmacy
Level: 8
Course Description: This course introduces the
student to the basic principles of ethics as they
pertain to health care in general and pharmacy
practice In particular. This course seeks to clarify
the obligations of pharmacists to use their
knowledge and skills for the benefit of others to
be fair and just in their services to the public. It
also serves as a tool for self-evaluation of
professional relations with other health care
givers in view of pharmacy law.
Course Name: Pharmacotherapy-Il
Level: 8
disease
states
(Gastroenterology,
Malnutrition/Nutritional
Support,
and
Nephrology) with concepts of drug action and
be reviewed with pertinent pathophyslology and
348

pharmacokinetic parameters of these processes

will be discussed.
Course Name: Drug and Poison Information

Services
Level: 8
Course Description: The theoretical part is
designed to introduce the students to the
concept of drug Information, functions3 and
how to establish drug information centers. In
addition this part will expose the students to the
theoretical background required to locate,
evaluate and communicate drug information
using mainly secondary and tertiary resources.
In this case the student will be taught types of
literatures, classification of requests, and how to
prepare, formulate, and communicate an
answer. In the practical part, the students will
also be exposed to the various types of drug and
poison information requests, and be involved in
preparation of written response to each using
the official request form used by the center. In
addition, the student will learn how to write
drug monograph. Furthermore the student will
be taught and exposed to the various types of
secondary and tertiary resources and to the
searching technique required for each type.
Course Name: Over the Counter Drugs
Level: 8
Course Description: This course enables
pharmacy students to follow health care
practitioners, and consumers by making
available comprehensive, convenient and easyto-use compilation of information on
nonprescription drugs and drug products.
Students practice interviewing and counseling
skills, and continue to develop their skills in over
the counter drugs (OTC) counseling with new
topics, including some alternative medicine.
Emphasis will be placed on mechanism(s) of
action of the various drug classes, body
system(s) affected, clinical manifestations of

problems and the resulting adverse effects.
Course Name: Patient Assessment and First Aid
Level: 8
introduce the student to various physical
assessment techniques and tools necessary to
monitor drug therapy and assess common
complaints that may be experienced in the
delivery of pharmaceutical care. Formal lectures
will be conducted to introduce student to
equipment and techniques necessary to conduct
physical examination. Also, students will be able
to understand signs and symptoms and first aid
care for commonly encountered life-threatening
situations and emergencies.
Course Name: Pharmacotherapy-Ill
Level: 9
Course Description: This course is formulated to
disease states (Endocrinology1 Neurology1
Psychiatry, and Reproductive system) with
Emphasis will be placed on drug selection1
reactions.
Course Name: Pharmacoeconomics and
Pharmacoepidemiology
Level: 9
Course Description: This course Is designed to
provide a framework for the understanding and
application of the concepts and techniques of
pharmacoeconomics
and
pharmacoepidemology. The course also
emphasizes the importance of utilizing
Pharmacoeconomic and Pharmacoepidemiology
349
selection, dosing regimen design and

Course Name: Pharmacy Management

Level: 9
introduce the principles of management as they
applied to professional pharmacy practice. The
course is intended to provide pharmacy
students with a basic understanding of the
practical aspects of managing a pharmacy
operation. This Includes the basic functions of
planning, organizing, directing, coordinating,
and controlling as they relate to fiscal,
personnel, and merchandize management. In
addition, the course will Introduce the student
to the principles and methods of human
resources management by teaching topics such
as recruitment, selection, orientation, training,
motivation, management by objectives, and
performance evaluation. It will also introduce
the student to principles and methods of
financial and operational management such as
principles of accounting, financial statements,
purchasing, and inventory control.
Course Name: Evidence-Based Pharmacy
Level: 9
provide the understanding of the concept and
skills required to practice evidence--based
pharmacy (EBP) and pharmacotherapy. Handon-experience will include use of evidence-based databases, critical appraisal and how to
calculate and interpret statistical indicators used
in pharmaceutical and medical literature.
Course Name: Psychology & Health
Code & Number: 414 IC
Level: 9
Course Description: The first part of this course

will survey the major fields of psychology. Topics
will include cognition, personality, development,
social interaction, and abnormal behavior The
course will explore current approaches to
psychology, demonstration of the biological,
cognitive, and socio-cultural approaches to
psychology
combine
to
provide
a
comprehensive view of human behavior. The
second part of the course will focus on the
interaction of mind and body as it affects
physical and psychological well being. It
discusses the relationship between health care
provider and the patient as well as the role of
social support in disease etiology. This part of
the course will cover topics such as: Stress and
coping,
adjustment
to
illness,
psychoneuroimmmunology, and pain and pain
management.
Course Name: Applied Pharmacokinetics
Level: 9
provide the student with exposure to the
application
of
pharmacokinetic
and
pharmacodynamic principles of a variety of drug
classes to clinical situations. The first few
lectures will provide a review of clinical
pharmacokinetic principles and provide
background for the student to develop an
approach to therapeutic drug monitoring.
Situations and clinical conditions that are likely
to alter the concentration: time and/or
concentration: effect relationship will be
emphasized. The remainder of the course will
deal more specifically with the most common
drug classes where therapeutic drug monitoring
is applied in clinical practice.
Course Name: Clinical Nutrition& IV admix.
Level: 10
Course Description: Parenteral administration
of medications, once restricted to hospitals, is
becoming more common in all levels of patient
350
results when evaluating drug safety. It also

enables students to explore and assess vital
topics and trends regarding spontaneous
reporting systems, adverse drug reactions, and
post marketing surveillance (PMS).
Course Name: Scientific Writing and Seminar-II

Level: 10
provide the student with an overview of the
current conventions and practices used in
scientific and technical writing in the field of
pharmacy and other health-related disciplines.
This course is considered as an intensive
introduction on how to prepare, write, edit and
review pharmacy research communications,
pharmacy reports, and patient education
materials. The student will also learn how to
present and convey his ideas with conviction,
poise and style. A limited questionnaire-type

field research project will be conducted by
students as a part of the course requirements.
Students will apply their acquired knowledge in
coding, recoding and analyzing collected data to
formulate, write, and present the results.
Course Name: Drugs of Abuse
Level: 10
the different cases of drugs of abuse whether
they are legal or illegal drugs. All these drugs
share the general properties of being able to
induce habituation, tolerance, dependence, and
addiction. The various factors that tend to
predispose youth to drug abuse will be
discussed together with the scientific strategies
to prevent youth from indulging in the habit of
drug abuse. The major part of the course will be
directed for discussion of the pharmacological
action, mechanisms and adverse reactions of
the drugs of abuse. Furthermore, the
discussions will include the various methods
available for treatment of addiction and
prevention of precipitation of the withdrawal
symptoms. Both lectures and seminars will be
utilized maximally to achieve the objectives of
the course.
Course Name: Pharmacotherapy-lV
Level: 10
Integrate the pathophysiologic abnormalities of
disease
states
(Oncology,
Hematology,
Dermatology, Rheumatology, Transplantation,
and Pediatrics) with concepts of drug action and
be reviewed with pertinent pathophysiology and
selection, dosing regimen design, and
351
care. Sterile products preparation has expanded

outside of hospitals to both community
pharmacies
and
specialized
sterile
manufacturing centers. In this course, students
will become familiar with the requirements for
safe and efficient preparation of intravenous (IV)
admixtures, total parenteral nutrition (TPN), and
chemotherapy. He will learn how to use
appropriate aseptic technique to prepare some
types of parenteral admixtures.
Course Name: Pharmacy Law
Level: 10
materials of the pharmacy law, which deals with
the regulations of pharmacy practice and
trading in medicinal and pharmaceutical
products Issued by the Council of Ministers
letter number 335 and dated 7/3/1398 H and Its
various explanations. The course is one hour,
delivered by lecture through which the
followings will be discussed: pharmacy practice
Including registration of pharmacists and their
assistants,
pharmacies,
wholesale
drug
distribution
warehouses,
pharmaceutical
companies
and
Industries,
medicines
registration,
pharmaceutical
companies
registration and their scientific offices,
transitional provisional rules, penalties, and
regulations of poisons, narcotics, and psychiatric
medications under control.
Course Name: Graduation Project

Level: 10
Course Description: Topics will include research
design, data collection,
analysis, and
interpretation and formulation of research
results and describe their process in oral session
presentation.
352
Vision:
A nationally distinguished college of public
health and health informatics, qualifying
professional cadres, supporting scientific
research and sustainable development.
Mission:
Provision of high-quality accredited educational
programs, producing qualified competent
national graduates, offering research services
and consultation in the public health and health
informatics, fostering sustainable development
in Qassim, and building channels of national and
international cooperation and partnership in
specialized health fields.
Aims:
1. Improving the quality of education in the
college to become one of the academically
distinguished colleges in Saudi Arabia and to
have its study programs accredited by NCAAA.
2. Enhancing the capability and competitive

potentials of the students.
3. Boosting the colleges role in local community
services, conducting applied research, and
offering consultations that address the health
issues to achieve the concept of health
development.
4. Fostering the administrative, technical and

informative performance of the college.
5. Building and maintaining mutual cooperation

with national and international institutions that
work on similar academic programs.
6. Raising the competency levels while satisfying

and maintaining human resources.
About:
The College of Public Health and Health
Informatics (previously known as Health
Sciences College) started to grant an
intermediate university degree in three majors;
namely, Health Services Management, Medical
Secretary and Medical Records. The College was
under the supervision of the Ministry of Health
until the Royal Decree No. 11032 was issued on
22/12/1428H that included transferring all
Health Sciences Colleges (for boys and girls in
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia) to the supervision of
the Ministry of Higher Education. In order to
improve the outcomes of these Colleges
(quantity and quality) including this College, a
decision was issued to raise its academic level
and to rename it to become "College of Public
Health and Health Informatics" to grant
Bachelor degree in order to graduate qualified
trained Saudi students. Therefore, the College
has started restructuring its disciplines to grant
Bachelor degree in new fields; namely, Public
Health, Epidemiology, Health Informatics,
Health Services Administration and Health
Insurance. The duration of the study is four
years preceded with one preparatory year and
followed by one internship year.
This modern public health and health
informatics College is located on an estimated
area of 90,000m2 in the Northern Province of
Bukayriah city, about 20 Km far from the main
campus of Qassim University. The building
includes administrative offices, classrooms,
353
College of Public Health and Health Informatics in Bukeriyah
College of Public Health and

Health Informatics in
Bukeriyah
laboratories, support services, and recreation

hall. It is surrounded by parking lots and lush
green lawns.
Mr. Hasan Zedan
Lecturer
Mr. Yousif Elimsaad
Lecturer
In the year 1431/1432 H, the College started
Mr. Mohammad Assaf
Lecturer
one program; namely, Public Health. This

program has been revised by the educational
plans committee (headed by the College dean)
along with participation of some international
consultants in this field. The public sectors
represented by the Ministry of Health
(Directorate of Public Health Affairs in Qassim)
will be the future area to implement the training
programs for the College graduates.
Mr. Somanath Mohapatra

Mr. Al-Masri Hammam
English Instructor
Emad Hassan
Lecturer
Study Plan:
1. Public Health Program:
Level 1
Bachelor
Programs:
Credit Units
Cod
e/
1. Public Health Program
Course
2. Epidemiology Program
No
Title
3. Health Informatics Program

4. Health Services Administration
Program
Faculty Members:
Dr. Hamed Adetunji
Associate Prof.
Dr. Hanie Youssef
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Husan Edrees
Assistant Prof.
Dr. Yaser Bathich
Assistant Prof
Dr. Khalil-Ur-Rahmen
Associate Prof.
Dr. Mohmmed Iqbal
Assistant Prof
Dr. Abdullah Alshourah
Associate Prof
Lecturer
Th
eo
re
tic
al
Pr
ac
tic
al
Tr
ai
ni
ng
To
tal
IC
101
Introduction
to Islamic
Culture
AR
AB
101
Arab
Language
Skills
CH
EM
101
General
Chemistry
BIO
105
Advanced
Biology
EPI
112
Introduction
to
Epidemiology
PH
Introduction
5. Health Insurance Program
Dr. Sohail Akhtar
Req
uire
me
nt
Pre
req
uisi
tes
354
Degrees:
Lecturer
S
121
to Public
Health
Total
Sciences
16
HIN
S
151
18
Introduction
to Health
Insurance
Level 2
Total
Credit Units
Cod
e/
Course
No
Title
IC
102
Islam and
Construction
of the society
Th
eo
re
tic
al
Pr
ac
tic
al
Tr
ai
ni
ng
To
tal
Pre
req
uisi
tes
MG
MT
103
Communicatio
n skills
STA
T
111
Biostatistics I
PH
S
122
Medical
Terminology
HS
A
131
Introduction
to Health
Services
Administratio
n
HIN
F
141
Introduction
to Health
Informatics
HIN
F
142
Computer
Application
for Health
Cod
e/
Course
Title
AR
AB
103
Arabic
Expositive
Writing
Th
eo
re
tic
al
Pr
ac
tic
al
19
Req
uire
me
nt
Credit Units
IC
101
Level 3
No
17
Tr
ai
ni
ng
To
tal
Pre
req
uisi
tes
PH
S
222
Medical Ethics
PH
S
223
Health Rules
and Laws
PH
S
224
Human
Anatomy
BIO
105
PH
S
225
Mental Health
PYS
355
and Health
Health
of Public
College
Informatics
in Bukeriyah
and Health
Health
of Public
College
Informatics
in Bukeriyah
Req
uire
me
nt
121
CH
EM
240
Principles of
229
Education and
Promotion
121
Organic
Chemistry
CH
EM
101
Department Elective
College Elective
Total
16
18
Writing Health
Reports
Credit Units
Free Course
Total
15
Cod
e/
2
3
Course
No
18
Title
Level 4
Req
uire
me
nt
Credit Units
Cod
e/
Course
No
Title
PH
S
226
Medical
Biochemistry
Th
eo
re
tic
al
Pr
ac
tic
al
Tr
ai
ni
ng
To
tal
Pre
req
uisi
tes
CH
EM
240
PH
S
227
Req
uire
me
nt
Human
Physiology
BIO
105
PH
S
228
Community
Health
PH
S
Fundamentals
of Health
PH
S
121
PH
S
Th
eo
re
tic
al
Pr
ac
tic
al
Tr
ai
ni
ng
To
tal
Pre
req
uisi
tes
IC
101
IC
103
The Economic
System in
Islam
EPI
318
Microbiology
for Public
Health
BIO
105
PH
S
226
EPI
319
Parasitology
for Public
Health
BIO
105
PH
S
322
Pharmacology
and
Toxicology
PH
S
227
PH
S
323
Environmental
Health
PH
S
121
PH
S
324
Geriatric
Health
PH
S
121
356
Level 5
HS
A
439
14
17
318
Level 6
Req
uire
me
nt
Credit Units
Cod
e/
Course
No
Title
IC
104
Th
eo
re
tic
al
Fundamentals
of Islamic
Political
System
FSH
N
222
Principles of
Human
Nutrition
PH
S
325
Reproductive
Health
PH
S
326
Preventive
Medicine
PH
S
327
Research and
Discussion
PH
S
328
Principles of
Clinical
Medicine
PH
S
329
Introduction
to Diseases
Pr
ac
tic
al
Tr
ai
ni
ng
To
tal
Pre
req
uisi
tes
Free Course
Total
14
IC
101
PH
S
226
PH
S
121
EPI
318
18
Level 7
Req
uire
me
nt
Credit Units
Cod
e/
Course
No
Title
PH
S
422
Non Communicabl
e Diseases
PH
S
423
Global Health
Th
eo
re
tic
al
Pr
ac
tic
al
Tr
ai
ni
ng
To
tal
Pre
req
uisi
tes
PH
S
329
PH
S
121
2
-
PH
S
227
PH
S
227
Department Elective
Free course
PH
S
322
Total
17
PH
S
424
Maternal and
Child Health
PH
S
121
PH
S
425
Occupational
Health
PH
S
121
PH
S
426
Evidence
Based
Public Health
18
Level 8
EPI
357
Total
Credit Units
Cod
e/
Course
No
Title
FSH
N
322
Th
eo
re
tic
al
Nutrition in
Life Stages
Pr
ac
tic
al
Tr
ai
ni
ng
To
tal
Pre
req
uisi
tes
FSH
N
222
2
-
EPI
413
Epidemiology
of
Communicabl
e Diseases
The internship year is divided into

four phases, each lasts for three
months as shown in the following
table:
Duration
1st
quarter
Drug Abuse
and Addiction
Control
PH
S
322
PH
S
428
Complementa
ry and
Alternative
Medicine
PH
S
329
Health Quality
Management
2
Quarter
Para-clinical
Phase
rd
Clinical
Phase
HS
A
131
Total
18
The Internship Program
-PHC visit
-Tertiary care
hospital visit
-Outdoor &indoor
patient care
-Medical recording
College Elective
-Visit to
public health
lab.
-Visit to
immunization
clinics
3
Quarter
-Water
sanitation &
conservation
-Hospital
administration
&management
EPI
318
PH
S
427
Department Elective
Preclinical
Phase
EPI
317
Visits or programs
12
Months
nd
HS
A
432
Phases
-Infection control
units
-Visit to perinatal
child clinics
th
4
Quarter
Field Training
-Team member in
outbreak
investigation
358
Req
uire
me
nt
living organisms are explored in this module.

Laboratory activities emphasize the scientific
methods in exploring these topics.
-Campaigns stop
smoking, safe
driving
EPI 112 (Introduction to Epidemiology)

This is a three-credit hours course that provides
an intensive introduction to epidemiologic
concepts and methods for students. During this
course the student will demonstrate knowledge
of the main types of epidemiological studies and
key issues in their use and understand the
course of error and bias in epidemiological
studies and strategies available to deal with
them. This course also introduces students to
the basic principles and methods of
epidemiology, with various examples from the
literature in communicable and noncommunicable
diseases.
Topics
include
measures of health and risk, epidemiological
study designs and considerations regarding
issues of measurement and precision that
include assessments of internal and external
validity, standardization, confounding, bias,
interaction, causality, and generalisibility.
-Creating health
awareness in public
Course Description:
Chem101 (General Chemistry)
Theoretical part: This course gives basic
principles about chemical calculations, gases,
liquid state, thermochemistry, solutions,
chemical and ionic equilibria, Bohr Theory and
electronic configuration of atoms and periodic
table. An introduction to types of chemical
bonds.
Practical part: some experiments on the
properties of matter: density, viscosity,
qualitative analysis: identification of acidic and
basic radicals for inorganic salts.
BUS 103 (Communication Skills)
This course introduces the student to the basic
concepts of effective human communication. It
focuses on the development of communication
skills and the basic components of the
communication process. It provides a
comprehensive coverage of major issues
including organizational conflict, leadership,
values, changes, diversity, technology and
ethical behavior, offering the students the
introduction to the current field of
organizational communication.
Bio105 (Advanced Biology)
This course introduces the students to the basic
principles of biology with emphasis on structure
and function of living organisms at the
molecular and cellular levels. The organization,
chemical foundations, metabolism, genetics,
evolution, ecosystems, and interdependence of
STAT 111 (Biostatistics I)

This course is designed to provide students with
basic understanding of biostatistics. The course
covers descriptive statistics with concepts of
dispersion, central tendency measurements.
Graphic and tabular displays are also covered.
Simple inferential statistics involving probability,
sampling, confidence intervals and tests of
significance are presented.
PHS 121 (Introduction to Public Health)
The aim of this course is to introduce students
to the nature and scope of public health theory
and practice. This course is tailored to students
who may have an interest in pursuing a career in
public health and those who are working toward
a major or minor degree in community health. It
aims to exposure of students to the connections
between their personal world and the field of
public health. Students will acquire information
on diverse ways in which the publics health is
359
-Short project on
Epidemic
Investigation
PHS 122 (Medical Terminology)

This course introduces the foundation of the
language of medicine and develops medical
vocabulary through the study of the structures,
functions, diagnostic procedures, pathology, and
treatment procedures of body system.
HSA 131 (Introduction to Health Services
Administration)
This course familiarizes the students with the
health services administration and provides
them with the basic health business skills
required to succeed in this increasingly complex
business. This course paves the way to
understand and analyze the relationship
between the elements of health services, as well
as to determine and describe the specific issues
involved in health services administration. This
course, grounded in business administration and
technology, helps the students explore the
operations and challenges facing health
organizations and the means of supporting the
various health services.
HINF 141 (Introduction to Health Informatics)
Overall, the purpose of this course is to provide
the students with a sufficient background to
understand the technical, organizational and
individual issues associated with the changes
related to the introduction of health computing
solutions. The course will cover contrasting
strategies in the successful adoption and
deployment of systems by introducing the
fundamental concepts of human factors and the
principles and strategies associated with
organizational change management.
HINF 142 (Computer Application for Health
Sciences)
This course introduces student to the
components of the computer hardware and
software and how the computer operates. In

addition, this course will introduce students as
well to the common software in daily activities
with special emphasis is the users related to
health sciences.
HINS 151 (Introduction to Health Insurance)
This course aims to provide students with an
overview and current status of health insurance
systems in Saudi Arabia, Assist the students in a
study of various health insurance products
available, introduce the concept of Managed
Care, underwriting and claims management in
Health Insurance
PHS 222 (Medical Ethics)
principles of medical ethics and its application to
health practice. It discusses the ethical issues of
health organizations, the differences between
legal issues in health administration and
organizational ethics. It also presents issues of
professional conduct and responsibility, of civil
rights and civil liberties, and of conscience, as
well as ethical issues surrounding public health
responses to catastrophe to enable better
management of the moral challenges inherent
in catastrophes.
PHS 223 (Health Rules and Laws)
This course introduces the medical professionals
to health care law, public health care, and
bioethics pertaining to public health. Topics
include the law and courts, bioethics and public
health law. It includes professional liability,
medical malpractice, defence to liability suits,
workplace legalities.
HSA 432 (Health Quality Management)
This module is designed to equip program
participants with knowledge and skills in
implementing
and
reviewing
quality
management systems for health services and
programs in a resource constrained
environment.
360
viewed,
safeguarded,
and
challenged.
Consideration will be given to historical and
contemporary forces and their impact on public
health.
HSA 439 (Writing Health Reports)

This course provides how to manage data, and
master the report-writing process. Assure that a
student reports get read, understood, and acted
on-rather than contributing to information
overload. Develop a communication strategy
that enables students to design reports to meet
the needs of diverse readers and decisionmakers.
PSYCH 102 (Introduction to Psychology)
This course focuses on developing an
understanding of the essence of psychology,
how it has evolved, what are the research
methods used, what schools, what are the most
important issues to be considered specially
(needs and motives, cognitive processes,
intelligence, emotions and personality).
SOC 112 (Introduction to Sociology)
This course gives general idea about sociology
and its founders. It also leads to scientific
thinking and how to use it to analyze societies
and social phenomena. This in addition to
understanding the human societies and forms.
EPI 212 (Emergency and First Aid)
This course introduces students to skills of basic
life support which is needed by any health
professional in addition this course will
introduce first aids and basic response to
emergency and early preparedness and
management of disasters and crowd.
HSA 312 (Health Policies)
This course concentrates on health policy issues
in the planning, delivery and organization of
health services. Examination of policy issues
focuses on the relative roles of the public and
private sectors and the control procedures used
to implement these policies. Ethical issues and
problems and their resolutions are presented
within a decision-making framework.
HSA 313 (Health Safety Management)
The course is designed for people whose area of

responsibility within industry or government
includes health and safety. They may include,
but are not restricted to, safety coordinators,
risk advisers, occupational health nurses, and
human resource managers, training officers,
engineers, production supervisors, union
officials and insurance personnel.
PHS 224 (Human Anatomy)
The aim of this course is to introduce the
structure of various cells, organs and systems in
the body. This course includes morphological
study of tissues, anatomical position, body
organization, musculoskeletal system, joints,
cardiovascular system, respiratory system,
urinary system, reproductive system, digestive
system, endocrine system, and nervous system.
PHS 225 (Mental Health)
Mental health is a state of emotional and
psychological well-being in which an individual is
able to use his or her cognitive and emotional
capabilities, function in society, and meet the
ordinary demands of everyday life. The mental
health sciences provide opportunities for
students to enhance their knowledge, skills and
attitudes in the area of mental health sciences.
The aim is to understand the theory, principles
and practice of mental health sciences with an
emphasis on Cognitive Behavioral Therapy (CBT)
(or Behavioral-Cognitive Therapy). Students will
develop proficiency in CBT and contingent upon
the actual award undertaken will, upon
completion of the course, be able to practice as
specialists in that field.
PHS 226 (Medical Biochemistry)
A course designed to meet the needs of both
the non-science major and the students entering
allied health fields. Emphasis is placed on the
study of proteins, carbohydrates, fats, nucleic
acids (DNA and RNA), Vitamins and protein
disorders. This course introduces biochemistry
as a complete understanding, at molecular level,
361
these techniques in the process of addressing

toxicological problems.
PHS 227 (Human Physiology)

The aim of this course is to introduce the
function of various cells, organs and systems in
the body. This course includes functional study
of the musculoskeletal system, cardiovascular
system, respiratory system, urinary system,
reproductive
system,
digestive
system,
endocrine system, and nervous system.
PHS 323 (Environmental Health)

This course sets out to explore environmental
health issues, and develop them further with
particular emphasis on the Saudi context. The
aim of the course is to introduce participants to
the nature and scope of environmental health
theory and practice.
PHS 228 (Community Health)

This course aims at introducing students to the
sociological aspects of health. In this regard the
contents include family structure and functions,
sociological factors as well as culture and its
relation to health.
Community health focuses on the health of
populations or groups. The course will cover a
broad range of community health issues, and
will focus on strategies to improve the health of
a population with emphasis on health
protection, disease prevention and health
promotion.
PHS 229 (Fundamentals of Health Education
and Promotion)
This module aims to introduce participants to
the main concepts, principles and components
of health promotion at local, national and
international levels. Participants will also be
given the opportunity to develop their own
health promoting skills.
PHS 322 (Pharmacology and Toxicology)
This course explores issues surrounding the
effects that pharmaceuticals and chemicals have
in
society.
Specifically,
it
integrates
pharmacology with social, health and political
issues as they relate to drug abuse and
addiction. This course will provide the
experimental theory of how the techniques
work and their advantages and disadvantages,
while additionally allowing students to perform
PHS 324 (Geriatric Health)

This course helps students to explore issues and
factors that influence health, changing social
function and quality of life for older adults, in a
variety of settings. The course encourages
interdisciplinary interaction, service-learning,
and evidence in practice, with a focus on
diversity, multi-cultural needs, health status,
health promotion, and wellness for older adults.
PHS 325 (Reproductive Health)
This course focuses on women health during
different cycles of childbearing and childrearing
periods.
Health
promotion,
protection,
maintenance and restoration are covered.
Emphasis is placed on the diseases of female
reproductive system from puberty through post
menopausal period are considered. The
application of nursing process in the assessment
and management of family during these stages
is adopted.
PHS 326 (Preventive Medicine)
This course highlights the measures taken to
prevent diseases or injuries rather than curing
them or treating their symptoms. The term
contrasts in method with curative and palliative
medicine, and in scope with public health
methods (which work at the level of population
health rather than individual health). This
module will provide students with enough
knowledge of key issues involved in the control
and prevention of communicable diseases.
PHS 327 (Research and Discussion)
362
of all the chemical processes associated with

living cells.
PHS 328 (Principles of Clinical Medicine)

This course provides an introduction to the basic
skills of clinical medicine. Emphasis has been
placed on the integration of the basic skills
based on essential anatomy, physiology,
pathology, microbiology, pharmacology, and
medical terminology relevant to medical
problems encountered in the primary care
setting. The differential diagnosis of symptoms
and physical findings along with interpretation
of laboratory and radiographic tests appropriate
to each system is discussed.
PHS 329 (Introduction to Diseases)
This course provides an introduction to the
mechanisms and major classification of diseases
and their expression in major organ systems of
the human body. The clinical presentation and
essentials of management of diseases are given.
The topics include infections, cancer, heart
disease, lung disease, diabetes, stroke,
malnutrition, poisoning by environmental
toxins, stress, inflammation, disorders of the
immune system, and aging. Emphasis is on
prevention of disease through control of risk
factors and early detection.
PHS 422 (Non-Communicable Diseases)
The
course
covers
selected
chronic
diseases/health conditions and their risk factors
as diet and nutrition; genetic susceptibility;
tobacco use; physical activity; alcohol use. Also
it covers Diseases/Health Conditions: Arthritis;
injury;
diabetes;
neurological
diseases;
depression; cardiovascular diseases from side of

clinical picture and management.
PHS 423 (Global Health)
This course introduces the principles of
structures and mechanisms of global health
systems focused on the developed countries.
Inter-disciplinary examinations will be made of
the achievements and the challenges in global
health systems by cross-cutting the problems,
e.g. global burden of diseases, process of health
system development. It will explore the possible
approaches to improve the health systems at
national and global levels from inter-related
perspectives, e.g. evidence based medicine,
cost-effectiveness, quality of care, equity,
human rights.
PHS 424 (Maternal and Child Health)
This course gives an overview of the state
structure of MCH programs, with an emphasis
on orientation to health promotion and
prevention of common health problems
affecting children and mothers.
PHS 425 (Occupational Health)
This course sets out to explore occupational
health issues, and develop them further with
particular emphasis on the Saudi context. The
aim of the course is to introduce participants to
the nature and scope of occupational health
theory and practice.
PHS 426 (Evidence Based Public Health)
During this course the student will identify the
principles of evidence based medicine and the
EPM techniques to critically appraise
information applying principles bio statistics and
clinical epidemiology to the field of public health
PHS 427 (Drug Abuse and Addiction Control)
The core of the course is critical review of the
cumulative scientific evidence in many areas of
drugs abuse including : primary prevention in
different setting e.g. schools , supply reduction
approach including drug interdiction and legal
363
This course is designed to enhance their

knowledge of research, presentation and
communication skills. Students will select
research topics from the curriculum of their own
interest.
It is also designed to explain how to use the
scientific methods to influence health policies.
The student will read research papers and
discuss any issues arise and its connection with
health policies.
PHS 428 (Complementary and Alternative

Medicine)
This course provides an introduction to
alternative and complementary medicine
modalities. Complementary medicine refers to a
group of therapeutic and diagnostic disciplines
that exist largely outside the institutions where
conventional health care is taught and provided.
Complementary medicine is an increasing
feature of healthcare practice, but considerable
confusion remains about what exactly it is and
what position the disciplines included under this
term should hold in relation to conventional
medicine.
FSHN 222 (Principles of Human Nutrition)
concepts of the elements of food and food
energy in human. The roles of carbohydrates,
proteins, lipids, vitamins, minerals and trace
elements as well as water and electrolytes in
health and disease are presented.
CHEM 240 (Principles of Organic Chemistry)
Theoretical part: Aliphatic hydrocarbons
(alkanes, cyclic alkanes, alkenes and alkynes),
aromatic
hydrocarbons
(electrophilic
substitution reactions, activity and direction,
polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons), alkyl
halides (nomenclature, physical properties,
preparation methods, nucleophilic substitution
reactions) alcohols ( nomenclature, preparation
methods, reactions) ethers( nomenclature,
preparation methods, reactions) phenols
(structure, nomenclature, preparation methods,
reactions).
Practical part: Some experiments on melting
point, recrystallization, distillation, extraction,
identification of different function groups.
EPI 318 ( Microbiology for Public Health)
Basic concepts of microbiology with emphasis
on microbial pathogenesis and immunity.
Medically important microorganisms including

bacteria, fungi, viruses, rickettsia, protozoa, and
the diseases which they produce. Laboratory
exercises develop fundamental skills in aseptic
technique, microscopy, pure culture study, and
the isolation and identification of pathogenic
microorganisms.
EPI 319 (Parasitology for Public Health)
This course deals primarily with the biological
and medical aspects of parasites of human
importance. These parasites cause several
infectious disease problems in humans,
especially in the tropical and subtropical areas
of the world. The lecture part of the course is
focused mainly on the growth cycles of
parasites, their means of infection, the diseases
they cause, how these diseases are treated and
prevented, and the geographic locations where
parasites are most likely to be contracted by
travellers. How parasites are characterized
biologically for medical diagnosis is an important
part of the laboratory experience. The course
provides valuable information for those
interested in human biology or the health
sciences.
FSHN 322 (Nutrition in Life Stages)
concepts of food guide. It focuses on nutrition
during pregnancy, nutrition and lactation,
nutrition during infancy, nutrition during
adolescence, nutrition during adulthood, and
nutrition for elderly. It explains the effects of
malnutrition and how to overcome this
problem.
EPI 413 (Epidemiology of Communicable
Diseases)
Communicable diseases are the infectious
diseases which can be transmitted from one
individual to susceptible one. This module will
provide students with enough knowledge of key
issues involved in the control and prevention of
communicable diseases. The students will
identify factors that cause and determine the
364
enforcement , treatment intervention and harm

reduction approach.
PHS 220 (Public Health in Emergencies)

The course aims at introducing key public health
issues in crisis, conflicts and emergencies, and
giving an understanding of the concepts of
disaster epidemiology. It also introduces
emergency health management strategies to
enable participants to prioritize health
intervention programs. It highlights on national
and international humanitarian assistance and
guiding principles before, during and after any
natural or man-made disasters.
PHS 221 (Public Health Leadership)
This course provides a solid introduction to the
concepts, models, and tools associated with
leadership and necessary to enhance
participant's personal leadership abilities.
Emphasis will be placed on the application of
the course material to real life public health
problems and issues in the development of
public health careers.
PHS 320 (Medical Anthropology)
This course introduces students to the cultural
basis of illness and curing. The course is
concerned both with how societies perceive and
treat illness, and also with how knowledge of
practices can be used to critique and inform the
management of our own health problems. The
course addresses the meanings of sickness, the
nature of relationships between patients and
healers, and the effects of culture on health.
PHS 321 (Disability Control)

This course explores the key concepts of
Integrated
Disability
Management.
A
multidisciplinary approach to managing all forms
of disability will be put forward relying on sound
best practice disability management techniques.
Government legislation and regulations will be
reviewed as well as the influence of nongovernmental organizations. Multiple models of
disability management will be presented

assessment and evaluation of various returns to
work processes will be undertaken with the goal
of site specific disability management program
development and implementation.
PHS 420 (Water Supply and Sanitation)
This course provides students with principles
and tools for designing and operating water and
sanitation systems, the influence of water and
sanitation on human health; types of water and
sanitation facilities and equipment. Key topics
include water quality parameters; groundwater
and surface water treatment; water treatment
process technologies; nutrient removal.
PHS 421 (Applied Geographic Information
Systems in Public Health )
This course provides an introduction to
Geographic Information Systems (GIS) and
presents its utility in public health. Provides
exposure to GIS as a tool for describing the
magnitude of health problems, and for
supporting health decision-making. Course
topics include a historical overview of the
intersection between geography and public
health; current epidemiological use of GIS; and
experimental learning (thematic mapping of
health needs observed in the field); and GIS
applications in identifying public health
problems.
2. Health Services Administration
Program
Will be launched in 1433 -1434
3. Health Informatics Program
(refer to the strategic plan)
4. Epidemiology Program
5. Health Insurance Program
365
distribution of communicable diseases and the

main strategies to control them.
Research Centers
Research Center of the College of
Pharmacy
Scope of Specialization
The
center
conducts
research
on
pharmaceuticals, pharmaceutical care, herbal
medicines and complementary medicine.
Activities
Studies related to the specialization areas
include:
Bioavailability,
Drug Stability,
Pharmacokinetics,
Toxicology,
Pharmaceutical Industry,
Pharmaceutical Education,
Drug Analysis and
Drug Development.
Research Centers
Services and Consultations

The center offers the following services and
consultation activities:
Scientific research in specialization

areas applicable to the public and
private sectors,
Studies in the specialization areas,
Studies in the program structure for the
College of Pharmacy,
Consultation in the pharmaceutical
industry, pharmaceutical services for
hospitals, pharmaceutical education,
pharmacokinetics, bioavailability,
medical and pharmaceutical logistics,
and pharmacy management.
366
The center specializes in basic and clinical
medical sciences, family and society medicine,
and medical education.
Activities
Activities of the Research Center of the College
of Medicine include:
Adopting research on basic and clinical

medical sciences, family and society
medicine, and medicine education.
Securing the required financial support
for research activities.
Training and qualifying human
resources and acquiring modern
medical devices.
Encouraging and adopting cooperative
research work in and outside the
University.
Supporting research work related to
Saudi society in general and the Qassim
area in particular.
Following up on current research
activities and facilitating the technical
and administrative aspects for
researchers.
Supporting and preparing statistical
studies for health research and
facilitating publishing activities for
researchers.
Scientific Research Center of the

Sciences
The Scientific Research Center includes staff
members of the college. It is supported by both
the College Deanship and the Deanship of
Scientific Research. The two deanships and the
University administration encourage scientific
research that aims to provide solutions to health
problems specific to the Qassim region and the
Arabian Peninsula.
Following the inception of the Scientific
Research Center, special laboratories were built
and equipped with essential apparatuses
intended to provide the core in its development.
This development will continue and yield a
distinguished and versatile scientific research
center.
Support and Development of Scientific

Research
Support and development of scientific research
is achieved as follows:
The center offers the following services and

consultation activities:
Introduction of its services to the

University and related areas by
performing integrated research work to
solve health problems of society,
Training of research personnel in and

outside the University and building of
close relationships between the college
and service institutions, health
institutions and other organizations in
the field and
Preparation of training and
consultation in health fields and
medical education.
By encouraging new staff members to

participate in refereed research work
and preparing scientific studies that
aim to serve the community,
By building close relationships between
investment and industrial sectors on
the one hand and the academic
367
Research Centers
Research Center of the

College of Medicine
Engineering Research and

Consultation Center
The Engineering Research and Consultation
Center provides engineering consultation
services that are intended to serve the
environment and benefit the scientific and
practical capabilities of the college. The college
has the following specialization areas:
Electrical Power Engineering,
Communication Engineering,
Structural Engineering,
Concrete Structures,
Sanitary Engineering and Sewage Drainage,
Soil Mechanics and Foundation,
Road Engineering,
Survey Engineering (preparing topological
and detailed maps),
Water Structures,
Surface and Underground Water Hydraulics,
Irrigation and Drainage Systems,
Design of Metal Structures,
Research on Water Structures (bridges and
dams),
Refrigeration and Conditioning,
Electrical Power Stations,
Solar Energy,
Automatic Control in Industry,
Resistance and Testing of Engineering
Materials,
Recycling of Industrial Solid Wastes,
Material Chemical Decay,
Structure Dynamics and Earthquake
Engineering and
Design and Testing of Concrete Mixtures.

Engineering research and consultation
services will be available in the following areas:
Electrical Engineering
Control of Electrical Motors

Testing Electrical Transformers
Testing Electrical Machines
Design and Execution of Electrical
Wiring
Improving Power to Industrial
Structures
Electrical Network and Power
Transmission Line Design
Calculating Load for Structures
Civil Engineering
Design of Concrete Structures

Inspection and Evaluation of Concrete
Structures
Design of Concrete Mixtures
Testing Hardened Concrete
Design of Earthquake Resistant
Structures
Design of Metal Structures
Studies on Soil and Foundation
Research
Research on Water Structures (bridges
and dams)
Underground Water Research
Feasibility Studies for Water and
Sanitary Drainage Projects
Design and Supervision of
Implementing Water Networks,
Drinking Water Sanitations and Sanitary
Drainage
Design of Interior Sanitary Work and
the Fire Prevention
Environmental Protection Methods
Design and Supervision of
Implementing Landfill Projects for Solid
Waste
368
Research Centers
research work of the college on the

other hand,
Through the organization of
conferences and seminars and by
encouraging attendances and
By supporting the training authorities in
their related activities and building
better relationships with universities in
and outside the Kingdom.
Design of Drainage Networks
Mechanical Engineering
Designing
and
Supervising
the
Implementation of Refrigeration and
Air Conditioning Projects
Design and Supervising the
Implementation of Electrical Power
Stations
Design of Heat Transfer Equipment
Diagnosing Machine Defects
Digital Machine Tools
Industrial Automatic Control
Maintenance of Modern Machines
Advanced Automatic Control
Mechatronic Applications
Examining Mechanical Parts Failures
Mechanical Tests to Determine the
Mechanical Properties of Materials
Microscopic Inspection of Engineering
Materials
Recycling Industrial Solid Wastes
Thermal Design of Electronic Matrix
Design Internal and External Gas
Networks
Works of Boilers, Furnaces, and Fire
Works
Works of Ventilation, Suction, and
Drawing Gases
Refining Water Stations
The center conducts scientific research and

related services by:

Computer Science
Computer Science
Computer Engineering
Information Technology
Encouraging researchers to publish

their work in scientific periodicals and
journals and to attend conferences
locally and internationally,
Determining research areas for work
groups according to the University and
college priorities and facilitating
communication with research
institutions in and outside the
University,
Collecting and documenting research
abstracts and research projects to be
used as necessary for development,
Building research groups in the college
to work on short-term, medium-term
and long-term research projects,
Providing sufficient support to help
researchers purchase required
materials for their research projects
according to the centers policy,
Encouraging participation in projects
from the City of King Abdulaziz for
Science and Technology and
Documenting and introducing results of
scientific activities to the college at the
end of each year.
Offering mechanisms to identify the

problems looming in the local areas of
the University and the industrial and
services sectors and finding effective
ways to handle them;
Determining the nature of each
problem and identifying case studies,
such as the industrial town in Qassim;
Organizing workshops in cooperation
with industrial and services sectors to
study and prepare cooperation
protocols with them;
Activities
369
Research Centers
Conducting training programs to the

institutions of Qassim on demand;
Offering general and specialized
training programs in all computer
science, engineering and information
technology fields and
Providing programming and
engineering consultation services, such
as industrial operations control, special
software design and development, and
maintenance of networks.

Science
The Research Center of the College of Science
concentrates on offering the following services:
The center supports the research activities of
the college according to applicable rules and the
annual budget of the center. In addition, it
strives to
Encourage departmental staff members

to apply for support of their research
projects and suggest the budget of
each project and
Provide documentation and housing of
research project blueprints, materials
and reports, including publications.
Activities
Following up with researchers who

have attended scientific conferences
and seminars,
Classifying
new
research
and
exchanging it with other departments
in the Colleges of Sciences and with
other universities,
Working in coordination with the
Deanship of Scientific Research and
Following up on departmental research

work and encouraging researchers to
introduce seminars on their work.
Facilitating, through coordination with

the deanship, the process of finding a
specialized researcher in one of the
colleges fields;
Exchanging research with other sectors
to encourage trial research work
intended to create a cooperative
environment;
Offering consultation activities related
to research activities in mathematics,
physics and chemistry and
Assisting the college staff members in
their application for financial support of
their research work from the SABEC
annual grant to Qassim University.

Agriculture and Veterinary
Medicine
The center was established in 1984 to
encourage and direct agricultural and veterinary
research required in addressing problems facing
the Qassim region. This area of research is a
priority to the college and University because
Qassim is the most important agricultural area
of the Kingdom.
The center is involved in different
agricultural research, including horticulture and
disease prevention. This includes crop
production and gardening, vegetable crops and
nutrition. The center also surveys and
determines the most important problems facing
agricultural activities in the Kingdom by seeking
input from all branches of the center and
working to secure financial support for research.
Under the guidance of college staff members,
370
Research Centers
Given the appropriate financial and

human resources, the center hopes to introduce
several services to the community. It aims to
provide useful research in the fields of plant
production and prevention, animal production,
veterinary and food science. The research will
be conducted in cooperation with the Deanship
of Scientific Research and with links to the local
community. The centers goal is to employ
specialized staff capable of providing services
and consultation to local farmers to develop the
agricultural sector of the Qassim economy.
The University Directorates

Several directorates provide the
University with the much needed resources
necessary to perform day-to-day operations
effectively and help the University achieve its
goals and objectives.
A list of these Directorates includes:
Computer and Information Systems

Directorate
Scientific Publication and Translation
Directorate
Administrative Communications Directorate
Budgetary and Planning Directorate
Projects and Maintenance Directorate
Safety and Security Directorate
Personnel Directorate
Finance Directorate
Purchasing and Inventory Directorate
Public Relations and University Information
Directorate.
Legal Directorate
Services Directorate
Transportation Directorate
371
Research Centers
the center seeks to build relationships with the

Ministry of Agriculture and individuals working
in the field to form discussion circles organized
and supervised by the Deanship of Scientific
Research. Through the participation of
researchers and local agricultural professionals,
the center hopes to uncover important
obstacles and to assist researchers in obtaining
the best results.

QU Bulletin 2012 - Health Colleges-Final

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

QU Bulletin 2012 - Health Colleges-Final

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Qassim University

Deanship of Academic Development

Custodian of the two Holy

King Abdullah bin

His Royal Highness Prince

Salman bin Abdulaziz

His Excellency Minister of

His Excellency Deputy Minister

Dr. Khalid ibn

Dr. Ahmed ibn

Preface by the University President

Higher Education in Saudi Arabia

Organization Structure of the University 19

Deanship of Educational Services

Academic Departments (Prep.)

Training and Scholarships

Colleges and Specializations

College of Applied Health Sciences in Al-Rass 58

Qassim University Bulletin

Preface by the University President

Prof. Khalid bin Abdul Rahman Al-Hamoudi

Qassim University Bulletin

Prof. Sulaiman A. Al-Yahya

Qassim University Bulletin

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia is an Arab Muslim State

26th of Jumadah the Second, all Saudi people

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia

Development in Kingdom has generally been

Capital and Major Cities:

Almost the entire Kingdom is arid, although

Is the city where Prophet Muhammad emigrated

Is the capital of the Eastern Province. It houses

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia

Introduction of Qassim Region

Introduction of Qassim Region

Al Qassim Province is one of the

Introduction- Qassim University

Qassim University was established in

The university has applied for QS stars rating

Introduction- Qassim University

The number of male and female students

Introduction- Qassim University

Huazhong Agricultural University, China

Scientific and Research Centers

Research and Consultation Center, Research

QASSIM UNIVERSITY VISION

QASSIM UNIVERSITY OBJECTIVES

QASSIM UNIVERSITY MISSION

Improving the Quality of education in

Introduction- Qassim University

Qassim University (QU) appeared in the

College of Applied Medical

Directorate for Planning

Institute of Studies and

College of Science and Arts

College of Science and Arts

College of Design and

College of Science and Arts

College of Science and Arts

College of Science and Arts

College of Medicine and

College of Science and Arts

College of Science and Arts